^mA%
GIFT or
Harold TOieeler
TT7J
^
i
Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2007 with funding from
Microsoft Corporation
http://www.archive.org/details/ahnsmethodoflearOOahnfrich
Steiger's German Series.
s/rpOi^^/C-
AHN'S METHOD
OP LEARNING THE
GERMAN LANGUAGE.
REyi.SED '..'...
BY
GUSTAVUS FISCHER.
FIRST (PRACTICAL) COURSE.
Fifth Edition.
NEW YORK.
E. Steiger.
1873.
UMituJ
/r
Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1 871, by
V B. Steiger,
in the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington.
GIFT OF
E. Steigee, New York,
Printer and Kectr«tyjier .
PREFACE.
Ahn's Method of Learning the German Language con-
sists of a Practical and a Theoretical Course. The former
contains progressive exercises in both languages, beginning
with the simplest elementary forms, and in the natural pro-
gress of the course gradually expanding with the different forms
of inflection and the most important parts of Syntax, till the
student may be considered sufficiently familiar with the lan-
guage to begin reading German text. The different exercisps
are preceded by special vocabularies and as many rules as the
student would need to render the exercises without mistakes.
The First Part of the Practical Course is preliminary, being 4r
intended to give the beginner a general idea of German forms
and constructions. The Second Part reviews the preliminary
exercises in a more complete and systematic manner; and the
Third Part chiefly contains exercises on tenses, moods, re-
flexive and compound verbs, conjunctions, prepositions and
syntactical idioms. A general vocabulary, appended to the
Course, facilitates the rendering of words that have already
occurred in previous exercises without being repeated in the
special vocabularies.
For the gradual acquirement of German handwriting a spe-
cial, and — we hope — efficient provision has been made at
the close of the Course, designed to accompany the single ex-
ercises, but so that the beginner may or may not make use of
it, the Course itself being in neither case interfered with.
Pronunciation has been treated in a preliminary chapter.
The Theoretical Course contains a brief and systematic
abstract of grammatical rules, to be studied either separately,
or in connection with the Practical Course. Paradigms have
been given no more than necessity required, but those given
are complete. Either Course will occupy no more than one
968295
— IT —
College-Term. In schools a longer time should be devoted to
the study of each Course.
The Editor has in the First and Second parts of the Prac-
tical Course mainly reproduced Ahn's work as it was originally
written by him, but the numerous errors and practical incon-
gruities and inconveniences have been carefully corrected.
Many sentences in the exercises have been rejected, and others-
have been introduced whenever it seemed necessary. Many
new rules have been added, since in the original work no
account was taken of the method of instruction peculiar to
our country. Tha Third Part of the Practical Course, the
weakest in Ahn's original Method, has been entirely re-written
in such a way as Ahn probably would have adopted, had he
written for this country and at this day. The stock of words
used, has been greatly enlarged, since the small number of
words in Ahn's Method by which he builds up and rebuilds all his
sentences, are always leading to great practical inconveniences,
however desirable it may be to confine first beginners to as few
words as possible.
With the same view, the whole Theoretical Course, which
In no wise comes up to the requirement of this country and of
this time, has been entirely written anew, and only the general
division of the work into chapters has been retained. In this
Theoretical Course the grammatical material has been selected
in accordance with the principle that the student should master
the leading facts of the language in the directest and plainest
way possible, in order to arrive by the shortest road at the
reading of text. Due regard has been always paid to ' con-
versational language' in the Practical Course, while in the
Theoretical Course the preparation of the student for ' reading'
has been the main object.
We deemed it necessary to add a complete index referring
to both Courses, not doubting that this addition will meet the
approval of all that shall use the work.
An absolute or even relative ^ completeness' cannot be ex-
pected in a work of this kind. Indeed, no grammar extant
can be considered ' complete. ' No grammarian can do more
than select ^ something' out of the inexhaustible store of the
living language, -discover the secret and silent laws which have
produced the forms of this 'something,' and call a collection
of such laws ^ a grammar.' How many details should be thus
presented, depends on the tact of the grammarian. But to
the ^ end of language' no grammarian has yet come, and in
this sense all grammars are (more or less) incomplete.
Whether ive have been successful in our selections, whether
or not we have omitted many things that ought to have been
explained, and explained many things that ought to have been
omitted, the reader must decide. Indeed, in this method of
^selection' consists almost the whole art of a grammarian. In
the present work many rules will be found which will be in
vain looked for in other grammars, and many will not be found
which other grammarians are in the habit of presenting.
Whatever may be thought of such deviations from the accus-
tomed ruts (often regarded as almost sacred with a peculiar
superstition), we always had our reasons for either the
omission or the addition, which reasons, although they have
nowhere been presented, the attentive reader will without
diflBculty discover ^between the lines'. But we hope that no
essential law of the language will be missed, and that both the
teacher and the student will find explicitness in our different
statements to be commensurate with the lesser or greater
difficulty of the subject. A glance at any of the different
chapters, for instance those on adjectives, prepositions, con-
junctions and the subjunctive mood, will fully bear out these
remarks. The terminology adopted is the one which is uni-
versally used in Germany. Nobody will now find fault with
such expressions as ^strong and weak verbs or nouns'. All
recent German grammarians and lexicographers (we believe
without a solitary exception) have adopted these terms*, and
* The expressions strong and weak in reference to declension and con-
jugation have been introduced by Jacob Grimm in the first edition of his
German Grammar (1817). The following ideas have led to the universal
adoption of these terms. A strong verb has strength enough in its root to
dispense with the help of auxiliary endings in the imperfect (fdjlagen — fd)tug);
but the roots of weak verbs have no such power, attaching auxiliary endings
for that purpose (lobeil — tobtc). A strong noun or adjective is one which
forms distinctive endings, so that it may be declined without the help of an
article, and yet show its case, gender and number (gifd^ — gtfd^e^, etc.), whil$
— VI —
we consider it greatly reprehensible to substitute for ^technical
terms' expressions made by ourselves for whatever reason; not
to mention the inconvenience arising from the use, along with
our grammars, of German dictionaries in which the familiarity
of the reader with such terms is presupposed. The owner of
the WORD ought to determine its name. Should we not be
greatly astonished, if in an English grammar, written in
Germany, our terms ^possessive case, progressive form,
POTENTIAL mood, ctc' wcrc ignored, and replaced by terms
unintelligible to us? The reading pieces in Ahn's original
Method are replaced by other pieces which seemed to us better
adapted to the wants of the beginner.
We close with the remark that (except the parts of Ahn's
original work mentioned above) no use has been made and no
authority followed of any existing grammar. We have tried
to develop the different laws of the language from the material
which during a close study of German literature for almost a
quarter of a century, has accumulated under our hands. The
form and wording given to our rules and their methodical
arrangement are the results of our experience, during an almost
equal period, as a teacher of German in College, in schools of
both sexes, and as an instructor of private pupils. We doubt
not that errors will be detected, and we shall be grateful to
have our attention called to them.
WEAK nouns and adjectives do not distinguish cases or numbers, and hence
must have an auxiliary article or other word to show in what case, number
or gender they are placed (bcr gute, beg gutCtt, bem gutCtt, etc.; beg §trtett,
bem §trtCtl, etc.). Formerly the strong verbs were improperly called irre-
gular or OLD verbs.
^WN Brunswick, April 18th, 18*71.
€rVLStavus Fischer.
^v/ The Pronunciation.
I. THE ALPHABET.
Thr German Alphabet is composed Qf tUe folio wing i^6;l6tters:
Written. Printed. Written. Printed. Written. Printed.
J
e ^* (I e
i ^. 3 i
3 1
^^ D
s
t
u
V
w
Uu
.^
x-3^
There are three softened vowels (Umtaute):
ii^^'ta o^.^fei) u^^'Uii
(2te) (Oe) (Ue)
COMPOUND AND DOUBLE CONSONANTS.
cli.^^/d^, ck^d, St ^^%
^% sell ^^^fc^,
"^~ ff^ff, tz ^ ^.
ss
— 2 —
il. SIMPLE VOWELS,
h. Fyery vowel is pronounced uniformly in whatever words
of the laiiguage. it wiy; occur. But every vowel-sound has a
loBg -and a ,sUor^ pronunciation.
' '2^ ^it(>wels: fpllo\\eri. by .two consonants or a double con
sonant are generally pronounced short; followed by one con-
sonant they are generally long.
3. 31, a long is pronounced almost like a in father: SSater,
laben, grage.
Short a has no exact equivalent in English: 3llter, banfen,
®a(Ic.
4. 6, e long is pronounced almost like a in care^ as the
first syllables in the words Stebe, geben, @teL
Short e is pronounced like e in end^ as: ®ctb, %tii, and the
first syllables of benteit and (Snbe.
The letter e in final syllables and in inflectional endings has
generally the English obscure sound, as the two last syllables
in lebeiibe, fanfterer, and the final syllables in 23ater, ®arten, ^Tage.
There is no other obscure sound in German but e.
5. ^, X long is pronounced like English ee (tree), as: 5£tger^
4BibeI, ittir.
Short i has the sound of 2 in ill or in: ^rrttjum, ftnben, ^inb.
6. D, long is pronounced like English o in hope: Of en,
ober, ^ol, rott).
Short has no exact equivalent in English. It keeps a
middle between English u in sun and o in hope: fommen, ®otb,
joUen.
T. U, u long is pronounced like English o in move: Slut,
5«B' Sntber, gut.
Short u sounds like u in full or double oo in good: 2}?unb,
2^l)urm, gutter, muBte.
8. ^, I) occurs in modern orthography only in words taken
from the Greek language, and is pronounced as German i
would be in its place: ®l)ftem, @tt)(.
III. SOFTENED VOWELS.
1. %. a long is pronounced as German long e (English a in
ocure): ©dbcl, 93dter, Sdi, ftdt^ (or ftete).
Short S has exactly the sound of German short c: alter^
®arten, mu.
2. £), long has no equivalent sound in English; it is
pronounced as French eu in feu: bofe, tonen, ®ot^e.
Short has no equivalent in English; it is pronounced as
French eu in jeune: fonnen, Dotlig, Corner.
3. it, ii long has no equivalent sound in English; it is pro-
nounced like French it in rue: Uben, mitbe, ®ltte.
Short ii has no equivalent in English and is pronounced like
French u in nul: 99?UtIer, ftiirmifd^, tt)iinf(^en.
Observation. — In order to pronounce o the mouth must be placed in the
position in which o is pronounced; but the vowel e (German) must be sounded.
To pronounce ii, we sound the letter t (German), having the mouth in the
position to pronounce u (German).
IV. DOUBLE VOWELS.
They are: aa^ ee, oo. They are sounded like a, e, o long:
®aa(, SJJeet;, JDJoo^. Guard against pronouncing the double
vowels ee and oo like English ee and oo.
V. DIPHTHONGS.
They are: ai, au, et, eu, ciu and the obsolete at) and el). The
diphthong ou occurs only in words taken from the French, and
is then pronounced like German long u, as: (Sourage, iour,
goui^. The diphthongs ot and ot) exist in some proper nouns,
and are pronounced like English oi: Soi^enburg, ^ol)m. All
diphthongs have only a long sound.
1. 2lt (at) and et are pronounced alike, and sound like
English i in wine: ^aifer, Tlai, (eiben, SBeitt.
2. 3lu (au) is pronounced like English ou in house: Saum,
laufen, blau.
3. Su (eu) and au are pronounced alike, and have no exact
equivalent in English. Their pronunciation comes nearest to
English 01 in boil: greunb, @u(e, geuer, @aule, ^dume, ©rduel
(©reuel).
— 4. — ■
VI. SIGNS OF LENGTHENED VOWELS.
1. Frequently the length of vowels is marked by certain
letters, connected with them. These are: l)the consonant ^,
2) the vowel e, 3) the repetition of the same vowel.
2. The letter 1^ as lengthening sign (in which case it, of
course, is not pronounced) occurs after all the vowels: ma^Ien,
getter, \\^v, woijl U^r; t^re, mWx, 3Ku^te.
3. The letter e as lengthenmg sign occurs only after i.
The combination ie is always pronounced like i (German) long:
regieren, Steg, Dtel, btefer. -
Obs. — But final te in some words taken from foreign languages is pro-
nounced like English ia in Virginia: gamttte, 3uUc, 2xixt* The same is the
case in regard to the endings ier of national nouns and ten, as: @panter,
©aHier, ^tften.
4. The doubling of vowels takes place with a, e and o, but
not with t, u,or the softened vowels and the diphthongs.
Obs. — Since very frequently the length of vowels is not indicated at all
(see the examples above, No. II.), all these lengthening signs are deemed
superfluous, and modern orthography has a tendency to diminish them, and
spell words with the simple vowels only.
VII. CONSONANTS.
1. 33r b is pronounced as in English, but b final has the
sound of p: ab, S8eib, 2;rteb.
2. S, c before e, i, t), a and o is pronounced like ts: Scifar,
Sitrone, gl)ltnber, goltbat, geber.
Before consonants, the vowels a, o, n, W, and at the end of
words it is pronounced like f : Sarnet^af, Socarbe, Sreole^ Sleru^,
Surie, giiraffier, *ipic.
Obs. — The letter c is'only used in words taken from foreign languages.
Many writers have commenced to discard the use of c, if pronounced like I,
and substitute the letter f for it. Words taken from the Greek should be al-
ways spelled with !: ^rttt!, ®ofrate8.
3. SI), cf), in the beginning of words, occurs only in words
taken from foreign languages^ and is generally pronounced like
kj as: 6t)or, Stjrtft, (5t)ara!tcr. But before i it has the German
— 5 —
aspirate sound (see below): g^ina, Sl)irurg. In words taken
from the French, it is pronounced like sh^ when it has this
pronunciation in French: g^ef, (5l}au[fee, St)arlatan.
In the middle or at the end of the word its pronunciation is
twofold, depending on the preceding letter. Neither has an
equivalent in English. It has a guttural sound after a, o, u,
an: "^adj, mac^en, 80^, poijcn.^ndj, fuc^en, anij, rauc^en. It has
an aspirate sound after any other letter or diphthong: Sled),
ftedien, ^dijm, riecfien, St^t, mdd^tig, mo(J)te, p^ttg, rdudjern, eud),
3}idbcf)en, tt)el(f)er, 3io^^en.
&}^ or d^f is generally pronounced like x (ks): ffiad^^, \cij^,
T^nij^r Sii(l)fe. But if ^ or f belongs to an inflectional ending,
or the i) belongs to a different radical in which the following ^
or f is not contained, the d) has either the aspirate or guttural
sound: be^ ©ui^^ (genitive of 33u(^), 1^0(^ft (superlative ofijod)),
mi)^ (superlative of na^e), n)acl)fam (from toai^en and fam),na(i)''
fe^en (from nac^ and fe^cn).
4. 5), b at the end of words is pronounced like t: 2txh,
Stub, iDilb, bdb.
5. ®, g at the beginning of a syllable is pronounced like g
in good: ge{)en, grog, SBagen, legen.
At the end and the middle of syllables the pronunciation is
not fully settled. After t and tc all give it the aspirate pro-
nunciation of d): fettg, ©teg, ftegte. After n at the end of words
it has the pronunciation of k: ®efang, lang, $Rtng. After other
letters some pronounce it invariably like g in good, while others
give it the pronunciation of (^, either aspirate or guttural ac-
cording to the previous letter. Both pronunciations have
equally good authority: S^ag, 2Beg, Icgt, ragt, beugt, fdugt, 3Sogt,
2:rug.
Obs. — Some pronounce g, if between two vowels, with a sound between
6) and g (hard). This pronunciation is inelegant and has no good authority.
In ©egen. 9f^egen, ttiagen, the g ought to be pronounced exactly as in good.
It is best for beginners to pronounce g in all instances as g in good, except
when it is final after it or i. The student is then sure to have always an un-
objectionable pronunciation.
If tig is not final it has the pronunciation of English ng in singer, bringer
or springer, not as ng in longer, stronger or finger, as: gttiger, lauge, 9Kenge,
Sunglttig, fatigen.
— 6 —
g in words taken from the French is pronounced, as it would be at the
same place in that language: hard in Ooutjerneur, soft in (Courage (softer
than sh),
6. $, 1^ at the beginning of words is pronounced like h in
hill: ^aii^^ l^art, l^eben. In the beginning of syllables not initial,
the aspiration is less perceptible: 9tetf)e, rau!)er. In the middle
or at the end of syllables t) is a sign of lengthening the preced-
ing vowel, and is not pronounced: 4Ba^n, frii!), mel)r.
T. Q, I is pronounced like the English consonant y in yet:
Sa\)x, Qod), jung.
8. S, ! is pronounced as in English, but is never mute:
Snie, Snabc. In place of doubling f, the double consonant d is
used, which is pronounced like k in bake^ and always indicates
that the previous vowel is short: baden, ®ti:(f, 3lder, Slid.
9. ®, f, ^, The long f is used in the beginning and middle
of syllables; at the end of syllables the short ^ only is used.
The capital © and long f are always pronounced like English z
in zeal; short ^ has always the sound of hissing s m hats:
©ommer, ateife, §aufer, §au^, lo^.
ff always has the hissing sound of ss in passing: SBaffer,
iriffen, mliffen. This double letter can never stand at the begin-
ning and at the end of words (except when Roman type is used).
^ has the hissing sound of ss: gug, glu^, flieBen, gro^. If
Roman type is used, § is generally written 55; Fuss, Fluss, etc.
®(^, fd) is pronounced like sh in shoe: @{f)atten, ©d^ule, Jtf^,
fd)Iafen, fdinjer, fi^reieu.
®t, ft, and @p, fp in the middle and at the end of syllables
are pronounced as in English, but in the beginning of syllables
they sound like sht, shp: beft, laften, 9Be^pe, Stein, fprtngen, t)er^
fte!)en.
10. 5t^, tt) is not pronounced like English th^ but like simple
t: Zi)at, xotij, mnt\), Qnt\)nm.
11. 3?, t) has the sound of/. But in words, taken from
foreign languages, it is pronounced like English v: 33ater, t)iel,
t)erfte^en, t)or; but SSenu^, 33incent. Some pronounce t) like Eng-
lish V in the word gretiel.
12. SB, tt) is pronounced like English v: S3e(t, SBurjef, moCen,
13. 3' 5 sounds like ts, never like English z: ^a% ja^m,
J3 has the same sound (ts), but is only used after a short
vowel: ®li(5, 9iu^en, fe1§en,
VIII. ACCENTUATION AND SYLLABICATION.
1. In German as well as in Enghsh words^ the principal
accent is placed on the radical syllable. The stress imparted
' by the accent, is stronger m German than in Enghsh.
2. The secondary accent is more frequently applied m
German than in English. Entirely without accent (obscure)
are only those prefixes and endings which contain the vowel e.
Thus the w^ord ar'beitfam has its principal accent on the first
syllable, and each of the other two syllables has a secondary
accent. On the other hand the word Derlet'jenbere has only one
accent, which is on the second syllable, the first syllable being
a prefix, and the third, fourth and fifth syllables inflectional
endings, all of which are pronounced with the obscure sound.
3. Compound nouns have their principal accent on the
radical syllable of the first component, as: -3iJng'Ung^^3lIter.
Verbs compounded with prepositions have their principal ac-
cent generally on the preposition, as: an'fangen. For other
compound words the rules are more complicated, and should
be learned by practice.
4. The syllables of German words are not divided accord-
ing to English principles. Except in compound words, no re-
gard is paid to the derivation of a word. Single consonants in
the middle of a word belong to the following, not to the pre-
ceding vowel, and of more than one succeeding consonants the
first is joined with the preceding and the next, with the following
vowel. Thus we divide: le-gen, ^du^er, Ite^ben, although the
consonants g, f, b belong in respect to derivation to the first
syllables.
— 8 —
PART
I.
1.
Singular, id) bin,
I am;
bu bift,
thou art;
er ifc
he is;
fie \%
she is;
Plural, XOXX fittb,
we are;
i^r feib,
you are;
fie finb,
they are.
®Ut, good; grog, great, large, big; fleiit, little, small; retd), rich; arm, poor;
jung, young; alt, old; miibe, tired; !ran!, ill, sick»
^6) bin gro^. ®u btft f(etn, (Sr tft alt. @te ift gut, 9Blr
finb jung. Q\)x f etb xtxi), @tc finb arm. ©in ii^ gro^ ? Sift bu
mlibe? ^'ft er fran!? .^ft fie iung? @inb xoxt reic^? @eib t^r
arm? ©inb fie a(t?
\^ ' "2. . ' ■' ^ ' / v.- ' ""-'
I am little. Thou art young. We are tired. They are
rich. Art tliou sick? You are poor. Is she old? Are you
sick ? Are they good ? ^e is tall (g ro^): Am I poor ?
@tarf, strong; treu, faithful; faut, idle, lazy; fletgtg, diligent; bofe, wicked,
naughty; traurig, sad; gtiicflid^, happy; l^bfltc^, polite.
Sift bu bofe? 3^d^ bin ni(^t bofe. @r ift traurig. Sir finb nid)t
ftarf. ©inb fie treu? Sift bunii^t gliicflic^? ^\)X \t\\i nirf)t fteigig.
@ie ift nirf)t faul. ^'ft er nid)t miibe ? Wix finb n\6)i arm. @inb
fieni^tfjoflid)? 3:)u bift ni(i)t franl.
4.
I am not tall. They are idle. She is not ill. We are not
happy. He is not short (tiein). Are you not tired? They are
— 9 —
not rich. Is he not diligent ? Thou art not strong. They are .
not happy. He is not polite. Are they not faithful ? Is she
not rich? He is not wicked.
5.
Masculine nouns: bcr S5ater, the father; ber @arten, the garden.
Feminine nouns: bte 9Jlutter, the mother; bie @tabt, the town, city.
Neuter nmns: bag ^iub, the child; ba6 §aug, the house.
^d)on, beautiful, fine; tag, long; ^od), high; neu,new; unb,.and; fel)r, very.
3:)er 3Sater ift gut. Die Whxiitx ift traurig. ©a^ Stub tft faul.
!Der ©arten ift mrf)t fef)r lang. ®ie @tabt ift gro^ unb retd). ©a^
, §au^ ift nirf)t fiod). -3ft ber ®arten f(i)ou? 5ft ber SSater fran!?
3 ft ba^ ^inb mcf)t flei^tg? ^\i ha^ ^m^ neu? ®er SSaterunb bte
a)?utter finb gtiicEa^
Obs. — All German substantives begin with a capital letter. — When two
or more substantives follow each other, the article must be repeated before
each, unless they are all of the same gender. — The article (ber, bie, bag) is
different for the three genders. — The gender of nouns denoting persons is al-
most always masculine for males, and feminine for females. — Objects not be-
ing persons are either masculine, or feminme, or neuter. i , m i
The house is not new. The mother and (the)* child are
ill. The town is very beautiful. The child is not naughty.
The father is very old. The house and (the) garden are very
large. Is the mother not happy ? The house is not very old. »
Is the garden not very fine ? The houseis very small.
. LX^ . ^^"^^^ iiMasc. Diefer ^aum, this tree. ''*-'^'-''^*^
■ Demonstratives: } Fern. biefe '^xau, this woman.
% ( Neut. biefeg ?^f erb, this horse.
'Der 9)lann, the man; ber iBercj, the inoun tain; bte S3lume, the flower; ba«
genfter, the window; pffen^ open; gufriebert, contented, satisfied, pleased; .
ober, or. <-■■>:' y .. , . i tu-vv./O Cv v ' - - *' "^
^ • ■ ■,,.. • A ^'-^y'
* A parenthesis by \^hich one or more words are enclosed, means that
such words are not used in the language from which the translation is made,
and that they must be translated, A bracket enclosing a word denotes that
the word is employed in the language only from which the translation is^*
made. Such words must be omUud in translating. ,n / ' '
Qui ^■' '^ h-^^t^ ^^^^^^fM^\
— 10 —
^Ciefer Tlam tft fe^r arm. Diefe« genfter tft fcf)r {)0(^. Dicfc
Slume tft fd^on. T)k\t^ *?ferb ift jung unb ftarf. ^^ft biefe
grau glucflicf)? ©iefer 33ater unb biefe DJiutter ftnb ni(f)t jufrieben.
©iefer :93aum ift fe^r grop. 2)iefc grau tft arm unb frattf. T)iefe^
Ititb ift fe^r bofe. !©iefer Wlann ift nid)t ^dflicf). Sift bu traurig
pber frattf?
8.
This woman is tired. This mountain is not high. Is this
child good or naughty? This man is not satisfied. This child is
not very diligent. Is this garden small or large ? Art thou
not contented ? This window is not open. Is this house old or
new ? This tree is very fine. Is this man rich or poor ? This
town is very dull (latign^eilig).
9.
Masc. Fern. Neut.
Indefinite article: etll,
I meii
I bein,
Fossessives: | P^^"'
etne,
em,
a;
meine, - mtxn,
betne, bein,
my;
thy.
2)er 53ruber, the brother; bie @ci)n)efter, the sister; bie geber, the pen; ba8
^ud), the book; bcv greuiib, the friend; ^arl, Charles; ?uife, Louisa; tt)0,
where; l^ter, here; nod), still, yet; aber, but.
aWein Sruber ift traurig. 3Keine @(^tt)efter ift franf. Tltiti
>8nd) ift fc^on. Q]t bein ®arten grop ? 3ft beine geber gut? ^ft
bein ^^ferb flein? .tart ift uoc^ tin ^inb. Berlin ift eine (Stabt.
Suifc ift lueine 2cf)tt)efter. T)ein 33ruber ift meiu greunb. T)m\
33ater ift nidjt I}ier. ffio ift meiu Sitd} ? 3=ft ntein ^nd) ntc^t ^ier ?
Sit beine tWutter nod) franf? ^d) bin noc^ itic^t ntitbe, aber bein
^Bruber uttb beine @d)tDefter finb fe^r ntitbe.
10.
Charles is my brother. This child is my sister. Thou art
my ft^end. Thy garden is very large. Where is thy mother ?
A Mend is faithful. Is this child thy brother ? This horse is
still young. Where is my pen ? Thy pen is here. Louisa is
J still a child. Thy brother is idle . My friend is very diligent.
--'U"^.'*^ %-€«/<*,.*-'
— 11 -
IL
-
,. , i
Ma»c.
Fem.
yeut.
( unfer,
Possessives: ■{ euer,
uttfcre,
euerc,
unfcr,
euer,
i^r,
our;
your;
their.
S)er @o^n, the son; bie 2^0(i)ter, the daught
er; t>k X^iivt, the door; tmmer,
always.
Obs»— The third person plur. of the English possessive (their), and the
second person plur. of the personal pronoun (you) are translated by the same
word t{)r. Whether in a given sentence i^r is a possessive or a personal pro-
noun must be determined by the connection.
The personal pronouns bu and its plural i^r, and the corresponding pos-
sessive beirx and euer are used to address near relatives, intimate friends and
children. ®u and betu refer to one person, t^r and euer to more than one.
Other persons less intimately connected, are addressed by the third per-
son plural of the personal pronoun (®te) and the same person of the possessive
(3^r), which are then written with a capital initial: @te fiub, you are (lit-
erally they are); 3^r greuub, your friend (literally their friend). It makes here
no difference whether one person is addressed or more than one. .
Thus the German iljr (3t)r) may have three meanings: you, your, their.
For a fourth meaning {her) see No. 25.
Unfer ©arten tft gro^. Unfere Mniitx ift ftant Unfer ^ferb
ift fd)on. ©iefer 9Kann tft unfer SSater. guer Sruber tft ^ier.
kaxl ift euer ^ruber unb guife euere @(J)n)efter. Suer §aug ift
gro^. 3)iefer aJtann unb btefe gran finb fe^r traurtg; i^r ®of)n ift
intmer fran!. ^art unb guife finb glitdlidt); i^re abutter ift gufrie^
ben. ^l)x fe1b traurig; ift euer SSater no^ franf ? -3ft ^\)x ®o^n
flei^ig? 3ft ^l)re Joditer jufrieben ? So ift 3^r «itd)? 3^re
2:i)itre ift immer offen. @inb @ie ntein greunb ? ©inb @ie nod^
aufrieben ?
12.
Our father is good. Our mother is little. Our house is
great. Thy father is our friend. Your town is beautiful.
Your garden is large. Your horse is small. Charles and
Louisa are sad ; their mother is sick. This man and this
woman are happy; their friend is here. Your son is not al-
ways diligent. Is your child sick ? Is Charles not your friend ?
Where is your sister? They are not here; they are sick. You
are tired, and your sister is sad. Are you not sick ?
i.^'vv-^/W'l^^
12 —
13.
^lein, little, small; fletner, smaller;
alt, old; alter, older;
grog, great; grower, greater;
jung, young; jiinger, younger;
fietgig, diligent; fteigtger, more diligent.
DWi^ttd^, useful; ungtMItd^, unhappy; ber §unb, the dog; bie ^a^c, the cat;
bie ©onne, the sun; ber 9}ionb, the moon; al6, than, as.
Obs. — In forming the comparative of an adjective, the radical vowel a
generally changes into d; into o; and u into u. All comparatives, without
exception, are formed by adding er to the positive.
.3Ketn 53ruber tft alter ate i^. Qd) bin junger ate ntetn ^^reunb.
^arl tft groBcr dte gutfe. 35tefer 9JJann tft groBer ate xoix. ©er
§unb ift treuer ate bie Sa^e. !J)a6 ^ferb ift fd)oner unb nit^(id)er
ate ber §unb. ©iefe^ Sinb ift flei^iger dte bu. ®ie ftnb glitdlic^er
ate S^x :^ruber. ' Sari ift ftdrfer ate 16). SBir finb 3ufriebener ate
tl^r. guife ift ^of(id)er ate beine @d^tt)efter. ^'ft Q\}v S3ritber Jitnger
ate (2ie ? Sr ift alter, aber Ileiner ate id) unb ©ie. (Sr ift um
glitcf(i(^er ate @ie,. aber (Sie finb tranriger ate er.
14.
My brother is more diligent than thou. Thou art not
younger than he. He is taller and stronger than I. Your son
is younger than this child. The moon is smaller than the sun.
Art thou older than I ? This dog is finer than this cat. Your
sister is politer than you. I am more contented than thou.
You are richer than we. We are more unhappy than you.
This dog is more useftil than your horse. Is your sister older
than my mother ?
15.
@ut, good; beffer, better;
l^oc^, high; l^ii^er, higher;
3)a« ©If en, the iron; bag iBtet, the lead; ber ©tal^I, the steel; btc Srbe, the
earth; fd^toer, heavy; l^art, hard; tl)euer, dear; fo, so, as; ju, too.
i
— 13 —
Obs. — Demonstrative and all other adjective pronouns are placed in tbe
gender of the nouns to which they refer.
As in the second part of a comparison is translated by al^; in the first
part by fo»
2)iein ^itd) ift f(J)oner ate j;ene^, 3Jieine gebcr tft beffer a{6 btefe.
©er Stal)I ift {)drter ate ba^ gifen. J)iefer Serg ift i)o^er ate jener.
©ie ta^e ift nic^t fo treu ate ber §unb. 3)a^ -Slei ift nirf)t fo ^art
ate ba§ (Sifen. ^ft 3{)r §au^ nicf)t grower ate iene^ ? 3=ft ba^
Sleitfjeurer ate ba^gifen? 3:)er ^Konb ift n\d)t fo grog ate bic
@rbe. !©iefe^ Sinb ift fteigiger ate iene^. Qznt grau ift (irmer a(^
biefe. Unfer ®arten ift nii^t fo lang unb fc^on al^ biefer.
16.
-V (The) lead is heavier than (the) iron. This tree is not so
high as that. /Is this book not better than that ? Our garden
is smaller than this one. / This house is higher than that
one. (The) iron is more useful than (the) lead. CI am not so
old as he. (The) lead is not so dear as (the) steel, n Our town
is larger and finer than this (bne. -fWe are not so rich as this
man, but we are more contented than he.
Singular, id) 'ijobt, I have;
\in lja% thou hast;
tXf fte Ijat, he, she has;-
PluraL tt)tr ^aben, we have;
xljv Ijabt, @te l^aben, you have;
fte ^aben, they have.
!5)tc U^r, the watch; bo8 3Jieffer, the knife; ^t&jt, right; Uttrcd^t, wrong;
§einrtc^, Henry; l[?ubtr)tg, Lewis; fiir, for; aud^, also; tt)arutn, why.— I am
right, lam wrong, tc^ Ijabe ^t^t, i(!^ ^abt Unre(^t (not x&j bin 9ie(^t or Unred^t),
Si) f)abe 9ted)t. ©u ^aft Unrcc^t. Qd) ^abe ein «udt). !Du
^aft eine geber. aWein ^ruber ^at eine Ut)r. SBir ^aben ein §)au^.
^i^v ^abt ein ^ferb. ^art nnb giiife ^aben eine ^a^e. |)aft bn
eine ©dimefter? |)at biefer aWann eine JEo^ter? ^aht xijx ein
tinb? ©iefe Uf)r ift fiir nteine ajjntter. ©iefe geber ift fitr Sari.
§aben ©ie notf) ^^re aKntter? Sarnm ^aft bn mein 2»effer? Qd)
^abe bein aJZeffer nid)t.
— u —
18. ,
Charles, hast thou my pen ? M^ouisa, hast thou my book ?
Henry has thy pen, and Lewis has thy book.*^-^hou art right.
My son is wrong. We hav€ a book and a pen.^^ave you also
a horse and a watch ? This knife is for Henry /v Is this watch
for thy mother ? Has your friend a knife ?>^Charles and Lewis
have a horse. "^Has your father still a sister ?X Is this flower
for my daughter ? K Are you right or wrong? >^ Have you my
( I have not your pen.
pen?^j(]
19.
Past Partidplee: gelauft, bought; toerfauft, sold; gefuttbett, found; tocrlo*
ten, lost; genommen, taken; gefe^en, seen.
Obs. — In all principal sentences the past participle is detached from the
auxiliary and placed at the end of the sentence. — 9f^od) ntd^t (not iitd^t tioc^),
not yet.
^6) I)abe mein Suc^ Derloren. §)aft bu mein SJJeffer gefunben?
-3(1) l)abe bein 3}2e[fer md)! gefunben. 3Bo ift meine geber? §abt
t^r meine geber ? SBir ^aben beine geber ntrf)t. 3JJein 23ater ^at
biefe^ ^^ferb getanft. SBtr ^ben nnfer ^au^ t)erfauft. SBo l^aft bu
meine U^r gef nnben ? aBarnm ^aben @te meine U^r genommen ?
^i) ^abe ^^xt 3J?ntter unb ^^xt S(f)tt)efter gefe^en. SBarnm ^t 3I)r
SSater biefe^ §an^ nii^t gefanft ? §at bein ©ruber meine geber ge^
nommen ? @r ^at beine geber nii^t genommen. §)aben Sie meine
U^r nod) ni(^t gefunben ?
20.
^ Where hast thou found this book ? Have you lost your pen ?
Has your father bought this horse ?-^ Why have you sold your
watch ? Why have you not taken my pen ? My brother has
found thy knife.'T We have seen thy mother. iTl have not yet
seen this woman. X Charles and Lewis have lost their mother;
they are very sad.
21.
Nominative. Accusative. Objective.
2)er SSater, ben 35ater, the father;
biefer iBater, btefcn '^a\n, this father.
p^
-. 15 —
2)er ^onig, the king; ber §ut, the hat; ber @tocf, the stick, the cane; bcr
©rief, the letter; oft, often; fd)On, already.
Past Participles: gefci^rieben^ written; erftalten, received.
Obs. — The direct object is placed in the accusative case. The accusative
in the neuter and feminine is the same as the nominative. — If the article or
pronoun belongs to two coordinate nouns of different genders, the article and
pronoun must be repeated in German before every noun: ber Bater unb
bte Wbxittx, the father and mother.
^c^ {)abe ben Sontg gefetjen. §aft bu ben -Srtef er^alten?
SKeine ©ditnefter ^i ben Srief norf) m6)i geftf)rieben, §einnc^ ^at
ben @tO(f Derloren. aJiein SSater ^at btefen ®arten nnb biefe^ §au§
getanft. SSo ^abt i^r btefen $nnb nnb biefe Sa^e gefnnben ? ^6)
^abe bie[en 3)iann fd)on oft gefe^en, 2Barnm ^aben @te biefen §nt
genommen? SBtr ^ben biefen Srief gefnnben. §at bein Srnber
btefen ©tod tjertoren?
22,
?^ We have sold the house and the garden. Have you bought
this dog and this horse ^ I have seen the man and woman,
the son and daughter. I have not written this letter. Where
have you found this book and cane?/^ Has thy brother bought
this tree ? This letter is for this man. Hast thou lost this
hat? /-Hast thou not taken this book and pen ? ?^ Hast thou
already seen the king? I have not yet seen the king.
23.
Norn, etn ©arten, ) ^ crc^r-A^r. -^^- inein §unb, [ _„ .„
S)eriBoge1, the bird; ber ®tu^t, the chair; bcr Stif (5^, the table; ber iBIeiftift,
the pencil; ber ^adjhax, the neighbor; fro^, Dergniigt, glad.
• Obs. — ^The accusative masculine sing, of all adjective pronouns (See No.
9, 11, 15) is formed by the ending en. The e of this ending is genltally
dropped in unfer and euer (unfern, euem).— The preposition fiir requires the
next noun in the accusative. ^
3Wetn53rnberift fe^r fro^; er ^at einen SSo^el. '|)aft bn etnen
53rtef er^alten? Qd) ^abe meinen ^nt Derloren. §aben@ie nteinen
^nnb ftfjon gefe^en? SBir ^aben etnen Stfc^ nnb @tu{)t gefanft.
— 16 —
SDlein ©ruber ^at betnen (Stod genommcn. 2Co ^aft bu beinen ©let*
ftift gefauft? SBtr ^aben imfern SSater unb unfere SKutter t)er(oren.
3rf) ^abe O^ren ©rief nid)t er^alten. §at bein ©ruber unfem ®ar^
Un unb unfer ^au^ fdE)on gefe^en? Uufer 5lac^bar ^at ben Sontg
gejeJ)en. §aft bu biefen aSoge( gefauft ober ienen?
24.
~ We have lost our dog. This man has lost a son and a
daughter. Where have you found my pencil ? Have you al-
ready seen my brother and mother ? \1 have bought a hat for
my sister. Our neighbor has found thy knife and cane.
Where hast thou bought this table ? Thy brother has taken
my chair. -^ Have you written a letter ? We have found this
stick and that one. -We have not seen your pen. • I have
written this letter for my father.
25.
Norn, kin, feine, fetn, [ , . ., il)r, i^re, i^r, [ ,
Acms. fetnen, feine, fetn, j ^^'^' '^^- i^ren, t^re, if)r, j ^®^-
;fen, read (past participle); gefannt, known; ber £)n!e(, the uncle; bie
2^ante, the aunt; ber gtnger!)ut, the thimble; bie @d)eere, the scissors; grau, .
wife, woman.
3Kein grennb ift traurig; fein 33ater unb feine SJiutter finb frant.
3Keine 3:ante ift gufrieben; i^r @o^n unb t^re Xodjttx finb fel)r
fleiBtg. ^einricf) ^at feinen <S>tod, feine U^r unb fein SJieffer t)er==
ioren. guife ^at i^ren i^tnger^nt, i^re geber unb i^r ©uc^ t)er(oren.
gner Dntel ^at fein §au^ unb feinen ©arten Derfauft. 'Dtefe gran
{)at i^ren SDJann unb i^r Sinb t)erIoren. S)iefe Stoc^ter Ijat einen
©rief fiir if)re 3)Zntter gef{f)rteben. Sari ^at feinen SSater nicftt ge=^
!annt. S)ie Zantt Ijat beinen unb ntetnen ©rief gelefen.
26.
^ The father has lost his son. The mother has lost her
daughter. My uncle has sold his watch. v'Our aunt has sold
her scissors. Henry has found his pencil. Louisa has found
her thimble. '^ I have seen this man and his son, this woman
and her daughter. My mother has lost her pen and her knife.
— lY —
""^ My brother has taken his hat. I have seen your aunt; has
she still her horse ? This man is very sad; he has lost his
wife. Charles has written a letter for his father, ^.x; My aunt
has bought this book for her son.
2t.
Nominative, tie SD^Utter, the mother; biefe 3}iutter, this mother;
Genitive. ber SJiutter, of the mother; biefer Mviiitx, of this mother.
S)ie '^(i^'ii, the maid-servant; bie ^ontgtn, the queen; bte 9^a(f)bartn, the
(female) neighbor. Past Participles : atigefommen, arrived; abgeretft, departed.
3)ie ajjutter ber ^ontgin ift angefommen. 3)er SSater ber Slac^*
barin ift abgereift. Q6) ^abe ben ®arten ber 3:ante gefet)en. $aben
©ie ben Sleiftift ber ©(^wefter gefunben ? ®iefe grau ift bie ©c^rne*
fter ber 5yfa(f)barin. T)tefer Sftann ift ber ©ruber ber SKagb. !ba^
^inb biefer grau ift tmmer !ranf .
28.
The hat of the mother is beautiful. The sister of the queen
is not beautiful. Is the father of the servant arrived ? Are
you the brother of the (female) neighbor ? I am the sister of
this woman. Hast thou taken the chair of the sister ? Have
you seen the horse of the aunt ? We have known the father
of this servant. The pencil of this woman is too small.
'29.
Masc. Norn, ber Skater, the father; biefer SSater, this father;
Gm. be« 35aterg, of the father; hk'it^ iBater^, of this father;
Neuter. Nom. ba^ ^tnb, the child; biefer ^tnb, this child;
Gen, beg ^inbeg, of the child; btejeg ^inbe§, of this child.
2)er @cf)u^mac^er, the shoemaker; ber @c!^netber, the tailor; ber ©artner, the
gardener; ber ^aufmaun, the merchant; ber^lrjt, the physician; baS 3il^^^^/
the room; bag '^oii, the people; ber §errf(^er, the ruler.
Obs. — All masculine and neuter nouns ending in er, et, en take 8 in the
genitive singular. All other neuter and most of the other masculine nouns,
not ending in e, take e§ or g in the genitive. Feminine nouns are indeclinable
in the singular.
S)ie 5Kagb be§ ©(^neiber^ ift franf. !Der(So^n be^ 9lacf)bar^ ift
noc^ fe^r jimg. £)ie S3Iume be§ ©artner^ ift fef)r fd)on. ©er ®ar*
— 18 --
ten beS ^dntge ift fct)r grog. !Der S5nig ift bcr ^errfdjer be§ SSolfee.
®ie grau be^ Slrjte^ ift tmmer jufrieben. ^i) Ijabt ben ®arten be^
Dnfel^ gefet)en. 2Bir ^aben ba^ "ipferb be^ Saufmann^ gefauft.
§aft bu ben Sletftift be^ Sruber^ genommen ? 2Bo ift bie 2)?agb beg
©dfjul^mac^er^? S)ie J^ure be^ 3^^^^^^ ^f^ immer offen, Die
Zoijkv biefeg aKanne^ ift abgereift. SBir ^beit bie 2)iutter biefe^
^inbeg gefannt. ©er ®arten biefe^ §aufeg ift Hein.
30.
' This man is the brother of the gardener. This woman is
the sister of the shoemaker. This child is the son of the tailor.
The door of the house is not open, -sd have seen the son and
daughter of the physician. We have seen the horse of the
merchant. >^The servant of the neighbor is the sister of this
gardener. Why is the door of this room open ? ^ We have
known the son of this merchant. The dog of the neighbor is
faithful. ^ The mother of this child is arrived.
31.
Mm, ein S5ater, etne SJlutter, ein ^inb;
Gen. eineg 35aterg, enter 3}iutter, etneg ^inbcs.
S)er ^egetifci)trm, the umbrella; baS gebermeffer, the penknife; geftenx, yester-
day.
Obs.— The pronouns tnein, bcttt, fetn, i^r, unfer, euer, are declined like ein,
eine, ein; jener (that) is declined like biefer.
®tnb ®ie ber ©o^n eine^ Sltjteg? Qi) bin ber ®o^n eineg
^aufmanng. §aben @ie bag §aug nteineg 9ia(f)barg gelanft? !l)er
53ruber beineg §reunbeg ift geftern ange!ommen. ©o ift ber 9tegem
f(i)irm beineg Onfete ? f)aft bn bag 3^^^^^ meiner (£rf)iDefter ge^
fel^en? ffiir l^aben ben ^rief beiner SIMter gelefen. SKein Dnfel
^t ba^ §aug 3^reg 23aterg gefauft. Qi) l^abe ber ©tod Qljxt^
^ruberg t)erioren. 3)er ®arten unferg ?larf)barg ift fcl^r gro^.
Unfere SOJagb ift bie Softer eureg ©cirtnerg. SBo ift ber 9tegen*
f^imt unfercr DJJutter ? ^arl {)at ben ginger^ut feiner ©(^mefter ge*
nomnten. ?uife ^t bag ^^^benneffer t^rer 2^ante genommen. !Die
3Jiutter ieneg Sinbeg ift franl. 2)er @o^n iener grau f)at mein
SUieffer gefunben.
»i/ t-'Wwlx^V-JtA.^
— 19 —
32.
I have found the hat of the child. Are you the servant of
my uncle ? I am the servant of your tailor. The penknife of
thy brother is very good. The pen of thy sister is not good.
The house of our aunt is large. Henry has lost the letter of his
father. Louisa has found the pen of her brother.— Is the
garden of our uncle as fine as this one? (See No. 15.) We
have found the hat of your neighbor's son (the hat of the son
of your neighbor). Lewis has read the letter of his Mend,
Louisa has bought a flower for a child of her sister.
33.
N(m. ber 33ruber, the brother;
Dat. bent 33ruber, to the brother;
Nbrn, bo8 ^uc^, the book; bie ©c^tDCfter, the sister;
Dat. bem ^ud)e, to the book; ber ©(^ttJefter, to the sister.
SYNOPSIS.
Nbm, ber, bte, \)a9, btefer, btcfc, bte|e6;
Gen. be§, ber, be§, btejeS, biefer, btefeS;
Dcft. bem, ber, bem, btefem, btefer, btefem;
Ace. ben, bie, t>a^, biejen, biefe, biefeS.
®el^brt, belongs. Past Participles: gelte^Ctt, lent; gegeben, given; gefd^ttft, sent;
t)erfprod^en, promised; gegeigt, shown. S)le greunbtn, the (female) friend.
Obs. 1. — The dative singular of nouns ending in er, el, en takes no end-
ing. The dative singular of nouns that take eS or § in the genitive has the
ending e, but this ending may be always dropped.
2. The dative generally precedes the accusative.
3. The English emphatic form of the verb, formed by the auxiliary to
do must always be rendered by the common form in German, without any
auxiliary: Does he belong (belongs he), ge^ort er? He does not belong (he be-
longs not), er gel^ort nici^t.
©tefe^ ^am ge^art bem Dn!et mcine^ 9lad^bar^. Qcmv ®arten
ge^ort ber 2:ante tnelne^ i^teunbe^. S^ ^cibe bem 3Sater einen ©rief , .
gefi^rieben. @ie ^at ber greunbtn i^rer ©d^mefter eine ©lume gegc^ * V
ben. Sari ()at ber (gf^efter fein gebermeffer getief)en. §aft bu
bem arjte meiu ^n^ gefc^tdt? Qd) ^abe btefem Stube einen 3Soget
tierfpro^en, §einric^ ^at biefer gran nnfern 9f?egen[(^irm gelte^en.
■— 20 —
guifc ijat btefem SJJanne unfern ®arten gejcigt. 3d) ^be metne
geber bem greimbe meine^ ^ruber^ gegeben. ^k\t^ SSvi6) ge^ort
meinem 33ater nic^t.
84.
This hat belongs to the gardener. This house belongs to
the mother of my friend. I have written to my uncle and
aunt. My sister has lent her thimble to the friend (fem. ) of
your brother, f My uncle has sent a watch to the son of your
neighbor (fem.). Have you given a ohair to this child? Have
you lent an umbrella to this woman? t^Does this garden belong
to the king ? No, it belongs to the sister of the king.-/ We
have sold our horse to the friend of our uncle. yI)oes this knife
belong to this or that servant ?
35.
iVom. etn 33ud), a book; eine J^ber, a pen;
Bat einem iSud^c, to a book; einer geber, to a pen.
3)crS5etter, ber (£ouftn, the cousin, bie iBafe, bie (Soufme, the (female) cousia;
^malie, Anielia; bie (Sdrtnertn, the (female) gardener or the gardener's wife.
a^bttofr/f^tE'^' ( ein Suc^ mnne« Skater.;
: book ^f ^y^ re^' [ ein ««* nteiner 3«utter.
SYNOPSIS.
iVom. etn, eine, etn, ntetn, metne, ntetn, nnfer, nnjt're, nnfer;
Ge7h etneg, etner, etne^, meine§, tnetner, metne§, unfere^, unferer, unfereg;
Bat. einem, etiter, einem, meinem, meiner, meinem, nnferem, unjerer, mtferem;
Ace. einen, eine, ein, meinen, meine, mein, nnferen, nnjere, nnfev.*
©iefer ®arten ge^ort einem ©^u^macEier. S)iefe^ 3)?effer -ge^ort
einer DJiagb. 8uife I)at meinem 23ater einen ^rief gefc^rteben.
^einrid^ I)at meiner ajfutter eine -93Inme gegeben. -3d) l^abe 3^^^^^
Dnfel mein ^ferb gette^en. @ie Ijahm unferer Xante Qi)X §an^
t)erfanft. ^ar( ijat feinem grennbe- etn Sud) geft^tcft. 3lmalie ^at
i^rer grennbin einen ginger^nt gelte^en, ®iefer 2)?ann Ijat enrer
^Jfac^barin einen 93oge[ gefd}t(ft. f)aft bn meinem 3Sater btefe Uf)r
gegeben? §abt i^r nnferer Safe einen Sleiftift gette^en? Sine
5Uiagb meiner 9D?ntter ijat tf)ren gingerl)nt t)erIoren.
* The e of the ending is generally dropped in unfer0, unferm, unfern.
=- 21 — -.
I have lent my pen to a friend of my brother's. Hast thou
given thy cat to a friend (fern.) of my sister's ?.Wd have given
the letter to a servant of the physician's. Have you sent this
flower to our gardener ? This garden belongs to my cousin
(masc. and fem.).vThis umbrella does not belong to your
brother. Does this pen belong to thy brother or to thy sister?
Has Henry written to his father or to his mother ?-^Has Louisa
written to her uncle or aunt? Have you seen the gardener's
wife? Afl have not seen her, but I have seen her brother.
37.
3(^ fptei^e, I speak, or I am speaking, or I do speak;
tt)tr fpre(i)en> we speak, (yr we are speaking, <yr we do speak;
id) tt)erbe geltebt, I am loved;
er tt)irb geliebt, he is loved.
Obs. — The preposition t)on, o/, /rom, is followed by the dative: Don bem
SBater (of, from the father).
Of is translated by the genitive, if it depends on a substantive: the '
father of the friend, ber iBater beg greunbeg.
Of is translated by t)on, if it depends on a verb, not governing the*"
genitive. Verbs governing the genitive will be marked as such : I speak "of
thy father, i(^ fprec^e ton betnem S5ater.
By governed by a passive verb is translated by t)on with the dative: 3>t6
tDerbe t)on meinem @o^ne getiebt, I am loved by my son.
^6) ^abe ba6 ®u(^ be§ 3lrjte§ gefe^en. §aben ©te btefe^ S3ucl^
Don bent 2lr5te er^atten? 3Btr ^aben ben ©arten nnfer^ 9?a(^bar^
gefanft. |)aben ©ie btefen ®arten t)on 3=^rem 9?ad^bar gefanft?
3=tf) fjabe btefe U^r t)on ntetnent DnM er^alten. §etnrt(^ l^at einen
Srief t)on feinent 3Sater nnb fetner 9Jintter erl)alten. ^^ f^rec^e t)on
bem Sontge nnb ber ^ontgin. 3Btr fjjtec^en t)on 3*^rein ^rnber nnb
^\)Xix @(^tt)e[ter, t)on biefent aJJanne nnb btefer gran. @)Dred^en
(gte t)on ntetnem SSetter ober ntetner -^afe? $etnrt(^ n)trb t)on feinem
SSater nnb feiner 3Jintter geltebt.
K I have received this horse from my friend. I have bought
this cat of thy sister. Louisa has received an umbrella from
— 22 —
y
her uncle and a watch from her aunt. I speak of this dog and
of this cat, of this bird and of this flower. We are speaking
of your cousin (masc. and fern.). *^ Amelia is loved by her
uncle and aunt.T^Our (fern.) gardener has received a letter
from her son and daughter. r Henry is the son of this shoemaker
and Louisa is the daughter of this tailor.
@d^oii, beautiful; fd^oncr, more beautiful; ber fc^onfle, the most beautiful;
gut, good; beffer, better; ber beftc, the best;
l^od^, high; ^o^er, higher; ber l^o^jte, the highest.
2)a8 2^]^ier, the aniifial; ber Lottie, the lion; ber 2^tger, the tiger; baSSJietaH,
the metal; baS @tlber, the silver; bag ®olb, the gold.
Obs. — The superlative is formed by adding jle or efte, and softening the
radical vowel, that is changing a into o, o into 5 and u into ii.
T)k tafec tft ntd^t fo ftarf at^ ber §unb. !iDer 8oh)e tft ftarfer
ate ber Jtger. ®er gome ift ba« ftiirffte Zijkx. SWetn 3la6)bav tft
rei(^er ate @ie; er tft ber ret(^fte ajjann ber ©tabt. !Da^ ®oIb tft
f(f)tt)erer ate ba^ ©tiber. !Da§ (Stfett tft ttii^Itd^er ate ba§ ©ttber.
®a^ gtfett tft ba§ nitfelt^fte aWetatl. gutfe tft fi^oner ate gimalte;
abet §etnrtd^ tft ha^ fdE)onfte Stub, gubtntg tft jitnger ate bu; er ift
ber iitngfte @o{)n unfer^ 9iad)bar^. ^art ift alter ate id); er ift ber
attefte @o^n ttteine^ Dn!ete. !Der §)unb tft fe^r treu. S5er §itnb
tft ba^ treufte ST^ter. ®tefe§ SSni) tft beffer ate Jene^. !Du btft ber
befte greuitb ittehte^ Srubere. ®a^ §au^ btefe^ ^aufmatttte^ tft bag
^d(^fte ber ©tabt. @ie tft bie bofefte grau ber ©tabt.
40.
Louisa is very beautiful; she is more beautiful than her
sister, but the most beautiful child is Amelia. This tailor is
the happiest man in (of the) town, i* Henry is more diligent
than Lewis, but Charles is the most diligent son of your friend.
He is the oldest, but also the most wicked man in town,
j You are not so poor as my cousin, but the poorest man is my
father. My chair is too high; this one is higher; but the
highest chair belongs to my mother. |vYour pen is very good;
my pen is better; but the best pen is that (bie) of my father
J
— 23 —
41.
INTERROGATIVE SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS.
Nam. XOtX, who?
Dat XOtm, to whom ?
Don VOtVa, of whom, from whom ?
Ace. totn, whom ?
fiir Wen, for whom ?
Nrnn. and Ace. toag, what ?
S$,it; ettt)ag, something, anything; ntd^t^, nothing, not— anything; 3emanb,
somebody, anybody; S^iemanb, nobody, not— anybody; ta, there.
Obs. — The personal pronoun of the third person has three genders: er,
he; fie, she; e^, it. If the English i^ refers to ^Am^/s, masculine in German,
it is not translated by eS, but by er; if it refers to things of feminine gender,
it is translated by fie; if to neuters by e6: the chair — it is high, ber @tuf)I —
er ift^od); the flower — it is beautiful, tie ^Inme— fie ift fd)on; the book — it is
useful, ba^ 33uc^— e ^ ift niiytc^.
SBcr ift ba? d^ ift ber ©c^neiber; e^ ift ^einric^. SBer ift
{ener Wlann? (S^ ift ber ©(^u^mai^er; e^ ift ber ©o^n be^ 2lrjte«.
aSer {)at biefen ^rief gefd)rieben? SBem ge^ort biefer^unb? (Sr
ge^ort uuferm ^Jad^bar. SBem ge^ort biefe U^r? @ie ge^ort tneiner
@d}tDefter. 9Bem l)aben @ie ben §ut gegeben ? 3Son iDem ^aben
@ie biefe Slume ertjalten ? SSBen {)aben @ie gefet)en? 2Ba§ ^aben
©ie t)erIoren? ^(^ I]abe nicf)t^ Derloren. §aben @ie tttoa^ gefun^
ben ? So ift Q^v .93ruber ? (Sr ift mi)t ^ier. -3ft 3=emanb ba?
5)iiemanb ift ba. §at .^emanb meiue geber genommen? ^iemanb
f)at fie genommen.
42.
Who is there? It is my tailor; it is Charles. Who is that
woman? She is the wife of the shoemaker; she is the servant
of the neighbor. To whom have you lent your knife ? To the
son of the gardener. J^To whom has your brother sold his dog?
To the sister of my friend. From whom hast thou received
this bird? From the father of this woman. y What have you
bought? I have not bought anything (bought nothing).
Of whom do you speak ? I am' speaking of your cousin. -^Has
anybody read my letter? Nobody has read your letter. Have
you seen anything ? I have seen your watch. It is here. For
— 24 —
whom have you sent this chair ? It belongs to your father.
To whom does that pen belong ? It belongs to my gardener
(fem.).<^ Whom have you sent? -I have sQnt my maid-servant.
Where is my pen? ^-It is not here; it is there.
43.
INTERROGATIVE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS.
Nam. Xozl&jZX, XOti&it, rt)e(c^e§, which or what;
Dai. tt)eld)'em, Xot\<i)tx, tnetdjem, to which, to what;
Ace. tt)eld^en, WzX^t, X0t\6)t^, which, what (objective case).
S)er 2^tf(^Ier, the joiner; ber 9^0 (f, the coat; in, in or into; mit, with; bei,
with (at the house of).
Fast Participles: gegangen, gone; auSgegangen, gone out; gefprod^en,
spoken; gemad)t, made, done.
Obs. — (1) What is translated by \ot\6)tX etc. only if followed by a noun.
(2) The prepositions mttand bet govern the dative (nut tt)em, with whom etc.).
(3) The preposition in governs the dative, if it corresponds to m, the accu-
sative, if it means irito.
SBeld^er Jifcf)Ier f)at btefen STiftf) gemarf)t? 3[CeI{f)e DJZagb {)at
btcfen ®rief gefdjrieben ? SBelto §unb ^ben ©te gefauft ? SBelcfic
VAjX ^aft bu t)er(oren? SBelt^ei §au^ f)at ^^x abater t)erfauft?
33on tr)eld)em 33otte f^^rec^en ®ie ? 3)iit h)e(d)em greunbe bift bu
au^gegaugen? ^n \ddijtm ®arten t)at er ben 3Soget gefimben?
SBeli^e geber ^ft "t^M ba ? • 2BeId[)er grau ^aft bu bein 3Keffer gege^
ben ? SBo ^aben ©ie metnen SSruber gefe^en ? Sei ^'^rent OnM,
bei 3^rer 3)?utter. 9)itt t^eldjer gran ^aben @te geftern gefpro(f)en?
Wxi ber gran metne^ 9la(i)bar§, SBo tft ©ein iSruber ? @r ift in
metnem §au[e; er tft bet ntetner 3Kutter; bet bent ©drttter. @r tft
in ben ®arten gegangen, ^arl f)at fetnen Sruber in ba6 3'^^^^^'
gefrf)t(!t. a?on mem fjaben ®te biefe U^r gefauft ? ^i) ^abe fte m
bem ®arten gefunben.
44,
V Where is your sister ? She is in her garden. With whom
has she spoken? With her cousin (fem.). Where is your
cousin? He is with (at the house of) his friend. Is your father
— 26 —
gone out? He is gone out with the physician. Which letter
have you written? What book have you read? What have
you found in the garden ? Which pen have you taken ? What
house have you bought in (the) town? I have yesterday
spoken with your brother at the house of your neighbor. From
what gardener hast thou received this flower ? Where have
you lost your thimble? At the house of my father. With
whom has (tft) your brother departed ?d«.Which cane have you
lost? Have you sent the maid-servant into the garden^^I have
sent the servant into the house of my father. -^Hak Oft)
Charles gone into his room TrWhat tailor has made this coat ?
My sister has made it for her brother.
45.
RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
N^. I g*-' ^^^' ZT 1 who ..which (that);
^- 1 rm'?''"'^;?"'^^*''" [ -Who., to which; ^
^- { "e?'"' bief'' bif ' [ whom, which, that (obj. case).
S)er ^pfel, the apple; bie iBirtte, the pear; ber @d)uter, the scholar, the pupU;
jemat^, ever.
Past Participles', gegeffeu, eaten; Cjefpeift, dined.
Obs.— (l)Relative pronouns are placed in the gender of the preceding
noun to which they refer (antecedent). — (2) Clauses beginning with' a relative
. pronoun, require the auxiliaries to be placed at the end, immediately after
the participles. — (3) In such clauses simple verbs without participles are also
placed at the end of the clause.
2Bir ^ben einen -©ruber, xoti^tx (ber) fe^r gro^ tft. Q\)x ^abt
etne S^toefter, tDeldje (bie) fe^r Heitt ift. JSRzm ®o^n ^at etn Sud),
ineli^e^ (ba^) fe^r nit^UdE) tft. Der ®arten, iDeldjeu (ben) betn Dnfel
gefauft l)at, tft fet)r fc^on. T)k geber, xotl6)t tnein SSetter gefunbeit
l)at, tft je^r gut. Q6) l^abe ba^ §au§ gefe^ett, xotl^t^ ^\\x 23ater
getauf t ^at. §aben @ie einett gittger^ut gefunben, ben metne ©c^n^e--
fter t)erloren |at ? §aft bn ben Sl^jfel gegeffen, ireld^en "t^Vi in bent
©arten gefnnben ^aft? .^c^ ^abe bie 33irne gegeffen, bie id} in ber
©tabt gefanft ^abe. §ter tft ber SJJann, melrfjem ®te 3^ren ^rief
gegeben ^aben. §ier tft W gran, xoti&jtx \mx nnfern $nnb t)erlauft
26
^abeit, §ier tft ber SIrjit, t)on bem tt)tr fo oft fpred^en* (5tn 3JZann,
bcr t)on einem greunbe geltebt n^irb, tft ret(f), ^ier ift tnein 9la(^bar,
bei bem id) geftern gefpeift ^be* SBo tft -S'^r greunb, mtt bettt @te
gcftern gef^3rod()en ^abeit? ^arl ift ber befte ©d^itler, ben id^ Jemat^
gefamtt ^abe* @^ ift ba§ t^euerfte SSn6), ba^ i(i) jental^ gefauft
l^abe* T)a^ SSnd), in mid)tm bu getefett t)aft, ift ttic^t gut«
46.
I have a dog which is very little. We have a cat that is
very fine. My father has bought a horse which is beautifiil.
Your friend who has bought this house, is in (the) town. The
woman who has made this coat, is very diligent. The child
. ,, that has lost his penknife, is very sad. >( Where is the man
^ *r*"wh(}ni I have seen at the house of thy father ? The man with
whom (at whose house) we have dined, is departed. Hast
thou found the man for whom I have bought this watch ? Have
you found the man to whom you have lent your watch ? A Have
you seen the umbrella which my mother has bought ? Hast
thou found the pear which thy brother has lost ? We have
seen the horse which your uncle has sold. Where is the thimble
which you have found? I have taken the pencil which my
cousin has bought^ Henry has eaten the apple which his
broth'er has received. Have you seen the woman of whom we
speak?' •'Have you read the letter which I have written?
Have you found the boy to whom this penknife belongs ? Where
is the pen with which you have written this letter? 4. The man
with whom you have (finb) arrived, is departed./ Your brother
is the most diligent man that I have ever seen.y The highest
house^that i s in this ci tj^ belongs to m y father. ' * ~~II
4t.
Masc,
Fern.
Neuter (!)
Neuter (2)
CORRELATIVES.
berjenige, ber (njeld^er)
ber, tt)e(d)er (ber)
btejentge, bie (toeld^e)
bie, tt)et(^e (bie)
bagjentge, ba§ (metci^eS)
bag, tvhije^ (ba^)
bagjeuige, tt)a§
ha^, tt)a8
he who
she who
that which
- the one that
that which (what).
— 21 —
!S)erj[enige, ben, the one whom (which); bcrjettige (bet), mit bcm, the one with
whom; ber (bie, \ia^) meiltcS S3ruber8, that (the one) of my brother.
Obs. — (1) The English that which, if it may be replaced by the one that,
must be rendered by the masculine berjemge, bet etc*, if it refers to things
masculine in German. Referring to things feminine, it must be translated
by the feminine btejentge, bte etc.: that (the letter) which we have written, berje*
nige (ber53rief), ben tDir gefd^rteben Ijaben,— (2) The second form of the neuter
(ba^ienige, tx)a§; 'tid^, lt)ag; or xoa^ alone) is used, if the English that which may
be replaced by what, and not by the one tJuU, so that it refers to things "in
general": That which (what) you have said, is true, baS, lt)a§ (baSjientge, toad or
toag alone) @ie gefagt ^aben, ift X0Qi\)x.
©erjenige (ber), tDet^er (ber) jufrieben ift, ift retd^* !J)tefer gin-
ger^ut ift beffer at^ ber nteiner ®(|tt)efter* ®iefe U^r ift fleiner ate
bte beine^ :93ruber§, £)iefe^ §au^ ift f(f)oner ate ba^ unfer^ ^ai)^
bar§* ^6) ^abe nteinen f)ut dertoren unb ben tneine^ SSetter^* SBir
l^aben beine i^eber gefunben unb bie beine^ grennbe^. ^einrid) ^at
mein 3^^^^^ gefefjen unb ba^ nteinen Dnfete* |)aft bu nteinen
©tod genomnten ober ben nteinen 4Brnber^ ? S)a^ ift nid^t beine
S3(ume, ba^ ift bie nteiner 3Jtntter* §aben @ie mein 3D?effer ober
ba§ be^ ©drtner^ ? ©^rec^en @ie t)on nteinent ©o^ne ober Don bent
be§3lrjte^? ®a^ "ipferb, melc^e^ toir gefauft ^aben, ift Jitnger, ate
ba§ ^|re^ SSater^. SKeine 3Kutter ift nict)t biejenige, bie biefen §nt
gefauft f)at. ©iefer S3rief ift nic^t ber, ben xi) gefc^rieben ^abe*
©iefe U^r ift bie, tt)eltf)e i^ gefunben l^abe* S03a^ itfl gelefen l^abe,
ift fe^r tranrig. !j)er, mit bem irf) gefprod^en ^abe, ift meiit greunb.
'©a^, tr)a6 't^u meinem 3Sater oerfproi^en {)aft, ift nod^ nid^t ange^
!ommen* ®iefe^ ^ferb ift t^eurer, al^ ba^ienige, xodijt^ n)ir ge=
lauft {)aben, ©iefer ©ta^t ift ni^t garter, ate ber, ben bein SSater
gef(i)idt {)at. ©iefe U^r ift ni^t beffer ate bie, tt)eld^e ic^ beiner
©d^tDefter geliel^en ^be*
48,
^ He who is rich, is not always contented. Are you (a looman)
the one that has taken this umbrella ? She who has written
this letter, is not in this town. \ My brother is not the one to
whom this watch belongs. That horse is not that which we
have bought. >*his pencil is not that which I have found.
This table is the one which your joiner has made. This flower
^
— 2S —
is that which your sister has sent/\ This steel is harder than
that which your father has sent. That which you have
written, is sad. * What your father has sent is here. That
which we have read of your brother is very sad. The
room of my neighbor is larger and higher than that of my
friend. This umbrella is finer than that which we have bought.
Have you taken my pen or that of my sister ? This is not your
pencil; it is that of my brother.*^ I speak of my book and of
that of your friend. Louisa has lost her thimble and that of
her mother. Thou hast eaten my apple and that of my cousin,
u My watch is better than that of my cousin (fem.). I have
received your letter and that of your brother. He whom you
have sent, has shown this letter to my father. KMj son is not
the one for whom you have made that coat^^ This man is the
one of whom we have spoken.j^This steel is harder than that
of thy friend.
\
49.
Mm. §einrt(^, Henry; ?uife, Louisa; 2)eutfd^Iattb, Germany;
Gen. Qexnxm \ Henry '^^ ^"^'^^^ | 1.0^^' ^^«tf*^^«^«' ^^ Germany;
JDat, §emn(^, to Henry; ![?uifen, to Louisa; ©eutfd^tanb, to Germany;
Ace ^Z\nxx(i)f Henry; 2m\t or ^uifeu^Louisa; 2)eutf(i^lanb, Germany.
SBUl^elin, WiUiam; ^pauim^ Spain;
3ol^ann, John; 3tatten, Italy;
(Smilie, Emily; ^reu^en, Prussia;
Sol^anne, Jane; Sfluglanb, Russia;
grantretd^, France; SSteit, Vienna;
gel^t, goes; lt)ol)nt, lives;
5Ste ^etgt betlt ^Better ? what is your cousin's name ? what is your cousin called ?
S)er §Ut §etnrtd)g or §etnrid^8 §Ut, the hat of Henry, Henry's hat.
^bltt, Cologne;
^riiffel, Brussels;
!Bt)on, Lyons;
§au^tftabt, capital;
^atfer, emperor;
\)t\^t, is called.
Obs. — (1) Proper names of all descriptions take §, never e6, in thegeni-
U tive; those of females in e take n§. — The dative of proper names never takes
U e, but is generally like the nominative; those of females in e take ii.
ij (2) Proper names may be declined with the definite article, especially
I in the dative without a preceding preposition (bent §etnrt(^, to Henry). If so
i declined they do not take any ending (be§ §etnrt(^, ber ?mfe).
(3) Instead of the genitive of proper names denoting places, the prepo-
sition t)on with the dative is more frequent: ber ^onig uon ^veugen, the king
of Prussia (rarely: ber ^ontg $reu§enS).
— 29 —
(4) The English preposition to ox for before names of places if depending
on verbs of motion, is translated by na(^ with the dative. At before names
of places is translated by in with the dative. — Names of countries and cities
are of neuter gender.
3)Jetn Sruber ^eipt ^einrti^ unb meine ©(^mefter ^ei^t 8uife,
©er abater 3Sin}e(m^ ift angefommcu. 3^ie SJiutter gutfen^ i[t abge^
reift l^ubmig^ Cnfcl ift fet)r reid), (Sutilien^ §ut ift fef)r \i)m.
§aben Sie biefeu §unb Don ^einrii^ ober Don gerbinanb er^Iten ?
9lmalte ^at bent .^o^ann i^re geber geltef)en. -^art ^at ber (Smilie
cine ©tnme gegeben. . ®et)ort biefer ®arten bent SnbiDig ober ber
Caroline ? SBo ift 3BiIf)eIm? gr ift tnit tarl nnb 3fofe^3^ an^ge^
gangen. SSSo^nt S^r Dnfel in «rnffel ober in ^ari^? ®e^t 3^r
SSetter nacf) SBien ober nacf) 53erlin? -3ft 'ipari^ grower ate St)on?
3ft 3^^^ grennb Don So(n ober Don :93erlin ? SBie ^ei^t bein SftadE)^
bar? (Sr l^ei^t ®ant|)fon. SBie ^et^t bie §anptftabt Don grant
reid)? 3Ber ift ^onig Don ^ren^en? 2Bie |ei^t bie fionigin Don
gngtanb? Berlin ift bie gro^te ©tabt (city) Don ©entfc^tanb,
^eter^bnrg ift bie §anptftabt be^ taifer^ Don ^Rn^lanb. !Der tonig
Don @panien ift ein @oI)n SSictor Smannete* §aft bn Smilien meine
U^r gelie^en ? . ^i) ^abe eine ©Inme Don 3lmalien erf)alten*
50.
"^ My cousin's name is John. The daughter of our gardener
(fern.) is called Jane. Art thou^ Charles's or Ferdinand's
brother ? Where are Henry and Lewis ? They are in John's
room; they are gone out with William. (^Have you lent your
pen to Henry? Who has given this flower to Louisa? We
have received a letter of Lewis; he is at Cologne. The sister
of Charles is very small. ^Caroline's hat is too large. My
uncle hves in Vienna, and my cousin John in Paris. My friend
Reiley goes to Berlin; his brother William is arrived from
Holmdel. Have you seen John and Jane ?'^''*-" My garden is
larger than that of Emily. Louisa has (ift) gone out with
Jane. A-Henry has (ift) departed for Brussels with his friend
Joseph. What is your son's name ? VWhat is the capital of
Italy called? -^rWho is the king of Spain ?Jk Victor Emanuel is
the father of the king of Spain.
PART n.
51.
Plural. Norn, btc %x\&\t, the tables;
Gen. ber %\\i)t, of the tables;
Dat. ben S^ift^en, to the tables;
Ace. bte %\\^t, the tables.
Nom. 2)ie @tabt SBertin (not »on ^Berlin or ^Berling), the city of Berlin;
Gen, ber @tabt ^Berlin, of the city of Berlin etc.
Obs. — Most of the nouns that form their genitive in eS, and many fem-
inine nouns of one syllable, take the ending e for the plural. The radical
vowels a, Q, U and au of such nouns are changed in the plural into a, o, it,
du. The dative plural of all words ends in tt»
®te greunbe tneine^ 3Sater§ finb angelommen* !Die ®o^ne un[er^
9^acf)bar§ finb fe^r pei^ig* ®te ©tiil^Ie, xodi^t xoxx gefauft ^aben,
finb fe^r fd)on, §aben ®ie bie ©tcibte SBien nnb Berlin gefe^en?
Sari ^at bie §iite SBil^elm^ nnb gerbinanb^ gefnnben, 2rtein 33ater
l^at bie 53riefe -3I)re^ £)n!ete ni(^t er^alten^ J)ie ^ferbe finb nii|^
tidier ate bie §nnbe, ®ic $Kdgbe enre^ 5Rarf)bar§ finb fe^r flei^ig.
S)ie aierjte in biefer®tabt finb fe^r rei(^. SBem ^aben @ie bie
©tode meine^ Srnber^ gegeb.en? ©ie |)an^3tftabte ber Sonige t)on
©a^fen (Saxony) nnb ©aient (Bavaria) finb feljr fd^on. ^Diefer
©arten gefjort ben ©o^nen meine^ 5yjacf)bar^.
52.
Thy brother has bought the dogs of my neighbor. The
friends of Charles are ill. Have you seen the horses of our
uncle William ? The cities of Cologne and Strasbourg (®tra^^
bnrg) belong to the king of Prussia. )^ Where are the hats of
my sister Emily ? I have given your umbrella to the maid-
servants. ^ Tour brother is gone out with the sons of our
neighbor (fem.).>* I speak of Henry's and William's friends.
^ To whom have you sold the trees of my brother?
31 —
53.
S)er3o^»; the tooth; ber 9fttng, the ring;
ber gu6, the foot; .btc @an6, the goose;
bie §anb, the hand; -^ber ^^urm, the tower, steeple;
ber @d^ul^, the shoe; tDarm, warm; fait, cold;
ber @trUttH)f, the stocking; tt)t\% white.
Past Participles : gebrad^t, brought; getool^nt, resided; erobert, conquered.
Plural (of all genders).
N(m. biefe, these; jene, those; totidjt, which (what) or who;
Gen. btefer, of these; jeiier, of those; tnelc^er, of which (what), of whom;
Dot. btefen, to these; ' Jenett, to those; ireld^en, to which (what), to whom;
Ace. biefe, these; jeite, those; tceld^e, which (what), whom.
Obs. 1.— The plurals of the possessives are mctne, fetne, tl^rc (her), uitfere,
eure, i^rc (their), 3^re (your), being for all genders alike. They all are de-
clined like the plural biefe* All pronominal adjectives are placed in the
plural, if their governing nouns are of this number: her shoes, tl^rc @c!^ul)e;
our friends, imfere greutlbe; their tables, il^re S^ifd^e; your tables, ^l^rc Xi\(i)t
(eure Sifd^e),
2, The relative Itjeld^er is placed in the plural (tt)etd^c, etc.) if the an-
tecedent (No. 45, Obs. 1) is in that number: ble Xx\djt, toti^t @ie ge!auft
l^aben, the tables which (that) you have bought.
S)eine 3^^^^ f^^^ f^^^ ^^^% 3Jieine f^it^c finb fe^r fatt. 3^re
^anbe finb tDarm. §at ber ©c^u^mai^er metne @(^u^e gebrad^t?
SBer ^t meine ©triimpfe genommen ? 3Bo l^aben @te biefe ®dnfc
gefauft? §)aben @ie meine ^dume f(^on gefel}en? 3Son todd)tn
Sdumen fprec^en @ie (do you speak) ? 3Son ben S3dnnten, tnet(^e
i^ t)on bent ©drtner ber Sonigin ge!anft l^abe. Unfere grennbe finb
fc^on abgereift SBer ^t biefe Sriefe gef^rieben? SKein SSater ijat
feine ^ferbe nnb §nnbe t)erfauft. 9D?ein 5yja(f)bar l^at Sriefe uon
feinen @bl)nen er^alten, tne^e in -Berlin finb. §at .^entanb nteine *
9f{inge gefnnben ? 9^iemanb l^at beine Otinge gefef en. Sarf toivb t)on
feinen grennben geliebt. *
Charles and Henry have lost their canes. The shoemaker
has not made your shoes. Where have you bought these
tables and chairs ? yt'rom whom have you received these pen-
cils ? My feet are very small. My sister has lost her thimbles.
I have received these letters from my friends, l These steeples
<
1
— 32 —
are higher than those. These animals are very fine. These
servants are very lazy. AHave you already seen our hats and
our rings ? Your hands are very white. I have found these
rings in my uncle's garden. What steeples of Paris have you
seen from those mountains ?)C Of what cities do you speak?
I am speaking of the cities wnich the king of Prussia has con-
quered in France. My sons to whom you have sold your
horses, are departed for Berlin.ylThe cities in which we have
resided, are Berlin, Vienna, and Cologne.
55.
• Sing. Norn, oHer, atte, alleg, aH.
Plur, " atte; Gen. atter; Dat ollen; Ace. aUe. \
\cLtAjdtiu.Jic S)a§ ^tnb, the chUd; ^ \i(i% S)orf, the vniage; !
'^ ba« 33ild), the book; ^ ba3 iBlatt, the leaf;
bag §au§, the house; - 'tid^ !t!o(^, the hole;
ba§ 5BolE, the people; .^ ba6 §u^n, the chicken;
' bag ®(ag, the glass; ^ bag i8ttb, the picture; ^
' bag ^anb, the ribbon; , bag ^alb, the calf;
'- bag ?anb, the country; ber SSurm, the worm;
^- bag ^leib, the dress; ber SSalb, the forest;
- bag @d^Io6,* the castle; *- ber Mdxm, the man, the husband.
Obs. — All these nouns ar« exceptions from the general rule, and form
their plurals by adding tx, softening the radical vowel. Substantives ending
in t^um follow the same rule, as: ^rrtl^um, ^rrt^iitner (mistake). The
dative plur. adds lu
S)ieie §aufer finb f^o^er a(§ {ene. Qzwt ^anber finb fd^oner
al§ btefe. ©etne Silver finb nit^tt(f)er ate bte ^iicf)er 8mfen^.
!Die[e 3)Zutter ^at il}re ^inber t)erIoren. ®er ^onig I)at feine
Si^foffer Derfauft. 23on mem ^aben ®ie btefe ®(afer er^Iten?
9Ber ^at btefe Sfeiber gemai^t? ©iefer WtOiXm ift fe^r alt; er ^at
alle fetne 3^^^^ t)erIoren. ©iefe aSolfer finb mtf)t glittf lic^. §einric^
unb SBtIt)eIm ^aben alle t^re <93itrf)er t)erIoren. 3lIIe eure Sriefe finb
angefommen. ®er 33ater ift tntt alien fetnen Sinbern abgereift,
©tefe S)drfer finb fe^r fd^on. 33on tcelc^en ©orfern fpred^en @te ?
f)aben ©ie ben Stnbern be^ 5lad)bar§ etnen 9Soge( gegeben ? S23cr
^at atle biefe goiter in meinen 2:ifd) gema(i)t ?
* Final % if an ending is added to it, changes into ff , whenever the vowel
preceding it is short.
I
-~ 88 —
56.
K
Where are your children? My children are gone out.
Who has bought all these ribbons ? Henrietta has lost all her
books. We have seen all your houses. <Have you also seen
the castles of the king? This tree has lost all its leaves. My
neighbor has sold all his chickens. j^\ have found this book in
all countries and cities which I have seen. Charles has written
letters to all his friends. I have the pictures of all my children.
"^ The men who have dined with your friend, have (finb) already
departed. ^\ have spoken with these men of the books which
you have written.
6t.
f)er ©ttefet, the boot; tie @abel, the fork;
ber @ptegel, the mirror; ber @(^nabel, the beak;
ber Soffel, the spoon; \iQA 2)Zdbc^en, the girl;
bie ^^x'^tX, the needle, pin; ber 3taUaner, the Italian.
®ie tt)oi)nen, they live; fte ge^oren, they belong.
\
Obs. — (1) Masculine and neuter nouns in er, et, en add no endings in
nominative, genitive and accusative plural, but those in er and el add, as i
usual. It in the dative, and some of them, as iBruber, ^ater, ©d^ttabel, i I
SSoget, ©arten, ^Ipfel, soften their radical vowels.— (2) Feminine nouns in er- \ I j
and el add n in every case of the plural, except bie 9}^iitter and bie 2^bc^ter,
which take n in the dative only.
T)ie ©djueiber mtb @rf)u^tna(J)er in btefer ©tabt finb alte reid).
®iefe (gngtanber [inb jefjr flei^ig. 9)Jeine ^riiber finb alte fran!.
§aben Sie meine ©(^tDeftern gefefjen?^ 2i3o ^ben @te btefe goffet,
93lefier nnb Oabein gelanft? ®ie genfter ^\)xt^ 3immer^' finb off en.
SBir t)aben btefe SSoget in ben SBalbern gefnnben. ©ie 3:tger finb fe^r
ftait ©tefe a}Jab(^en finb fe^r glitdU^. ®inb metne STod^ter an^*
gegangen? @inb meine ^tatner nt(^t fef)r f(^on? §at i^re STante
alle biefe @^3tegel gefanft? SBer ^at bie ^nd)er nnb gebern biefe^
3)tabd}en^ genontnten? iffiem geI)oren btefe ®arten nnb |)cinfer?
Snife nnb §enrtette ^ben t^re 9tabeln t)erIoren. 35er @d)n^ma(^er
^at 5^re ©c^it^e nnb ©ttef et nod) ntd)t gebrat^t. ^Vixt 3)iat\ner finb
■Stdtciner. ©tefe ©cirten gefjoren metnen Sriibern. ^6) \^^^t in
biefcn 3itttntevn gemol)nt.
— 34 —
58.
-^ The shoemaker has brought your shoes and boots. The
houses of this village are all very fine. Bring us (Srtngen ®ie
un^) the spoons, forks, and knives. - Where have you bought
these needles ? Your brothers and sisters are arrived. Our.
mothers have seen the gardens of the king.- ' My sons have
bought the mirrors of my neighbor. Horses are bigger than
tigers. T These Italians live in the city of Berlins The beaks
of those birds are long.
69.
©ins (etn) one; fiinf^e^n, fifteen;
gtDei, two; feci^^e^n, sixteen;
bret, three; fiebge^It, seventeen;
tjier, four; adjt^t^n, eighteen;
fiinf, five; neunje^n, nineteen;
fcd^g, six; 3lt)an;;ig, twenty;
fteben, seven; tie 5lufgabe, the lesson, exercise;
adjt, eight; *ba8 3al^r, the year;
neun, nine; tie SKod^e, the week;
gel^n, ten; *ber Tlonat, the month (pi. e);
elf, eleven; *ber XaQ, the day;
gnjolf, twelve; bte @tunbe, the hour;
bretje^n, thirteen; ber ^nabe, the boy;
Oterge^n, fourteen; feit, since, ago (governs the dative).
Obs. — (1) Substantives of whatever gender, ending in e, (except a
few neuters) take n in all cases of the plural, and never soften their
radical vowels. — (2) The English there is is rendered by e8 ift, and there are by
eg jinb, if there has no local meaning, and is merely expletive. If e§ i\t, t^ ftnb,
do not begin the sentence and are preceded by words other than conjunctions,
the pronoun e§ is omitted, — (3) The form etltS (one) is only used in numeration,
or when ojie refers to a neuter noun mentioned before. Else it takes the form
/ etn, etne, tin, and is declined exactly like the indefinite article,
Y^ Qn imferm §aufe finb t)terje^n 3tomer. ^'n biefem 3ttnmer
finb gmei Zx\i)t unb gmotf @tit{)Ie. Unfer 9tacl)bar f)at fiinf Stnber:
brei 8of)ne unb jiDei ioditer. 2Bir l^aben Dter ^a^en unb brei
§nnbe. Qn enrem ®arten finb fiinfje^n 53aume. !©a^ Qoi^x ^ai
gmolf 2)?onate; ber SD^onat ^at t)ier S93odE)en; bie SBod^e I}at fieben
Stage. Qd) ^abe Don meinem SSater fed)^ Slepfetf unb ad^t Sirfien
* Masculine and neuter nouns, not ending in e, which do not soften the
radical vowel, are marked with an asterisk.
t If the softened vowel is a capital, the softening is generally indicated
by an e, added to it.
— 35 —
txijalkn. Tlcin Dn!el t)at meiner @d)tt)eftcr etn ijebcrmeffer unb
jmanjig gebern gegeben, §aft bu fdt)on atle betne 2luf gaben gemact)! ?
3=01)01^ ijat nod) nti^t feine 3luf gaben gema(J)t. ^aben ©ie no(^ ntt^t
gefpeift? 3^rf) ^abe [fi^on] feit brei ©tunben gef^^etft 3ft Qijv
3Sater uoc^ ntrf)t angefommen? ®r tft [fc^on] feit gtDei S£agcn ange^
fommen. 2Ketn Onfet f^at feit a(f)t Jagen ni(i)t^ gegeffen. SUiein
Sriiber ift neun Qai^xt att, aber meine @d|tt)efter ift no(^ nii^t fieben
3at)re alt.
.60.
T^ My father has three houses and two gardens. This man has
five boys and four daughters. My friend has seven sisters. We
have received six letters. In this town there are twenty shoe-
makers. My cousins (fem.) have bought two cats. -/-My cousin
is seventeen years and two months old. My mother has bought
six knives, twelve forks, and eighteen spoons. Our joiner has
made three tables and ten chairs. -rWe have received this
week fifteen chickens and three calves. William has eaten five
apples and four pears. + Henry arrived (is arrived) three days
ago. My uncle departed (is departed) a year ago.-f- Charles
and Ferdinand have made six exercises. There are two holes
in this door.-i-In this town there is one physician. The gardener
has given three flowers to my children. I have seen one of
your sisters.-r This house belongs to one of my friends.
61.
*2)a8 ^rot, the bread S3rot, bread, some bread, any bread;
baS 5^^if<^/ *^® meat; S^^^f^f meat, some meat, any meat;
bte ^epfel, the apples; ^e!|)fet, apples, some apples, any apples.
S)er SSetn, the wine; tie ^trfd^c, the cherry;
ba§ iBier, the beer; bte ^flaume, the plum;
*ha^ Saffer, the water; bie S^tnte, the ink;
bag ©emiijc, the vegetables; bie (Bnppt, the soup;
ber 3ucfer, the sugar; tnatt ftnbet, one finds, they find;
ber ^affee, the coffee; getrun!en, drunk (participle);
geben @te mtr, give me; er tnad)t, he makes;
tDodeu <Ste? will you [have] , do you want ? gefatttgft, if you please.
Si} f)abe Srot unb gleifd) gegeffen. SBir l^aben Sirfd^en unb
^flaumen gefauft. aWein ©ruber ^at aOSein getrunfen unb t^r ^abt
53ier unb SBaffer getrunfen. T)er ©d)uf)ma(i)er mad^t ®tf)u^e unb
— 36 —
©tiefel. T)tv ZWzx ntad^t Jtf^e imb ®tu^Ie. SKan finbet bei
btefem ^aufmann ^iid^er, x^t\>txnr SEinte unb ©leiftifte. ®eben@tc^
mir (Snppt unb ©emilfe. |)ter ift SBem unb SBafjer, unb ba ift
^affee unb Wifi). ^aben @te and) ^ucfer? SBir fjaben ajieffer unb
©abein, Slaffen unb ©Ictfer gefauft. ® er ©drtner ^at 8utfen ^irfdjen
unb JBtumen gegeben. §aben @te fd^on Saffee getrunfen? 2Jian
finbet in jenem §aufe (Spiegel, 9tegenf(J)irnte, -Sdnber, ginger^iite
unb Dtabeln. Wfltim greunbin {)at tjon i^rem Dnfet ®rnen unb
^flaumen erf)alten. Sir l^aben gotoen, STiger, ^a^en unb §unbe
gefe^en. ^n biefer @tabt finb ®rf)neiber unb ©c^u^mad^er, tueld^e
fe^r reid^ finb. 3BoIten @ie (Snppt ober ®emUfe ? ®eben @te mir
gefdlligft gteifcf) unb ©rot.
62.
-j- Will jou [have] some wine or some beer, some milk or some
water ? Give me, if you please, some soup, vegetables, meat,
and bread. Where does one find (finds one) ink and pens ?
Have you children ?^ Has 3^our father bought trees or flowers ?
My brother has books and friends, .^^ere is cofiee and sugar.
My neigbor has birds, dogs, and horses. jsWe are speaking of
towns and villages, of houses and gardens. What have you
done ?v. We have done our lessons; we have written letters.
We have eaten apples and plums, and we have drunk some
wine and beer.SlDo you want these spoons or those ? Have
you sold any wine to my brothers ? XHave you bought any
cherries of my brothers?
63.
SBenig, little, few; ha^ Obfi, tie gru(^t, the fruit;
t)tel, much; tjtele, many; bag @elb, the money;
genug, enough; ber ^feffer, the pepper;
nte^r, more; bag ^(lih the salt;
tt>entger, less, fewer; ber ®enf, the mustard;
tt)te? how? ber S^lenfd), man (pi. bie 9}Jenf(i|cn).
Obs. — (1) There is and there are are often translated by eg gtbt (literally:
it gives), instead of eg tft and eg jtnb, both for singular and plural nouns.
Both expressions differ only slightly. Tiie noun, following eg gtbt, is placed
in the accusative, and the pronoun eg in this connection can never be omit- j
ted. — (2) SKenig, tX)eniger, Uiel may be left imdeclined in most instances; J
— 37 —
but mtljV is never declined.— (3) The English man is rendered either 'Sflanxi
or SD^enfd). The word iD^atttt is confined to the adult male sex, while 3iRenfd)
means a human being in general.
|)einrid^ l^at Diet ®elb; er ^at me^r ®etb aUxdj. ®eben ©iemir
ein iDenig gleifdj. Qd) t)abe genug ^rot. ©u ^aft ju Dtel ©alj
unb ^feffer. SBir ^aben meniger Dbft al^ i^r. guife t)at mentger
gebern a(^ §enriette* Sari l)at me^r 3lufgaben gema(i)t al^ gubiDig.
§aft bit fo t)te{ ®etb ate mein ^ruber? g^ gtbt tt)enig SKenfc^en,
mldjz jufrieben finb* ®eben @ie §enrietten ni(f)t 3U t)iel @enf!
3Kein ^ruber ^at ju Dtel SBein getruuten. ©iefer SJJann I)at Diele
53(umen. 2Ste t)ie(e $unbe \)at Qi^v SSater? g^ gibt biefe^ S^afjr
tDeutg Strf(^en, aber t)tel ^flaumen. 3)2ein greunb ^at biefe SBod^e
me^r ©riefe erl)a(ten ate \d). §at bein SSater fo Dtete Suiter ate
mein Dnfet ? ®eben @ie mtr gefattigft ein menig 3:inte. SBoIIen
©ie no^ (any) mel^r? 3^cf) ^abe genug. '®ibt e^ nid)tt)iel ®emiife
in biefent 8anbe ?
64.
-i^ There is much fruit this year. Our gardener has many-
trees and flowers. -/-Will you have a little meat or some'
vegetables ? Have you mustard enough ?4^ 1 have salt and
pepper enough. Our neighbor has much money; he is very rich.
Give a littlef wine to thfs woman, -f This man has few friends,
but he has many dogs and cats. There are many birds in this
forest. 4- How many physicians are there in your town ? Have
you as many apples and pears as we ? -HWe have not so many
as youj but we have more plums and cherries than you. Charles
has fewer friends than Henry vf-This tree has fewer leaves than
that one. There are (finb) too many chairs in this room.^-Is
(gibt) there more than one physician in this town ?.j. How few
men are there that are contented !
65.
3)a§ @tM, the piece; *bag S)u1^enb, the dozen;
bte glafd^e, the bottle; ber ^orb, the basket;
bte Xaffe, the cup; bte I^etnlt)anb, thehnen;
t Little is translated by ftein, if it is opposed to great or large; but by
tDeuig, if opposed to much.
X
— 38 —
'^'Qa% $funb, the pound; \i(i^ S^afd^Ctttud^^the pocket-handkerchief;
tie ©tte, the yard, ell; *ber §anbfd^u^, the glove;
^'tid^ ^aar, the pah-; baS Sotl^, the (half) ounce;
Jl ber 3^^^ *li^ i^cl^J ber ^dfe, the cheese;
'iiCi^ §emb, the shirt; ber ©d^itlten, the ham.
bie §algbtnbe, the cravat;
Obs.— The words ^funb, Sotl^, $aar, ©ui^enb, %Vi% 3ott and some other
masculine and neuter nouns, when used as units of measurement, weight and
computation are not declined. The preposition of, following any noun denot-
ing measure, etc. is not expressed in German.
2)ieine abutter I)at ber §enriette brei ^mx §anbf(J)u^e, \t6)^
^aar @trum|)fe, gtoet ©u^enb ^emben unb einen iorb Sirfd^en ge-
fd^idt Qn biefem goffer finb je^n @IIen Seimuanb, t)ter Safc^en^
titd^er unb fei^^ §atebinben, ^ein Sruber ^at jmet *i|3aar @cf)u^e
unb ein ^^aar ©tiefel getauft. SBir ^aben bem greunbe unfer^
DuM^ 3it)an3tg ^fimb 3i^tfer unb jetju gtafc^en SBetn gef(f)i(ft.
®eben @ie ntir ein ©titd ^df e, etue gtafd^e 53ier unb ein trenig @enf.
Q^ l)abe tm ®Ia§ 2Beiu getrunfen unb tin ®titcE ©djinten gegeffen.
aSir ^aben bei unferer greunbin eine 2:affe taffee getrunfen. ®eben
®ie mir ein ®(a^ Saffer unb ein @tii(f 3^^^^- SK^ine ©dE)n)efter
\)cA ixotx ^funb ^irfc^en unb zxw ^^funb "ipflaumen getauft. 2Bir
^aben ein ©u^enb ©tU^Ie bei bem 3:ifd()(er unfer^ Dn!ete gefauft.
^i) f)abe Don bem ®drtner einen ^orb :93Iumen er^dten. ©iefeg
§au^ ift stDanjig gu^ ^o(^.
66.
^- The shoemaker has made a pair of shoes for Louisa and two
pair of boots for William. We have drunk two glasses of wine
and three glasses of beer. ^ Give me a bottle of water and aj
little meat and bread. Will you have a piece of ham or cheese ? }
-rMy aunt has bought a dozen of cravats^ two dozen of shirts, I
and ten pair of gloves and stockings. How many shirts have!
you? '^ 1 have three dozen.J^ This linen is very fine; how manyj
yards have you bought ? I have bought twenty yards. Thal^
(ba6) is not enough for ten shirts. ---My uncle has given to
Henry a penknife, twenty pens, two cravats, and a pair of
'gloves, r Ferdinand has bought a pound of plums, six ounced
of coffee, and two yards of ribbon. \WilJ you have a cup ol
— 39 —
coffee or a glass of wine ? Give me, if you please,
of water*- My brother is six feet three inchy^s high.
WjO^XjJrt^^' ^
I
6Y.
3eber, {ebe, jebee, every, each; bie ^uget, the bullet;
fd^ted^t, bad; bie greutibin, the (female) friend;
pbfd}, pretty; ber l^e^rer, the teacher;
' tobt, dead; bcr SBeg, the way, the road;
berii^mt, renowned; ber ©ncjlcinber, the Englishman;
tt)etfe, wise; ba^ li^ebeu, the life;
golben, golden, gold (adj,); *ba§ @(^i(ffal, the fate;
filbern, silver (adj.); ha^ Tl'dbdjtn, the girl;
fuq, short, brief; ha^ X% that is.
Obs. 1. — Predicative adjectives take no endings of declension: ber
Tlann ift gut.
2. Adjectives not predicative (that is connected with a noun expressed
or understood) must take certain endings of declension either according to the
WEAK or according to the strong scheme of declension.
3. The STRONG scheme of declension is the one by which the definite ar-
ticle and the determinatives (biefer, jener, jeber, treld^er) are declined. It
consists of the endings er, e, eg, em, en.
4. The WEAK scheme consists of the endings e and en only: e for the
nominative sing, of all genders and the accusative sing, feminine and neuter;
en for all the other cases.
5. The WEAK declension is used whenever any adjective is preceded by
the definite article, or by a determina-tive (biefer, etc.).
-r
Nom. Sing, ber(btefcr) gute 9Jiann; ba§ (btefeg) gute ^inb;
Gen. " beg (btefeg) guten 9Jlanne«, etc. \
Mm, Plur. bie guten Wlaxmtx, etc.
I
HP^h greunb Derloren. ^'n Jeber @tabt gibt e^ ettien Sltjt. [Set]
gute §etnrtd) ift Irani [®ie] Keine (So|3^te ift fe^r pbfd). ®a^
arme fiinb ^at feine 2Jfutter t)ertoren. ®a^ ift ber ^oc^fte Saum in
nnfenn (Sarten. gifette ift bie flei^igfte tjonf nnfern 9}?agben. ©ie^
fer retire Snglcinber n)o^nt bei^neinem Dntet. SJBo I)aben @ie biefe
gotbene 9^abel gefnnben ? 2Bem ge^ort biefe^ gro^e §an^ nnb jener
fd)one ©arten ? |)einrid) ift ntit [bent] fleinen ^arl an^gegangen.
Wix ^aben geftern bei ber gnten ©milie ^irf(^en gegeffen. SBer
tt3ol)nt in biefem fd)onen ©t^Ioffe? SBie \)tx^i biefe f(i)one ©Inme?
t Of after superlatives may be expressed by the genitive or the preposi-
tion uou.
— 40 —
So ^abcn ®ie biefen fd^tet^ten aBein unb biefeS fc^Ie(f)te Srot gefauft?
. ®er l^otue unb ber S^iger finb bie ftdrfften SE^iere, ®a^ finb bie glit*
•*r Iid)ften S^age meine^ \?eben^. ®eben ©ie biefem armen 3)ianne ein
'n)emg SSein! S)er 3Sater biefe^ !(einen aWdbd^en^ ift tobt. T)a^ ift
ba^ @d)i(f fal jebe^ gro^en 93?anne^. ®ie fi^onen ©orfer jene^ 2anbe^
finb berii^mt. (Sr l)at meutem greuube bie befteu 3^^^^^' i^^ feinem
^aufe gegeben. ©ie ®ol)ne ber meifeften SSdter finb oft bumm (dull).
68.
>^ Not every king is great and wise. Every year has twelve
months^ and every week seven days. We have seen books and
pictures in each room. ^ The diligent scholar is loved by every
teacher. The new house of my brother is sold. I have read
the long letter of your friend. \ He has spoken of the sad fate
of this young man. The father of (the) little Henry is dead.
The daughter of this old woman is sick. '^ Give this flower to
my young friend (male and female). Which hat have you
taken ?^ I have taken my white hat. Which watch and which
ring have you sold ? We have sold the silver watch and the
gold ringX The short roads are not always the best.* Are
there any lions and tigers in the cold countries of the earth ?
The dresses of these young girls are too long. >(rhe fates of the
greatest men are often sad.'^ I have resided in the best houses
of the city.
69.
^etn, feine, fein, no (adj.); !ein greunb, no friend;
these are, bag (bieg jinb); the business, bag ©efc^aft.
Obs. 1. — If adjectives are preceded by the nominative sing, or the neutei
accusative sing, of ein, fein or of any possessive (tnein, beln, uufer, etc.),
they are declined after the strong declension, and take the endings of Diefct,
btefe, biefc^: mein guter 55ater, unfer guteg ^inb.
2. If adjectives are preceded by any other case of etn, !ein, mein, et€,
they are declined after the weak declension: metneg gnten ^aterg, etc.
Unfer ©artner ift ein gnter 9)iann. @nre ©iirtne'rin ift eine gnt
gran, gmilie ift ein fel)r gnte^ Sinb. SBir I)aben einen gnten 9?at(
unb eine gnte a)Mter. §einric^ t)at ein fc^one^ "iPferb unb etnej
* Adjectives whosQ nouns are understood, must be translated as if ti
nouns were expressed.
— 41 —
f(^anen §unb. gitife I)at gro^e S'd^m, aber ein^ ffetne |)anb unb
einen tleinen gu^. gerbinanb ift mtt ntetnem iitngeren Sruber au^ge*
gangen. ^enriette ift mtt meiner atteren @d)tDefter abgereift ®eben
8te bieje^ Srot einem armen ^inbe! S)tefe^ ^^ebernteffer ge^ort
einem {ungeu Wlannt, ber bei unferm 9lact)bar tno^nt. Submig ift ber
@o^n eine^ rei(i)en ^aufmann^. Sffiir l^aben feinen guten SBein unb
tein gute^ Srot. SEer ijat meine filberne U^r unb meinen golbenen
9?ing genommen ? SBir l^aben unfern beften greunb t)er(oreu, Sure
Heinen Siuber finb fe^r gut. S^ gibt biefe^ Qa^v feine guten 0r*=
fcf)en. ayjein Dufel ^at feine fd^onften ^ferbe t)erfauft. Sift bu mit
beinen neuen ©tiefeln jufrieben?- §aft bu fd^on don unfern guten
^flaumen gegeffen ? Qd) ^abe ein beffere^ *iPferb unb einen grd^eren
§unb, ate @ie. Sart ift ein ^iibf^erer tnabe afe ^einrid^.
'^Charles is a good boy. Emily is a pretty girl. That is a
happy mother. That is a very good wine. Where is my little
Henry, my good Louisa? We have a very rich uncle. William
has an old father^^ Irbnis a useful metal H^ The dog is aVfaith-
ful animal. I have received a new umbrella and a gold watch.
My neighbor has done much business (plural in German) this
year. -f-Oive this bottle of wine to a poor man or to a poor
woman. I have no friend in this town.4rHave you ng good
pens for this child ?'Y*Our best friends are dead. This joiner
makes no goodv^aii:^.>^hese are the tables and books of our
youngest children^A horse is a more useful animal than a dog.
Thou hast written a longer letter than I.
n.
^iBortreffUcf), excellent; *^ ber gteig, the diligence;
X0% red; bie @tatue, the statue;
xUeben^tDtirbig, amiable; \ha^ 35ergnugcn, the pleasure;
ber 99Zarmor, the marble; \)a^ ^^apm, the paper;
bie @efal)r, the danger; v gerettet (past part.), saved.
Obs.— If the adjective is not preceded by an article or any other deter-
minative word, it is inflected after the strong declension.
§ier ift guter @cE)infen, gute ©uppe unb gute§ <93rob, ^aben
©ie gute^ 'ipapier unb. gute Jtnte? mix ^aben f(^tedf)ten 3Bein unb
gute^ SBaffer getrunfen. Unfer ©artner ijat t)ortreff(icf)e^ Dbft
— 42 —
Unferc 9Kagb f)at guten ®enf, aber f(f)(e^ten ^feffer gefauft. ©biiarb
l^at gute greunbe unb uu^tid^e 53ud)er. ajjein Onfel f)at fi^one ®dr^
ten unb gro^e §aufer. (guer 9ta(f)bar ijat treue §unbe. .^o^ann,
gebcn ®ie mtr etn ®Ia^ 2Baffer ! SBoHen @te fatted ober marme^
aSaffer ? 2Keinc ©^mefter ^at ein ^aar pbf^e §anbfd)u^e gefauft.
^art^ unb gonbon [tub f^one @tabte. ^einrtd^ |at ein *ipaar neue
©c^u^e*er^alten, Siebe ©t^mefter ! Qii) ^abe beinen -Srief nttt gro^em
ajergnugen gefefen. tart ^at feme Slufgabe mtt rotter SEtnte ge*
fd^rieben.
12.
-Jr Have you any good mustard ? We have good bread and
good meat. Your gardener has very fine flowers. These
children have fine dresses. vWe have faithful friends, amiable
brothers, and useful books. Give me some better cheese and
better bread. VAt (bet) this merchant's one finds pretty gloves,
fine penknives, and good pens. Iron and silver are very use-
ful metals. -iYou have always excellent wine. My brother is
not gone out, he has too much business (plur.). Henry has
bought good paper and good ink. > We speak of good cofibe,
of excellent fruit, and new dresses. You have done your
lesson with great diligence. TPoor friend, how little money
have you made !• This statue is made of white marble. ^^He has
saved the life of his friend with great danger.
6-\iu>-^^'^"
Y3.
S)er, bte, ha^ erfte, the first; . ber, tie, \>a^ te^tc, the last;
ber, bte^ ba^ gtuette, the second; unartig, naughty;
htv, bte, bo§ brttte, the third; ber S^^eit, the part;
ber, bie, bog toierte, the fourth; ^ ber iBanb, the volume;
bcr, bit, bag ^imanjtgfte, the twentieth;^ nur, only; bie Piaffe, the class.
2)er tineotetfte ? what day of the month ? what (in order) ? *
ber erfte 3anuar, the first of January;
ber SJionat 9Jlai, the month of May.
Obs.— (1) The ordinals from 2 to 20 add te to the cardinals; from twenty
upwards they add fte. They decline weak, if preceded by the definite article
(2) Names of the months and the days of the week are masculine.
* If an ordinal numeral is expected in the answer.
1
— 43 —
©er iunge 3Jiann ift fe^r flei^ig; er ift ber erfte in ber 0affe.
f arl ift ber smeite; |)einricf) ift ber britte; G'o^ann ift ber oierte; [ber]
Heine Sil^efm ift ber fiinfte; $an( ift ber fei^^te ; gran? (Francis)
ift ber aii)te; (Suftat) ift ber neunte; [ber]nnartige Sbnarb ift ber elfte
unb [berjfanle gnbtnig ber te^te. 3^^i *ft ^^^ fitnfte 2:^eil Don ge^n.
gunf ift ber t)ierte ZijAl Don ^tDanjig, ©n S:ag ift ber fiebente
2:^eU einer SBoc^e.. !Den mieoielften ^aben mir (is it) ^eute? SBir
^aben ^ente ben breije^nten ober ben Diergefjnten. Q^t e^ nid)t ber
jman^igfte? SJiein 3Sater ift ben britten 5Iftai abgereift, nnb ben jetin^
ttn T)e5ember angefommen. §aben @ie ben erften nnb jmeiten
S3anb ? ^c^ ):}aU nnr ben erften.
U.
-f' Louisa is the first in the class; Pauline is the second; (the)
little Josephine is the third; Emily is the fifth; (the) pretty Sophy
(©opfiie) is the ninth; Jane is the fifteenth; (the) naughty Caro-
line is the last. Three is the sixth part of eighteen. A week is
the fqjarth part of a month; and a month is the twelfth part
of a year .4- What day of the month is it (have we) ? It is to-
day the eleventh or the twelfth.-*' We (are) departed on the
second of May and. arrived on the sixteenth. Which volume
have you taken ? Have you taken the third and the fourth ?
; I have only taken the third.
fcc. bcinc, )
tc. beintge, Y
V, e, e«, )
lb.
S)er, {hit, ba6) meinc, ) ber etc. 1
ber^ (bte, ha^) meintge, >■ mine; ber etc. beintge, [- thine;
meiner, nteine, meine^, ) beiner,
ber feine, etc., his; ber tl}re, etc., hers; ber unfere, unfrige, etc», ours;
ber eure, etc., (3l)re, 3^rige), yours; ber i^rc, etc., theirs. >
@d)tDer; difficult (hard), heavy; letd^t, easy (not difficult), light (not heavy);
ber (bag) $?o{)n (sing.), the wages (plur.).
Obs.— (1) Mine, thine, etc., if used predicatively (after bin, btjl, i% ftnb)
are rendered by ntetn, bein, etc., without article and ending: S)0§ §au8
ift metn, bie §aufer finb metn, the house is mine, the houses are mine.—
(2) 2)er meine, meintge; ber beine, etc., are used, if a noun, previously men-
tioned is understood: S)etn §aug ift groger, al8 ha^ meinc (mcinigc) or al8
meineS, These expressions are also used predicatively, but with peculiar
— 44 —
meanings (which may be orally indicated by the teacher). — (3) S)cr tlicinc,
bcr meimge, etc. decline weak: Gen. be« mcinen (meintgen); Plur. biemetnen
(meinigen), etc. 2Jieiner, beiner, etc., decline strong: Qen. meineS; DaU
meinem; Plur, meine.
X)iefe^Sucf) ift mem* S)tefe fj^bernfinb nidfitbetn. ©iefeU^rift
unfer, S)ein 33ater ift grower al^ ber metnigc. 3Keine 3Jiutter ift fleiner
al^ W beine. Unfer S3urf) ift niifelic^er al^ ba^ O^rige. 93?ein
(So^n ift nid^t fo alt aB ber bcinige. (Suer ^ferb ift iiinger al6 ba^
unfere. Unfere <©itd)er finb nUl^Iid)er at^ bie eurigen. SJiein 33ater
l^at feine U^r Derloren; ^einrii^ ^at au^ bie feinige tierloren. ajJeine
®(i)tt)efter ^at bie i^re t)er!auft. 2)?ein 9Sater ^at beineu Srief unb
ben meineu gelefen. 3)?eine iante l)at i^ren ®arten unb ben nnfrigen
t)er!auft. ^ai bein 53ruber meinen Stocf ober feinen genommen?
§at \?uife meinen gingert)ut ober it)ren gefnnben ? X)etne Slufgaben
finb leic^ter al^ bie meinigen. 3)iefe Sdume finb ^o^er at^ bie
unferen. ^n unferer ©tabt finb me^r Slergte ate in enrer. Sarte
Si(b ift gut; aber beine^ (bein^) ift tDortrefflid). a)Zein Sruber ift
grower, ate beiner. Unfere 3lufgabe ift fcfimerer ate eure. (^r ^at
meinem ©ruber me^r 2lepfet gegeben, ate beinem. SBir geben unferer
aJiagb l^o^eren 8o{)n, ate it)r ber eurigen.
76.
'^TDMs basket is mine; these gloves are ours. The city is
ours. My thimble is as fine as yours. Your umbrella is not
so large as mine. My son is more diligent than thine. My
friend has sold his house and mine. My sister has eaten
her apple and thine. -fHas Louisa taken my pen or hers; my
pencil or hers ? Henry has read my books and yours. Youi
sisters are younger than ours. We speak of our friend and of
yourSvA^ Is my room smaller than thine ? I have promised %
book to your son and to mine, to your daughter and to mine^
I speak of my tasks and of thine. This castle belongs to mj
uncle and to yours. VWhat wages are higher^ yours or mine
Are your last lessons harder or easier than ours ? Are th]
bullets heavier or lighter than his ? Emily's room is prettie]
than mine, but mine is larger than hers. -^ Are the wages oj
the Englishman higher than thine or those of the Italian ?
<^
— 45 —
Singular. Flural,
Nbm. er, he; jie, she; c^, it; ftc, they;
Ace. x\)n, him; jte, her; e«, it; fte, them.
3a, yes; nein, no (answering particle).
_^§^ For the use of the gender see No. 41.
|)aben ©ie meinen @to(J? ^^a, id) ^abe t^n. ^aben @ie meittc
Uf)r? 9^ein, id) ^abe fie ni^t. §aben @ie mein aWeffer ? ^^^ ^cibc
e^ nid}t. §aben ®ie meine ©c^u^e ? .^a; i(^ ^abe fie. S3o tft mein
|)unb ? 3(| ^abe i^n nid)t gefe^en. SBer f)at meine geber genommen ?
J)ein -Srnber ^at fie genommen. SBo ^aft bn biefe^ Jafc^entnd) ge^
fnnben? Qd) t)abe e^ in 3^^^^^ 3*^^^^ gefnnben. j)iefe 33oge(
finb fe^r fdjbn. 2Son tnem ^aft bn fie er^alten ? ®eine ©d^lrefter
ift feljr flei^ig; meine 9JJntter liebt fie fe^r. §aben @ie meinen
D^eim gefannt? Qd) ^be i^n nid)t gefannt. ©ie^ ift ein nii^Iic^e^
^nd); ^aben @ie e^ fd)on getefen? SBo ift mein ginger^nt? Qd)
f^aht if)n Q\}xtv ®d)tDefter gegeben; fie ijat i^n t)ertoren. §at ^^emanb
meine ®abel genommen ? Sari ^t fie genommen. 2Bem f)at ber
©artner atle biefe -33Inmen gefd)i(lt? @r ^at fie ^'^rer 3JJntter ge-
fd)i(f t. §aben ®ie biefe U^r fiir Qf}xm Srnber gefanft ? 9^ein, id)
l)aht fie nidjt fitr i^n gefanft. §aben ©ie eine fitr -3^re ©^mefter
gefanft? 5Jtcin, id) ^be feine U^r fitr fie gefanft.
78.
H Has the tailor brought my coat ? Yes, he has brought it.
Hast thou already done thy lesson ? I have not yet done it.
Have you seen my new room ?f No, I have not yet seen it.
Where hast thou bought these pretty rings ? I have bought them
in- Paris. I have received a letter from my aunt, have you
read it?'^^Have you already seen the king ?^ I. have not yet
seen him. You have a good pen; give it to my sister. Where
are your gloves ? I have lent them to your aunt. Where is
your umbrella? Give it to this child, f My aunt is dead; did
you know her ? What books have you there ? Have you read
them? Where is thy dog? My father has sold it. Have you
received any letters for your father ? No, I have received no
letters for him. '*Have you bought these books for your mother ?
No, I have not bought them for her.
— 46 —
T9.
Ferfect Thnse: \6) bin getoefen, I have been;
bu bift getDefen, thou hast been;
er ift gemejen, he has been;
mx finb gen)efen, we have been;
tl^r feib getrefen, you have been;
fie finb getnejen, they have been.
2)er §crr, the gentleman; ber SJJorgen, the morning;
bag grantein, the (unmarried) .lady; ein ^alber, eine l^albe, ein l^albeg,
bie !^ame, the lady (married or half a, one half of;
unmarried); 'llC^toiertel, quarter, (one) fourth of;
gnfammen, together; einmal, once;
l)eute, to-day; " gttJeimal, twice;
gliidltc^, happy, successful; breimat, three times;
lange (adv. of time), long, a long Diermal, four times;
time; mentals, nie, never
Obs.— (1) The nouns §err, grau, grdutein are used as titles and ad-
dresses (Mr., Sir, Madam, Mrs., Miss). Mr. and Sir are translated by §err;
Mrs. by ^vaVi;Madam by the French SDZabante, if a married lady is addressed.
In the address of an unmarried lady grcinlein is used. Miss is translated by
grantein. — (2) If §err is used before the names of persons spoken o/", it is de-
clined with or without the article; in the plural the article must always be
used, and mostly in the genitive singular.— (3) §err takes in all cases of the
singular n, and in all cases of the plural en. — (4) The words §err, gran,
grdnletn are used idiomatically, if relatives or friends of the person addressed
are spoken of without mentioning their names: 3^r §err greunb (your friend) ;
3br §err 33ater, ^rnber, @ol)n; 3^re gran Tlntttv; ^l^r grdntetn ©cf)n)efter,
(5) Of after fractions is generally not translated, the following noun, if
the numerator of the fraction is more than one, being placed in the plural :
brei tjtertel (SUen (but bret titertel $fnnb. See No. 65).
S3er ift l^ier gewefen? §err aJiotl ift I)ter gct^efen; cr ijat biefe^
SSnd) gebra^t.. Sift bu hti bem Sc^u^mac^er gewefen? ^cf) bin
l^eute bet S\}xtm @rf)U^macf)er gelDefen; er l}at Qi)vt ©ttefet |d)on g^
mac^t. SBo feib tt)r btefen 9Jiorgen gemefen? 933ir finb bei unfern
greunbe ^art geirefen, mefc^er fetjr franf ift. J)tefer §err ift bn
Qa\}Xt in SBien geiDefen, unb feine Sriiber finb fe{)r fange in Sonftan
tinopel gemefen. ©u biftntc^t fteifeig gemefen, bu ^aft betne Slufgabc
no^ ni(^t get|tad)t. 3^^ ^in geftern bei grau 9?ober gemefen; fie
eine fe^r tieben^tuitrbige !Dame. Sf^ grdufein gmifie oft in biefc
sStabt gewefen ? @ie ift fd^on breimal I)ier geujefen. ^aben ©i
— 47 ^
$erm (Bd)oU gefannt? Qi\ {)abe i^n in ©erltn ge!annt; njtr ftnb oft
3uf ammen au§gegangcn. SBte tange finb ®te in aJZabrib gemefen ?
3=d^ bin nur ein t)albe^ ^^^^l^^ ^^ geiDcfen, aber ii) bin brei t)iertel
^abre in ^ari^, nnb ein biertel 3^^^^^ in 2Bien gemefen. §aben ®ie
bie ^erren JloUd f(J)on gefe^en? S'a, 2)?abame, ic^ ^abe fie geftem
bei einem meiner grennbe gefe^en. Q\t meine ajjntter t)ier gemefen ?
9iein, [mein] grdulein; id) l)abe Qf)xt gran 3Kntter nic^t gefe£)en;
aber Q1)v §err aSater nnb O^r §err Srnber finb btefen ajjorgen ein*
mat ^ier gemefen,
^^ Has [there] been anybody in my room ? Yes, your son has
l3een there. ^ Has the tailor been here?^^No, he has not
yet been here. Hast thou been at the joiner's ? No, I have
not yet been there. We have many flowers; we have been in
the garden of Mr. NoUet.-f^ Have you also been at Mr. Moll's?
My brother has never been more contented than to-day; he
^ has received from his uncle a beautiful gold watch, and half a
dozen pocket-handkerchiefs. 3^How long have you been in
Paris ?-)-^Ve have been there six months. These gentlemen
have done much business (plur.); they have been very success-
ful. Are Messrs. N. already departed for Cologne ? -j-^hey are
departed this morning with their uncle; I have seen them at
Mrs. Sicard's. ) Has Miss Louisa been here to-day? No, Madam,
your sister has not been here; I have seen her three quarters
of an hour ago at your brother's [house]. Give me half a yard
of (Don) this linen. Have you ever known my father ?-t' Yes,
I have seen him three or four times at your sister's.
81.
Imperfect Tense: xdj trar, I was;
bu iDarft, thou wast;
er wax, he was;
ton ttjaren, we were;
tl^r rt)aret, you were;
fte iDaren, they were.
S^ematg, formerly; bie <^ule, the school; at«, when.
Obs. — When a clause begins with cl8, when, the verb is placed at the end
of the clause.
— 48 —
SBo tDarft bu biefen SDJorgcn? Q6) war 6cl mcinem SSetter, todi)tt
t)on granffurt angefommen ift. 3Kem ©ruber unb id) tDaren bd beu
nem 2Sater. Qijxt Zank toax fd)on abgereift. ^err aJioH mar e^e*
mate \tijv reic^; er {)at feit 3e^n ^a{)ren t)iel t)er{oren. 5Baren @tc
no(^ ni^t bet $errn 3)iab(t) ? ^d^ bin geftern ba gettjefen, aber er
tear au^gegangen. SBie alt mar -3^r §err ©ruber, a(^ er in ^bln
wax? (5r mar neunje^n ober jmanjig 3'a^re alt. SBir maren nid)t
jufammen; er mar in Soln unb ii) mar in ^Diiffelborf. DJieine
@c!^meftern maren fange in ©ritffel bei §errn SloUet. SBarum finb
®ie geftern nic^t gefommen? ^d) mar geftern !ranf. 3Baren biefc
§)erren immer fo reid^ ? §aben Sie immer fo mU greunbe ge^abt ?
Sarft bu biefen 2)Zorgen in [berj ®(f)ule? Qd) bin ^eute ni(f)t in [ber]
@(^u(e gemefen. ^d) mar in [ber] Stabt, al^ @ie geftern bei meinem
SSater maren.
82.
y I was formerly much happier; I was young and strong.
Wast thou always as contented as to-day? My father was
formerly very rich. My sisters were very ill yesterday. . How
old were you when you were in France ? I was fifteen years
and six months old. 4Was my room open when I was in school ?
No, but the windows were open. This girl was much prettier
when she was young. John and William were always your
friends. Were you not at my brother's when you were in
town ? Ll have known your father when you were still a child.
83.
Iipperfed Tense: td^ l^atte, I had; "
bu ^atteft, thou hadst;
er ^atte, he had;
tt)tr f)atten, we had;
il^r Ijattet, you had;
|te l^atten, they had.
2)ic (Sltern, the parents; je^t, now;
ber eine, the one; ber anbere, the other.
Ohs. — (Sin and anber, when not followed by a noun, decline weak or
STRONG, according to the rules for ordinary adjectives.
®u ^atteft geftern einen neuen §ut; ^aft bui^n terloren? ^ex
§ut, ben id) geftern ^atte, ge^ort mcinem ©ruber. Qijx |attet mU
-~ 49 —
fjreunbc, ate i^r noc^ {ung tt)aret; »arum l^abt il^r fcftt fo ttjemge ?
aBir ^aben me^r greunbe af^ i^r. SWein Dnfet l^at allc ^ferbe, bte
er e^emal^ ^atte, t)erfauft. ^6) ^atte jmei ©c^tDeftern; bic eine xoav
in SSien, bte anbere.tn Serlin; {)aft bu fie ge!onnt? Qi) l^abe bte*
jemge gefanitt, bte in Berlin war; l^atte fie nid^t jtt)et Sorfiter?
fatten @te ntt^t dier |)dufer in ber ©tabt? @ie ^aben 9?e(^t; aber
icf) t)abe jiuei bon btefen |)aufern oerlauft; i^ ^atte itt bem eiiten ge^
mo^nt, unb meitt ©ruber in bem anbern.
84.
^ I had formerly little money; but I am now richer than you.
You were (had in German. See No. 17) wrong, my dear friend;
but your brothers were right. Nobody had any money for my
brother when he was in Cologne. Did you have (had you) your
lessons when you were yesterday in school ? No, I was sick; but
my brother had all his lessons. Hadst thou still thy parents when
thou wast in Boston ? Where had you your books when you
were in the house of your sister ? JrMy brother had them in his
room. We had few friends when we were in Berlin, but we
had many when we were in Cologne . Where are the little
dogs which Miss Emily had when she was at your mother^s ?
She has sold the one, and the other is dead. How many
servants had you when you were in France ? What had you
in your hands when you were in your room?^I had a piece
of sugar in the one hand, and two little bullets in the other.
85.
Nbm. x6), I; bit, thou; er, he; . jtc, she; e8, it;
Vat. tntr, tome; hiv, to thee; il^m, to him; tl^r, to her; t^m, to it.
Infinitives: laufen, to buy; tl^un^f to do;
Derfaufen, to seU; mad^en^f to make, to do;
geben, to give; lefcn, to read;
lei^en, to lend; fe^cn, to see;
fd^retben, to write.
SBad^fam, watchful; bic Qdt, the time;
Suft l)aben, to have a mind; bic @iitc, the kindness.
*bcr Xtfaltx, the dollar;
'^6) !ann, I can; bu faniifl, thou canst; cr tatin, he can; ttjir lotntcn, we
can; t^r !onnt, you can; fte fonncn, they can. In/in.: fonncn, to be able.
t 2}2ad)cn and t^Uti are thus distinguished in German: t^un is to act for
any purpose; madden, to act for the productiou of a work,
— 60 —
Ob8.~(1) All German infinitives end inn (mostly in en).— (2) English
infinitives with to must generally be rendered by German infinitives with gu.
If the English infinitives lose their sign to, the German corresponding infini-
tive is generally employed without ju: ic^ fann lefen, lean read; x^ l^abe gu
t^un, / have to do. — (3) The German infinitive is placed last in the ordinary
sentence, but so that it precedes the past participle, if there is one.
(4) The English objective case (me, thee, him, etc.) must be translated
by the German dative, if we may supply the preposition to : Give me (to me)
your pen, geben @ie mix 3^re geber. — (5) Personal pronouns in the accusa-
tive or dative (without prepositions), must generally be placed before the
accusative or dative of substantives, and before all other adjuncts of the verb.
^annft bu mir bicfe^ 48u^ let^en ? Qd) fann bir biefe^ SSmi)
ntc^t Ieif)en; e^ gel^ort metnem 3Setter |)einri(f). SSJer tann btefen
Srief tefen? Qd) fann i^n lefen; er ift fe^r gnt gefdirieben, SBir
fonnen biefen 2Korgen nt(f)t fc^reiben, SBarnm fdnnt i^r ntc^t ]d)xeu
ben ? SBir ^aben feme Jinte, fonnen ©ie meinem Srnber Qijxt Uf)r
lei^en ? Sd) fann t^m melne U^r ni(f)t leif)en, id) i^aU fie bem^errn ©.
Derfanft. |)aben @te nteiner (3(f)tt)efter etne geber gegeben? Qd) f)abe
xi)x feme geber gegeben, §aben ®ie Snft, biefen §nnb ^n f anfen ? Qd)
l^abe feine 8nft i^n jn f anfen; er ift nid)t tnadifam. §at Qi)x Srnber
l^ente nirf)t^ ^n t^nn ? ®r ^at brei ©riefe ^n f^reiben. Sir ^aben
no^ jmei 3lnfgaben jn mad)en. Qd) ^atte geftern t>a^ SSergniigen,
Qljx grdntein (3cf)mefter jn fe^en. ^aben @ie ^tit, biefen ©rief jn
lefen ? 3^(1) ^abe je^t feine ^dt, i^n jn lefen, Sonnen @ie mir einen
SRegenfdjirm geben? Qd) fann Ql^ncn f einen geben, id) l^abe nnr
einen. Q\jx §err Srnber ^t bie ®iite, mir ben feinigen jn tei^en.
©inb ®ie geftern bei meiner Zantt gemefen ? 9^ein, ic^ toax geftern
nxd)t bei i^r; ic^ ^atte jn diele ®efd)afte.
86.
"^ Can you do that exercise? Yes, lean (do it); but my
brother cannot (can it not do). Will you (S&oUtn @ie) lend me*
your penknife ? I cannot lend thee my penknife; my sister has
taken it.V Have you given a pen to my cousin ? Yes, I have
given him one. Hast thou sold thy dog to my sister ? I have
not sold her my dog. Canst thou not lend me twenty dollars?
I cannot do it to-day. yWe can read this book. These gentle-
men cannot write their letters; they have no paper. Hasi
1
V^'
51
thou a mind to buy a pair of boots ? Has your brother a mind
to sell his ring ? Had you the kindness to give a glass of water
to this poor man? My friend had the pleasure to see his
parents. -^I had no time to read all these letters. My father
had the kindness to buy me a gold watch. Hast thou seen it ?
I have not yet seen itrf-Have you beeii with Ferdinand to-day?
I have been with him this morning.
SI.
Nam. tt)tr, we; i\)X (@te), you; ftc, they;
Bat. un«, to us; eu(^ (^l^nen), to you; il^nen, to them. '
Qtijtn, to go; fein, to be;
tommen, to come; ttjenn, if;
trinfeu, to drink; untro^t, unwell; nton, one;
effen, to eat; t^a^ Ungtiirf, the misfortune;
l^abett, to have; ba§ ^aar, the pair, the couple.
xdj toxU, I will; bu tnttljt, thou wilt; er tDtU, he wiH; toir itJoltett, we will;
i^r ttjollt, you will; jte tt)otten, the/ will. Inf.: ttJotten, to be willing.
Obs. — Clauses introduced by tnentl require the verb to be placed last in
the clause; the same as in relative sentences (No. 45).
Sitlft bu tntt mir ge^en? Qii) fann nt^t mit bir gefjen, id) ^abe
feine 3^it. 3^^^ ^iH ^i^ ^in fc^oite^ Sud^ lei^en, menn bu flei^ig bift
lann bein -©ruber l^eute ni(f)t fommen? (5r i)at feine guft 3U fommen;
er ift untDol)!. 3Bir molten {el|t unfere 2lufgaben madden. SBoIfen
@te etn ®Ia^ SBetn trinfen? 9^ein, aber ic^ wilt etn Stitd gleifc^
ober ^cife effen. 2BoHen ®te ein mentg @enf unb ©alj ? ^onnen
@te nn^ biejen Sanb tei^en? Qd) faun 3^^nen biefen -53anb nii^t
(ei^en, mein ^ruber tt)il( t|n ^aben. 2J?an lann nt(f)t ungludftrfier
fein, al^ biefer junge 3Jiann; er ^at feine gitern unb feine Srilber nnb
©ii)n)e[tern t)erIoren. 2Ber toiU biefen 2tpfel ? Qd) voiU t^n l^aben.
SBa^ iDoUt i^r ie^t t{)nn? SBir luoHen ein /i^aar ^riefe f(f)retben.
Qd) tDill end} eincn Sorb Sir[d)en geben, inenn it)r flei^ig fein tuoKt,
SBollen ©ie bie ®itte I)aben, mir eine 92abel gu geben ? ^c^ Ijcibe je^t
teine, id) tann S'^nen feine geben. §aben ®ie ^tit, mit un^ gu
ge^en ? Qd) ^abe feine 3^^^, mit 3^1)^^^ gn ge^cn.
88.
T What hast thou to do? I have nothing to do. Wilt thou
read this book ? Yes, I will read it. How is (SBa« mai}t) thy
— 52 —
brother ? He is unwell, he cannot come.-h Where can one buy
these fine penknives ? One can buy them at our neighbor's.
Will you give us a little ink? Can your sister lend us her pen-
knife ?4^^hat do these gentlemen want (what will these etc. ) ?
These ladies will buy an umbrella. One cannot be more un-
happy than I [am], one cannot have more misfortune than I.
Give us something to drink. fWhat will you [have] ? Will you
have wine or water ? Have I not lent you my cane ? No, you
have not lent it to me. Where are your brothers ? I have sold
them my dog. f-These men are very rich; all these houses be-
long to them.
89.
cr- 7 r» ^ ^:^ ( to Hic; v;^ ( to thee;
Singular. Dot. mxt, \ ^^ j^yg^jf. txx, -j ^^ ^^^^^^^.
j tl^m, t^r, t^m, to him, to her, to it;
I \\6)f to himself, to herself, to itself, to one's self.
Ace, mic^^j^^^^if. btdl, {thyself;
S t^n, jte, t%, him. her, it;
] ftc^, himself, herself, itself, one's self.
Plural. i>«*. UnS, j^^^^Vselves; ■ «'«^' ] to youkelves;
J tl^nen, to them (3^nen, to you);
( jlC^, to themselves, (to yourselves, to yourself).
Ace. \m^f
j us;
1 ourselves;
^^' 1 yourselves;
' fte, them {Bit, you);
" ftd), themselves, (your
selves, yourself).
Infinitives.
Past Participles.
Y Soben, to praise;
^'jd)lagen, to beat, to strike;
getobt, praised;
gefc^tagen, beaten, struck;
* ix)a)d)en, to wash;
gemajd^eit, washed;
^Derle^en, to hurt;
Derle^t, hurt;
fptelen, to play;
gefptett, played;
"* erlauben (with dat.), to permit, to aUow;
erlaubt, permitted, allowed;
< bert^eibigen, to defend;
Oert^eibtgt, defended;
♦ bcjd)utbtgen, to accuse; '
befd)ulbtgt, accused;
/ entfc^ulbtgen, to excuse;
entfd)ulbtgt, excused;
lianbetn, to act;
gel^anbelt, acted;
f retten, to save;
gerettet, saved;
jprei^eii, to speak, to talk;
gefprod^en, spoken, talked;
id)netbcii, to cut;
gej(i)mtten, cut;
Vau^fel^en, to expose;
au§gefe^t, exposed;
\n %^t nel)meu (with Ace.)
, to take care of;
in ^'d^t genommen, taken care oi
1
— 53 —
2)er 5lbt)ocat, the lawyer; baS ®t\dj\d, the ability; bcr 2Jlut^, the courage; bte
(geife, the^soapi'ber @taub, the dust; bic %xmtt, the army; ber iBerbat^t/ the
suspicion; toorftc^tig, cautious; unt)or|td)ttg, incautious; ^angene^m, pleasant;
unangeuel)m, unpleasant;* \o, thus; ba (conjunction), since; ttjeil, because.
Obs — (1) SBeit and ba (since) require the following verb to be at the end
of the clause (No. 45). — (2) Adjectives are generally preceded by their qualify-
ing words or adjuncts: S^ tft mir angcnel^m, it is pleasant to me. f
£)er Se^rer f)at bii) gclobt, totii bu flei^tg gewefen bift. !Cetn
©ruber ift ein bbfer Sndbe; er ijat itiid^ gcftern gefd^Iagcn, |)aft bu
bic^ frf)ou gemajd)ett? Qii) ^abe midf) uod) ui^t gett)afdf)eu; aber
§eiuri^ ^at \id) \d}on fcit eiuer ©tuub'e geiDufc^eu. Qd) ^be ntic^
l^eute mit einem ajieffer tJerie^t. Sari f)at ficfi aud) gefdiuitteu; cr
ijdt mit feiuem gebermeffer gefpielt. SBoHeu @ie uu^ crtaubeu, in
3{)rem ®arteu ju fpielen ? ^d) toxU e^ cuc^ eriauben, tomn iijv bte
©lumen in Sl^t nef)men iDoIIt. Sarum feib i^r l^eute nti^t au^ge*
gangen ? SBir tDoIten un^ in 2ld)t ne^men, iceil tt)ir franf getDefen finb,
(5^ ift leid^t, fidf) in 3)[d)t ju ne^men, menu man Dorfiditig ift. !Diefer
2lbDocat ^t bid) mit gro^em ©efi^icf t)ertt)eibigt. ®u l^aft Unred^t,
bic^ ju t)ert^eibigen, ba bi^ no^ 3iiemanb befd^ulbigt ^at. S^ ift
Unrec^t, fid) ^u t)ert^eibigen, iDenn man nic^t befd^ulbigt ift. @ie
lonnett fic^ nid)t entjc^utbigen, [meine] ^erren; 5yiiemanb !ann fid|
entfd)ittbigen, ber fo ge^anbelt l^at. (S^ fann ^'^nen nid)t fd)tDer fein,
tt)eurer greunb, fid^ ju entfd)ulbigen, ba ®ie t)ot(ig (perfectly)
9?ed)t l)aben. ®^ ift meiner ©^mefter fe^r unangene^m, fid^ in biefer
©cfa^r 5u fet)en.
90.
^It is very pleasant to me, to hear you speak thus. It is
easy for (to) you to accuse me if I cannot defend myself. Hast
thou hurt thyself, when thou wast in my room? I have not
hurt myself, but William has hurt himself with his fork. ' How
can you permit yourself to hurt the trees in my garden ? Thou
art right to take care of thyself, since thou hast been sick.
These boys have struck me to-day; but thy brother has de-
fended me with great courage.. William's father has beaten
us, because we have played in his garden. Children, I cannot
praise you to-day, because you have not done your lessons. (My)
gentlemen, you have not been wise; to excuse one's self if one
— 54 —
is not accused, is incautious. Charles had cut himself when he
was in your garden. Will you give me some soap and water ?
r will wash myself, and clean myself of the dust. Why have
you not been in school, children? t We have already excused
ourselves with (bei) the teacher. Our army is lost, it cannot
save itself. These men have exposed themselves to a great
danger .-7~^You have exposed yourselves to (a) grave (f corner) sus-
picion, since you have taken what does not belong to you.
©ogen (past part, gefagt), to say, to cinen iBefucf) mac^en, to pay a visit;
tell; fold^er, \oldjt, fold^eg (strong declen-
{ci)ic!en, to send; sion), such;
gtauben (past. part, geglaubt), to be- fcinblid), hostile;
lieve; bort, there (at that place) ;
tDiffcn, to know; bie iBe!anntfd}aft, acquaintance;
• terfprec^en, to promise; ber getnb, the enemy;
' fiird^ten (past. part, gefitrd^tet), to be ha% that (conjunction);
afraid; Wit^, tDag, all that, everything that;
*fi6) tt)etgern (past part, getreigert), to ^idj% tt)a§, nothing that,
refuse) ;
Inf. ntiiffen: id} mug, I must; bu utugt, thou must; er mug, he must; toit
miiffeu, we must; il^r miigt, you must; fie miiffeu, they must.
I have been in New York for a year, id} bin [f d^ u] j e i t eiuem ^atjV
in ^m 3)or!.
Obs, — (1) Clauses, introduced by t)a% require the verb to be at the end of
the clause (No. 45) . — (2) The indefinite pronoun man is only used in the
nominative, and is translated by one, by the indefinite /7eop^ or by ihei/: Tlan
mug fagen, one (they) must say. Often man may be rendered by an English
passive construction: man gtaubt, U is bdieved. — (3) The accusative of personal
pronouns generaUy precedes the dative.
Sonnen ®te Httr fagen, IDO |)err SUioH tt)of)nt? Qfi) tarn [e^]'
Q^mn nirf)t fagen. 2BoHen ®te mir btefc geber (ei^en ? Qd) tarn
fie 3^nen ni^t let^en, fie ge^ort mir nic^t. Qd) mug l^eute bem
graulein ©♦ einen ^efutf) mad)en; fie ift geftern mit i^rer Ttnttcv an^
gefommen. 2)?ugt bu fci)on ge^en? 9Bo finb meineSc^u^e? ^at
ber ®d)U^ma^er fie noif) nid)t gebrad^t? 9Jein, er mU fie bit in etner
©tunbe f(J)t(f en. SBte !annft bu [e^] toiffen ? dv f)at [e^] mir ge^
fagt. S)ein SSruber mug nodt) feine ?lufgaben madden. Sir muffen
t
— 56 —
Sitter t^uttr tt)a6 unfcm dittxn unb gel^rcm ongenel^m tft. Q^x mii^t
meinen SSetter befu^en; er tft feit brei SBodjen frant §einric^ unb
Sil^efm miiffen t)iele Sud^er f)aben- 2}ian mug mcf)t au^ge^en,
menu mart fran! ift, 2JJait mug fii) mc|t t)ert^eibigen, tt)eun man
nt(^t bef(^ulblgt ift. @te mitffen ntd)! 3111^^ glauben, ma^ man ^'^nen
fagt. @te mitffeu fid^ ni(f)t foti^er ©efa^r au^f el^eu. 3)ian glaubt,
bag bte 'ipreugeu bte fetnbttd^e 3lrmee gef(i)Iagen l^abeu* Tlan fagt,
ba^ ber getnb ftd^ ntd)t (auger i^ert^eibtgeu faun. 3Jiau glaubt mcf)t,
bag bu bie^ SSvLii) gefcfjrieben l^aft. ©te mitffeu \\^ tu Sldjt ue^men,
iDeuu @te tu metueu ®arteu ge^eu toolleu. @ie mitffeu tDiffeu, bag
QijV greuub Sari fic^ gemeigert l^at, mtr jeue SitdEier gu fdiideu.
S33arum l^aft bu bid) geiDetgert, uac^ SBteu ju get)eu? .^c^ ^abe mt^
ni^t gemetgert, ua^ SBieu gu gel^eu; aber tc^ mug fitr(i)teu, bag t^
bort feiue ©efd^cifte mad^eu fauu, SBtr ijahcn uu^ gemetgert, btr uufer
§au^ ju t)erfaufeu, toeil e^ fiir btd^ gu grog ift. Sir fiub fdjou feit
t)ier SBodjeu iu ber @tabt, aber Sftiemaub ijat uu^ eiueu 48efu(^ ge^^
ma^t.
92. v_„
rt^ My friend had the kindness to send me a basket of cherries.
You have not yet sent me my book. Who has taken my pen ?
I cannot tell (it) thee. This penknife belongs to my brother;
thou must give it to him. Charles will not lend me his um-
brella, -^hy will he not lend it to thee ? One must not pay
visits if one is unwell. One must promise nothing that one
cannot do. One must never praise one's self, 'hi can promise
you a great pleasure if you will make the acquaintance of my
friend; you must pay him a visit. I cannot believe (it) that
you have such suspicionX, It is said that you have been for
two years in this country. I t has been sa id that you have re^^
fused to pay a visit to your sick brother rf- We have not refused
to write this letter, but we must be cautious in this affair (®e=
fd)aft). Must we not be afraid that our friends have lost all
(that) they have ? -fWe will do nothing that can be unpleasant
to you, but you must have the kindness to do what you have
promised to us.
^^
— 56 —
PART nL
93.
Present Indicative. Sing. 1. '\6) lobe, I praise, I am praising, I do praise;
2. (bu lobeft),* bu lobft, thou praisest, etc.;
3. (er lobct), er lobt, he praises;
Plural. \. Xoxt lob en, we praise;
2. (i^r lobet), i^r lobt, you praise;
3. fie loben, they praise.
Imperative. Sing. lobe (bu), praise (thou) ;
Plural. lobt (il)r), praise (you) ;
loben ®ie, praise (you) [for polite conversation].
gtnben, to find; tt)unfd)en, to wish, to desire;
' fud^en (with ace), to seek, to look for; arbeiten, to work, to labor;
iDOl^nen, to dwell, reside, live; ba^ Xuc^, the cloth;
bringen, to bring; bte ©trage, the street;
bebauern, to regret, to pity; ber iBuc^pnbler, the bookseller;
* banen, to build; 3ebermann, every body;
reiten, to ride; fdjarf, sharp;
taDeln, to censure, to blame; QCinj, whole,
Ob9. — 1. The e in the endings of the 2d and 3d pers. sing, and 2d plural
is always used if the infinitive ends in ben or ten (finben, arbeiten). In verbs
with infinitives in ein and em (tabein, bebauem) the e of the ending is dropped
in all persons, except the 1st pers. sing.
2. The demonstrative pronoun ^Aa^, used without a noun, and referring to
something mentioned before, or pointed at, is rendered by the neuter baQ or*^
bteS (instead of biejeg).
3. Mixed fractions are placed wholly before the following noun: glDei
unb ^ine Oiertel 3J^eiIe, two miles and a quarter.
3Ba§ fud^en (Sie ? 3d) fucf)e nteine geber. ajJein 53ruber fu^t
fcinert ^(eiftift, SBir fudjen unfern §unb. ©iefc Sinber fatten
t^re Sitc^er. 2Bo faufen ®te Qi)X ^apkv? SBtr tatfen unfer papier
* The forms enclosed in parentheses are obsolete.
— 5Y ~
bei bem Su(^^dnbler. Qii) finbe metnett ©tod ttt(f)t. SBer l^at
meinen ©tod genommen? Qd) glaube, ba§ Qijv ^ruber tf)tt ge*
nommen ^at* 3^(1) Uebe bie[en ^naben niijt; er ift immer unartig.
©u tiebft betnen ge^rer, ®ott liebt bie guten 3)ienf(f)en. ®ute ^tn=»
ber (ieben i^re ©Item* 3ft e^ toa^r, baB 3^r Onfel fein $au§ oer^
fauft? SBie t^euer derfaufen ®te bic (a) gtle t)ou btefem Stuc^e?
3(^ t)er!aufe bie (a) (Slle btefe^ Zndjt^ gu (at) t)ier 3:^alern, ©a^
ift fe^r t^euer. ginbeft in mtf)t, §einri^, ba^ ba^ fe^r t^euer ift?
Sa, id) finbe e^ fe^r t^euen 2Bir t)erfaufen aber t)iet t)on biefem
Xndjt. ^ebermann finbet e^ fd^on, @(^iden ®ie mir bret unb eine
^albe glle! SBiffen @ie, too id) wo^ne? 3a, ©ie n)of)ueu tit ber
teteftra^e, Qd) ntu^ tDitnfrf)en, ba^ @ie ftc^ ein tDenig itt %d)t
ne^men. SBarum tabdt i^r eure greunbe? S^ filrc^te, ba^ i^r nie
3emanb (obt. Wdn greunb ^aii arbeitet ben ganjen Zaq; er ift
ein fe^r flei^iger Snabe* fringe ntir meinen ©tod, SBil^elm; id)
it)itl an^ge^en. Sei^en ©ie mir ' gefdiligft 3^^ S^^^^'J^^ff^^' ! b^^^
^aft bn e^, aber fdineibe bid) ni^t; e^ ift fdiarf.
94.
What are you doing? I am reading the book which your
brother has lent me. You read too much. Why do you not
write? I have already written three letters. My cousins
never write. You always blame your cousins; you must not
blame them. What art thou doing ? I am doing my exercise^
-^What is thy sister doing?! She is working. V'l^an you tell me
where Mr. N. lives? He lives in (the) William street. Dost
thou live with (bei) thy uncle? No, I do not live with
him. We regret that thy father is sick. Do you know, that
your uncle is building a new house? Where is your little
brother? I believe that he is playing in the garden. I
am afraid that thou playest too much, my son; thou must play
less and work more. Has your brother found my watch ? He
finds all (that) he seeks. I can not excuse you if you are
acting thus/ '^ Write this letter for me, if you please. Tell my
brother that he must go to Yienna with thee. Do not excuse
thyself 1 I believe what thou sayest to me. My father wishes
that thou ridest to the village, and buyest there ten pounds of
— 68 ->-
sugar and twenty yards of linen. How much coffee hare you
bought ? Three pounds and three quarters.
95.
Imperfect Indicative. \6) tobtc, I praised, I did praise, was praising;
bu lobteft, thou praisedst, etc. ;
er lobte, he praised;
tt)ir lobten, we praised;
t^r lobtet, you praised;
fte lobten, they praised.
SBefiid^en, to visit; antmorten, (with dat.), to answer;
toerfuc^en, to attempt, to try, to en- fenbett, to send;
tbbten, tokill; [deavor; fennen*, to know;
beabftd^tigen, to intend; lernen, to learn;
tjerlaffen, to quit, to leave; begleiteit, to accompany;
\\6) begeben, to proceed, to betake amuftrcn, to amuse;
one's self; ber ^erfu^, the attempt;
benfen, to think; ber ^ob, the death;
ftd^ befc^dfttgen, to occupy one's self; \i'\t 5lbjtd^t, the intention, design;
brennen, to burn; v bie 5Serftdr!uitg, the reinforcement;
reben, to speak; bie SfJeife, the journey;
bemer!en,to perceive; bie 2lntunft, the arrival;
]^inretd)en, to be sufficient; bag @elb, the money;
l^elfen, (with dat.), to help; bie SBo^nung, the residence;
au^fii^ren, to accomplish; ber ^Bote, the messenger;
ertrarteu, to expect; \iCi% iDSetter, the weather;
anjetgen, to announce; ' tt)d^retib, ** while.
Obs«— 1. The imperfect ending is ete in regular verbs ending in ben,
ten, gnen and d)nen (id^ rebete, arbeitete, t% regnete), except fenben and tt)en=
ben, which generally form fanbte, wanbte.
2. The imperfects of bringen and benfenare brad)te and bac^te; of brennen,
brannte; lennen, fannte; nennen, nannte; rennen, rannte.
3. SBotten forms regularly n^ollte; !bnnen makes fonnte, and ntiiffen,
mugte, both without softening the vowel. 3d) trottte is translated by / was
willing, I intended, I was going to, I wished; id) tDOttte ntd^t, / was unwilling,
I did not choose; td^ mugte, I was obliged t6\ \&\ fonnte, I could.
4. If conjunctions that throw the verb to the end of the clause(ba§, a\%,
tt)enn, ba, meit, ird^renb etc.) precede their principal sentences, the verb of
the latter is placed before its subject:
x6) g e ^ e , trenn er fommt, I go if he comes,
hjenn er fommt, g el^ e id^ , if he comes, I go.
* ^ennen (to know) means *to have an acquaintance with somebody or
something' ; hjiffen, (to know) means 'to have a knowledge of something.'
** SSdl^renb requires the verb to be at the end of the clause.
I
— • 59 —
6. In this instance (Obs. 4) the principal sentence is often preceded by
the adverb fo, which in that position cannot be expressed in English: 2Senn cr
fommt, fo ge^eid).
6. Feminine nouns consisting of more than one syllable, except those
in futlft and tiife^ take en in all cases of the plural, without softening the
radical vowel. For feminine nouns in el and cr see p. 33.
^d) tDar in bem ®arten, afe bein Sruber un6 befucf)te. 211^ SSooti)
abradant gtncoln tobtete, voax id) in ©eutf^Ianb. Qi) tt)unfrf)te
betnen S3ruber in 2Bien ju fe^en, ba td^ i^n in Berlin nic^t fe^en
fonnte. S)a i^ alle^ ©elb t)ertoren ^atte, beab(i(^ti9te ic^ meine U^r
gu Derfaufen. S)a id) ^axU t)erlaffen innate, fo tuollte id) nti^ nad^
So(n begeben, ^ SBir ntad)ten feinen SSerfnd) nad) ber ©tabt jn gef)en,
tt)ei( e^ ben ganjen !Iag regnete* SBeil Sliemanb fiir beinen 33rn*
ber rebete, fo t)erfu^ten tviv [e^], i^n ju t)ert^eibigen. SBir fpielten
in bem ®arten, ma^renb bein ^rnber in feincm 3'^^^^^ arbeitete*
S2BciI)renb mx M bir f^^eiften, brannte nnfer §an^. 2lfe iDir hid) nic^t
im §anfe bemerften, bad^ten xoix, ba^ bn bid) im ®arten beft^ciftigteft
ffienn bu bid) n)eigerft un^ beine 2Ibfid)ten gn fagen, fo fbnnen toir
bir nid)t ^elfen* X)a^ bein :33ritber in nnferer @tabt too^nte, fonnte
id) nicbt n)iffen.
I did not attempt to proceed to Paris since my money was
not sufficient for the journey?^ We did not expect the arrival
of thy brother, since it rained the whole day. Since my
brother refused to help me, I could not accomplish my designs.
f- Since my friends were afraid to come to (gii) us, we were
obliged to visit them. We were expecting the arrival of your
brother, when a messenger brought us your letter that
announced his death. We could not yesterday come to town,
because the weather was bad. Just (®erabe) because he was
wrong, I did not answef him. / Why did you not send your
son, if you could not come to town ? If you thought so of him,
you did not know the man. My brother was learning his
lesson while I accompanied Charles into the garden. A While
our house was burning, I amused myself with my friend
William. -JL That Henry did not choose to come, I could not
— 60
know. Since Mr. Davis was going to sell the house in which
I lived, I was obliged to look for another residence. When
we perceived the designs of the enemy, we sent reinforcements
into the village.
9T.
Future Indicative, x6) IDCrbe loben, I shaU or will praise; 1 am going to praise;
bu trirft (oben, thou wilt praise;
er tuirb loben, he will praise;
voxt roerben toben, we shall praise;
i^r ttjerbet loben, you will praise;
fie ttjevben loben, they will praise.
%6)i 2^age, a week; ber 2)tener, the man-servant;
toierje^n S^oge, a fortnight; mitnel^men, to take along;
bt«*, till, until; in ^ttjet bis bret 2^a= ontommen, to arrive;
gen, in two or three days; abretfen, to depart;
nod) etnmat,' once more; l^oren, to hear;
ttJteber, again; regnen, to rain;
ntorgen, to-morrow; bauern, to last;
mbgtid), possible bleiben, to remain;
ber ^rteg, the war; > erjud^en, to request;
bte ^ngelegenl^ett, the affair; * tjerlieren, to lose.
Obs. — (1) The FUTURE is formed by the verb tt)erben as auxiliary, and
the infinitive of the verb without ju. This infinitive in simple sentences
must be placed at the end of the clause. The verb merben, not followed by
an infinitive, denotes to become: jte tnerben greunbe, they 6ecowe friends. —
(2) ShaU in the 2. and 3. pers. sing, and plur. is translated by the verb foUen,
which is irregular in the pres. indicative sing.: id) foil, bu follfi, er fott.
Shall in questions is translated by foUeu even in the first person : shall I come,
foE id) fomnten ? — (3) If I will etc. means to he willing, to intend, it should be
translated by t(^ tDttt. — (4) The interrogative adverb when is translated by
toann.
^d) trerbe btefen 2lbenb ba§ aSergttitgen l^aben, meinen DnM ju
fc^en. Qi) tDerbe bir btefen pbfd)en 9{tng geben, xotxm bu flei^tg
fein tnirft. §etnri(^ itiirb mir ^eute ein ^aar fd^one §anbfrf)u^e !au*
fen. Seine ©(^tuefter n^irb jufrieben fein, XQtxm fie i|re 2Iufgabe ge*
g, if it is used as a conjunction has the verb at the end of the clause.
— 61 —
marf)t f)at. aSenn tt)ir in 9?. fein trerben, toerben tt)ir Die! aSergniigcn
^aben. 2Bann merben @ie mid} befudjen ? Q^ glaube, ba^ irir @ie
morgen befud)en iDerben. 2)fetne «^ruber tcerben ^eute ober morgen
aud) fommen, g^ mirb meinem 23ater fe^r Dtel ^erguiigen mad)en
(give), fie noc^ einmal ju fe^en. SBann merben @ie -3^rem greunbc
kaii fdjreiben ? 3^ tDerbe il)m in ad)t bi^ t)ier5et)u Slagen fd)reiben.
Solleu ®ie bie ®iite ^aben, mir ba^ Sud) ju f^iden, tt)eid)e^ @ie
mir t)er)pro^en ^aben? Qd) merbe e^ Q^nm ()eute fd)iden, grdulein*
3)2ein !t)ienern)irb e^ 3^nen bringen. 3^r greunb fd)eint (seems)
arm ju merben. ©oH id^ 3{)neu je^t ^elfen, ober foH id^ im ®arten
arbeiten, bi^ @ie fertig (done) fein tnerben? ©a bn bid) morgen
nad^ aSien begeben trirft, fo erfud)e id) bi(^, meinen ©o^n mitjune^^
men. ^(eiben @ie in ^Berlin, bi^ idj bort anfommen tt)erbe ?
98.
Will you go with us ? I do not believe that my father will
allow (it to) me. Has the shoemaker brought my boots ?^ No,
he will bring them to you this evening. What shall we do now ?
We will go to town together (together to town). Will you
have the kindness to lend me your horse ? I shall lend it to you
with much pleasure. We shall play to-day in the garden of
our uncle; he will allow us. This man is becoming rich. I
hear that thou art going to depart for Germany; wilt thou not
take along thy children? Mr. Nollet has (is) arrived who
desires to speak with you. Tell him that I will not see him.
My father will arrive here in [a] short time; will you visit him?
Excuse me, I must depart in three or four hours. It will not
be possible for (to) me to see him. Since the war will last longer
than we expected, it will be better if we remain in the country.
Will you accompany us if we go to town ? If your friend is
losing so much money, he will soon become poor. What will
your father say, if he hears that you are going to leave the
country? I shall not write you again till I shall come (till I
come) to Vienna. Will the weather be good or bad to-morrow?
I believe that it is going to rain to-morrow. Shall I try it once
more ? Do not try it till you have spoken again with me. Do
you know that our friend William is going to leave our town ?
_ 62 —
When is he going to depart? I believe that he will depart in
five or six days. If thou wilt (tt)illft) bring me pen, ink, and
paper, I shall try to write that letter for you.
99.
Present Subjunctive. Sing, i^ lobe, I praise (praised etc.);
bu lobeft, thou praise (praisedst etc.);
er lobe, he praise (praised etc.).
Plur. mv loben, i^r lobet, fie loben.
Imperfect Subfunctive. id^ lobte etc. (like imperfect indicative).
Perfect Indicative. \^ ^abe (bu ^ft, er ^at etc.) gelobt, I hare praised.
Perfect Subjunctive. \6) \)Qiht (bu ^abcft, er l^abe, Xo'xx ^aben, t^r ^abet, fte l^a*
ben) getobt.
Perfect Infinitive. gelobt l^obeti, gelobt gu l^aben, to have praised.
Pluperfect Indicative, id) Ijattt (bu l^atteft etc.) gelobt, I had praised.
Pluperfect Subjunctive, id) ptte (bu l^cittefi etc.) gelobt.
Obs. — 1. The present subjunctive generaHy does not drop the e in the
endings. The third person sing, is always like the first.
2. The first persons subjunct. present of fonuen, tDoUeil, miiffen are: ic^
fonne, ic^ iDoIte, id) tniiffe, and are conjugated like the subjunctive of ic^
lobe. §aben; to have, makes thepres. subj.: ic^ l^abe, bu ^abeft, er ^abe, rt)ir
l^aben, t^r l^abet, fie ^abeu. @etu, to be, has the pres. subj.: id) \ti, bu feieft,
cr fet, tt)ir feien, ii)r feiet, fie feieu.
3. The imperfect subjunctives of founen, Xt)oUtn, miiffen are: id) fonute,
(could), tvoUttf miigte. §aben, fein, bringen, benten soften in the imperf.
subjunct. the a of their imperfect indicatives: id) tvdvt (I were), id) bad^te, id)
brac^te. @enben, ttienben, brennen, tennen, nennen, rennen form their imperf.
subjunct. regularly, restoring the c of the infinitives: id) fenbete, ttJenbete,
brennte, fennte, nennte, rennte.
4. The perfect indie, of l^aben and fein are: id) l^obe gel)abt, I have had;
id) bin geiDefen, I have been; perfect subjunctive: id) l^abe (bu })dbt\l etc.) ge^*
l^abt; id) fei (bu feieft etc.) getrefen; pluperfect indicative: id) l^atte geljabt, I
had had; id) toax gettjefeu, 1 had been; pluperfect subjunctive: id) |atte ge
l^abt; id) mdre gemefen.
6. In clauses introduced by b a g the subjunctive is under certain cii
cumstances more generally used than the indicative. This is the case if th
clause introduced by bag is dependent on a verb of hearing, thinking, bb
LiEViNG or SAYING, in the imperfect or pluperfect tense:
I believe that he comes, id) gtaube, ba^ er f nt m t ; but:
I believed that he came (was coming), id) gtaubte, bag er ! ttt ttl e.
Such verbs as require the verbs in the following clause to be in the sub
junctive are: benfeu, iiberjeugt fein, l^oren, glauben, ttjcil^nen, fiird^ten, fageii
anttt)orten, fd)reiben, and the like.
— 63 —
6. In clauses introduced by tJwt, the English past tense is translated
either by the present or imperfect subjunctive, and the English pluperfect
either by the pereect or pluperfect subjunctive:
They believed that he learned, fie cjtaubten, bag er I e rn e (or t e rti t e).
They said that he had learned, fie fagten, '^(iS^ er getemt 1^ a b e (or ^ d 1 1 e )♦
But the use of the present and perfect subjunctives must be avoided, when its
forms would not be distinguishable from the indicative : id) gtaubte, bag fie
lemten (not lernen); tc^ gtaubte, \iQS^ fie gelernt fatten (not ^aben),
7. In all these constructions the conjunction bag may be omitted, and
the verb (subjunctive) of the clause takes its place immediately after the
subject : \^ glaubte, er fei in ber @tabt, I believed he was in the city.
8. The same usage of the subjunctive takes place in clauses introduced
by ob (whether, if), after the imperfect or pluperfect of verbs of asking
(fragen) or doubting (,^rt)eifeln): \&\ fragte t^it, ob er franf Jet (or to a re), I
asked him whether (if) he was sick.
|^° If the clause introduced by \i(x^ depends on verbs in the present or
FUTURE, the subjunctive is more rarely used than the indicative,
SSd^nen, to suppose (wrongly); un^juldffig, inadmissible;
»ermutl)en, to presume; rid^ tig, correct;
ertldren, to declare; unrid)tig, incorrect;
annet)men, tb accept; tdglid), daily;
be^aupten, to state, to assert; bte B^^f^^^/ supply, provision;
bemerten, to remark; ber ^orfc^lag, the proposition;
fd^einen, to seem; bie 2lnfid)t, the view;
fragen, to ask (a question); bie^utter, the butter;
»erfxd)ern, to assure; bag (Si (pU ©ter), the Q^g\
borbereiten (past part, t)orbereitet), to bie SBa^r^ett, the truth;
prepare; bie ©efellfd^aft, the company;
teugnen, to deny; bie @(^Iad)t, the battle;
jtneifeln, to doubt; ber ©eneral, the general;
ja^ten, to pay; *ber Sintuo'^ner, the inhabitant;
iibergengt, convinced; ob, whether, if.
3cf) glaubte, ba^ er fpiele. ^i) glaubtc, \^^% fie f)3tetten. ^^
md^nte, "ti^^ bu franf feieft. 3^(f) tt)a^nte, bu feieft franL .SBir Der*
tnut^eten, ba^ bu beine 9lufgaben lernteft. J)ie i^einbe \i^i)itw.f '^^^
tDtr feine ^i^M^^n l^citten, 3Keine greunbe furd()teten, id) fei tobt.
©r tnar uber^eugt, \i(x% id) mi^ nad) :93ertin begeben f)atte. ©ein
greunb erffdrte, ba§ er beinen 3Sorfd)fag nicfjt anne^men fonne.
J)iefe 2Jfdnner fatten be^uptet, ba^ bu in So(n tDof)nteft. 3d) be*
merfte, ba§ biefe Slnfid^t uuri^tig ju fein f^eine. Sr t)erftd)erte ntir.
— 64 —
ba§ er tmmer biefe 9lbfitf)t gefjabt ^abe. ©er Setter ba(f)te, ba^ mir
un^ nti^t Dorbereitet fatten. Tltint greunbe f(f)rieben mir, fie hxdd}^
ten tdglid) Sutter unb Sier nad) ber Stabt, S3Ji(l)e(m (eiignete, ba^
er iemate bie 2lbft(f)t ge^abt ^citte, fein §ou^ ^u t)er!aiifen. ©ein
25ater fragte tnt^, ob idf) jemat^ in SBien gettjefen fei, Qi) gtDeifeltc,
ob biefer SJiann bir bic SSa^rt)eit fage.
100.
My brother thought that thou wast Vorking; but I was
afraid that thou wast playing. He supposed [wrongly] that I
was wrong. He often told me (told me often) that he had
never had such a suspicion. We presumed, ffenry was in your
company. Were you not convinced that we could not lose,
that battle? The general declared that these propositions
were inadmissible. He stated that the English were sending
provisions, and that the inhabitants were bringing them to the
city. How could you say that I was living in France ? Did I
not always say that your views were correct ? He remarked
that he knew me, and [that] your suspicion could not be correct.
My brother asked me whether I had ever had such designs ?
Henry answered me that he was not prepared to declare his
views; he doubted if we could pay that money. I supposed
you were accompanying your brother. I was afraid you were
dead, since I had heard that you had not been in town for a
month.
101.
Future Subjunctive, x^ ttjetbe tobeit, bu tDcrbefl loben, er tDcrbe lobem, ft>tr
trerben loben, i^r iDerbet (oben, fie mcrben loben.
Conditional, xdj tniirbe loben, I should or would praise;
bu tniirbeft loben, thou wouldst praise;
er roiirbe (oben, he would praise;
tntr tDiirben toben, we should praise;
iljx triirbet loben, you would praise;
fte tDiirben loben, they would praise.
Obs. — 1. If a clause, introduced by if, is dependent on a verb in the
potential mood with should, would, could, might, the clause is called
HYPOTHETICAL, and requires in German the subjunctive of the imperfect for
the English past tense, and the subjunctive of the pluperfect for the
— 66 —
English pluperfect. The conditional should not be used in clauses intro-
duced by tnenn (if) : / should praise you, if you were here, \6) iDliube @te tobett,
hjenn @ic l^ier tporen; I should praise you, if you worked (would work), id^
ttJiirbe ®te (oben, tpenn @te arbetteten {not arbetten njiirben): / should'
praise you, if you had worked, x6) tt)iirbe @ie loben, votmi @te gearbettet fatten.
2. In the principal sentence of the hypothetical period the English
potential with should or would is rendered either by the German conditional,
or by the subjunctive of the imperfect (pluperfect): 3(j^ ttJlirbe jufrteben
f e in (or id^ tD a r e gufrieben), tuenn fie angefomnten rtjaren, I should be.pleased
if they had arrived. @ie fatten t^n gelobt, tuenn @te l^ier getDefen tocireti,
you would have praised him if you had been here.
3. The English potential with could or mi^ht in the principal sentence is
generally rendered by the subjunctive of the imperfect (or pluperfect, see
p. 108) of the modal auxiliary fbnneit (id) fbnnte) with the infinitive of the
verb: dr !ontite bieg ti)un, tt)enti er l^ier tudre, he could (might) do this
if he were here.
4. The imperfect subjunctive of the modal auxiliary tttiiffert (id^ Tttil^tc)
in the principal sentence of hypothetical periods is generally rendered by
*/ ought to or '/ should he obliged to' or by similar circumlocutions: @te
mil 6t en bies triiffen, tt)enn @ie auftner!fam mdren, you ought to know this if
you were attentive. 3c§ moigte meinen ^lan aufgeben, trenn bie^ bev gaU
iDCirc, I should he obliged to give up my plan if this were the case.
5. The imperfect subjunctive of the modal auxiliary mogen (\6) ttiod^te,
see p. 108.) in the principal sentence of hypothetical periods, generally cor-
responds to 7 shmU wish to' or 'like to : 3(^ moc^te i^n fel)en, Xotxm eS mogltd^
toare, / should wish (would like) to see him if it were possible.
6. In all these instances (No. 2 — 5.) the conditional clause is frequently
understood: 3Ba^ tuiirben ^\t tl^un? what would you do?
7. The English potential with should or would in clauses introduced by
THAT (bo6), is expressed either by the subjunctive of the future, or by the
conditional (especially with a plural verb). But after verbs of wishing,
would is expressed by mo&jit, or by the imperfect ^bjunctive of the main
verb: 3d^ ^offte, ^(k^ er fommen ft) er be (or tt)iirbe), I hoped that he would
come, ^r gtaubte, \)(x^ fie bleiben n? iir b en (not merben), he believed that
they would remain. 3d| njiinfd)te, 'b(x'^ fie tommen m o d^ t e n (or fdmen), I
wished that they would come.
8. In clauses introduced by that, could generally corresponds to fonnte,
and wiigrA^ to mbd)te: (Sr bad^te, bag fie nid^t tommen fonnten, he thought
that they could not come. (Sr fiird)tete, bag fie fommen m o d^ t c n , he was
afraid that they might come.
?lbfd^neiben, to cut off; XO^Xtn, to choose, elect;
erreid)en, to reach; befolgen (part, befolgt), to follow;
anbem (part, geanbert), to change; reifen, to travel;
jurudfte^ren, to return; fid^ juriidfjiel^cn, to retreat;
— 66 —
crrld^teit, to establish; ber dtai^, the advice;
bej^dtigen, to confirm; ber S3urger, tlie citizen;
bauen, to build; bte 9legterung, the government;
^offen, to hope; baS ^oftamt, the post-office;
fortfe^en, to continue; gern, gladly, willingly;
ber Si^ein, the Rhine; ^p'dt, late;
ber ^raftbent, the President; bolb, soon;
ber 53ef(f)tu6, the resolution; gefunb, healthy;
ber ®ef alien, the favor; {parfam, economical.
!iDer ©eneral furcfitetc, ba^ bte geinbe feme 3wfi^^ten abf(f)neiben
tDiirben. SBir fiirc^teten, ha^ bu ju fpdt fontmen ntodf)teft. !Setn
33etter tDiinfc^te, ha^ \)n biifi narf) SBien begeben tnoc^teft, !Die (Stn==
n)of)ner l^offten, ba^ bte geinbe \)k ©tabt nxd)t errei(J)en fonnten. -3<1)
glaubte ni(i)t, ba^ bein Sruber feine 3Infi(i)t anberh tt)erbe. 3Bir t)er:=
mut^eten, ba§ ^art feine Slufgaben mc[)t fjaben tDiirbe. 3^dE) bacf)te
bu iDerbeft balb guriicffe^ren. Qij tDiirbe gludli^er fein, iDenn id)
^iid^er unb greunbe ^citte. Qd) iDiirbe mel^r 23ergnugen ^aben, irenn
ntetne @d)tx)eftern t)ier iDciren. !©u iDurbeft mcf)t fo reid) fein, mnn
bu ntd^t fo t)iele ®ef(i)dfte gemad^t ^tteft. SBenu §eiuri(^ @elb
^citte, U)urbe er biefe SJJeffer faufeu. Qd) tDurbe beiueu -©ruber be^
fudEien, menu t(^ ^dt l^dtte. SBtr tDiirbeu bid) nidjt tabelu, tneun bu
fleipiger getrefeu mdreft. !Dein Dufel fagte mir, bu iDiirbeft morgen
md)t tommeu. SBeli^eu t)on biefen Stodeu iniirbeft bu tDd^teu?
JBem iDiirbet i^r eure -Slumen gebeu? SBa^ tDitrbeft bu fageu, wtnn
id) meiu ^ferb t)erfaufte? Qd) U)ixrbe bir erlaubeu ju fpieleu, treuu
hn beiue 2lufgabeu gemad^t l^dtteft. 2Beun bu ^dt ju lefeu ^citteft,
tDitrbe i(^ bir eiu uii^Ii^e^ 33u(f) lei^eu. 3^ tDitrbe gern mit bir
ge{)en, menu meiu ?e^rer e^ eriaubte; id) mu§ f)eute [uo(^] brei Sriefc
fd^reibeu. Qd) bxadjtt bir geru beiue 33ud^er, treuu ic^ fie ij'dtk.
®eiu ^ater tpdre je^t reid), uieuu er meiueu SSorfd^Iag befolgt Ijdttt,
©u ^dtteft 9Je(J)t, tDeuu n^ir iu grau!rei(^ mdreu. Qd) fdjidte bir
meiueu S^ieuer, meuu er uid)t au^gegaugeu lt)dre. )i&tnn toix in
!l)eutfc^laub n)ot)uten, fo ^dtteft bu uid^t fo t)iel ®elb t)erIoreu. 9Benn
bu bic^ iu Slc^t genommen l^dtteft, fo tt)drft bu je^t uid)t frauL Seine
greuube fonuteu bir mdjt fo Diel ®elb gebeu, wznn fie uid^t reid^
tDdren. Qd) modjte nad) J)eutfd)(aub reifeu, voenn id) meljr ©efb
l^dtte. ®u fdnuteft bein ®ef(^dft fortfeijeu, menu bu t)orfid)tiger
mdreft. ®r fonnte gefunb fein, tomn er eiuen 5lrgt gel^abt ^dtte,
— 67 —
Qi^x mii^tet rcit^er fetn, tDcnn i^r f^jarfam getoefen todxtt SBcnn
bu meinem yiai)bav ni(^t ®elb gegeben ^dtteft, miigte er fein $aue
Derfaufen, 2Benn tDtr jmet ©timmeu (votes) met;r ge^abt \)dtkn,
fo ^atte bein SSater 9te^t ge^abt.
102.
We thought that the enemy (pi. ) would retreat to the
Rhine. Charles did not doubt that you would return in five or
six days. The inhabitants wished that the government would
establish a new post-office. All citizens expected that the
President would confirm these resolutions. We were afraid
that you might choose the wrong (unred^t) way. Louisa would
be much, (fe^r) pleased if she had these flowers. Henry would
not have so many friends if he were not so kind (gut) and
diligent. We should not yet have (be) arrived if we had not
received a letter from your father. We should not have sold
our house if my father had done more business (pi.). The
teacher would blame thee if thou hadst not done thy exercises.
I should not believe it if thou hadst not seen it. If I had money
I should buy a pound of cherries. If you would tell me where
Mr. N. lives, I would give you two dollars. Would you be-
lieve that I had done this ? Would you do me this favor if I
allowed you to amuse yourself this evening? I would do it
willingly if I had time. You might be rich now if you had been
more cautious in your afi'airs. Thou mightest live now in a
palace (@d)(o^) if thou hadst followed my advice. If we should
receive reinforcements, we could beat the enemy. They could
not have defended (t)ertl^eibigt) themselves if my brother had
not helped (gel^olfen) them. If they had (were) departed
yesterday, they ought to be here now (now here). If you had
followed your [own] advice, you would be obliged now to leave
the country. I should like to build this house for you if you
would (were willing to) pay more money. We should like to
follow thy advice, if it were possible. [ Use the imperfect in-
stead of conditional in the following sentences], 1 should
bring you your pictures to-morrow if they were done (fertig).
They would have sent your money a week ago if they had had
it. If you had arrived later, you would not have found us in
— 68 —
town. If I were riot sick, I should visit you. If thou hadst
changed thy resohitions, thou wouldst not have lost thy
money. Thou wouldst be lost now if I had not saved (gerettet)
tliee. If you had had less money, you would have been more
economical.
103.
StuSge^eu, to go out.
id) gc^c an^, I go out;
bu ge!)ft an^, thou goest out;
er gel)t am, he goes out;
tt)ir geljett auS, we go out;
il^r ge^t an^, you go out;
tie gc^cn aus, they go out.
oufmac^en, to open;
gumad)en, to shut;
5^rucfici)icfen, to send back;
Unterrid)t ne^men, to take lessons;
anflopfen, to knock (at a door);
aufmad)en, to awake;
ftubiren, to study;
abfc^reiben, to copy;
mitt^eilen, to communicate;
onjiel)en, to put on;
erfranfen, to faU sick;
auf^oren, to cease;
onfangen, to begin, to commence; .
gefle^en, to confess;
etnfe^en* (etnc (Sa^e), to be awnre (of
a thing);
ftc^ anftetben, to dress (one's self);
auffte{)en, to rise (from bed or a fall,
etc.);
aufgel^en, to rise (from the sun, moon,
etc.);
unterge^en, to set (of the sun, etc.);
tjor^ie^en, to prefer;
bie '^madjxidjt, the news;
bic ©emo^n^eit, the habit;
bie ^ommobe, the chest of drawers;
bie 9^eife, the journey;
bie @ad^e, the thing;
bie UntDiffen^eit, the ignorance;
fd^ttjarj, black;
friil^, early.
Obs. — 1 . Verbs having for prefixes syllables that do not occur as words by
themselves, are called inseparable coMPOum) verbs. Such prefixes are bcJ
ge, ent (emp), er, tier, ger. Most other prefixes of verbs are particles (espeT
cially prepositions) which also occur as separate words. Verbs compoundec^
with these are called separable compound verbs. The most usual of thesi
particles are: ah, an, auf, au§, bei, mit, uadj, t»or, gu, guriicf, ettt, fort, and th^
compound particles with Ijtx and ^in (f)ert)or, ^erauf, etc.).
2. The prefixes of the. separable compound verbs are detached fromthd
simple verb in the present, imperfect and imperative, if they stand in orl
dinary (see Obs. 4) sentences. The detached prefixes are removed to the en<r
of the clause: er g et g te mir ben Zot feineS betters an, he announced to md
the death of his cousin.
3. If separable compound verbs are construed with infinitives (with
gu), the detached prefix is often placed before the infinitive and its adjuncts:
SSir f anqeti ^eute an, ba§ iBud) ju lefen (or: iESir fang en ^ente ha^ ^\i6)
gu tefen a n), we begin to-day to read the book.
4. If the separable compound verbs occur in clauses that require the
verb to be at the end (No. 45; 95, Obs, 4), the prefixed particles are not de-
tached, but keep their connection with the simple verb, the same as in the
infinitive: S)ie ^naben, tie ju lefen a n f a n g e n , the boys that begin to read;
njenn bie ^naben ^n tefett a n f a n g e n , if the boys begin to read^ etc.
5. The prepositions burc^, iiber, nm and nnter are in some compounds*
SEPARABLE, and in others inseparable: id^unterne^nte, I undertake; but:
bie @onne g e 1} t n n t e r , the sun sets.f
Qii) ge^e^eute m(f)t au§; ba^ Setter t[t gu \i)kii)t SBenn ba^
SBetter fdjdner todre, iDiirbert iDtr gem au^ge^en. f)einrt(^, bumac^ft
nie bie 3:i)ure ju. Sannft bu biefe Sotnmobe aufmad^en ? Qd) mad^e
mein ^^wtmer gu, tDenn id) au^ge^e, Qi) fd)i(Ie ^'^nen ba^ SSnd)
gurud, mlijt^ ®te mir gettefien ^aben* Mdn Setter fc^tdte tnir
gefteru ben ©tod juriicJ, ben id) iijxn getie^en Ijatk, @(^relbft bu
atle biefe S3riefe ab ? Qd) mn^ 3t)nen etina^ mittljeilen, 2Ba^ tnolten
@ie mir mitt^eilen? Qd) t^eile ^'^nen eine angenel)"me yiadjxidjt mit»
SBet(f)e^ Sleib gie^ft bu ^entean?. Qd) jie^e mein fc^marge^ Sfeib
an, unb meine ©c^mefter iDirb t^r n^ei^e^ ^teib angie^en. 3Keine
3lad)haxn fangen ^ente an, i{)re ©ad)en jn t)erfaufen. 3)ein grennb
fe^te geftern feine 9?eife fort. SBci^renb er feine 9?eife fortfe^te, er^
franfte er* 3Bann I)oren ©ie anf, Unterri(f)t gu nel}men ? Senn ic^
je^t anf{)orte, toUrbe id) nid)t fe^r t)ie( tt)iffen. SBann ge^t bie @onne
im Wtomt aJidrj (March) auf ? SBenn bie Sonne frii^ aufge^t,
gel)t fie fpdt unter. SKann ftetjen @ie auf?
104.
Do you not rise yet? No, I am unwell; I shall not rise
to-day. You always rise very late; that is a bad habit. Shut
the door, if you please. Open the window. Your brother al-
ways opens the door and the windows. Do you not go out to-
day? I shall not go out to-day. My brother goes out twice
every day (every day twice). I shall send you back your
umbrella to-morrow. Send me also back the cane which I
t If such verbs are inseparable, they are marked with an asterisk.
— TO —
have lent you. What is my son doing? He copies the letters
which you have written this morning. If my uncle arrives,
I shall communicate to him the good news. Do not com-
municate him anything. Put on thy new dress. I announced yes-
terday to my children that you would visit us to-day. Why do
you begin again to take lessons ? Because I am aware of my
ignorance. Are you aware that I was right ? No, I am not
^ aware of it. My children begin to study early, and cease [to
study] late. Which garden do you prefer, mine or that of my
brother ? I must confess that I prefer that of your brother.
When my servant knocked [at the door] I awoke, dressed my-
self and perceived that I had slept (gef(^fafen) too long. My
brother departed from Vienna while I was preparing my
journey. Why do you not prepare your lessons, children?
53auen, to build;
l^eirotI}en, to marry;
ful)ren, to conduct;
ipliinbern, to plunder;
gerftoren, to destroy;
gul^oren, to listen;
atierfeunen, to acknowledge;
Ijeiten, to cure, to heal;
fid} beffern, to improve (one's self)
btctiren, to dictate;
Dergrbgern, to increase, to enlarge;
tjerld^onem, to embellish;
befc^iegen, to bombard;
Uertrunben, to wound;
Dortegeit, to submit (place before);
ableljnen, to decline;
ougbertaufen, to sell out;
frangbfxfd), French;
unbegriitibet, unfounded;
amertfanifci^, American;
105.
faft, almost;
griebrtd^, Frederick;
Oefterreid^, Austria;
ber ©efanbte, the ambassador;
' ber (Sraf, the count;
ber giirft, tbe prince;
ber getb^err, the commander;
*ber (Stfofg, the success;
ber @0lbat, the soldier;
- ber §elb, the hero;
ber ©enat, the senate;
bie 5lufmerffam!ett, the attention;
bie SfJepublif, the republic;
bte SBunbe, the wound;
bie S^l)\, the number;
bie iBebingung, the condition;
ber grteben, the peace;
ber ©e^iilfe, the assistant;
ber 35orrat^, the stock,
ber 5?rattjofe, the Frenchman.
Obs. — 1. The PAST PARTicrPLE of verbs that make their imperfects
te or ete is formed by prefixing the syllable ge (augment) and adding th
ending t or et to the infinitive, after its ending (en or n) has been dropp
Verbs in ben and ten take et: toben — gelobt; anbem — geanbcrt; reben-
gerebet. Those verbs that change e into a in the imperfect (No. 95.) ke
that vowel in the participle (fenbet — gefanbt; benfen — gcbac^t, etc.).
2» Verbs with the ending ttctt (tetctt), and the inseparable compound
verbs do not take an augment (ftublren, ftubtrt; eriauben — criaubt). Separable
compounds insert the augment between the prefix and the simple verb (auf*
ijQXen — auf g e ^brt). Some compound verbs consist of a separable prefix
followed by an inseparable one. These take no augment: t)orberelten — t)or*
bereitet.
3. About hundred and seventy verbs and their compounds form their
past participles by the ending en, refusing the ending te of the imperfect (fe!)en
— ge|el)en; faHen — gefalleu). These verbs are called strong verbs, and their
conjugation strong conjugation; all the others (with participles in et) are
called WEAK verbs, and their conjugation weak conjugation. See p. 90.
4. Nouns form their genitives in e^ (0) or etl (u)* The former are of the
strong, the latter of the weak declension. Nouns of the weak declension
take en (or n if the nom. ends in e, el or er) in all cases except nom. sing., and
never soften their radical vowels in the plural. To the weak declension be-
long the masculines in e (^nabe, ^ote, $renge, etc.), and some other,
especially foreign nouns which have dropped their former ending e (@raf,
prft, §err; SJienfcf), §e(b, (^olbat, ^rafibent, etc).
9){etn ^ruber ^at ein neue^ $au^ in ber griebridj^ftrage gebaut.
©er franjoi'ifrfie ©eneral ^at ben ©rafen Si^mard nad^ ber ^taU
23erfat(Ie^ beglettet Wan fagt, ba§ ber ©enerat 9?. bteiod^ter eine^
granjofen ge^eirat^et ^abe. SBenn i^r ben gitrften ermartet ij'dtttt,
fo ^atte er end^ in fein @rf)to| gefit^rt. §aft bn bem gelb^errn ben
(Srfo(g ber @(^(ac{)t angejeigt? ®ie ©olbaten ^ben bie @tabt
ae))tnnbert nnb jerftort. SSenn i^r biefen §elben gefannt ^dttet,
tt)iirbet i^r t^iffen, ba^ biefer 3Serbad)t nnbegriinbet ift. 5)er ®^nat
^at ber Sotf(i)aft be^ ^rdfibenten mit grower 2lnfmertfam!eit jnge^^
^ort. ©er ^rdfibent \)at bie franjofiji^e Siepnbli! anerfannt, nnb
bem ameritanifdien ©efanbten erianbt, in ^ari^ jn bleiben. 9Kein
grennb l^at brei .^a^re in Berlin ftnbirt. 33Bie-^ben @ie fii^ in ber
©efetlf^aft biefe^ |)errn amitfirt ?
What physician has cured the wound of that soldier?
Frederick has Improved very [much] in the last three months.
Do you know the boy ? .Have you ever seen (the) Count Bis-
marck? Do you know the conditions of (the) peace which the
Prussians have dictated ? We had expected the physician,
but he has sent his assistant. The Emperor Napoleon has
enlarged and embellished the city of Paris very [much] . Hav«
— T2 —
the Prussians not yet commenced (strong verb) to bombard
the city ? They have killed or wounded a great number of
French soldiers. One has almost ceased to speak of this affair.
There are few men that have not acknowledged this. The
ambassadors of England and Austria have submitted to the
King of Prussia other conditions, but it is said that the king has
declined them. We have almost sold out our whole stock, but
our friends have advised (anjeigen) us that they have shipped
(abfenben) another supply.
lOT.
2)cr D^effe, the nephew; beittJOl^nen (with dat.), to be present at;
ha^ ?anbgut, the country-seat; antt)enben, to employ;
ber ^ebiente, the (man) servant; *uberrafcl)en, to surprise;
bie iBorlefung, the lecture; t)erbienen, to deserve;
bie Sntjdjufbtgung, the excuse; abt)olen (with accus.), to call for;
ber Coffer, the trunk; brauc^en, to need (a. v.);
ber ©aftbof, the hotel; aufrid^ttg, upright, sincere*
ber gort|d)ritt, the progress; Qcfiitttg, obliging;
bie ^vone, the crown;' Qebovig, proper;
hit Strafe, the punishment, penalty; geniigenb, sufficient;
leben, to live (be alive); tttd^t blog, md)t nur, not only.
Obs. — 1. In SEPARABLE compouud verbs, the preposition gu as sign of the
infinitive is incorporated in the verb and placed immediately after the prefix
(anfaitgen — ang ufangen).
2. In order to, before an infinitive, is rendered by the prepositions Uttt —
gu: in order to praise, um 311 lobeit. Um is placed before all adjuncts of the in-
finitive if there are any: um morgen uad) ^L ju gel^en, in order to go to K. to-
morrow.
3. If a phrase with um — gu opens the sentence, the verb of the latter
must be placed before the subject. The same is the case if any sentence is
opened by an adjunct of the verb (objects, adverbs or prepositions) : Um ^u
leben, miif f en in tr arbelten, in order to live we must work. 3}Zit greunben
b i U t dl ftreng, with friends I am strict.
4. German adjectives in their crude forms (without endings) are used
as ADVERBS, corresponding to English adverbs in It/: (gie b^ben r t d) 1 1 g geur*
t^ettt, you have judged correctly.
5 If the conjunction hut stands after a negative phrase which it corrects,
it is translated by foubern, not by aber: S)ie§ tfl ntd^t tDetg, fonbern
jc^ttjorj, this is not whit© hut black.
— 73 —
6. The POSSESSIVE cask of nouns may generally be rendered by the Ger-
man genitive preceding its noun. In this instance the governing noun, as in
English, loses its article (the article or other determinative words, if there are
any, always belonging to the possessive case) : the boy's father, bc^ ^nat)en
^ater; the teacher's book, beg Se^rerS'
Qii) fomme, um bir gu fagen, ia^ ii) morgen md) nteine^ S^cffcn
Sanbgute abretfe* Qd) ^abe metncn Sebienten gefcf)t(ft, um mtr etn
^funb ^ndcx ju faufen. Sir teben nt(f)t, um ju effeu, fouberu tvxx
effen, um ju lebeu. Um glud Ud^ ju feiu, mug mau jufriebeu fein. .
Um greuube ju ^aben, mug mau nid)t blog aufri^tig, fouberu aud^
gefdffig fetu. Qd) ijahe uirf)t ^cit au^juge^eu. |)aben @ie bie ®ute,
biefe jtDei ^riefe abgufif)retben. SBolIeu ©ie fo gut feiu bie Slpre
aufjumat^eu? 3J?eiue^ 5)tad)bar^ ®o^u ^at jlDei ^ferbe gu tierfaufeu.
3ft e^ uo(^ ui^t 3eit aufjufte^eu ? Qd) ^abe ba^ 33erguiigeu ge^^
l^abt, beiuer @(f)mefter 3?orIefuug beiguujo^ueu. §abeu ©ie @tlb,
um biefeu $Riug gu faufen ? §at bein ^ater bir biefe^ ®elb gegebeu,
um ee fo f(^Ied)t augutDeuben? S)e^ giirfteu SEob l^at mid) fe^r uu^
augeuel^m iiberraf(f)t, ©eiuer ®(i)tr)efter greuubiu t)at ui^t uut^or*
fid)tig, fouberu fe^r toeife ge^aubelt. Qd) biu uic^t {)ier, um eure
(Sntfc^ulbiguugen auju^oreu, fouberu um bie ©trafe, bie i^r berbieut
l^abt, ju bictireu.
108.
My brother has six letters to copy. Have the kindness to
send me back my book. It is time to depart. Which dress do
you wish to put on ? Allow me to open the window, it is so
warm. Excuse me, it is not warm, but cold. You have the
bad habit to rise too late; you must not rise late, but as early
as you can. A soldier has (is) arrived in order to take along
the general's children. I have sent a servant to the hotel in
order to call for my sister's trunk. In order to make progress
(plur. in German), we must not play, but diligently work. We
need more money in order to continue this business properly.
In order to prepare [yourself] sufficiently, you will need not
one but three hours. The Emperor Napoleon has declared war
to the King of Prussia in order not to lose his crown.
■^
— T4 —
109.
Present Infinitive Passive: geloBt ttJCrben (geloBt gU tnerbetl), to be {jraised.
Present Indicative Passive : id) inerbe gelobt, I am praised;
bu njirji gelobt, thou art praised;
cr ttJirb gelobt, lie is praised;
ttJtr tuerben gelobt, we are praised;
il^r ttJerbet gelobt, you are praised;
ftC loerben gelobt, they are praised.
Passive Form with fetn : x6) bin gelobt, I am praised;
bu btft gelobt, thou art praised etc.
Obs. — 1. The present passive is easily distinguished from the future
active, the auxiliary ttjerbett in the latter being connected with the infini-
tive, and in the former with the past participle of the verb.
2. The passive with toerbetl is the ordinary form of the German passive, ,
denoting the actual happening or continuing of the action expressed by the
verb : bie geinbe tt) e r b e n Derfolgt, the enemy are pursued {are being pursued).
The form of the passive with fetn denotes a state, resulting from the action
expressed by the verb: ba§ §au^ t ft toerfauft, the house is sold (is a sold one),
denoting the result of the act of selling, while: ba§ §0U8 tuirb tJerfauft
denotes the actual going on of the sale (the house is being sold, for instance by
an auctioneer). K the action itself and its result are not distinguished, both
forms may be used with equal propriety: bic ^iCi\ii tt)trb (or tft) belagert, the
city is besieged. If for the English ordinary passive we use or may use the
progressive form of the passive, the German passive takes the auxiliary '
ttjerberu
3. The passive agent (doer of the action) is generally indicated by toon ,
with the dative (sometimes by burd^): bie @tabt tDtrb to o tt ben 2^ruppeii belo*
gert, the city is besieged by the troops.
4. The conjunction when is translated by ttoettii (not by al§), if it de-
notes whenever, or if the verb stands in the present, perfect or future tenses.
SYNOPSIS.
ttoatttt ? in questions, direct or indirect;
Itoenn, if denoting whenever or if the verb is in present, perfect or
when -I future;
al8, if the verb is in the imperfect or pluperfect, and does not
denote whenever.
ttoCtttl^ denoting contingency id conditional clauses;
ob, if denoting whetfier after verbs of asking or doubting.
5lttftellen, io appoint; befe^eit, to occupy;
aitgreifeti (part, attgegriffett), to attack; betteiben, to envy;
ou^riif^en, to endow; beletbigen, to insult;
attfiittett, to fill; blii^en, to flourish;
ad^ten, to esteem; etmten, to harvest;
belo^tten, to reward; , ' erl^ebeii (p. erl^obett), to collect;
I
T5
ttftawxm (v. a.)^ to astonish;
erfreuen, to delight;
gebraucf)en, to use;
getmgen, to succeed
l^affen, to hate;
Ueben, to love;
^laniren, to grade;
pfkftern/topave;
xdd^en, to avenge;
reparircn, to repair;
fcien, to sow;
ftrafen; to punish;
tdufd}en, to deceive;
*umqeben, (strong v,) ) ,
*,,^^- , ' \to surround;
•*uberl)aufcn, to overwhelm;
*uber3eugen, to convince;
t)erlaffen (strong), to leave, quit, desert;
t)erf(^Iiegen (p*t)erfd)Ioffen), to lock;
t)erforgen, to supply;
*t)oIlenben, to finish;
bic Stbgabe, the tax;
^tc mintage, the talent;
ber 5lntrag, the application;
bic 5(rbeit, the work, labor;
bic Hrt, the kind;
bag 2)ampfboot, the steamboat;
bcr ^tfcnbal^njug, the railroad-train;
bic Srbtttcrung, the animosity;
ber gaU, the ca«e;
ba^ gelb (pi. getbcr), the field;
bcr grii^Ung, the spring;
ber ©egner, the adversary;
ha^ ©ctreibe, the grain;
ber §onbeI, the trade;
ber §erbft, the autumn;
ber ^dufer, the purchaser;
ber ^ahtn, the shop;
ba6 !t?anb^an8, the villa;
hit li[?eben§mtttel^ (pi.) the victuals;
ha^ ^e^rbud), the text-book;
ber ^lan, the plan;
ber ^ole, the Pole;
bic 9legeltnd6tg!eit, the regularity;
ber 9luffe, the Russian;
bcr ©omiTter, the summer;
ber UI)rmad)er, the watchmaker;
ha^ iBcrbienft, the merit;
ber ilSeingartcn, the vineyard;
gef(i)t(ft, able;
frud^tbar, fertile;
reid)U(^, abundant;
fonberbar, odd;
unnjtffenb, ignorant;
fogteic^, presently, directly, immed-
iately;
liberal, everywhere.
Qd) tt)erbe t)on meinem aSater gelobt, iDettn id) flet^ig bin. !Du
tDirft t)on beinem 8c^rer getabelt, tvtil hn immer fau( bift J)er ge==
fc^idte Tlann n)irb gelobt unb ber itmtjiffenbe getabelt. SBetc^e ^m^
ben n)erben beto^nt unb iDeWie n^erben geftraft ? S^iejenigen, toddjt
flei^ig finb, ttjerben belo^ntunb bie, tr)el(^e fani fiub, geftraft. 2Bir
n^erben Don unfern SItern geliebt; i^r merbet Don ben enrigen geta==
belt. 3UJeine Sritber tnerben t)on ^^^^^'^^ann gead)tet, SBir irerben
t)on unfern geinben ge{)a^t. 35ie Slbgabcn tuerben je^t mtt ber gro^^
ten 3?egelmd^igfeit er^oben. ©er Srieg tt)irb mit grower (Srbit^
terung fortgefe^t. SBenn i^r Don euern geinben befeibigt lt)erbet,
mitgt i^r end) nic^t rad)en. SBir ^ben unfer ^am Derfaffen,
meil e^ {e^t re^arirt mirb. Senn ba§ ©etreibe gefaet toirb, ift e^
griif)ang; tt)enn e^ geerntet tt)irb, ift e« ©omnter ober ^erbft. ^ft
-- t6 —
bte S^iir Derfd^Ioffen ? Q^ bin erftaunt, bag ©ie etne ©ad^e (cause)
t)ert^eibtgen, bie ntrf)t Dert^etbigt hjerben fann. Unfere Slrbeit tft
t)olIenbet; iDir ^offen, bag bu fie loben totrft @^ fd^eint, bag biefe^
S)orf t)on feinen SinlDo^nern t)er(a[fen tft. @ein ^ii^^^^^ ift ntit
ben fonberbarften ©ac^en angefiillt. gr tobtete feinen ®egner, um
nid^t t)on il^m getobtet jn merben. Unfere ®tabt ift (tnirb) t)Ott ben
frud^tbarften gelbern umgeben. ©n fannft nidE)t in bie ®tabt fom>
men, ba fie t)on ben geinben befefet ift (or n^irb).
110.
I am envied by my friends, but thy merits are acknowled- .
ged by all. The king is deceived by his servants*. The
President is daily overwhelmed by applications of every
kind. We are overwhelmed with work (plur. in German)
which has been in our hands for a year. These books are no
more read. What text-books are used in your school ? Are
the Poles loved or hated by the Russians? Is your work
finished? It is not yet finished, but it shall (fotlen) be finished
presently. I am surprised that your father should have given
(transl. has given) this permission. Are you not convinced
that these plans will succeed ? The inhabitants say that they
are abundantly supplied with victuals. How is the city of New
York supplied with victuals ? The railroad-trains and steam-
boats convey (bringen) them daily to the city. My watch is
now repaired; the watchmaker has sent it back to me. My
watch is now (being) repaired by the watchmaker. Is thy
wound not healed yet ? The streets of our city are now being
graded and paved. When the shops are filled with purchasers,
(the) trade is fiourishing. If that work cannot be continued
by you, it must be finished by your brother. You are deserted
by your friends because they are always insulted by ^ you.
We are delighted that your diligence is now better rewarded
than** it was formerly the case. Since you are occupiedf
* S3ebtente is a menial servant; 2)tener comprises aU kinds of servants.
A servant of God, etn ^ n e d) t @otte§. Otherwise ^tTed)t is used of the lowest
kinds of servants,
** %l^, than, throws the following: verb to the end of the clause.
t To occupy is rendered by befeljeti, if it means to take possession : but by
be{d)dfttgen, if it refers to work. ^
— n —
with too many engagements (Slrbeit), we shall appoint another
assistant. My brother is expected by his friends while he is
expecting them. Our soldiers were obliged to attack the
enemy (plur.) in order not to be attacked by them. This man
is endowed with the highest talents. The city is everywhere
surrounded with villas and vineyards.
111.
Imperfect Indicative Passive: \6) ttJUrbe* getobt, I was praised;
bu iDurbefl gelobt, thou wast praised;
cr IDurbc gelobt, he was praised;
tore ft)urben gelobt, we were praised;
\\fc ttjurbet gelobt, you were praised;
ftc ftjurben gelobt, they were praised.
Present Subjunctive Passive : id^ ttJerbe (bu iDerbefi, er UJCrbe etc.) gelobt.
Imperfect Subjunctive Passive : t(^ tuiirbe (bu ttJUrbejl, er tDUrbc etc.) gclobt.
Obs 1. The imperfect indicative passive is formed by the auxiliary
ttjurbe, the imperfect of the verb tDerben, to become, whose subjunctive is ttjurbc.
The imperfect subjunctive passive is easily distinguished from the active
conditional, the auxiliary iriirbe in the latter being construed with the
infinitive, and in the former with the past participle of the verb.
2. Instead of the ordinary passive with iDerben in these tenses and
moods, a passive with f e t n is used under the same circumstances as in the
present indicative (No. 109, Obs. 2): Imperfect Indicative: id) Wax geliebt, I was
loved; Present Subjunctive : id) jet geliebt (generally translated by the past
tense); Imperfect Subjunctive: \&j xtyaxt geliebt. S)er !?aben Vdax gefdjloffen, the
shop was closed, if it means that the shop was a closed one, as a result of its
having been closed before. But: ber ?aben tt) ur b e gefd^loffen, if the act of
closing is described (the shop was being closed). If the action itself and its
re3ulting state are not distinguished, we generally use the auxiliary ttJurbc
in the imperfect.
3. The use of the subjunctive passive is the same as that of the cor-
responding active tenses (No. 99. 101.)
Hbl^aucn (strong verb), to cut down; bebecfett, to cover;
abtragen (strong)^ to pull down; bebrol^en, to threaten;
anreben, to address; be'^anbeltt, to treat;
auf fatten (strong), to delay; beldftigen, to molest;
bcbaueru, to regret; bertd^ten, to report;
* In higher style the form \6) h) ar b is used instead of \6) iuurbe, in the
singular.
— 78 —
bcftcgctt, to defeat;
bett)unbern, to admire; *
einlaben (strong), to invite;
cntbedfen, to discover;
ernd^ren, to support;
crhjeifen (part, erftjiefcn), to prove;
fortrdumen, to remove;
qudlen, to torment;
fd)Uegeu (part, gefd^loffen), to close;
ftoren, to disturb;
troften, to console;
*utiternc^ten, to instruct;
Derldumben, to slander;
tjermiet^en, to rent;
berfel^eit (strong), to provide;
toerurt^eiien, to condemn;
Dermatten, to administer;
h)ieber aufbauen, to rebuild;
ber 5(bi)0Cat (weak decl.), the lawyer;
ber 5lngrtff, the attack;
bag Sluge, the eye;
ber 5lnge!(agtc, the accused;
ber 53a^n^of, the railroad station;
ber Pettier, the beggar;
bte 33e(agerung, the siege;
ber Sigent^iimer, the owner;
bag (Sinfommen, the income;
bte ^mnalfmt, the revenue;'
ber ©aft, the guest;
ber ©efangene, the prisoner;
bag §inbemt6, the obstacle;
bie ^anonabe, the cannonade;
bte ?eute (pi), the individuals;
ber SD^arjd^, the march;
bte $artet, the party;
ber ^ftduber, the robber;
ber 9^td^ter, the judge;
ba^ ®d)ieferbad^, the slate-roof;
bte ©d^ittbel, the shingle;
bag @d)iff, the ship;
bie @(f)ulb, the guilt, the debt;
ber ©eerduber, the pirate;
bie @prad)e, the language;
bag 35erbre(i)eit, the crime;
ber SSuttbarj^t, the surgeon;
betrdd)tli^, considerable;
beutfd), German;
buntei, dark;
fro^, glad;
ieer, empty;
^)rdd)ttg, magnificent;
fd)recflid^, terrible; .
bort, there;
nidjt einmal, not even.
Qn me(cf)em 3a^re unb Don tDem tt)urbe 2lmerifa entbcdt ? SBcr,
xoax ber 9)?ann, tion bem bu ^eute in ber ^amiltonftra^e angerebet
iDurbeft ? 3l(^ id) no(^ SBien retfte, n)urbe id) nhtvaU t)on Settlem
belafttgt. SBa^renb bn t)on betnen greunben beiDunbert tDurbeft,
n)urben n)ir t)on unfern g^etnben t)erldnmbet. ^d) wax erftaunt, ha^
Wix noc^ ntd)t^ t)on btr ge^ort l^atten. !l)ie §aufer biefer ^tat)t
toaxm bamate mit ®(i)tnbeln bebecft; je^t finbet man bort nnr (Bdjk^
ferbac^er. SDtein greunb getgte mir an, ba^ feine 233nnbe wod) nic^tj
ge^eilt fet; er fitgte fjinjn, ba^ er Don feinem SBnnbarjte fe^r (tjieOj
geqnalt raerbe. 9)ietne ^riiber in S3er(in t^eiften mir mit, ba^ ficj
faft tdglic^ Don beinen grennbcn eingelaben tniirben/ 3Benn id) Don
meinen geinben ge^^t tDlirbe, fo iDiirbe id) fie nic^t l^affen, fonbemi
Keben. SBenn id) Don meinen grennben Derlaffen n^are, fonnte id)\
mid) nid)t kid)t troften. ^c^ n^iirbe fe^r frol^ fein, tDenn btefej
— 19 —
|)inbenttffc f ortgcrauntt tt^Urben. 3116 btcfer Srtef gefdEirieben tonxbt,
toaixn bie 3lugen, bit i^n lefen fotlten (were to), fdjon gef cutoff en.
'Der ^ngetfagte murbe bon ben 9tid^tern berurt^eilt, h)eil ba^ 9Ser*
bretfien emiefen lt)ar, unb feine @(^ulb nid^t bejtDeifelt* iDerben fonntc,
112.
The Russians were defeated by the English in the battle
of (bei) Inkerman. The city was threatened with a siege, but
the threat was treated with contempt by the inhabitants**.
The city was threatened with a siege [ever] since the third
of March. In what year wast thou sent to Germany by thy
friends? The prisoners were defended by able lawyers.
In what battle were you wounded ? When I departed from
the city, I was accompanied by my friends to the railroad
station. I was astonished when I heard that my friend
Charles was not invited. When we were sailing (reifen)
to Europe, our ship was pursued by a pirate. While you
were instructed by Mr. Reiley, I was studying Ahn's
Grammar of the German Language. We were obliged
to quit our house because it was repaired. At that time all
hotels of the city were filled with guests, but now they are
empty. When it was dark, a terrible cannonade was opened
(eroffnen) by the enemy. Was thy wound healed or not when
thou wast returning to the city ? It was not healed then, but
it was treated by the surgeon. The general reported that his
march was being delayed by attacks of the enemy. My friend
declared that he was abundantly provided with money. He
said that he was daily molested by individuals who were
disturbing him in his work. If my debts were paid (beja^Ien),
my income would be sufficient to support me. I would regret
very much if these beautiful trees were cut down. Were your
streets at that time in good condition (bet ©tanb) ? No, they
were not even paved; but they are being paved now. If your
* in the passive to doubt must be translated by be;;tt)etfettt, not by
gmeifeln.
** All those adjuncts of the verb which complete its idea, mugt bo
placed after the passive agent. /
— 80 —
house were rented, your revenues would increase (themselves)
considerably. Would we pay fewer taxes, if our city were
[being] administered by your party? If you were attacked
by robbers, would you defend yourself or not? The house
was pulled down by the owner in order to be rebuilt more
magnificently.
113.
Perfect Indicative Passive: xi) bttt gelobt iDOrben, I have been praised;
bu btft getobt tDorben, thou hast been praised;
er tft gelobt toorben, he has been praised;
Xoxx finb getobt irorben, we have been praised;
\\)X feib gelobt toorben, you have been praised;
fie finb gelobt toorbeit, they have been praised.
Perfect Subjunctive Passive: id) fei gelobt tnorben, bu fetft (er fet, \mx feieu, etc.)
gelobt njorben.
Pluperfect Indicat. Passive: i(^ rtjar getobt ttiorbett, I had been praised; •
bu trarft getobt roorben, thou had^t been praised;
er Voax getobt toorben, he had been praised;
irir Ujoren getobt iDorben, we had been praised;
\\)X tt>aret getobt toorben, you had been praised;
fte luaren getobt tnorben, they had been praised.
Pluperfect Subjunct. Passive: \6) trdre getobt irorben, bu tt)dreft (er tt)dre, -etc.)
getobt trorben.
Obs. — 1. The perfect and pluperfect passive are formed by the perfect
(tc^ bin tt)orben) and the pluperfect (id) Xoax irorben) of trerbenf (to become),
in connection with the past participle of the verb.
2. The rules No. 99, Obs. 5 and 6, as to the use of the subjunctive and
its tense after verbs of believing, stating^ etc., are applicable to the passive
voice, the same as to the active: er gtaubte, 'ixi'^ \6) in ber (Sd)tac!^t Der*
ttjunbet tnorben fei ober it) a r e , he believed that I had been wounded
in battle.
3. The pluperfect subjunctive is often used in hypothetical periods
with the force of the English potential with should (would) have (or should
tvotdd have been in the passive): See No. 101, Obs. 2: id^ 1^ d tit i^u g ef el^ en;
t The verb ttjerben, if not an auxiliary, takes the augment in the parti-
ciple: id) bin g e tt)orben, I have become; id) tvax g e tnorben, I had become.
— 81 —
I shmld have seen him; er lt» S r c tion mtr gefe^ctt tcorbeti^he wovld have
been seen by me.
4, In ordinary sentences the pbrfeot is frequently used in German, when
in English only the simple past tense would be proper: t(^ b t n geftertl in
hex @tabt g e tt) e f e n , I was yesterday in town.
5, The conjunction ctfteris translated by the German conjunction nadj*
htm, and the conjunction before by el)e, betior. All these require the verb to
be placed at the end of the clause: nad^betnid) t^n gel^ort ^attc, after
I had heard him; nad^bemtrgetobtet tDorben tnar^f after he had
been killed; e^e (bet)or) er angefangen ^atte, before he had commenced.
5lu«ful^ren, to execute; ' bie S3urgfd)aft, the bail, ( to give
benac^ndjtigen, to inform; bail, ^iirgjd) aft leiften);
befeittgen, to remove; bk ©ntfc!^dbigung(sing,), the damages;
corrtgtren, to correct; i)a^ geuer, the fire;
entlaffetl (strong v.), to dismiss; ber ^Iciger, the plaintiff;
cntmut^tg en, to discourage; bie SJJii^e, the trouble;
Ipftegen, to nurse; ber ^ro^eg, the law-suit;
^rotefttren, to protest; bte ^rafibentfd^aft, the presidency;
*iiberfenben, to send over; ber 9latl)geber, the adviser;
*iibertragen(stvong), to confer (upon); bie @telle, the place;
toer^aften, to arrest; ber 'Xelegra^^ (weak d,),the telegraph;
Derlangen, to demand; bte 3Sa^I, the election;
t)erratt)en (strong), to betray ; ber 2Bed)f et, the note (bill of exchange) ;
bortaben (strong), to summon; ber ^^^^^^^^t^r ^^^ custom-house
tuarnen, to warn; officer;
5lnbrea^, Andrew; attattttfi^, Atlantic;
ber ^uftrag, the order; tiergeblicf), in vain;
bie ^an!, the bank; gn)eifelf)aft, doubtful.
Qi) bin t)on metnem ge^rer geftraft morben, iDeil id) biefe 9Iufga^
ben abgef(f)rieben I)abe. S^-n btft Don betnem Dnfel be(of)nt tDorben,
ttjeil bn feine U^r gefnnben Ijaft. ^einrid) tft fitr [eine Wn\}C ni(i)t
beIo!)nt tDorben. 35ie[e 9tac^rirf)t tft am t)on §errn TloU niitget^eilt
n)orbcn. 3Son mem ift biefe 2lnf gabe corrigtrt iDorben ? d^ ift mix
gefagt ttjorben, ba^ ©te einen Sebienten fndjen. ©tefe ^ad)xid}t ift
un^ bnrc^ (by) ^cn atlantifi^en 3:elegrap^en iiberfanbt inorben.
S)iefe6 ®elb ift mir geja^It n)orben, nat^bem ii^ e^ ^tDeimal bergeblicf)
Dertangt ^atte. 5Ra(^bem ber ^riifibent Lincoln getobtet tDorben toar^
t In such passive constructions the participle tt)orben is sometimes
omitted: naci)bem er getobtet rt)ar.
— 82 —
tourbe btc ^rafibetttft^aft Slnbrea^ G'o^ttfon iibcrtragcn. SBer pflcgte
eud^r al6 il)r in ber @(f)Iad)t t)erti)unbet morben mart? £arl be^
l^auptete, ba^ btefe 5yfa(^ricf)t tl^m Don feinen greitnben norf) m(f)t mit^
get^eift n^orben fet. Unfere ^tdm fonnten nic^t au^gefii^rt iDerben,
nad^bem fie unfern ©egnern t)errat^en tDorben tDaren. SKeine greunbe
glaubten, ba^ id) in ber@d^Ia(^t getobtet iDorben fei, ®te geinbetDer-
mnt^eten, ba^ \m burd^ (by) nnfere 9Jieberiage entmutljigt iDorben'
iDiiren* SBarum anttDortet il)r, ef)e i^r t)on enrem Server gefragt
iDorben feib ? J)ie geinbe fIo{)en (fled), bet)or [no(^] ba^ gener t)on
nnl eroffnet (opened) tt)orben iDar. 9Benn bn meinen dtatij befolgt
tjdtteft, tDiirft bn nidjt t)on beinem ®egner bei (at) ber 2Sat)t be*
fiegt niorben. S)iefer 23orfd)tag ircire Don inir nxi)t angenominen
(accepted) tDorben, toenn id^ nic^t t)on meinen 9tat{)gebern getdnfc^t
morben n^dre.
114.
I have been informed that you have opened (eroffnet) a
school in the city of New York. This debt has never been
paid. Almost all custom-house officers have been dismissed by
the President. Your note has been protested by the bank.
After your cousin had been arrested, I was summoned by the
judge in order to give bail for him. We continued our journey
after these obstacles had been removed. William paid me a
visit, before I had been informed that he was here. Before
your orders had been executed, we heard that (the) war had
been declared. Your brother stated in his letter that he had
lost his law-suit and was condemned to pay damages to the
plaintiff. It is doubtful whether I would have found bail, if I
had been arrested. If I had been in your place, I should not
have been defeated by my adversary. If you had had better
advisers, you would have been warned by them.
— 88 —
116.
\i6) frcuen, to rejoice, to be glad.
idf) freue mt(^, I rejoice, I am glad; id} l^abe tntd) gefreut, I have rejoiced;
I have been glad, etc. ;
bu freufl bid), thou art glad, etc.; bu ^aft bid^ gefreut,
er freut fief), er Ijat fid) gefreut,
mv freuen un§, ttJtr ^abett un^ gefreut,
.i^r freut eud^, i^r ^abt eud) gefreut,
fie freuen fid). fte l)aben fid^ gefreut.
Obs. — 1. A great number of German reflexive verbs (construed with a
reflexive pronoun) correspond to English neuter or passive verbs or to
whole phrases: f id^ Derbreitcn, to spread; ft(^ tdufd^eu, to be disappointed; ftd^
Jcljen, to take a seat. The reflexive pronouns (unless governed by preposi-
tions) are generally, but not always, in the accusative. In f ic!^ fd)meid)ehl, to
flatter one's self, fid) eiubilben, to imagine, and several others the reflexive
pronouns are datives: id) {d^mctd^Ie mir , etc.
2* The English compounds with self (myself, thyself, himself, etc.) , are
not to be considered as reflexives if they qualify nouns or pronouns with
BMPHATiCAL forcc. In this case they are rendered by the German indeclinable
•fclbft (orfelber): 3(^ I)abe ben 3}iann felbft gefel^erf, I have seen the man
himself; e r f e t b ft fagte e^, he said so himself; i 6) xotxbt f e I b ft ge^en, /shall
go myself
3. If the English compounds with self have both a reflexi ve and emphat-
ical force (which always is the case when reflexives have the rhetorical accent) ,
they are rendered by the German reflexives in connection with felbft: He has
killed himself (and no other), er l)at f i (3^ f e I b ft getobtet; you must not praise
yourselves (but others you may), i^r miifit euc^ nid)t f elb ft loben.
4:. The English reciprocals each other, one another are either translated
by the indeclinable einanber, or, if no ambiguity can arise, by the reflexive
pronouns either alone, or in combination with einanber: fie fd)impfen \id) ,
they abuse each other; trtr l)affen einanber, we hate each other; fie ftoreu f i (^
etnanber, they disturb each other. Often German reciprocal verbs are ex=
pressed by neuter verbs in English: f t d^ treffen, to meet (one another); ft 6)
(mit einanber) unterl)alten, to converse.
^bgel^en (al>gegangen), to leave (neuter fic^ begegnen, to meet;
verb); befd^cibigen, to damage;
jtd^ omiifiren, to enjoy one's self; ftdf) biiden, to stoop down;
anbeuten, to intimate; banfen (with dative), to thank;
ouf{)eben (aufge!^oben), to pick up; pd^ erinnern (with gen.), to remember;
fid) aufl)a(ten (strong), to stay; jtd^ erfunbigen, to inquire;
auSbrennen, to burn out; fid^ erfditen, to take a cold;
fid^ befinben (befunben), to do, to be jtd^ ergeben (strong), to surrender
(of the health); (one's self);
— 84 —
ftd) etnbttben, to imagine;
fid) fiigetl, to submit;
gcl)orrf)en (with dative), to obey,
fatten (strong), to keep;
l^erau^forbern, to challenge;
fld^ ndl)ern, to approach;
rcgieren, to govern;
jic^ fe^en, to take a seat;
treffen (getroffen), to hit;
fid) trennen (to separate (from one
another) ;
*fxd) unterl)alten (strong), to converse;
*unteiTid)ten, to instruct;
*unterftiiljen, to support;
fid) Uerbcugen, to bow (down);
t)erpf(id)ten, to pledge;
tierfcmicn, to misjudge;
fid) Dcrfammeln, to assemble;
tierurf ad) en, to cause;
toemicfcin, to implicate;
*fid) iDiberfet^en (with dative), to op-
pose, to resist;
tt)iebericl)CU (strong), to see again;
fi(^ irunbern, to wonder;
^aijkn, to number;
gugeben (strong), to concede;"]
bic Slnforberutig, the demand;
bie Hnorbniing, the regulation;
ber ^u(pvud), the claim;
ber 5Irgtt)0^n, the suspicion;
htx 5(u0fd^u§, the board;
ber iBeamte, the officer;
haQ ©elbftiidf, the piece of money;
ha^ ©efel^, the law;
ber §inime(, Heaven;
bie ^anonenfugel, the cannon ball;
ba« SRitglieb (plur. 3Jiitgtieber), the
member;
bie £)brig!eit, the authorities;
ber @d)aben, the damage;
bie @i^ung, the session, meeting;
bie Unternel^muttg, the enterprise;
ber 35orfi^enbe, the chairman;
bie.3uftimmung, the approbation, con-
sent;
ougerft, extreme;
befannt, known (as adj.);
beutUc^, distinct;
gered^t, just;
Iteb, dear;
Tnel^rere, several;
miibe, tired;
ftrenge, severe;
tobtlid), fatal;
tno^t, well;
\va^ iTiad^en (Sie, how is your health ?
3lbfc^ieb'nel)men, to take leave;
fid) (dat.) iBeiregung (fem.) maditn, to
take exercise;
33eifaE finben, to meet with favor.
• (Suten 2:ag, tieber §)einrt^, Qd) frcite mid), bi(^ tDieberjufel^en.
5Bie befinbeft bu hid) ? Qd) befinbe mid) fel)r n)oI)I, feit id) in dim
3)orf tt)oI)ne. SBa^ m'ad)t bcin ©ruber ? 3ft er woijl ? Qa, er bc^*
finbet fii^ fel)r n)oI)L Sa^ tl)uft bit, gubtDig ? Qd^ fleibe mit^ an.
^(eibet if)r end) nod) nid)t an ? Sir n)crben un^ fpater auHeiben.
211^ bie aiiitgtieber be§ 2lu§f(^uffe§ fid) t^erfammelt I)atten, iDurbe ha^
^xototoU (the minutes) ber let^ten ©i^itng t3om SSorfiljcuben oerfe*
fen.f SBir biidten un^ alle, urn nid)t Don ben ^anonenfugeln getrof^
fen ju trierben. SS3arum ^aft bu bid) nid}t erfunbigt, trmin berCSifen^*
t To read, lefen, nortefen, ablefen, Oerlefen. The simple verb Ie(en de-
notes reading in general; the compounds denote io read aloud. In the sentence
ftbove the simple verb would be improper.
— 85 —
bafinjug abge^t? Sir fjaben un$ nod) meittaf^ ben Slnorbnungen ber
Obrtgteit n)iberfe^t. Sir erinnern un^ bie)e§ 2)ianne^ feljt beut(id).
grinncrt tl)r tnd) nidjt, bafe il)r eu(^ Derppt(i)tet I)attet, ben ©efefeen
}U ge^ordien? Sir ()aben felbft nidjt geglaubt, ba^ bie 2KitGlieber
fi{^ biefen Slnforbcrnngcn fiigen iDiirben. Sir frenten nn^, ate ttjtr
I)ortcn, ba^ @ie felbft nnjere 5lnfprii(^e nnterftU^en tnitrben^ ©ein
2?ater fetbft ift in biefe aingelegenljcit t)ern)i(felt iDorben. Ql)v mii^t
felbft anerfennen, ba§ nieine 3lntrdge gered)t finb* §elft end) felbft,
bann (then) tt)irb ber §immel end) I}c(fen. ®n Dernrtljeilft btd^
fetbft, menn bn bie^ jngibft. Sann trerben wix nn^ ipieberfel)en?
& wax nidjt belannt, ba^ biefe §erren fid) f^on fennen. ®ie Wdn^
ner ndl)erten fid) einanber o()ne ^rgn)oI)n. ^arl nnb Sin)e(m fnd)en
fid) einanber [fd}on] feit tdnger (for more) afe einer @tnnbe. Sari
nnb id) begegneten nn^ geftern breimat in ber ©tra^e, .9?e^mt iel^t
3lbfd)ieb t)on einanber, liebe Sinbcr, i()r miij^t end^ trennen; i()r ()abt
feine 3cit ^^i}^'r ^i^ti) ntit einanber gn nnter^atten. Qd) glanbe, ba^
tt)ir nn§ einanber berfannt f)aben ; tt)ir irolten fiinftig (for the future)
gnte grennbe fein.
116.
Were you not extremely glad when you heard that this
war had been finished (beenben) ? I have staid here for more
than three months. How did you enjoy yourself in my
brother's company? The enemy did not oppose the march of
our army. Doest thou not remember my older brother ? Re-
member, my son, that our days are numbered ! How do you
do, Charles? I am not very well, I have t%ken a cold. I do
not wonder; you take too little exercise. I bowed, when I
recognized the President. The ambassador bowed, in order
to intimate his approbation. Why doest thou stoop down?
In order to pick up a small piece of money that I have
lost. I imagined that my enterprise would meet with more
favor; but I was mistaken. Why do you not take a seat ?
You must be tired. I thank you, I cannot stay [any] longer.
What damage has been caused by this fire ? Several rooms
are burned out, but the house itself has not been damaged
much. Have you not conceded ygurself that this city must
— 86 —
surrender soon and cannot keep (itself) much longer? Hare
you heard this of the President or of one of his officers f ? I have
seen myself that the accused has beaten the boy. Who has
instructed your brother ? Nobody, he has instructed himself.
You must never be more severe with others than with yourself.
Those that cannot govern others, -cannot govern themselves.
Will you not send a servant in order to buy these things ? No,
it is better that I go myself. Po you know if these peoplej
know each other? The two soldiers wounded each other; but
their wounds were not fatal. We have met to-day, but did
not recognize one another. Do you know that two members
of the Senate have challenged each other ? Mr. Nollet and I
have conversed (for) two hours (with each other).
117.
1. @S regnet, it rains; eS ft^ttctt (jd^tieet), it snows; e§ frtert, it freezes; c§
bUt^t, it lightens; e§ bonnert, it thunders; eS tagt, the day breaks; e§ flopft,
Bomebody knocks; e§ Idutet, the beU rings; eS ift fait, it is cold; e§ ttnrb !alt,
it begins to be (is getting) cold.
- ttttd^, I am
hungry;
2. x6) frtere or e8 friert 1 f cold;
id^ fdimi^e . . '. ,, eg jc^tDt^t perspiring;
idj^ungere, idj bin ^ungrtg,
i)abe §unger ,, eg ^ungert
\6) burfte, id) bin burfttg, ^abc
S)urft ,,e8bnrftetj thirsty;
id) bin ttjarm L warm.
3. 2Bag ifl 31^nen?- what ails you, what is the matter with you?
2Bie tfi 3l^nen ? how do you feel ?
(58 ifl tntr
c8 iDirb mtr
latt,
xoaxm,
tt)Ot)I,
untt)o^I,
lib el,
. fc^njtnbltg,
I feel
I begin to feel
' cold;
warm;
well;
unwell;
sick in my stomach;
giddy.
^g tfl mtr, alS ob . . (with subjunctive), I feel (it seems to me) as if
eg fommt" mtr tJOr, { ^^|^^ ; ; ^^.^j^ g^^. ^^ it appears (seems) to me [ *f j*^; ;
t Officer is translated by S3eamte, if a civU officer is meant; an officer of
the army is translated by Officter»
X This people, btejeg ^olf; these peoples, bicfe iBolIer; these people (mdiYiduals),
blefc !i?eute.
— 87 —
4. eS orgcrt mtd^,
' angry, displeased,
e§ e!e(t mxdf,
disgusted,
eg t)erbrie6t mi(f) (part
vexed, irritated,
Derbroffen), '
e§ njunbert mid) (tdft
munbre mid^),
eg freut mid), eg tft mir
bog, ..lam
(tt)cnn)... ■
astonished,
glad, pleased.
that.
•(iO «
lieb (ic^ freue mic^),
eg betrubt mid), eg tf)Ut
grieved, sorry,
mir (eib, eg fc^mergt
mic^, J
5, x^ (irgere mid), id) bin '
draerUd|,
td) etie mid),
angry, displeased, '
treit, (ba^)
disgusted,
id) bin Derbrieglid),
ioj bin betriibt, id^ bin
' I feel, (am)
vexed, imtated.
• becau
grieved, sorry,
tranrig,
sad,
Obs.-1. The number of impersonal expressions is considerably larger in
German than in English. Almost every German sentence, not having a
mere personal pronoun for a subject, may be cast into an impersonal form,
in which case the subject must be placed after the verb: eg rottt ber Conner,
the thunder rolls; eg tvax bieg ein nener iBenjeig, bag. . this was a new proof,
that. . The impersonal form is generally preferred if indefinite substantives
are the subjects: eg flopft 3»emanb, somebody knocks; eg ift 9^iemanb ha,
nobody is there; eg ift ein gener anggebrod^en, a fire has broken out.
2, Those impersonal expressions that are construed with an accusative
or dative (enumerated No 2, 3, and 4) frequently begin with their accusatives
or datives in which instance the impersonal eg is generally dropped : mi(^
fricrt, I am cold; mid^ bnrftet, I am thirsty; mir ift unttJOl^I, I feel unwell.
Those impersonals enumerated No. 4 always drop the eg, if the dependent
clause (with bag or tt)enn) is placed at the beginning of the sentence; other-
wise the eg is more generally retained: mir t^nt j[eg) leib, ha^, etc., I am
sorry that, etc; but: bag @ie nid)t tommen, tl^ut mir leib, I am sorry that
you do not come. Those expressions enumerated No. 1 never drop the eg.
Stugfe^en (bn fte^jl ang), to look (with
a clause or with an adjective) ;
bet)err(d^en, to rule over;
bred)en (part, gebrod^en), to break;
belten, to bark;
ge^en (gegangen), to walk, to step;
l^eigen, to warm (heat) the rooms,
build a fire (in the stove);
l^errfd^en, to rule, to prevail;
lanfen (strong v.), to run;
mitbringen, to bring along;
9^ot^ leiben, to suffer;
reid)en, to hand;
tjerfcinmen (strong), to miss;
toerftel^en, to understand;
tooriiberge^en (strong), to pass;
tndrmen, to warm (a person);
tie S^re, the honor;
baQ ©etnttter, the thunder-storm; baS 5Serf^red^en, the promise;
ber topfic^mera (pi. bie to^ffdimerseii), bie Ui1ad)e, the cause;
the headache; ber iBeftwinb, the west-wind;
bie §au^tl)iir, the street-door; bunfet, dark;
bie lt^ran!l}eit, the sickness; getDo^nlid), ordinary, common;
bie 9^ad)t, the night; ^ ^erglid^, sincere;
ber @clat)e, the slave; nag, wet;
bie @id)erl)eit, the safety; untreu, faithless;
ba§ ©d^neeluetter, the snow-storm; burd)aug nid)t, not at all;
bie ®umme, the sum; Dielleidjt, perhaps;
(bag) XI}autt)etter, a thaw; ^eute (5(benb), l^eute CUfla^^t), to-night;
bag S)atertanb; one's own country,
fatherland;
einmal,r^"^(^P^^^*^^^)-
(S§ ift f(^ted)teg ^Better, there is a storm; it is bad weather.
(SSift Oftiutnb, the wind is east.,
2)ie ®efd)dfte cje^en fd)Ied)t, business is dull.
(S8 betrifft (past. part, betroffen) miCtj (mi^ bctrifft) ein Unfatt (m.)
I meet with an accident.
SRegnet e^? S^3 regnet nod^ nid^t, aber e^ mirb foglett^ anfangen
ju regnen. @>3 I)at bie ganse )!fta(i)t gefc^nett. Sir merben tnorgen
©d^neetnetter I)aben. (5^ iDirb fait, wiv miiffen balb ein(}ei5en. SBirb
e^ ittorgen frieren ? 9Jein, e^ t^irb Sl^aumetter fein* ^aben ©ie fic^
[f^on] getDdrmt? Sleiti, icf) brauc^e mi(^ m(i)t ju lijarmen; e^ ift mir
buri^au^ nid)t fait, 9Ba^ ift bir, Sari? Su fie^ft bla^ am, d^ ift
mir nur ein tDenig iibel; e^ iDirb balb t)oritbergeI)en. 2Bie ift bir
je^t? Wiv tpirb beffer, irf) I)abe nur [nod}] ein t^enig topffi^merjen.
a^ fc^eint, ba^ e^ 3^nen fd)n3inblig ift. 9Zein, id) t^ill 3^nen offen
geftel)en, ba^ id) §nnger I)abe. T)nrftet end), Sinber? (g^3 t^nt mir
leib, ba^ fein 9Baffer in nnferm §anfe ift. 2iSie fiel^ft bu an^, §ein^
rid)? bnfd^iDi^eft; bn l^aft gett)iB (I suppose) jn ftarf (much) ge^
Idnfen? S^ wax mir, al^ ob id) einen §nnb bellen l^orte, nnb id^
^orte ni(^t anf gn lanfen, bi^ i^ in @id)er^eit tDar. 9Ba^ (at -what)
t)erbrie^t hid}? Qd) bin drgerlid), ineil id) ^ente jmeimal in meiner
Slrbeit geftort morben bin. @^ l)at mic^ nie me^r ge^nngert, al^
geftern. 2}iid) bnrftet fe^r, 2JJntter, id) mod)te (No. 101, Obs. 3)
ein ®Ia§ SBaffer f)aben. S5enn i^r I)nngrig iDdret, iDiirbet it)r ener j
©rot gegeffen ^aben. d^ iDnnbert mid^ bnrdE)an^ nid^t, ba^ ©ie bie^J
nid)t t)erftel)en. griebrid) ber (Sro^e fagte, ba^ e§ i^n efele, @clat)en
JU be^errfd)en. @^ drgert midE), ba^ ic^ geftern bie SSorlefung t)erJ
— 80 —
fciumt ^abe. ?freut e^ ®ie Dtelleiiiit, ba^ 3!)re greunbe 9lot^ (eibctt
mitffen? 9^ein, e^ t^ut mtr ^erjUtf) leib, aber ic^ !ann it)nen nic^t
l)etfen; ii^ ^abe nii^t^, ma^ ic^ tf)nen geben fonnte. (5^ tDar un§
(iu^erft lieb, ba^ tl)r ^^apter unb gebern mitgebrac^t ^attet 3rf) bin be*
triibt, meil id) meinen ^^iSroseg Derloren f)abe. SBarum bift butraurtg?
SBeit bie ®efd)afte jd)(ed)t ge^en. Sag ^^^re grau Tlntkv mi)t
(auger bet un^ bteiben fann, tf)ut un^ fef)r leib (to be transposed in
English). S)a§ beiueu 23ater eitt fo grower Unfalt betroffen t)at, be*
trubt mid^ fe^r. SBitrbe e§ eu(^ nid)t [(^merjen, i^enn cure ®o^ne
i^rem a3ater(anbe imtreit iDciren ? S'ommt e^ bir nic^t t)or, afe ob e^
geHopft f)atte? 3ft betn ©ruber fleiBig? (Sr ift fet)r fleiBtg; e^
fanu S^temaub fletBiger feiu, afe er. d^ fterbeu j;e|t me^r 2J?eufdjeu,
aU geu)d{)u(i(^; tDa^ ift bie Urfadje? d^ f)errfd)eu ie^t me^r ^raut
l^eiten a(^ e^emat^.
118.
Is it going to rain ? No, it will snow. Will there be a storm
to-night ? I believe not, the wind is west. Are you afraidf
when it lightens and thunders? No, I am not afraid of (t)or
with a dative) a thunder-storm. Our journey was J not finished
till the day broke (aubred)eu). It will soon begin to be da^rk; you
must lock the street-door, John. It begins to storm, Charles;
we must run if we do not want (iDoIIeu) to be thorougly (burc^
uub bur^) wet. Why do the bells ring-? There must be a fire in
the city. I should be very sorry, if that were the case. I am
very hungry, let me have (gib mir) a piece of bread. You will
be thirsty if you take (effeu) too much salt. Do you (already)
heat your rooms? It has not been cold enough (in order) to
heat [them], but we shall build a fire to-night. Do you feel un-
well, Charles ? It appears to me as if you looked sick. You
are right, I have taken a cold. If this is so, you must walk
into the room, and warm yourself. No, I thank you, I cannot
stay; 1 feel too warm already. I begin to feel unwell, will
(iDoHeu) you have the kindness to hand me a glass of water ?
f lam afraid, foUowed by that is translated by idj fiiri^te; ^Iso, if fiird^teil
is followed by an accusative. But the neuter verb to be a/raid is rendered by
flcl^ furd)ten.
X SBuvbe or war ?
— 90 —
What ails you to-day ? You look as if you had met with an
accident. I have (impersonally) met with no accident; butf
I feel angry because I have m'issed the railroad train. I felt
vexed because Charles had broken his promise. What is the
matter with your friend ? He feels sorry because he has lost
a large sum of money. I am pleased [to hear] that you are
well again. I was glad that William had not followed your
advice. Nobody has wished yet (to be expressed impersonally)
that he should have acted badly (translate: to have acted
badly). My friend writes me (impersonally) that he is expect-
ing you. Once upon a time lived a great man (impersonally)
who owned (befa^) large palaces (Sd^Io^No. 55) and gardens.
ll'9.
Infinitive. treff ett, to hit.
Past Participle, Qetroffcit.
Present Indicative, id) treffe, bu triff fl, er trifft, \mx treffcrt, il^r trefft, fte treffen.
Present Subjunctive. \6) treffe, bu treffeft, er treffe, etc.
Imperfect Indicative, td) traf, h\x trafft, er traf, \mx trafen, i^r traft, fie trafen.
Imperf. Subjunctive. \6) trdfe, bu trcifeft, er trdfe, njir trafen, t^r trdfet, jte trdfen.
Imperative. tx\% trcfft
Obs. — 1. The strong verbs, a list J of which is attached to the Second
Part have the foHowing peculiarities:
a) The first pers. imperf. indie, takes no ending, but changes the radi-
cal vowel. The past participle retains either the vowel of the infinitive, or
takes that of the imperfect, or a vowel different from 'both: fd)tagen, fd^Iug,
ge|tf)lagen; fed^ten, fod^t, gefod^ten; fterben, ftorb, geftorben.
b) The imperf. subj. adds the ending e to its indicative, softening the
radicals a, 0, u into ix, o, ii.
c) Most strong verbs with the radicals a and o soften these vowels in the
second and third pers. indicative (id^ fd^tage, bu fd^ldgft, er fd)tdgt); and most
of those with the radical e change this vowel into i in the same persons, and
in the singular ofthe imperative, dropping at the same time their final e in
the latter mood, some of them doubling the final consonant: geben, gib;
ne{)Tnen, nimm. Some other strong verbs (for instance laffen, tag), drop like-
wise the final e of the imperative. If strong verbs with any of these radicals
i' ^ber or fonbern ? Does I fed angry ? correct the previous clause ?
J The strident should look for every strong verb in the list before at-
tempting to use it. Since none of the many compounds of strong verbs are
given in" the list, the mode of their conjugation must be ascertained by look-
ing for the corresponding simple verbs.
I
— 91 —
end in bctt or ten (t^cn), they drop the c of their endings in the second and
third pers. pres» indic», those in ten and tl^en generally dropping also the t of
the ending in the third' pers.: vatljm, rat^ft, rcit^; treten, trtttft, tritt.
d) Of irregular formation are: tl^un, t^at, getl^an; ge^en, ging, gegangen;
fte!^en, panb, geftanben,
2. Several German verhs governing an infinitive without ju, are to-
gether with their infinitives rendered by single verbs or various phrases*
Such verbs are: fpagteren ge^en, to take a walk; fte^en btetbcn, to stop; fallen
laffen, to drop; lennen lernen, to become acquainted with. Only the last of
these infinitives (being the governing verbs) are conjugated, and must in the
simple tenses of ordinary sentences precede their dependent infinitives : id^
ge^c fpaj^ieren, td^ blieb ftel^en, etc.
^nneljmen, to accept, to take;
auffc^reiben, to write down;
befel)len, to command;
bitten, to request, to beg;
betaujd)en, to watch;
einneljmen, to occupy, to carry;
fi(i) erj^redcn, to be frightened, to be
scared;
Ptel^en, to flee;
gelten, to be esteemed, to be worth;
etmaS gelten, to be for something;
f al^ren, to ride (on a vehicle) ;
nad^geben (with dat.), to yield;
ratten, to advise;
flatt finben, to take place;
jlerben, to die;
fd^Iafen, to sleep;
fdjeinen, to shine;
bergeffen, to forget;
ber ©tgentl^ilmcr, the owner;
bie grei^eit, the liberty;
bai8 ©ebirge, the mountain-chain;
bie ©efangennal^nte, the capture;
bie ©ettJatt, the force;
ber ©Idnbiger, the creditor;
bie ^offnung, the hope;
bie (£taf jtfer, the classics;
bie Orbnung, the order;
ber SReiter, the horseman;
bie @petfe, the food;
bie ©tarfe, the strength;
bie ©tettung, the position;
ber ^^etter, the plate;
bie 2^rnppen, the troops;
bie Unorbnung, the disorder;
bie Unterl^altnng, the conversation;
bie SSerfd^anjung, the intreuchment;
bie SBerfpred^ung, the promise;
ftd^ tjergletd^en, to make a compromise; *ba8 iSerlangen, the demand;
tjcrratl^en, to betray;
tierfd^njinben, to disappear;
bertreten, to represent;
;^uftellen, to deliver;
ftd) 3uriirfjtet)en, to withdraw;
bag ^tmofen, the alms;
bag ^S(I, the ABC, the alphabet;
bie SBebcutung, the meaning;
bie ^rteftafc!^e, the pocket-book;
SBenn bu 2ltmofen gtbft, ta§ betnc Itnfc |)anb nid)t tDtffen, tua^
bctnc red)tc t^ut. 50Jetn (So{)n fjdlt alle feine SSerfprcdEjungen, ba er
niemal^ mc^r t)erf:pricf)t^ al^ er ^alten fann. yiimm meinen diatif
bie SSernjaltung, the administration;
bie B^Wllttg, the payment;
*ba8 Sort, the word;
linf, left )
rec^t, right f ^^^®'
^lotjUtj^, sudden;
ttiJlitg, fully;
gufdttig, accidental.
— 92 —
an, unb tg nid^t^ bon btcfer ©peife. Tlan berriit^ fcinc ^reunbc^
ipenn man fie t)ergt§t. ®er 2lbt)ocat, ber mid^ in biefem "iproceffi
t)ertntt, gilt t)ie( in unferer ®tabt. S)ie geinbe fIol)en in gro^ci
Unorbnung, nadibem i{)re 3Serf(i)an3ungen t)on unfern Struppen einge^
nommen uiaren, S)ie Wftao^h lie^ bie Speller fallen, tneil fie firf) er
fcI)ro(fen f)atte. !Die 5Reiter btieben p(o^(i(f) ftel}en, afe ob fie nnfen
©tdrte nnb Steltnng lennen lernen inollten. 211^ njir geftern in bei
®tabt fpajieren gingen, fanben ton eine -Srieftafc^e, bie Xdiv mitna^:
men, nm fie bent Sigentpmer jnsnftellen, 2Ba^ tl)at bie 9tegierung^
al^ fie bie 5yja{f)rid}t Don ber ©efangennal^me be^ Saifer^ er^ielt
@ie gab bent 9SerIangen be^ 3SoIf^ nad) nnb jog fid) Don ber SSermal
tung be^ @taat^ (state) jnriicf. (S^ fant nn^ Dor, ate ob bie gcinbe
fid^ nad^ ber @tabt jtirncEjogen. Sr fame gerft tnieber, nienn ic^ i^ti
bate, mid) jn befnd)en. Qd) Derga^e 2(He^, ma^ i^r mir gefagt ^abt,
toenn ic^ e^ nid)t anf fd^riebe. ^
120.
Where force commands, the law is (getten) [for] nothing. Be-
fore thou diest, do not forget to put (bringen) thy house in order.
Read this letter, and see thyself that our last hope has dis-
appeared. Help me to do my lesson before thou commences!
thine. What did your friend when he received the news that
these men had stopped (einftetten) their payments ? He wrote
me that he had made a compromise with his creditors. Whei
Charles arrived in Cologne he found the letters that he had ex-
pected. While my son began to learn his ABC, thine was already
reading the classics. When we saw that we were watched, we
immediately dropped our conversation. When we were riding
[on the cars] to New York, the railroad-train suddenly stopped
(fte[)en b(eiben) before we came to Newark. Where was your
mother when that accident took place ? She was taking a walk
with my sister. How did you become acquainted with that
gentleman? I met (treffen) him accidentally at Count Bis-
marck's house. We conversed more than an hour, and he in-
vited me to see (befnd^en) him at his residence. I advised that
lady to take lessons of (bei) Mr. Nollet, if she commenced
(subjunct.) to study Frenchf. If you did not sleep so long^
f Uninflected adjective (franjofifd^).
— 93 —
you would be healthier. If the moon were shining now, you
would distinctly see (imperf.) the whole mountain-chain. I
would gladly die (imperf.), if I could buy (erfaufen) the liberty
of my country with my death. They said that they did not
fully understand the meaning of his words.
121.
PREPOSITIONS
with Genitive :f with Dative: with Accusative :
iDd^renb, during; aiiQ, out of (from); burd), through, hy;
tOtQtn, on account of; ttad^, after (to); O^ne, without;
t)On, from (of, by) ; um, around, about;
^n, to; QCQen, against.
with Dative or Accusative i
an, at;
auf, upon, on;
neben (near) by, beside;
unter, under, below, beneath;
iiber, over, above;
t)or, before, ago.
3ni is often used instead of in betn; am is often used instead of an bent;
tn3 ** ** in ba§; an3 . " " an bag;
beim ** *' bei bent; bom ** " t)on bem;
pm ** " 3u bem; nnterm ** ** nnterbem;
gur ** '* gu ber; aufg ** ** auf bag.
burets ** ** bitvcfibag;
Obs. — 1. 5(n, in, anf, neben, nnter, iiber, t)or govern the accusative, when
they express a motion or direction towards an object, or a placing of some-
thing on, 6e/bre, etc. an object. If this is not the case, these prepositions
govern the dative. In relations other than those of place, the use of the
case is regulated according to an analogy to local relations, which is often
difficult to determine. .
2. The meanings attached above to the prepositions are only approxi-
mative and denote the original conception connected with each preposition.
Very frequently English prepositions must be rendered by German pre-
positions not expressing their original meanings:
^nf ber @ee, at sea; anf bie @ec, to sea;
ouf bem SJlartte, at (in) the market; anf ben 9Jiarft, to the market;
t For a complete list of prepositions see the Theoretical Course p. 61.
— 94 —
auf ber ^ojl, at the post-office;
auf bent iBaKe, at the ball;
auf t)tm !Oanbe, in the country (op-
posite to city);
im ^oncerte, at the concert;
im 2^1) eater, at the theatre;
gu §aufe, (at) home;
am lifer, on the shore;
an ber SBanb, on the wall;
in ber 2>d)uU, at. school;
gu ber ^eit, at the time;
an bem Sage, on the day;
am 16ten Tlax, on the 16th of May;
bet ^a^t (in ber ^'^ad^t), at night;
gu SSeil^nad^ten, at Christmas;
auf btc $ofl (gur ?5ofl),to the post-office;
auf ben «aU (gum iBatte), to the ball;
auf« !Oanb, to the country;
iu8 Concert, to the concert;
in8 2^^eater, to the theatre;
nad) §aufe, (to) home;
onS Ufer, to the shore;
an bie 3Banb, to the wall;
gur (in bte) (gc^ule, to school;
bis gu ber ^dt, (up) to the time;
biSgu bem S^age, (up) to the day;
big gum 3ten 3unt, (up) to the 3d of
June;
am ^Dlorgen, in (on) the morning;
im tjorigen 3a^re (t)origeS 3a]^r), last
year.
3. The preposition bi/ cannot be translated by Don if it does not denote
the agent of a passive verb. It is translated by burd^ if it denotes by means of.
4. To is generally not translated by the mere dative if it denotes the
object of a motion in space. If this motion refers to places, it is generally
translated by nad^, but also by other prepositions (See Obs. 2). If a person •
is the object of the motion, it is generally translated by git: come to me,
fomm gu mir.
5. The adverb h\9, placed before prepositions denoting direction, meana
{IS far as J up to, if referring to space. Referring to countries and towns it i
generally connected with nad^, which may also be left out. id^ !am big (nod^)
S3ertin, I came as far as Berlin. Referring to other localities it is mostly con-
nected with gu (bis gum ^erge, etc.). But all other prepositions, denoting
direction may be connected with big (bt« an ben gtug, big auf ben 53erg, etc.).
Referring to time, big is translated by till, up to, and is generally connected
with gu, which sometimes is dropped: big gum 2ten 3Jidrg; big (gu) SSei^uad^*
ten, etc. Not till is rendered by erfi.
5lbfaIIen (strong), to fall off;
anfeljen (strong), to look at;
auffallen (strong, w. dat.), to strike;
augbreiten, to extend;
augtaufc^en, to exchange;
beforbern, to forward,
bege^ren, to demand;
begraben (strong), to bury;
batiren, to date;
itc^ bre^en, to revolve, to turn;
ermutl^igen, to encourage;
errtd^ten, to erect;
errtngen (strong), to obtain;
fatten (strong), to fall;
pug en (strong), to hang;
liegen (strong), to lie, to be (situated)j]
fid) rii^men (w. gen.), to boast (of);
fi^en (fa6, gefcffen), to sit;
ftellen, to place;
fpagieren fal^rcn, to take a ride;
umge^en (strong), to associate;
jtd^ UJagcn^ to venture;
— 95 —
bic %di\t, the axis;
bie 5llpen, the Alps;
bie 3lu8ftd)t, the prospect;
bic 3lnftrengung, the effort;
ber SBaU, the ball;
t>a^ iBefinben, the health;
bie 53emer!ung, the remark;
bag iBoot, the boat;
ha^ Concert, the concert;
bie (Sintabung, the invitation;
ber Sinlag, the admission;
bag ©is, the ice;
bie (Sifenbaljit, the railroad;
baS (Snbe, the end;
bie Srlaubnig, the permission;
(Suropa, Europe;
ber gelbgug, the campaign;
bie geftung, the fortress;
ber gtug, the river;
bie gront, the front;
ber %xo% the frost;
bte ©artent^iir, the garden-gate;
baS ©ebdiibe, the building;
ber ©eburtstag, the birthday;
bte ©elegen^eit, the occasion;
ber ©tebel, the top (of roofs);
ber ©tpfel, the top (of trees, etc.) ;
ber ©raben, the moat, ditch;
ber §tmmet, the sky;
bie §iitfe, the help;
bte 3nbuftrtc, the industry;
bte ^o^Ie, the coal;
bie Seid^e, the corpse;
bie lOtfte, the list;
bie 3}Zad)t, the power;
9Kat(attb, Milan;
ber 9Jiaitget, the want;
ber 2Jiar!t, the market;
hxtSStavitv, the wall (outside);
ber 9?ame (gen. SIflamtnQ), the name;
ber Sfiebel, the fog;
ber $ret8, the price;
ber 9laitb, the edge;
ber 9^ang, the rank;
ber 9legen, the rain;
bie ^tx\)t, the row;
bte 9^et)otutton, the revolution;
bte @d)ilbit)a(^e, the sentinel;
bag @d)ta^tfelb, the field of battle;
ber ®cf)itce, the snow;
. ber 'BcijVLi^, the shelter, protection;
ber @omttag, the sunday;
bte station, the station;
ber @tt)l, the style;
ba^ X^eater, the theatre;
bte ^^itr(c), the gate, the door;
ha^ Ufer, the bank (of a river) ;
ber Untlauf, the revolution (turning);
bag ^xdj, the cattle;
ber S$ort^eil, the advantage;
ber Sag en, the carriage;
ber Sail, the rampart;
bie Sanb, the wall (inside);
ber ^immttmamx, the carpenter;
abtrefeitb, absent;
blau, blue;
brett, broad, wide;
bid)t, dense;
• eigen, own;
einjtg, single;
eittjiicfenb, charming;
crl^ebiid^, considerable;
gar m(^t, not at all;
gefegtiet, blessed;
ttcii^ft, next;
offentlid^, public;
ftabttfd^, city (adject.);
tief, deep;
unbebeuteitb, inconsiderable;
unerl^i3rt, unheard of;
Weit, far;
ico^tfeit cheap.
Sol^in ge^en @tc (tt)0 gel^cn ®te l^in)? where (whither) do you go?
So^er (tjon njo) totnmcn ^ie (too fontmen ®ie §cr) ? from where (whence) do
you come?
©as tjl bie U^r (toictJiet U^r ift eg) ? what o'clock is it?
— 96 —
(S8 if! fed^S U^r, it is six o'clock; l^alb jteBcit U^r, half past six; cm btcrtcl na(^
fed)S (auf ftebcn), a quarter past six; breiDiertel auf fteben (ein biertcl t>ox
fteben), a quarter of seven.
Um tDetd^e 3^^^ ? ^t what o'clock ?
Um fecf)^ U^r, at six o'clock.
2Bir lonnten ti^egen be6 ftrengen grofte^ (be6 ftrengen grofte^
iDegen) ntd)t au6 bem §aufe gel^en. ^m Dortgen 3a^re bradien mir
burd/^ (Si^; nad^ biefer 3^it tDagten mtr nidjt tDieber auf^ Ste ju
gel)en. Surd) tDeldje ©tra^en miiffen tntr gel)en, um auf ben Ttaxtt
3U !ommen ? ©ie (Siun)ot)uer giugen auf ben SSSatten ber geftung
fpajteren. 3luf bem ®ipfet be^ -Sergei fatten trir eine eutjiidEenbc
Slu^[id)t. SSer ftel)t an ber Jf)ur? (S^ ift §errn molkt'^ S)tener,
ber fid) nad) -3f)rem Sefinben erfunbigt. SBarum fe^en 8te []xi)] bie
S3Uber an, bie an ben SBcinben t)angen? SBir ftanben geftern am
Ufer be^ gluffeS, um unfere greunbe ju fel^en, bie auf bem @d)iffc
iDaren. Slopfen (£ie an bie Oartent^itr, unb bege^ren @ie ©inla^!
-3ft 3I)r -©ruber ju §aufe ? 9?ein, ic^ ^abe i^n auf bie $oft gefdjidt.
Sin (to) n)entt)otten ®ie btefe Sriefe fdjiden? Qd) ^abe nad) §aufc
an meine ^^i^eunbe gefi^rieben. Q6) fa^ unter bem gro^en -Saum, ber
neben unferm ^laufe fte^t; unter un^ lag bie®tabt, unb iiber mir tear
ber blaue §tmmet au^3gebreitet. Sir giugen unter bie Sdume, um
@(^u^ gegen ben $Rcgen ju finben, 2Bo fommen @ie l)er? ©inb
@ie im 2:i)eater gemefen? 9fein, ic^ fomme au^ bem (t)om) Soncert.
©ie geinbe iwaren bur(^ einige unbebeutenbe SSortl^eife, bie fie iiber
unfere Slrmee errungen l^atten, ermut^igt morben, ffio^in fd)i(fen
©ie ^firen Sebienten ? Qi) fd)ide if)n gum @d)u^mad)er, um meinc
©tiefel abgul^olen, unb jn ^art um il^m eine ginfabung gu bringen.
§aben ©ie eine ©inlabung gur ®efeKfd)aft bdim ©eneral? ?Jein, tt)ir
gefjen nic^t mit einanber um. O^ne Qljxc ^iilfe tt)dre. xi) berforen
gemefen. S)ie 6rbe bre!)t fi(^ um bie ©onne unb um (on) t^re eigene
2ld)fe. SBd^renb be^ gangen i^elbjug^ fonnte ber geinb fid^ nic^t
eine^ einjigen ©iege^ rii^men. ^n leiner ^txt ir>aren ber ^^leig unb
bie -Snbuftrie be^ 8anbe§ gefegnetcr, al^ in biefem .^a^re. 2lm ndd^*'
[ten 3Korgen nad) ber ©c^lad^t begruben unfere ©olbaten i^re ^Tobteit
unb bie ber geinbe. S)iefer Srief ift t)om IQ. b. 2)i.t batirt, aber
erft am 18. gefd)rteben unb am 20. gur ^oftgefanbt tporben. 2)er
t btefc§ SKonatS.
®fenbaf)naug lam bi« mi) Zxot), fonnte afierf t)on bort aBJ ntc^t
mitcx beforbert merben. 3)er ^1^9 ^^^ ^^^ 3"^ ndc^ften Station,
blieb aber bort au6 (from.for) 2)JangeI an (of) koijkn liegenff. ^i^
3um 3a{)re 1866 gait ^reugen nur a(^ eine dJlai)t (bee) iwtitm
SRangee, 2l(Ie ftdbtif(J)e(n) 2lbgaben miiffen [no(f)J t)or bem erften
S'anuar bega^It njerben. 9Btr btieben lahge t)or bem ©ebdube fteljen,
unb tau[(f)ten unfere Semerfungen nber (on) ben )3ra(f)tigen Stljl
aue. ©er gropte 2:^eil nnferer SCrnppen fam in biefer (Bi)iad)t gar
nii^t t)or ben geinb. d^ fiel nn^ auf, ba§ bie Stegiernng t)or aCe
offentlic^en ©ebdube (Sd)ilbn>ad)en gefteUt f)atte.
122.
During that whole time not one of our entrenchments was
carried by the enemy. On account of the dense fog, our boat
was detained seven hours at (bei) Poughkeepsie. After un-
heard of efforts the general arrived with his army at six o'clock
in the (Gen.) evening on the field of battle. By what efforts
have you made it possible to arrive so soon ? Does this name
stand on your list? No, but I shall place (fet^en) it immediately
on the list. I sent the carpenter to (aitf) the top of the roof
in order to repair it. I believe that somebody is listening
(^or{^en) at the door ? • Go to (an) the window, and look (jn-
fe^en) whether our carriage is at (oor) the gate? I see that
the plaster (ber Salf) on these walls has (tft) almost fallen off.
He has erected a beautiful villa on (an) the edge of the forest.
Where (whither) do you intend (tootten) to ride ? I only intend
to take a ride through the city. Wljen are you going to re-
turn home ? At half past eight o'clock. Are you going to the
concert to-night ? No, I shall go to the ball at Mr. NoUet's.
How long have you been in this country, and where do you
come from ? I come from Metz, and have been here almost
nine years. How long did you stay [out] in the country ? Only
a couple of days. * How many of your children go to school ?
Only two; the others I am still keeping (be^atten) at home.
t ^ber is frequently placed after one or more words of the sentence.
1 %h is often used to increase the force of toon, denoting a starting point,
tr Siegcn bleiben, to be detained.
— 98 -^
Why do you not place (fteCen) your cattle under shelter (trans-
late: under a roof) ? Below the walls of the fortress are broad
and deep moats. Will you not go to the general, and ask him
for (urn) protection against these soldiers? Jupiter revolves
in 10 days on his axis, and his revolution about the sun lasts
(bauern) almost 12 years. Did you do this without the per-
mission of your father ? This man lived at the time of the
French revolution. My friend's birthday fell upon a Sunday.
After many years you will acknowledge that I was right. Be-
fore our last war, the prices of (the) victuals were considerably
cheaper than now. Fiftyf years ago there were no rail-
roads in the country. During the whole battle the oflQcers
were before the front. The general sent all his officers
before the front. I have planted a whole row of trees before
my house. On the morning after the battle, the corpses lay
thick (bi(J)t) on the field of battle. On that day we met (treffen)
but (nur) few of the enemy (translate: /ei^; enemies). On (bet)
that occasion our soldiers took a great number of prisoners.
My friend returned home on the 10th of March; he will not
depart again till the 20th of June Ouni). He will be absent
till the 10th of July O^tt). Will General Sheridan remain in
Europe till the end of the war? We came on our journey as
far as Milan; last year we came only up to the Alps.
123.
SBotJon, of what; batjon, of that, of it;
iDomit, with what; bautit, with that, with it;
tuoju, to (for) what; bagu, to (for) that, to (for) it;
tDoran, at what; baran, at that, at it;
Worin, in what; barin, in that, in it;
iDoburd^, by what; baburc!^, by that, by it.
§erab, l^inab, down;
berauf, ^ittauf, up;
I§erau8, ^tnauS, out;
l^erein, ^inctit, in;
l^eriiber, ^inubcr, over.
t See the list of numerals in the Theoretical Course.
Obs. — 1. All these particles are formed of prepositions, combined with
the adverbs h)0, t>a, l^er and l^tn* If, in the formation of these words, two
vowels meet, an r is inserted.
2. The prepositions with which these adverbs are combined, are liable
to the same variation of meaning, as if they were separated: 2S o r a ti (not
ttJOtion) benfett @te, of what do you think ? (the verb beitfeit being construed
with an, not with tjon); tt) t) n pngt e3 ah, on what does it depend? (the
verb abpitgen being construed with t)on, not with ailf).
3. The adverbs formed by prefixing tt)0 and ba must always be used
instead of prepositions connected with the interrogative tt)a§ or with per-
sonal and demonstrative pronouns in the neuter gender. They are not ad-
missible if what, being followed by nouns, must be rendered by treldjer, e, eS:
Of what books, toon tDeId)en iSiid^ent (not tcotoon ^iic^ern). The adverbs
combined with ba are used if the personal pronoun or demonstrative depend-
ent on a preposition, refers to things masculine, feminine or neuter in either
number, but not in reference to persons. I have made no use of them (the
books), x<i) Ijdbt !etnen ©ebranc^ b a to o n gentad)t,
4. The compounds with ^tx and l^in are mostly used in combination
with VERBS OF MOTION, forming separable compounds with them» The forms
with l^er and Ij'm are distinguished by the standpoint which the speaker is
conceived to occupy. If the motion, expressed by the verb, is represented
as directed towards the speaker, the compounds with Ijtx are used. If the
motion has a direction away from the speaker, the compounds with l^tn must
be employed: I go down, tc^ ge^e "§ in ab; he is walking down the mountain,
cr ge^t toont S3erge I) e r a b (if the speaker is represented as being below).
5. All TRANSITIVE and reflexive verbs form their perfects and plu-
perfects active by means of the auxiliary l^aben. Neuter verbs generally
take the same auxiliary. But the following neuter verbs form these tenses
with the auxiliary fein:
a) Neuter verbs, expressing a motion from one place to another, as
fommcn, gel^en, reiten (to ride on horseback), fliel^en (to flee), gnriidte^ren (to
return), begegnen (to meet), fallen (to fall): 3d) tt) a r (not id) l^atte) juriidge*
te^rt, I had returned; ic^ b i n (not id) ):)ahe) ge!omttten, I have come.
b) Those neuter verbs, denoting a transition from one state to another,
as: fterben, to die; erf ran!en, to fall sick; ttoat^fen, togrow; toerjtnfen, to sink,
genefcn, to recover, and a great many others: id) bin (not id) l^abe) geftorben,
I have died*
c) Some verbs that cannot be classified, as: bletben, to remain (stay);
gelingen, to succeed; miglingen, to fail; folgen, to follow.
3lbl^angcn toon, to depend on; cntttoetd^cn (strong), to escape;
au\xoadjtn, to awake; erfranlen, to fall sick;
beftel^en (strong) in, to consist in, genejen (strong), to recover;
— 100 -.
fatten (strong), to hold; baS (Eotigregmitgltcb, the member of
^eremfommen, | . . Congress;
ftineinfommen, \ to come m, get m; 2)eutfc^tanb, Germany;
l^ereintreten (strong), ) , . bte ^enntnii the attainment;
l^tnemtreten, j ^^ ^^®P ^^' bte Ttimtt, the minute;
l^eruberfd^tDtmmen (strong), i to swim ber ^affagter, the passenger;
]^inuberfd^tt)immen, j over; ber @d)lu|iel, the key;
leiben (strong) an, to suffer of; bte @d)ttitnbfud^t, the consumption;
itttgUngen (strong), to fail; ba§ S^ermogett, the property;
toerfiuten (strong), to sink; bie ^Serurtljeilutig, the condemnation;
tnarten, to wait; anfdngtid), in the beginning;
*njtberfal)ren (strong), to befall; literartjd), literary;
guriicfretfen, to go or come back; irentge, few;
*ber SBud^^atter, the bookkeeper; einige, a few.
aSotJonf fprei^en @te ? Q^ fpre(J)e t)on bem| UngliidE, ba^
^'^rem Sruber miberfa^ren ift. Qi) l^abe gtetc{)fato (likewise)
baDon ge[proc{)en. §aft bu ni(J)t geI)ort, iDomit ^arl \xfi) ^eute beim
ge^rer entf(f)u(bigt t)at? Qd) [)abe nxdjt^ baoou gef)ort, |)at er
ntd)t gefagt, ba^ er ju fpiit t)on feiuer 9tei[e juriidgefe^rt fei? 9ietn,
batnit {)at er fief) m(i)t entfdjulbigt. SBiffen ©le, tDoranff ^err 9lot(et
geftorben ift? Q^t er DieIIei(f)t an ber @(i)H)inbfud)t geftorben?
©aran ift er [tt)oI)I] fdEjirerlid^ (hardly) geftorben; benner^atnie
baran (of) gelitten. SBarnm finb ©ie nid^t geftern auf (into) mein
3tmmer gegangen ? Qii) iriare gem f)inaufgegangen, tt)enn id) ben
@(i)(iifiel ba;^n gc^abe Ijjitte. SBo befinbet fid) je^t Qljv §err iSrnber ?
©r ift nad) 55entfd}Ianb jurucf gereift. SBirb er nidjt balb tDieber ^er^
iiberifommen? Qd) glaube nidjt, er ift {e^t Icinger l^ier geblieben, afe
er anfdnglid) beabfid)tigte. 2Bobnr(^ I)at .^^r grennb fein 3?ermogen
Derloren? 9lad}bem. faft alle feine Unterne^mnngen miptnngen'
inaren, ift fein ^ud)^alter niit einer grogen ©nmme entiDid)en. ^ft
md)t ^arl t)om S5ad]e gefaden? (S^ wax nid)t Sari, ber l^erabge^
fallen ift, fonbern fein Srnber. SBarnm feib i^r nid)t jn nn^ Ijerau^
anf^ 8anb getommen? SBir lonntenni^t ^inan^fammen; bie ©ege
iDaren jn fd)[e(^t. 2:reten ©ie l^erein, [meine] §erren. SBir tniirben
gem {)ineintreten, tDenn tcir ^dt fatten. Qd) erfnc^e @ie, meinen
t SSotion, of what, must be well distinguished from t)on lt)0, from where.
% Prepositions cannot be contracted with the article, if a relative clause
follows. _j_
ft To die of a disease, an einer ^rant^^ett flerbcu.
— 101
©o^tt tntt ft{^ l^eriiberjubrtngen, totm ®ie bon ??ranlret(^ jurfid^
reifen. Qd) miirbe -O'^ren @o^n mit bent grogten SSergnitc^en .yt
^'^nen l^eruberbringen, toenn er mrfjt fcI)on a6garH(^ Wtire, ' /• V
124.
On (t)on) what will the condemnation of the President de-
pend ? It will depend on the votes of two or three members
of Congress. Do you know that Charles's father has come (in
order) to take his son home? Of that nothing is known (be*
fannt) to me. With what have you occupied yourself during
the year? I have occupied myself with- literary labors, but I
am now done (fertig) with them. Are you invited to (ju) the
President's party (®efelIfd)oft) ? No, I have no invitation to it.
Of (an) what do you think ? I am thinking of the steamboat
that has sunk in the river. Have [there] been many passengers
in it ? Their number is not known to me. It is now the highest
time to begin this work; let us go at it immediately. In what
do the attainments of this man consist ? Why did you read in
that book? I did not read at all in it. At what o'clock did
you awake (Perf.) this morning? I did not awake (Per/,) till
nine o'clock, because I had returned very late from my journey.
Has General Smith died of (an) his wound? No, he has
not died of it; he has entirely (tjollftcinbig) recovered. Why did
you not remain (Perf.) home yesterday? I was obliged (mltffen)
to see my brother, who had suddenly fallen sick. Can you not
come down for (auf with accus.) a few minutes ? I cannot come
down now, you must wait. Do me the favor to send up your
servant to me. I cannot send him up; he must hold my horses,
but I shall come up myself. When we had arrived at (6ei) the
river, I requested my friend to swim over with me. Dear
Charles, come over to us for (auf) a few days, all your friends
are expecting you. Who is knocking at the door? It is
William. Tell him to come in. When we found that the
street-door was locked, we tried to get in by the garden-
gate.
— 102
125.
' i S •• c *•,<,. < obiDo^t,
. 1 1- ; *** • ; ^ l^cnn (^itxd), \ although, though;
iDenn audi,
*
aud^ njcnn (itjcnn aucf)), [ ^„^^ ....
felbft mnn {mm felbft), j ^^®^ "'
irenu au(^ norf) fo (feftr), however (much)?
bcnn (conjunction), for (conjunction),
Obs. — 1. The different German conjunctions corresponding to although
and even if, require the verb to be at the end of the clause. Those connected
with ob may be separated (ob — Qlct^, etc.), and often take other words of
the sentence, especially pronouns, between them. £)b tt)tr gletd^ fcil^en, al-
though we saw. Such words may also be interposed between the different
combinations of ttjenit, if the conjunction toeuit precedes.
2. The principal sentence, if it follows the clause with the equivalents
of although, is generally introduced by fo, and after the verb generally is in-
serted one of the particles bod), benttod^, gletd^tro'^t, corresponding to the
English still, yet, nevertheless: obgteid^ ttJir frii^ tatnen, jo mugteti tvir bod^
(bennod^, gletd^mo^t) langc ttjarten, although we came early, we (still) were
obliged to wait a long time.
3. The conjunction rtJetllt, either standing alone (if), or in connection
with gleid^, jd^on, audt) ( although) y may be entirely dropped, and in this case
the sentence is construed as if it were a question, beginning with the verb,
followed by the subject. The particle fo is then generally employed as a con-
nective: fommft bu, fo gel^c id^, if thou comest, I go. 3ft bein Skater abgereifl,
fo tuerbe id^ aud^ abreifen, if tby father has departed, I shall also depart.
SKcire bein greunb gefunb, fo toiirbe er ^ter fein, if thy friend were well (were
thy friend well) he would be here. 2Sar er glcid^ entmut^tgt (tDcnn gletd^ er
entmut^igt tuar), fo uergtueifette er bod^ Tiid)t, although he was discouraged, he
[still] did not despair. SSdrfl bu aud^ nod^ fo fleigig, fo fonnteft bu eg bod^
(bcmiod)) ni^t tl)un, however diligent thou mightst be, thou couldst [still]
not do it.
4. Diminutives are formed from most German substantives by the end-
ing d) en , softening the radical vowel, and being of neuter gender: ber ©O^Il
— ha% @ol)nd)en (the little or dear son).
5. Almost all personal male names form female appellatives by the i
ending in , elidmg the endings e and en: ber ^reuge — bte ^reugin (the J
Prussian woman); ber 2)td^ter (poet) — bte 2)td^tertn (poetess); ber ^erjogj
(duke) — bte §erjogin (duchess). Some soften the radical (®raf — ©rcifin).
In the plural they double their final n (2)id^terinnen),
103
^ttflcBett (strong), to state;
fid} onftrengen, to exert one's self;
augborren, to parch;
blii^en, to blossom;
crreid^en, to obtain;
crjielen, to derive;
Derborren, to dry up;
iDad^fen (strong), to grow;
to ertralten, to administer, to manage;
^tidjnm, to draw (make a draft);
bie 3lnmutl^, the grace;
bog ^ttt, the bed;
bie (Sigenfd^aft, the quality;
bie Srtrartung, the expectation;
bie gran;^bftn, the Frenchwoman;
ber ©ebraud), the use;
bie ©egenb, the landscape, the grounds;
bie @ete^rfam!eit, the scholarship;
ber ®eift, the mind;
ber ©laube, the faith;
ber ®runb, the reason;
baS @Ut, the property;
hit ^lar^eit, the clearness;
bie ^reibe, the chalk;
bag Tlitttl, the instrument, the means;
bie 9^ac^fi(^t, the indulgence;
ber 9iu^m, the glory;
bie ©c^on^eit, the beauty;
bk 2^a|)fer!ett, the valor;
ber Umri6, the sketch;
bie SBeig^ett, the wisdom;
ber mUe, the will;
bie ijettimg, the (news) paper;
ber S^^^f the purpose;
getel)rt, learned;
gettJtg, certain;
gldnjenb, brilliant;^
graufam, cruel;
fd^twad^, weak;
unlDal^r, untrue.
@g fcl^tt (tnangett, gebrid^t) mir an eitier ®a(f)e, I am deficient in a thing,
destitute of a thing, I lack a thing.
DbtDo^I e6 geblt^t ^at, fo ^aben tt)tr bod^ !emen !Donner ge^ort.
Obgleid^ t)ieI9tegen gefatlen ift, fo finb unfere ©ege bod) gut; benn
bie @rbe luar t)on ber §t^e t)ot([tdnbtg (perfectly) au^geborrt tDorben,
Db bein @o^n fdion [tar! (rapidly; getoai^fen ift, fo fd^eint e^ ntir
gteicI)tt)o^I, ba^ er fleiner ift, al^ mem Sllbert. SBenn ic^ gtetc^ feine
gro^e ©ele^rfamfelt bemunbern mu^te, fo glaubte id) bod), ba^ e^
feinem ©eifte an SJlar^eit fe^te. SBenn i^r and) 9lt(e^, xoa^ ii)x ux^
fprod)en l^abt, t^atet, fo loiirbet i^t bod^ euern ^\Qtd nidit erreit^en.
^citte mein Sruber fein ©iit^en felbft t)ertt)altet, fo n^itrbe er me{)r
©nna^men barau^ erjiett ^ben.. §ort ber ^rieg nic^t batb auf, fo
miiffen totr unfer |)du^(^en unb ©cirt^en t)er!aufen, §at bein 3Sater
gteid) feine ©ritnbe angegeben, fo mu^t bu bic^ bennod^ feinem SBitten
fUgen* @eib i^r nur flei^ig, loirb end) ber ©rfolg nid^t fe^Ien.
SBciret i^r and) ^ier, fo fonntet t^r in ber ^hi)t (matter) bod) nid)t^
ftnbem. 3^ft gtei^ bie ©rcifin nod) nidt)t t)5ttig genefen, fo tft fie ben^
nod^ mit atten i^ren ©tenerinnen abgereift. |)atte id^ nur ein ©titd^
— 104 —
d)tn Srctbe 6et (with) mtr, fo ttjiirbe id) cinen Untrt^ bcr ©egenb {)ter
an bie Zljixv jeidineu. SBenn id) au(f) jugeben mu^, ba^ ba^ ^nd)
ntel)rere gute gigenfdjaften ^at, fo tann ic^ glei(i)tt)0^( feinen ©ebraud^
bat)on mac£)en. ©elbft tt)enn b'er Sonig bie^ gefagt ^atte, tDiirbe
ic^ e^ bennod) nid^t glauben. 3tu(^ tuenn ber ©eneral je^t [nod)] Jiegen
fotlte (to be victorious), tDitrbe er bo^ feinen frii^eren 9iHf)m nie*
nml^ mieber eriangen (recover). Senn i^r and) nod) fo reid) toaxtt
(ttjciret i^r and^ nod) fo reid)), fo fonntet i^r bod^ biefe ©nmme nid)t
3at)Ien. SBenn t^r and) noc^ fo fange l^ier bleibt, fo itjerbet i^r t)od)
Dergeblic^ marten. ®o gele^rt biefer 2)tonn and) ift, fo gebrit^t e^
i^m bod) an SBei^^eit.
126.
Althoughf these men are deficient in many qualities, they
certainly are not destitute of valor. Though we had gone
very late to bed, we yet rose very early in the morning. Al-
though this man is not learned, still he is a very good teacher.
Although we have no claim to (anf) your indulgence, we never-
theless thinli that you will excuse us in this matter; for we have
acted in good faith. Although our little trees (dimin.) blos-
somed in the spring, they (yet) have dried up in the summer.
Although the news was confirmed in the papers, he still be-
lieved that it was untrue. However much they exerted them-
selves, their efforts were fruitless (uergeblid)). However cruel
this king was, he still was not destitute of good qualities. Al-
thoughj the Italian women are renowned for (megen) their
beauty, they lack the grace of the French [women]. If this
little house (dimin. ) belonged to me, I should sell it. If your
friend does not arrive to-day, we must go (reifen) to him. If
the king keeps his word, the people will be happy. Although
his instruments were not always well chosen, still his designs
were certainly good. Although our hopes are weak, our efibrts
will be great. Had it not rained, we certainly should have
come. However brilliant this victory was, the results did not
warrant (red)tferttgen) our expectations.
t In translating the sentences with although^ sll different modes of ex-
pression should be employed in succession.
J In all the sentences following below, the conjunction tozwa, must be
dropped, the sentences being rearranged accordingly.
-_ 106 —
127.
Sing, ber 9Jiann Plur. btc lOeutC (if used as an indefinite aggregate
of persons).
Sing, ber ^auf matin Plur. btc ^aufleute (not ^aufmditner).
Most of the compounds with SJlauit form the plural Scute, not
2)ldnner.
Obs. — !♦ Participles if used as adjectives, are declined with the same
endings as adjectives, either after the strong or weak declension: etit CjetrO(f=»
neter 5lpfet, a dried apple; ber getrodnete 5lpfel, the dried apple. They are
also subject to comparison with the same endings, as ordinary adjectives:
gebitbet, educated; gebilbeter, more educated; etit gebtlbeterer SOf^attti, a more
educated man.
2. Present participles add the ending eitb to the stem of the verb:
lobeilb, praising; etne b(ii{)enbe @tabt, a flourishing town.
3. Adjectives and participles, used with the force of adjectives, are
generally placed before their nouns, even when they have one or more ad-
jimcts. Tiie adjuncts, in this case, always precede their adjectives, and are*
placed between the article or determinative pronoun, and the noun. In
English, such phrases must be placed after the noun, and often they must
be replaced by relative or other clauses:
©in fetnem iBaterlattbe ergebetter iSiirger, a citizen devoted to his country .
(who is devoted to his country).
S)ie i^re (SItern Itebenbeit ^tnber, the children loving their parents (that
love their parents).
Sine mit gu^rttjerfen angefiillte @trage, a street crowded with vehicles.
4. The Geiman infinitive with the neuter article (or other determina-
tive) is used with the force of the English participial noun in ing. It is then
declined like other substantives in en: "^(1% !?oben, the praising; Gen. bc6
?oben6, of the praising; Dat. bem Soben, Ace. ha^ lOoben.
5Infertigen, to compile; ppgen, to plow;
berauben (with Gen.), to deprive of; raffiniren, to refine;
, bejc^rdnfen, to limit; reigeit, to charm;
betranen, to entrust; rnfen (strong), to call; .
betriiben, to afflict; fc^iegen (strong), to fire;
briilten, to bellow; jd^reten (strong), to shout;
entbliDfien, to denude; taufd^en, to disappoint;
erbittern, to exasperate; toben, to rage;
crfal^ren (strong v.), to experience; *iiberfe'^en (strong), to overlook;
erjc^iittcrn, to move, to affect; *unter!^atten (strong), to entertain;
erftarren, to benumb; t)crf^ar!en, to increase;
fil^Ien, to feel; Ocriiben, to commit;
— 106
btx ^CbfaH, the defection;
ber 5lnbacftt8pla^, the place of worship;
ber Slrbeitgeber, the employer;
ber ^Irbeit^matin, the workingman;
ber ^luStDanberer, the emigrant;
ber 5(nbli(f, the- sight;
bie 33erettn)illtg!eit, the readiness;
btc iSeute, the booty;
bie ^liite, the blossom;
ber Sinbrucf, the impression;
bie (Sntlaffung, the dismissal;
bie (Srpreffung, the extortion;
ber (Sjceg, the excess;
bie ©emetnbe, the congregation;
bie ©locfe, the bell;
bie ®raufam!eit, the cruelty;
ba§ §er^, the heart;
*ber ^an^rer, the chancellor;
ber ^Unftler, the artist;
ber $?anbmann, the countryman (hus-
bandman) ;
ber ?anb§mantt, the countryman (being
of the same country) ;
bie 9}lenge, the multitude;
ber ^J3Ian, the plan;
*ber ^untt, the point;
hit ^robtnj, the province;
bie Sftegung, the emotion;
ba^ ditidj, the empire;
ber @inn, the sense;
ber @taU, the stable;
ba§ !^alent, the talent;
bie Zljatf the exploit;
ber Xi)txlf the part;
bie Umftd)t, the circumspection;
ha^ Urt^eil, the judgment;
ber SBeften, the West;
begierig auf, eager for;
empfe^len^lDert^, commendable;
entfeljttd^, terrific;
fur(i)tbar, fearful;
liiftern nad^, greedy of;
neuertid^, (adv.), recently;
ro^, rude;
fd^on, fine;
fd^mer^tid^, painful;
ftolj auf, proud of;
itnfd^ig (with Gen.), incapable of;
ungeriil)rt, untouched:
Dertraut mit, privy to;
tooU, full;
mejentltd^ fiir, essential to.
g^ beftnbet ft(^ (there is) ein crfal)rener SBimbarjt auf bent
©c^iffe. SSir arbeiten je^t mit t)erftdr!tem r^kx^t. ©u l^aft ntir ein
retjenbc^ ^ni) gelief)en. 2Bir ijatkn l^eute ben SSt\i\^ tne^rerer xcU
jenber Saufleute. ©a^ 8efen unter^altenber ^iirf)er ift nt(^t tmmer
empfe^Ien^njert^* 2Bir bemerften t)tele nttt ^pgeu befd^aftigte Sanb*
leute. X)a^ @d)reien unb 3:oben ber erbttterten 5D?enge tDar furd^tbar.
'^a^ Seiben biefer t)on aller §ulfe entblo^ten Seute wax entfeglii^,
©er Slbfall ber feinem 9ietd}e fo (ange treu gemefenen ^rot^in^en'
erfdiutterte ben Sonlg tief. ©ie nenertic^ t)on @nro|3a angefont^
menen Stn^tDanberer n)nrben fogleid) nad) bent 9Beften beforbert.
Wid)t^ madjt etnen betritbenberen ©inbrud, aU ein tr)af)renb be«
©omnter^ feiner flatter beranbter ®annt. ©tefe nad) 9?n^nt fo
begierige Sitnftlerin fii^fte fti^ [(^nter^tic^ getanfd)t, qI^ ba§ Urt!)eU
ber aJienge tt)r befannt ju merben anfing, T)k t)or (with) groft faft
erftarrten ®olbaten tnurben mit raffinirtcr ©ranfantfeit t)on ben nad)
Seute liifterncn Sanbteuten getobtet. SBtr ^ben immer unfere armcn,
t)om Unglitd (distress) betroffenen (involved in) Sanb^teute mtt
grower Sereitmilligfeit unterftitl^t ®ie rof)en unb auf t^re X^atm
ftoljen ©olbaten t)erubten bie grobften (grob, brutal) g^ceffe.
128.
This news was very painful to the afflicted father. This is
true (gelten) in a more limited sense than you seem to believe.
I shall not answer (beanttDorten) these insulting remarks. The
firing of the troops taking part in this battle, lasted till (the)
evening. The carpenters, threatened with dismissal from their
places (bie SteUe), submitted to the extortions of their em-
ployers. The officers (civil), entrusted with the compiling of
these lists, accomplished their tasks (3lufgabe) in less than
three months. We heard the bellowing of the cattle (bie 9tin^
ber, plur.) returning to their stables. The tolling (gduten) of
the bells, calling the congregations to their places of worship,
made a solemn impression. We were shown (translate by man)
the works of several [lady] artists, [who are] renowned for
(megen) their talents. Although the workingmen, disappointed
in their hopes, were exasperated at (iiber with accus.) their em-
ployers, they soon returned to (gu) their work. These points so
essential to us, have been entirely overlooked by you. There is
no finer sight than an apple-tree (standing) in full blossom. This
heart, incapable of all higher emotions, remained untouched.
The chancellor [who was] privy to all the plans of the king,
prepared this enterprise with great circumspection.
129.
Infinitive.
mogcn, to like; bfirfcn, to be at liberty, to be tDtffen, to know.
aUowed.
Present Indicative.
i(f) tnag, I may; i6) barf, I am atUberty etc.; id) tOtl% I know;
bu titagft, thou mayest; bu barfft, thou art at Uberty; bu Weigt, thou knowest;
er mag, he may; cr barf, he is etc. cr iDetg, be knows;
koir mogetl, we may; UJir burfen, we are etc., toxx triffetl, we know;
tftr mogt, you may; il^r biirft, you are etc.; il^r ttJtgt, you know;
fie mogctt, they may; |tc burfen, they are etc. ; * pc toiffen, they know^
— 108 —
Present Svhjunctm.
t(^ moge, etc. id^ biirf e, etc. M) ttilffc, etc.
Imperfect Indicative,
id^ Utod^te, I might etc. td^ burfte, I was at liberty; id^ Itiugte, I knew.
Imperfect Sitbjunctive.
i(^ mbdijte, I might; idj biirfte, I were at liberty, id^ triigte, I knew.
Imperative,
triffe, tDxgt, njtffen @te.
Obs. — 1. 2R*6gen in the present and imperfect denotes a possibility, de-
pendent on contingency: bieS mag fid^ gutragen, this may happen. With a
negation it generally expresses , / do not like to, and in the subjunctive im-
perfect (with or without negation) often I should wish or like. 3d) mag bie^ Xlidit
t{)Un, I do not like to do this; id) mod^te bteS I)aben, I should like to have this.
2. Mai/ in questions is generally rendered by biirfen: barf tc^ eintreten,
may I enter ? In the suBJIJ^'CTIVE imperfect it denotes probability: bteS
biirfte toaljX fein, this is probably true. Must with a negation may be generally
translated by (nid)t) biirfen: tnir biirfen bieS nidt)t tf)un, we must not do this.
3. All modal auxiliaries (mogen, biirfen, miiffen, fonnen, tnollen, foHen)
form past participles (gemod)t, gebnrft, gemugt, gefonnt, gemollt, gefoUt), and
all compound tenses (Fut. td^ trerbe fonnen, I shall be able; id) ttJerbe miiffen,
I shall be obliged; id^ Ujerbe biirfen, I shall be at liberty, etc.). Their past
participles in the perfect and pluperfect ^eweraZZy teA;e the form of their infinitives ;
Perf.: ic^ l^abe md)t fommen f o n n e n ,t I have not been able to come (I could
not come) ; \&j l)abe bie§ nid)t t^un m o g e n , I have not liked (did not like or
wish) to do this; id^ l)abe nid)t fommen biirfen, I have not been at liberty
(was not at liberty) to come; x6) l)abe nad) §anfe gel^en miiffen (follen), I have
been obliged (was obliged) to go home. The pluperfects are in the same
way formed by id^ ^atte.
4. The English potential pluperfects with could, should (ought to) are
translated by the pluperfect subjunctives of the verb fonnen, follenf unb
miiffen with the present infinitive of the main verb; id) ^dtte bieg nic^t
fd)reiben fonnen, I could not have written this; fte 1^ ei 1 1 e n ntd^t fo frii^e
fommen f o 11 en (or miiffen), you should not have come so early; er I) d 1 1 e
bie @d^Iad)t geminnen m ii f f en (or foIlen),tt he ought to have won the battle.
5. If clauses in which the infinitive of the modal auxiliaries is used with
the force of a participle, are introduced by one of the conjunctions ha^,
f The perfects and pluperfects of the modal auxiliaries are only then
formed with the past participles, if the infinitive, dependent on these verbs
is understood: id) I)abe e 8 ntd)t gefonnt, / have not been able [to do it], etc.
J Provided that should has not the force of a simple conditional, in
which case it is rendered by tuiirbe, with the perfect infinitive.
ft The literal translation of these English potential pluperfects, by means
of lonnte etc. with the perfect infinitive has an entirely different meaning.
They are used only in spefcial circumstances.
I
— 109 --
ItJCnn etc., requiring the verb to be at the end, the auxiliaries l^aBc, l)atte
and Ijcitte can never be placed at the end of the clause, but must precede the intini-
tive of the main verb, as: luenn t^r l)dttet fommen fonnen, if you could have
come (not tDenn i^r fommen fonneri I)dttet).
6. The preposition without before a verbal noun in ing, is rendered by
O^ne and an infinitive with ,^u: O^lie t»eu SJiann 3U fennen, without knowing
the man; ol)ne il)n cjefe^en ju I^aben, without having seen him; D^ne e0 t^un
gu fonnen, without being able to do it.
7. 5Sif)eu is construed with gu and the infinitive, corresponding to the
English know how to etc. : er rougte fid) JU md^igeu, he knew how to restrain
himself.
8. ^flegen with j;u and the infinitive corresponds to the English to be in
the habit of with the participial noun in ing, or to lam wont with the infinitive.
In the imperfect it is generally translated by I used to: it)ir pflegeu am SD^orgcn
gll baben, we are in the habit of bathing (we a^ye wont to bathe) in the morn-
ing; id) pflegte mid) mit meinen greunbeii iiber biefen ©egenftanb gu unter^al*
ten, I used to converse with my friends on the subject.
2(nrii{)ren, to touch;
anf(efen (strong), to pick up;
au^briicfen, to -express;
au§rid)ten, to execute;
^ebenten tragen (strong), to hesitate;
beitragen (strong), to contribute;
fid) bene^men (strong), to behave;
benu^en (with Ace), to make use of;
befud)en (with Ace), to attend to;
fti^ betl)ei(igen an, to engage in;
betreten, to enter;
friil)ftii(fen, to breakfast;
gebeil)en (strong), to prosper;
in ^enntntg fei^en, to notify; •
fronen, to crown;
fic^ mifd)en, to mingle;
ftoren (with Ace), to intrude on;
iibereinftimmen, to agree;
*iiberlegen, to consider;
nn^ufrieben fetn, to find fault;
i)eri3ffentttd)en, to divulge;
t)ort)erfel)en (strong),, to foresee;
bortragen (strong), to deliver (a
speech);
berfid)ern, to assure;
njteberje^en (strong), to see again;
giel^en (strong), to draw;
btc ^tntitjort, the answer;
ber 2lnffa^, the composition;
ber 5(nftvag, the commission;
ber 3lu^ldnber, the foreigner;
bte ^u^fid^t, the chance;
bte 8efanntfd)aft, the acquaintance;
ba^ 33etragen, the conduct;
bie ^ibliot^e!, the library;.
bie gotge, the consequence;
ber (5^efd)dft^brtef, the business letter^
bag ^{auier, the piano;
bie ^trd)e, the church;
ber Soften, the lot;
ber 9lebner, the speaker;
ber @d)lu6, the conclusion;
ber ©c^ulbfc^ein, the draft;
bie ®prac^e, the language;
bie @pet(en (pi.), the eatables;
ber Umfang, the extent;
ber Untergebene, the clerk;
bie SBaare, the article (of trade);
gang, quite;
gered)tferttgt, warranted;
jebenfatig, at all events;
mit Unred^t, wrongly, unjustly;
Derantmorttid^, responsible;
tt)a!^r|(^etnltd^, probable.
^ 110 —
J)ie6 ntag ber ^oXi fein ober ntd^t; icbenfafl^ fonnen @ie e§ nx6)i
hjiffen. SlWgen @te Derficfiert fein (rest), [tneine] §erren, ba^ i^
t)on ber ganjen ®a(f)e mdf)t6 xotx% unb nut Unred^t jene^ 3Serbred)en§
befd)ulbigt morben bin, 3JJein ©rnber mag fid^ in biefe @arf)e (affair)
nicf)t nufdjen. -3c^ mag biefen SJiann nicf)t n)ieberfet)en. SKoc^ten
©ie [tDo{)t] ^l^ren ©rnber itberrafd^en, tnenn er Don feiner 9teife i\x-
rit(ffef)rt? ©itrfen @ie biefe S3ib(iot^ef benn^en? ^a, x6) barf fie
benu^en, fo oft (as often as) ic^ tDill. ®arf t(^ mid) nad^ O^rem
53efinben erfnnbigen? ©iirfen -3^re ©ol^ne l^ente mit mir anf^
8anb get)en ? 91ein, meine @o^ne biirfen ^ente gar nid^t an^ge^en,
®ic Solbaten burften fid^ niii)t mit einanber nnter^alten, J)iefe
§erren U)iffen fid) nid)t ^n bene^men* ©iefer Sln^Icinber i^n^te fid^
fe^r gut (well) in nnf erer ^|)rad)e au^jubriiden. ^6) pflege bie
3eitungen ju lefen, fobalb (as. soon as) ic^ gefrii^ftiidt ^abe. @ein
^ruber ^ffegte bie t)on ben S3aumen f)erabgefat(enen 9IepfeI .aufjufe^^
fen, unb fie nad) ber Stabt gu bringen, ^6nnen ®te Slauier fpielen ?
9?ein, id) I)abe e^ niemate lernen mogen, ^ij l^abe nid)t ein einjige^
SBort biefen 9ftebner^ t)erfte^en fonnen. 3Bir ^naben fatten nodf)
niemal^ biefe^ 3^^^^^* betreten biirfen. fatten ®ie nit^t fritter ju
nn^ l^eriiberfommen fonnen ? Qi) ^citte e^ geraig get^an, iDenn \6)
gefonnt ^tte. @ie fatten biefen 3luffal^ nic^t beffer f(^reiben fonnen;
aber @ie f)dtten i^n beffer t)ortragen foUen. ^6) iDitrbe ben 3luffa^
beffer gefd)rieben ^aben, n^enn id) bie offentIid)e Sibliot^ef f)atte be* J
nu^en bitrfen, ^d) n^erbe S'l^ren ^lan an^jnfii^ren t)erfnd)en, aber]
o^ne mid) fur beffen (its) (Srfolg Derantiportlid^ ju mac^en. ®r fe^rtcj
Don ber (£tabt guriid, ot}ne feinen Sluftrag au^geric^tet gu ^benJ
3^d) tDar tcmge in ber @tabt, o^ne mit §errn 9ZolIet f|3re(^en.ju fon^j
nen. (Sr mu^te im 3i^J^^^ bleiben, o^ne etma^ Don jenen ©peifenj
anriil^ren ju biirfen,
130.
You may be diligent, but you are not attentive enough;
What is reported in the paper may be quite (ganj) correct J
but the conclusions which you would like to draw from (au^)|
it, are certainly not warranted. May our country continue
(fortfa^ren)t to prosper, and may our labors be always crownedl
t To continue is translated by fortfc^en, if governing a substantive; if id
is foUowed by an infinitive, it must be rendered by fortfa^ren. If foUowea
by an adverb or adjective, we translate it bleiben.
— Ill —
by success I Would you like to engage in this enterprise ? I
have often told you that this enterprise does not agree with
my views, and that I do not like to contribute to (ju) it. Since
my brother was at liberty to divulge the matter ((2ad)e), he did
not hesitate to make me privy to it. I shall probably (woiji)
be at liberty to make you acquainted with this affair in a few
days; but I must not do it now. May I intrude on you for a
few minutes? Do you know how to use (gebraui^en) this instru-
ment (3=nftrument n.)? I believe, I knew it formerly, but I
must have forgotten it. We are in the habit of answering (be^
mittrorten) all our business letters on the spot (bie ©telle). When
I was living in the city, I used to attend to this church. I am
not wont to allow such liberties to my clerk. I did never
like (perf. of tttogen) to make acquaintances on the street.
Although I made (perf.) several efforts (ber SSerfud^) I have not
been able to become acquainted with this gentleman. We
have been often obliged to find fault with your conduct. Have
you been q,t liberty to take these books home ? Why did you
not notify me directly of (t)on) your plans ? You should (foHen)
have sent me an answer by return mail (mit umgel^en^
ber ^oft). I could not have imagined that your claims against
(an) me were of (t)on) such extent. You ought to have better
considered your probable chances before you came to this
country. Would you have engaged in this enterprise if you
could have foreseen its consequences ? I engaged in it without
much thinking of its consequences. I know very well that I
should (foKen) have taken (to me) more time, when I was
writing this book. Do you know that you ought to have paid
your draft yesterday? I shall not leave the city without
having seen Mr. Nollet. I staid (perf.) three days in the city
without being able to find (treffen) Mr. Nollet at home. We
stood several days before the enemy without being at liberty
to attack them. Must I take the whole lot if I want to
purchase this article ? You may purchase as much (foDtel) of
it as you want (tDoHen), without being obliged to take the
whole (bae ©anje).
— 112 —
APPENDIX,
1. The following exercises in German Hand-writing are intended to
drill the first beginner in the use of writing characters. The numbers refer
to the numbers of the exercises in the Method,
2. Each number should be carefully copied in connection with the
exercises it refers to. The teacher may, in addition, require the sentences to
be written out in English characters, or to be translated into English.
3. In translating the English exercises in the Method into German,
which should always be done in writing, the student should in the beginning
of his course use English rather than German characters, till he will have
had sufficient practise in the use of the German written alphabet by copying
the appended sentences.
r.
-^^fi^-^/^ -^^^i*^^-^^
^
-^^^^ <^^<^t^^^^i<-'^i^.
Of y - ^
113 —
'f'^^'^'^^^^ C_^;?^^^^^^
K^^'i4' ^-^-^-^-/f-^f C^Cc^'^-^^-^ ^^^-^-^^-/^ f/^^^i^^^^-^ .
-^^^ ■ "^ y y -y ■ J' x'"
/I ^X ^
-^ yyy y - *
y y ^ XX
yy^y y^ ■ y y^
y" -/ ^
bcquem, comfortable.
114 —
-f^^^f^/f^^^
^ <^ - yy9^y ■
J y/^ 7yyy 2/
y^ yy y ^ .,
y yyyy J ■ y y^ -^
yy ^ /^ ^ y ^
^^f;^^-^^^^^
-^^^^-^f^A*-*
115 —
^X
^^^^{f^^^^^l?{P^^^
^'.
■'^•^iP' ,
•^^5^^^^
-f^/^-:^^ -^i^-^-^ic^^^ii:"^^^!^.
^s. ^J^J;.
i^^i^-^^i^ -^i^i-tf^^'C'ti't^i^'ff-^^.
5^:^ -p^^-^SP^^P^^-^if-
C^'^^'^^^sf^
^i"^'^'^i^i/>^^<^, i^^v^^ ^^^1^ ;^^^^^^;^^ ^!^^^^^i<f6^'/f^
— 116 —
^7. ^^ J:
J. ^ yy ^ <^- yy
^?^ ^^^<-^^i<'^^if^ .
^p.
■^ 3^=i^:?Cj^ <=x:C^;s^:
y _ y y y
'f!fi^i<^
y-^^^^y^ •^y^'/^fy^/^y ^y-3^^'ff^f'^yf-/i<y ,
^^^^^^jc^^^^jc^ cy-^^^y^yy ^e^^^fry^^^^^f-^^ . y^'/^<^
2)cr Slufgang, the rising.
— in —
<lf.^^ t[i^»^<. «=.^£»«##J^ *=»:#?!#*-» X^J^i^^it**-^.
^ '/^'^^f^^^ '/'^^'f^'^'^^ C^-^-^^^^-^ :^'/!f^/!f''^^^
y y 0< ^' ^ y
yy ^^ y y
y^ y ■ yy y ^yy y
y y y y
y y
^''^^sj^J^ ^a^^f^^-^y ^^^i:*-^^ -c^^-f^-^'-ff-p^^^t^.
118
S7. .
s^at-^^if;^
-^-^^P^Sf^^-^^^^Sf-Z-^-P
iS^^/!f^iC
^^:^>/^^^^^ -^^/^
^^-€^-/^ -^^fi^^^f^^^ ^^<^
■^^^"f^
•^ty. X^^5«^ <<^^"/f'^'^^ ^^€^^^^Sf-P^ ^y^-^^/if-
— 119 —
y y ^ 7 yy ^-
y y ^ y
s^^^^^;^t7 ,^^^-€^1^1^ ^^</^t^^^i<^, y/%y€^ -f^^
"^f^^^^c^t^-j^^^/^.^^ ^-t^iy, .^Oy-^^'^^^^-^^
^■^</^
y -y y y^ y
^ yt::ii>yy/if-^^ y^^-y. yiy^-^i^y^ c^^^-^yy^
y yy
^7. .^i^Lyy ^cy ^ ^.y^
* 2)te OucUc, the source.
120
■^^//!f-^ -e^SJ-^^ ■i£^'/i<- ^^i^^Xi/'^if-'O ^C^'t!^'^^/^^^^(>/i<'^ .
/ X
121 —
VOCABULARY.
■/^ WKV;con]., but
y ftbfattCH (strong), v. n,, to fall off
>d W)Qahe, t, tax
^ abge^en (strong), v.n., to leave, v. n.
^jobjcingen (strong), v. n., to depend
/abljanm (strong), v» a., to cut down
A ahi)olnif V. a., to call for
Ja6Ie!)tten, v. a., to decline
atetfen, v. n., to depart
Xj^^ife, f., departure
Ol^ii&neiten (strong), 'v. a., to cut off
^ Slbfd^teb ne^men, to take leave
tl^^f^^mbm- (strong), V. a., to copy
X ^Ibjid^t, f., intention, design
)c abtragen (strong), v. a., to pull down
^abtt>efenb, adj., absent
y 5ld^fe, f , axis
^tn ^c^t nt^mtn, to take care of
a(j^tpQumreight; bet adjte^_^tlie eighth
^at^ten, v. a., to esteem
\L2lbbocat, m., lawyer
ofier,. e^ eg, adj., all
'' Slttnofen, n., alms
^l^en, plur. f., the Alps
fti^^onj., than, as, when
~ olt^^dj-j old
a«tert!amfd&, adj., American, adj.
OtmrfiTETf; V. a., to amuse; jtd) amiijt*
J ren, v. refl., to enjoy one's self
V Qtt, prep., at
be»-«tt^eije, adj., the other
)^anbern, v. a., to change, v. a.
>Cailcr!enneti (strong), v. a., to acknow-
ledge
- anfangen (strong), v. a., to begin,
Slnforberung, f., demand ^
anfiillen, v. a., to fill, ,v, a. 7^
angeben (strong), v. a., to state y(
ber ^^ngeflagte, the accused-v
2lngelegenl^ett,.f. , affair ^^
angenel^m, adj., pleasant -A
angretfen (strong), v. a., to attack /\
Slngrtff, m., attack Y^
fxdj anfletben, to dress (one's self) / ^
anflopfen, v.n., to knock (at the door)
on!o»«tteit'ts*^eBg)^.-n., to arrive — "
tofimfV^., arrival <
51nlage, f., talent ^
^nmutl^, f . , grace -X
anne^men (strong)/ v. a., to accept,
to take
^norbnung, f., regulation
anreben, Ar. a., to address
anfel^en (strong), v. a., to look at
5lnfid^t, f., view
5lnf)3rud^, m., claim
atiftetten, v. a., to appoint
fid) anftrengen, to exert one's self
toftretigung, f., effort
^tltrag, m., application
antltJorteti, v. intr., to answer
aittoenben, v. a., to employ
Qitjetgen, v. a., to announce
an^ie^en (strong), v. a., to put on
9(^4elf m., apple -^
^beitpf., work, labor
w ?beiten > v. n., to work, to labor
ftd^ argern, to be angry, displeased
5(rgtt)o]^n, m., suspicion
.eMfW> adj., poor
Slmtec, f., army
SOrt, f., kmd ,^
122 —
Slrjt, m,, physician
atlantifd^, adj., Atlantic, adj.
qUC^, particle, also
auf, prep», on, upon
Ottffeouejt, V. a., to build up
^ui%abe-r f., lesson, exercise, task
ouffteDen, [*°"^- See page 6S.
OuffaEen (strong), v. intr. with dat.,
to strike
auf^alten (strong), v. a., to delay; ftd^
auf{)aUen, to stay
auf£)eben (strong), v. a., to pick up
ouf^oren, v. n., to cease *
oufmad)en, v. a., to open
5lufmer!fam!eit, f., attention
aufrtd)ttg, adj., upright, sincere
auffd)reiben (strong), v. a., to write
down
5luftrag, m., order
auf roadmen, v. n., to awake
%l^ n., the eye
au8, prep., out of, from
augbretten, v.n., to extend
ausbrettnen, v. n., to bum out
xiu§borren, v. a., to parch
-ftugerft, adj., extreme
auSfii^ren, v. a., to execute, accom-
plish, carry out
augriiften, v. a., to endow
5lu§f(^ug, m,, board (of persons)
auSfel^en (strong), v. n., to look, v. n.
au^fe^cn, v. a., to expose
^u§ft(i)t; f., prospect
au8taufd)en, v. a., to exchange
Qusoertaufen, v. a., to sell out. i
».
^ S3al^n^of, m., railroad-station
««i. batb, adv., soon
-53atf, m., ball
.^antr,n., ribbon; m., volume
. 'iBattl7~f., bank (moneyed Institute)
T^ iBafe. f., cousin, f.
>yL bauen, v. a., to build
^/ JBoiim, m , tree
beabfid^tigen, v« a. , to intend
ber ^eamte, m., the officer (civil) yL
bcbauern, v. a., to regret -(-
beberfeti, v. a., to cover ^
^ebeutung, f., meaning 4-
bCLiBftrcrtrt«yJiM«i-servant
^ebingung, f., condition ^"
bebro^en, v. a., to threaten S-
befei^Ien (strong), v. a., to command '
SSefinben, n., health N^
ftd^ befinben (strong), to do, to be (of j
health) . ^
befolgen, v. a., to follow (an order) >
beforbern, v. a., to forward ^
fid^ begeben, to betake one's self, to *
proceed
fid^ begegnen, to meet (one another) ^
bege^ren, v. a., to demand -\
begteiten, v. a., to accompany^
begraben (strong), v. a., to bury f
beftanbein, V. a., to treat v[.
bel^aupten, v. a., to assert, to state
be^errfdjen, v. a,, to rule over -V
bci, p i'e p :y^witli^ in the house of
iBeifall fittben, to meet with favor -^
betmo^nen, intr. v. w. dat., to be
present at
befannt, adj., known -^.^
ber iBefatintc (personal noun), the,
acquaintance
S5e!anntfd)oft (abstr. n.), acquaintance
belagem, v. a. , to besiege
S5elagerung, f., siege
beldftigen, v. a., to molest
belauf^en, v. a. , to watch
beleibtgen, v. a., to insult
bcllert, V. n., to bark
belo^nen, v. a., to reward
bemarfeir, v. a., to perceive, to remark
SBemerfuttg, f., remark
benad^rtd^ttgen, v. a., to inform
beneiben, v. a., to envy
^ei?g^-m-^ mountain
bertd)ten, v. a., to report
berit^mt, adj., renowned
befd^cibtgen, v. a., to damage
— 123 —
fid) befd)afttgctt, to occupy one's self
befd^tegen (strong), v. a., to bombard
iBefd^lug, m., conclusion
bejd^ulbtgen, v. a., to accuse
befe^en, v. a. , to occupy (take pos-
session of)
beftegcn, v. a., to defeat
jtc^ beffern, to improve (one's self)
beftotigen, v. a., to confirm
53efted)ung, f. , bribery
beftcl^en in (strong), to consist in
nwft-^ffl!!^ m^^'iV, to pay a visit
-bcftt^^€tt7-v. a. , to visit
fici^ betrogetl (strong), to behave (one's
self)
iBetragen, n., conduct
betrac!^tlii^, adj., considerable
betriibeti, v. a., to afflict; e§ betriibt
tntd), I am sorry
fid^ bctriibett, to be grieved, sorry
SBett, n., bed
iBettler, m., beggar
ftd) 53etDeguitg tnaci^en, to take exercise
bemunbern, v. a., to admire
Jj^n., beer
58tlb, n., (pi. SBilbcr), picture
«8miE, f., pear
bi^prep. and conj., to, till, until
iHttgfl (strong), V. a., to request
nun (pi. S3latter), n., leaf
blau, adj., blue
SBkvn., lead
5gkifiiftr«i., pencil
bkiJbOL^strong), v. n., to remain
bitten, V. n., to lighten
nt(f)t blog, conj., not only
bliil^en, v. n., to blossom, to flourish
5^tetf> f., flower
*^oot, n., boat
Jwfe, adj., wicked, naughty
SBotc, m., messenger
53otf(^aft, f., message
brauc^en^ v. a., to need, v. a.
-bue^^ (strong), V. a. & n. , to break
brett, adj», broad, wide
brenncn, v. a. & n., to bum
'. \
^rief y m,, letter
S3rteftafd^c, f., pocket-book
bringoi (strong), v. a., to bring
*Brtrt, n., bread
^vnber, m., brother
^YJiff^I, n., Brussels
^3tt(ir(pl- Biidfter), n., book
^ ^Xi^^al kt, m., book-keeper
^ud^pnbler, m., book-seller
ftd^ biitfen, to stoop
mrgfd)aft, f., bail . (
i}Sitfff»r f ., butter D ^
^.
(Concert, n,, concert
iSottgreg, m„ Congress ^
^ongregmitglieb, m., member of Con-
gress
corrigiren, v. a., to correct v^
^OUfhtT^n., (male) cousin; (Soufine, f.,
(female), cousin
S)a, adv., there; conj, since /
bamal§, adv., then, at that time * c'
2)atne, f., lady '>^
^ift^H, V. intr. , to thank
bafc^onj., that
battren, v. a. , to date X^
bauern, v. n. , to last -
beittrPi'^J^o^^j *^y5 betner, ber bctntge,
thine
benleit (strong), v. n., to think
beuttid^, adj., distinct ><
beutfc^, adj. German (adj.)
beiv^eutf(^e, German (noun)
2)feUtf^lanb, n., Germany
bid)t, adj., dense v^
bicttrett, v. a., to dictate yL
2)ieiier, m., man-servant
biefer, e, eg, pron., this
bonnern, v. n. , to thunder >
Dorf (pi. S)orfer), n., village ^
bort, adv. , there, at that place X
b ye t ,mim ., three; bretmal, three times ^
fid^ bre'^cn, to revolve, to turnyt^
124
4- hrt Wtftc, num. , the third
-f bunfel, adj., dark
feur^prep., through, by
"A burd^aug ntd)t, not at all
burflen (biirften), v. n. , to be thirsty
$4Mje«b7-»r-, dozen
>jL. ^^t, conj., before (conj.)
H^C^etnatS, adv., formerly
-JU (S^re, f., honor
■f di (pi. Ster), n., egg
^ eicjen, adj., own
^ ^igenfd^aft, f., quality
- ^ TStgent^iimer, m., owner
cmpa,-one
-4-4tcf) einbilben, to imagine
u ettitge, adj. plur., a few
Ai^Stnfommen, n., income
Ji^mlaben (strong), v. a., to invite
^'Sinlabung, f., invitation
X (Sinlag, m. , admission
Z ekimal, adv., once; nod^ etntnal, once
more
N Sinita^nte, f., revenue
J. cinnel^men (strong), v. a., to occupy,
to carry (a fortress)
NC^ettlfe'^en (strong), v. a., to be aware of
^ ettlft, adv. , once (upon a time)
*@tnn)Ol)Tlcr, m. , Tnhabi tant
eitt^^en (strong), v. a., to collect
-^ einjig, adj., single, only (adj.)
•< (Si«, n., ice
.^tfftlH*., iron
"r^ Sifenba^n, f., railroad
^^^tjettba^njug, m., railroad-train
l^jid) efein, to be disgusted
-aUt, f., ell, yard
S{tern-(plur.), parents
-^ ^tlbe, n. , end
^ngldnber, m., Englishman
>f— entbcden, v. a., to discover
./^ cntlaff en (strong), v. a. , to dismiss
j„ cntmntl^igcn, v. a., to discourage
©ntfd^abtgung, f., damages
^^mtfd^nlbtgeii, v. a,, to excuse
(Stttfdjulbtgung, f., excuse '^
tnttozxdjtn (strong), v. intr., to escape H
entgiicfenb, adj., charming ^z
er, pers. pron., he
(Srbitterung, f., a^imosity -^
€tb^J[,^arth
erfreuen, v. a., to delight "-
*(SrfoIg, m., success, result *-
ftd^ ergeben (strong), to surrender
(one's self)
crl^altert (strong), v. a., to receive
erljeblid^, adj., considerable
fidj erinnern, to remember
er!Iaren, v. a., to declare
fxci) erfdlten, to take a cold
er!ranfen, v. n., to fall sick
erfennen, v. a., to recognize
ftd) erfunbtgen, to inquire
erlauben, v. a. , to permit, to allow
(^rlaubntg, f., permission
ermut^igen, v. a. , to encourage
erna^rett, v. a. , to support
ernten, v. a. & n., to harvest
erobent, v. a., to conquer
erretd)en, v. a., to obtain, to reach
errid)ten, v. a., to establish, to erect
erringen (strong), v. a., to obtain
(with effort)
jtd) erfd^redeti (strong), to be fright-
ened, scared
erfl, adv., not till
erftaunen, v. a., to astonish (v. a.)
ber erfte, num., the first
erfud^en, v. a., to request
ertrarten, v. a., to expect
(Srhjartung, f., expectation
erlueifen (strong), v. a. to prove
er^iteleti, v. a., to derive
eg, pers. pron., it
effen (strong), v. a., to eat
ztWa^, indef. pron., something, any-
thing
cucr, poss. pron., your; ber eure, bcr
eurtge, yours
@uropa, Europe
:
f-
— 126
9-
ga^rcn (strong), v. n., to ride (on a
I vehicle)
!f gatt, m., case
---fatten (strong), V. n., to fall
?^-.faft, particle, almost
foutr^dj., idle, lazy
^Se^f., pen
(^cmrcffer, n. , pen-knife
geitib, m. , enemy
fdubXi^r-adj., hostile
-gelHpl- gelber), n., field
T^-^elb^eri*, m., commander
y'geTb;^ug, m., campaign
g€H^r, n., window
,%^mx, n., fire
^nhm (strong), v. a. , to find
^ gtef^, f., bottle
< gtetg, m., diligence
glct fe i) , n., meat, flesh
^ fteifiig , adj., diligent
fBcl^n (strong), v. n., to flee
%^lugel, m., wing
gltt§^4n., river
><{, fortrciutneit, v. a., to remove
'.; gortfc^rttt, m., progress
T^ortfet^en, v. a., to continue
fragEnrvrB;^, to ask (a question)
gwmlm^T^Hfance
graHj0f€7-i». , ^Yenchman
fran;^ftf^,-adj.TlFrench (adj.)
grau,.X,-woman7 wife
, grdutein, n., young lady,TiIiss
y^grei^eit, f. , liberty
^ fid) freuen, to be glad, to rejoice
friend (female)
greuttbttS^ffT?- friendship
grk-bitt, m. , peace
^riebrid),J'rederick
fro^, adj., glad
grant, f., front
-groft, in., frost
'^ frieren (strong), v. n. , to freeze
-%m^ f., fruit
v(^ frud^tbar, adj., fertile
fr%adj., early y^
grii^Iing, m., spring <
ftd^ fiigen, to submit >^
fiif)ren, v. a., to conduct >4
filv> prep. , for
fftiel^ten, v. n. , to be afraid; v.a. , to fear
gH»jl, m., prince
^ttg^m.,foot
, fork tK.
Oong, f., goose
ganj^adj., whole
gar ntd)t, (particle,) not at all '^^
©arten, m., garden
©artentl^iir, f., garden-gate >C
Oartner, m., gardener (male); ©art*
nerin, f. , gardener (female)
jga£t,jCQ^£u^st . >e^
©afi^of, m., hotel
.Qthm (strong), V. a., to give
©ebaube, n., building v^
©ebirge, n. , mountain-chain y/
©ebrand^, m., use ^
gebrand^en, v. a., to use ^
©ebnrtStag, m., birth-day "^
©efa^r, f., danger -<.
*®efallen, m. , the favor r-
gefallen (strong), v. intr., to please V
gefcitltg, adj., obliging /
ber ©cfangene, the. prisoner y
gegen, prep. , against
©egenb, f., landscape, grounds y(
©egner, m., adversary )<
y])fj ^, pa tron g-)j. v. n., to gO, tO walk,
to step
gc^ori^en, v. intr. w. dat., to obey \]
^eprntpr. intr., to belong
geprig, adj., proper -^
©el^iilfe, m., assistant-^
©etftm., mind X
©elbfiilcf , n. , piece of money ^
Oetegen'^ett, f. , occasion ^
(Sele^rfamfeit, f., scholarship
gelel^rt, adj., learned
126
>c^clten (strong), v. n., to be esteemed,
to be worth; etttJoS getten, to be for
something
@emll[e^ ~nr, vegetables
*^eueral^-m., general (nomi)
X Qcnefen (strong), v. n., to recover
(neuter)
7> geniigenb, adj., suflacient
yCQ^^^^t, adj., just
Si. gem, adv., gladly, willingly
Ct ber ©efanbte, the embassador
' @e{4^ ^-j business
jf ©efdjti, n. , ability
u gefc^icft, adj., able
©efellfd^aft, t, company
^ @efe^, n„ law
gefunb, adj., healthy
.^^fleai, adv., yesterday
yt geftel^en (strong), v.a., to acknowledge
«/v@etreibc, n., grain
^ ©eraalt, f. , force
y getrig, adj., certain
V@ett)itter, n., thunderstorm
Ih^mo^nljtitff., habit
gett)bl)nltct), adj., ordinary, common
@iebel, m., top (of a roof)
©ipfel, m. , top (of a mountain etc.)
@la§, n., glass
glauben, v. a. & n., to believe
©lauben, m., faith, belief
©Idublger, m., creditor
©liicf, n., fortune, success, happiness
-gfflttit?, adj., happy
©olb^ji., gold
goibmradj., golden, gold (adj.)
©raben, m., moat, ditch
"©raffm., count
groft^-adj., great, large, big
©runb, m., reason
9tt4>-adj., good, kind
@Ut, n., property
®litc,f., kindness
^b«l
-v-\. «•
:il,*¥'<rwr,\tu"hav<
^n^albcr (c,i^), halfa
^alMnbtf f., cravat ^|—
l^lten («<Tong), V. a,, to kold, to keep
t)aTlb, f., hand
^anbel, m., trade | ,..
l^dnbeln, v. n., toact^ *-{--
l^itlTTjnTTstrong), v. n., to hang
Jart, adj^, hard ^
l^affen, v. a., to hate -yL -^^7"^
^oixptft^bt, t, capital
§(Uia4pl. .©aufer), n., house
^augtl^iir, f., street-door v
l^eilen, v. a. & n., to heal n/,
^etrat^en, v. a., to marry y^.
l^eigeu, V. a. & n., to warm the rooms,
to build a fire
"^^rfbT^m., hero
l^difiHistrong), V. intr.w. dat, to help
§emb, n., shirt ^
^erau§forbern, v. a,, to challenge /
^erbft, m., autumn *^
beretniommen, i ,
I)tiietn!ommen, | to come m, get m ,
bereintreten, ) ^ ^ . .
^inetntreten, jtostepm/.
^emj m.. gentleman, Mr.
^miibeil^iDlmmen, l^oswunoyer-^^
^er^lic^, adj», sincere ;/
i^m^, adv., to-day
^ttr,'adv., here
§tmmc(, m., heaven, sky ^
^inberntg, n, obstacle -f^
i^eti^ adj., high
^offen, V. a. & n., to hope -^
^o|fmwgpi.,hope
^ofHt^, adj., polite
l^breit, .V. a., to hear
j^iibfd^^ adj., pretty
^I)n, n., chicken
§iilfe, f., help ^
*§unb, i»tr-<iog
]^ngeni;Trn::7"tcrbe hungry
^Ut, JBi, hat t
^
\21
3. (rowel),
^IjX, pers. pr., you, to her; poss. pr., •
her, their, your; ber tl^rtgc, hers,
theu's; ber 31^rtge, yours
immer, adv, , always
in, p^ep,, in, into
3nbnftrie, f,, industry
3tolten, Italy
3taltener (3taitaner),m., Italian (noun)
4. 3* (consonant). vlv5\ *^
3a, adv., yes
*34^r, n., the year
{cber, e, eg, each, every
^ebermantt, everybody
[i3emailb, somebody, anybody
7-i^er, £,. ea (dem. pron.), that (dern.),
that one
je^t^ad^M now
j|uug,.adj., young
^a\\Uf nu, fijM^i^or
fUalh, n., (pi. mihtv), calf
faitj^dj., cold
yitalte, f., the cold
:^ ^amerab, m., comrade
^ftttftbftt, m. , cahdidale^^^'-—
^4liWiab€, f., cannonade
^nottcnlugel, f., cannon-ball
^cife, m», cheese
to^, f., cat
!aufen> v. a., to buy, to purchase
^Ctllfer, m,, purchaser
^oufmcum, m., merchant
teiit, no, adj. pron.
leiinen, (irr.), v. a., to know
K ^enntntg, f. knowledge, attainment
ttnb, n.rtP^' ^tnber), child
li!irf(3^e, f.,. cherry
X ^Iciger, m. , plaintiff
>^^Iar^ett, f., clearness
<<^Iafft!er, m., classic (noun)
^^twKpl.^Ieiber),n., dress
.c,-ti\
tUinf adj., small, little
Muc^m.y boy
*^offer, m., trunk ^
^o^le, f», coal y
.(iiiltty. Cologne
Ig mtnett (strong), v. n., to come
^omntobc, f., chest of drawers y{
f'nnt^ m., king
^finiytlt, f., queen
fonnen, irr. v., to be able y^-
^to^ffd^tnerj, m., head-ache ^
• ^orb, m., basket yi^
-kOfl]^ adj., sick, ill
^ranf^ett, f., disease, sickness /. .
^retbe, f., chalk y.
^rteg, m., war ^
^rone, f., crown y
#tt^ f., bullet
-lUj^adj., short, brief
?aben, m., shop -^
ganb (pi . I^anber), n., country
IBanbgut, n., farm, country-seat >C
iOanbljaug, n., villa *^
JtitH§5r€fe^^leng
lattge (adv. of time), long, for a longX
time
laufetl (strong), V. n., to run ^
e8 Iciutet, the bell rings y^
Ifebtir," V. n., to live
geben, n., life
lOeben^mittel, n., victual, eatable ><
leer, adj., empty ^
^^fytt^^r^^., teacher
"^^^blUJ^ n., text-book
lOetc^e, f., corpse -f~
letd^t, adj., light, easy ^
eg tl)Ut tnir leib, I am sorry >;<
letbeit (strong), v. n. & a., to suffer x.
letl)en (strong), v. a. to lend -/^
fe^He%v. a., to learn
U!{m (strong), v. n. & a., to read
leugtien, v. a., to deny 5<.
Seilte^l., people, individuals
— 128 —
')^ItcB,"adj., dear; cS tfl tnir lieb, I am
glad
liebeiv V. a., to love
liegeh^ (strong), v. n., to lie, to be
(situated)
-|^'Iin!, adj., left (side)
v^gifte, f., list
V liter arijc^, adj., literary
"f-Ioben, V. a., to praise
-gaij^n., {pi. 2bd)tx), hole
f^offel, m., spdon
>$?oI)n, m. & n.,\ wages
•^ot^, n., half an ounce
Jgijtnr, m., lion •
^ Suft l)aben, to have a mind (desire)
^ ^ m.
■ SKfl^H, V. a., to make
"jf- Tla6)t, {., power
S^^^4^^ II- » girl
S9^br-f-j maid-servant
^ aJ^ailanb, Milan
•^SD^anget, m., want
/Maim, m., (pi. Tlanmx), man (male),
husband
y. MadtfjOQ.., market
^MaxmoXf m., marble
yC^ 2Rauer, f., wall (outside)
BRj^indef. pron., more
N. nte^rere, indef. pron., several
' utetttT-my; ber tneintge, nteiner, mine
SKettfc^, m., man (human being)
^ffe^^i., knife
*meta% n., metal'
Wttmttty t, minute
Imi^iin^m (strong), v. n., to fail
mit^prep., with
-^ tnitbrtngen (strong), v. a., to bring
along
r 9iJl-itgtieb,n., (pi. er), member (person)
-t mttnel^men (strong), v. a., to take
^ along
'^ IKittel, n. , means, instrument
*<mtttl)eileit, v. a., to communicate, to
impart
mbgltt^/a)4j., possible
*2)^onat, m., month
*3}iOTlb, m„ moon
*3}?0Tgett, m., morning
tltDrgen, adv., to-morrow
mitbe, adj., tired
Ttii^t, t, trouble-^
Tlnt^, m., courage -f^
2KllikX, f., mother
^' A
^ad), prep., after, to K
ggftf^hnr m., (male) neighbor; 'Hflacti*
biirin, f., (female) neighbor
tiad^gebett (strong), v. intr., to yield
9^a(i)ftd^t, f., indulgence^—
nad^ft, adj. & adv.. ne^fjA^
^S'ht^f., night \
^otJct, f., needle, piii'
fid) nci^ern, to approach ^
,^fietm%y~m., name
nag, adj., wet >/
neben, prep., (near) by 'f>
9^ebel, m., fog >^
D^effe, m., nephew -f..
tttttt, no (particle)
vymr adj., new
md^f not
nid^t einntol, not even "/-
nt4t^ nothing, not anything; m(i)t«
tuag, nothing that
uk^Jlkma^Jiever
9^ieberlage, f., defeat VC
Ui]4L(adv. of time), still, yet
'Hflotl) letben, to suffer (be in distress) j
'^' ^itt^di^ , adj., useful
Db, whether, if
Ob^^i., fruit '•
Obrigfett, f., the authorities ^
ober, or \
off en^ adj., open
bffentlid^, adj., public y^
bffnen, v. a., to open "<
C^eitn, Onfel; m., uncle
— 129
m\
o^tte, prep. , without
Drbnung, order (opposed to disorder)
iftreid^ (Oefterreid)), Austria /^
^y^MT, n., pair, couple
K^artet, f., party
y^^Jaffagter, m*, passenger
■]i fpff ^^; ni., pepper
^fcrlr, n., horse
^^ftaume, f., plum
y J)flafterjt, v. a., to pave
/ pflegen, v. a., to nurse
-^♦^funb, n,, pound
JC ^latiiren, v. a., to grade, to level
A plo^ttd), adj., sudden
^Jto^ent/ T. a:;'to plunder
X $oftamt, n., post;'^ffice
< ^rdcf)tig, adj., magnificent
^Jktifttytttt, m^j^^president
^jjrdft^^trtftlJafCf^ presidency
^:^m^, m., price
^ifCitge, m., Prussian (noun)
^reugen, Prussia
'T'^roteftiren, v. n. , to protest
I ^rojeg, m., lawsuit
sCCluatett, V^ a., to torment
7n «•
)l Sldd^en, aA a., to avenge
^ 9iatib (pi J 9?dnbcr), m., edge
'/ 9iang, m.^ rank
s^ 9^at^, m.,i advice
■^ xatljtxi (stirong), v. a., to advise
>" 9tat^geberi m», adviser
. 9lduber, mi, , robber
^iMft, n,, tight
m(;t, adj., right
xsiim, V. n.,, to speak, to talk
^S Slegelmdgigtett, f., regularity.
Wi%m, m., rkin
^k^m^d^xxmii m., umbrella J.
tcgieren, v. $.. & n., to govern
^ftcgterung, fi, government
xt^nm, V. n., to rain
m%adj., rich
rcid^en, v. a. , to hand ^
Xtxdjii^^ adj., abundant /
'3idlje,\ f., row, series y,,
^^%y.^, journey
retjettpp. n. , to travel, to go (travelling)
mt^n-^stapong), V. n., to ride (on
horse-back)
^tittXf m., horse-man 7^
repariren, v. a., to repair 7C.
S^kjUlW^I, f., republic
r£|iuJWilmiiff^ adjr, repttbliean
9iet)aluti0tt;-f., -revolution (uprising)
d^ftmr ffi. pEEme
^iiijtex, m., judge >/^
ric^tig, adj., correct
S ^ itt ^ y. m., ring ^
9farf, m., coat
9liu^m, m., glory jl_
ftd^ rii^tnen (w. gen.), to boast (of)j^^
^nfitfltlb, Bussia
@ad^c, f., thing ^(.^
fden, V. a. & n., to sow (scatter)TC
^gettrV. a., to say, to tell '
*@«% n., salt
®d)aben, m., damage ^
fd^aben, v. intr., to injure ^
4(i^ai;fradj., sharp
fd^einen (strong), v. n., to shine, to
' seem -^
itfjl^u, V. a., to send
*@d)icffal, n., fate n^
@d^ief erbat^, n. , slate-roof >(^
@rf)iff, n., ship >^
@d^il^t2jl^, f., sentinel
@d)itibel, f., shingle \^
@d^infen, m., ham X
@d)tac^t, f., battle
@rf)tad^tfelb, n., field of battle SL,
Wtftfen- (strong), v. n., to sleep
f(i)tagen (strong), v. a., to beat, to strike
W«^, bad
n ^
130 —
^fd^IieSctt (strong), v. a., to close
^ @#t0§rn.» (pi. ©d^toffer), castle
y ©d^liiffel, m., key
i-<BdjmtV^, m., pain
i- e8 fd)mergt ntid^, I am grieved, sorry
^fttjTXabll, m., beak
y, @(^nee, m. , snow
^(i^neert)ettcr, n., snow-storm
fdjneiben (strong), v. a., to cut
.©d^neiber, m., tailor
nU:, fdineien, v. n., to snow
/ \6)on, adv. , already
-fci^oii, adj., beautiful, fine
@d)on^ett, f. , beauty
f(i)re(fltd^, adj., terrible
fd^cttrnr(strong), V. n. & a., to write
*'^VL%'"m., shoe
*<2d)n4m<X^^ m., shoemaker
r (S(f)ulb, f., debt, guUt
Q>dfukj4. , school
©driller, m., scholar (pupil)
@djit^, m., shelter, protection
fd^tDa^, adj., weak
jd^mar;^, adj., black
{d^loeiv adj., heavy, difficult
^d^ttielJer, f. , sister
fd[)tt)tnbtig, adj., giddy
@ct)rt)inbfud^t, f., consumption
fd^lrt^en, V. n., to sweat, to perspire
@cttrtJC, m., slave
(BtttdVLbtXf m., pirate
4cl&eu (strong), V. a. & n., to see
fcfyiv ^dv. , very, very much
-@eiferf., soap
jtin, his, ber fetnlgc, his (without a
noun)
ffiu^ V. n. , to be
fcit, prep., before, since, ago; conj.
since, ever since
*@eitat, m., senate
-fenbctVr (irr. ) v. a., to send
@enf, m., mustard
fic^ ie^en, to take a seat
<Bi6)txljtxt, f., safety
@teg, m., victory
@ttber, n., silver
ftlbcrn, adj., silver, ^adj.)
fx^tn (strong), V. n., to sit
'Strung, f., session, meeting
fo, adv., so, thus
fogteid^, adv., presently, directly, im-
mediately
®ol)n, m., son
fold^er, e, eg, such
©olbat, m., soldier
®ontmer, m., summer
fonberbar, adj., odd
fonbern, but
(Sonne, f., sun
©onntag, m., sunday
®^anten. Spam
fparjam, adj., economical
fpdt, adj., late
fpajteren fal^ren, to take a ride
jpa^teren ge^en, to tak^ a walk
@^eife, f., food, eatable, (n.)
@ptegel, m., min-or, looking-glass
f^ielen, v. n., to play
©prad^e, f., language
f^red^en (strong), v. n., to speak
@tabt, f., city, town
ftdbtijd^, adj., city, (adj.)
(Bta^l, m., steel
ftar!, adj., strong
©tdvfe, f., strength
©tation, f. , station
(Statue, f., statue
@taub,m., dust
(©telle, f. , place
ftellen, v. a., to place
(SteEung, f . , position
fterben (strong) v. n., to die
(Sttefel,m., boot
(Stod, m. , cane, stick
ftoren, v. a., to disturb
ftrafen, v. a., to punish
©trage, f. , street
ftrenge, adj., severe
©trnntpf, m., stocking
(Btixd, n., piece
ftubtren, v. n., to study
(©tul^I, m., chair
- ^ -\ h
— .131 —
©tunbc, f., hour
@tt)t, m., style
fud}en, V. a., to seek, to look for
^itmnte, f., sum
@u^pe, f., soup
a, v^a., i
i-^¥
)^ 2^abeltt, v^a., to blame, to censure V
^%a%, m., day; adjt Xa^t, a week
"^taglid^; adj., daily *f
J eg tac^t, the day breaks 7^
'§;a]ltff f., aunt
"/-S^apferfett, f., valor, bravery
^%a]d)entn(ij, n., pocket-handkerchief
^•ft^, f-, cup
^tauf(i)en, v. a., to deceive, to disap-
point
^ek§m^ m., telegraph
>- Speller, m., plate
*V!^^kTrm., dollar
7^2^I)aun)etter, n», thaw
^eiic r; n., theatre
ee, m. , tea
7^2;^ eil, m., part
filf%¥m^ adj., dear
[ 3^1) h r r ; n,, animal, brute
ll^mrtslrong & irr.), v. a., to do
%()ill( ^; f.j door, gate
XtjUT^m., tower, steeple
;Ctief, adj., deep
^4gfrrm., tiger
Zmi r ; i., ink
^Tf(fJ7m., table
•^S ^ifd y t f tv m., joiner
See^terf-, daughter
gt f br m., death
t ub t ;- adj., dead
^toWn, v. a., to kill
ytbbtUd^, adj., fatal
Iruii^VuillTtlt, V. a., to transport
tremog^ sad; id) bin traurig, I am sad,
I am sorry, grieved
^ffffnr (strong), v. a., to hit
fl^^— trctmctt-,- to separate (from one
another)
•-- t«av adj., faithful
t » t!t!on ..( &t rong), v. n. & a., to drink
troften, v. a», to comfort, to console
Zxnp);im, pi. troops
U.
iibel, adj., sick in the stomach -^
ittoj-prep., over, above
iiberall, adv., everywhere V
*uberpufen, v. a., overwhelm >
*iiberrafd^en, v, a., to surprise •*#.
^btffeffe i ib tf H^ {iv T r )y-v: -a^ tp send
*iibertragen (strong), y. a., to confer ^
(upon)
iiber^eugt, adj., convinced
Ul^r, f., watch, clock y^
* U l) t ' Umd)Civ> m., watchmaker
Utn, prep., around, about ^?4
*umgcben (strong), v. a. , to surround X
umgel^en (strong), v. n., to associate -^
Umlauf,m. , revolution (turning round)
*untrtngen, to surround (in a circle) y(^
Utnrig, m., sketch ^
iwiattgm£tlllt4 adj., unpleasant
jmortig^-adj., naughty
Utlbebeutenb, adj., inconsiderable y^
utibegrunbct, adj., unfounded n<
ainb^jDonx^ and
UtifaH, m., accident, misfortune
4lrtgIMr-Ji.-,-inisfctft«ne
ungliitflidft, adj., unhappy, unfortunate
Unorbttung, f., disorder
Unrcct)t, n. , wrong
imrtd^tig, adj., incorrect
unfer, our; ber unfrige, ours
Utlter, prep., under, below, beneath
utlterge^eti (strong), v. n., to set (of
the sun etc.)
*ftd) utiterl^alten (strong), to converse
Unter^attung, f., conversation
Untemel^mutig, f. , enterprise
*utiterrtd^tcn, v. a. , to instruct, to in-
form
Untcrrtd^t ncl^mcn, to take lessons
*unterftii^en, v. a», to support
untreu, adj., faithless
c -4
— 132 . —
iUltJorft^ttg, adj., incautious
lintt)al)r, adj., untrue
Untnlffen^eit, f., ignorance
unttJO^I, adj., unwell -
uitj^ulaffig, adj., inadmissible
Urjad^e, f„ cause
-^Sater, m., father
'^S^a^ertanb, n., one's own country,
fatherland
V jtd) t)^rbeugen, to bow (down)
iBerbr^d)cn, n.^ crime
SBerbadjit, m., suspicion
s^ toerbtenen, v. a. , to deserve
rf-S$erbienft, n., merit
-^erbrtegltd^, vexed, initated
tLc^ Derbrtegt vxi6), I am vexed, irritated
'L oerborren, v. n., to dry up
^ Derfolgen, v. a., to pursue "
bergebtid),adv., iu vain
T^-toergeffen (strong), v. a., to forget
^ ftd^ tjergteidjert (strong)^ to mabe a
compromise
/ oergniigt, adj., glad
i ^^erguiigen, n., pleasure
'ULjjergrofeern, v. a., to increase
/^erl)aften, v. a», to arrest
-^Derlaufen, v. a., to sell
•^erlenneu, v. a., to. misjudge*
Det[aitgen, v. a., to demand
SSerlangen, n., demand
Oerlaffeu (strong), v. a., to leave, quit,
desert
Derlaumben, v. a., to slander
toerlejen (strong), v. a., to read
Jjerle^en, v. a., to hurt
tocrlleren (strong), v. a., to lose
oermietl^en, v. a., to rent
55ermbgen, n., property
t)ermut^en, v. a. , to presume
tternld^ten, v. a., to annihilate
toerpfltd^ten, v. a., to pledge
berrat^en (strong), v. a., to betray
ftd) t)crjammetn, to assemble (v. n.)
Derjclumen, v. a., to miss
SSerjdian^ung, f., entenchment
tierfdjttegen (strong), v. a„ to lock
terfd^onern, v. a., to embellish
Derfc^ttJinben (strong), v. n., to dis-
appear
tierfe^en (strong), v. a., to provide
toerfic^ern (v. a.), to assure
Derfrnfen (strong), v. n., to sink
tjerforgen, v. a., to supply
berfpred^en (strong), v. a., to pro*
mise
S5erfpred)en, n., \ ^^^^. ^
iBcr[pred}uttg,f.,F"^^^^
SSerftarfung, f., reinforcement
toerftel^en (strong), v. a., to un-
derstand
*iBerfu(^, m., attempt
toerfud)en, v. a. , to attempt, to endeav-
or, to try
Jjert^etbigen, v. a., to defend
oertreten (strong), v. a., to represent
tjerurfad^en, v. a., to cause
t)erurtl)eilen, v. a., to condemn
35erurt^eilimg, f., condemnation
t)erlt>alten, v. a., to manage, to ad"^
minister
35crtDattung, t, administration
DertDtdeln, v. a., to implicate
toerttimtben, v. a., to wound
better, m., cousm (male)
^itlj, n., cattle
totel, much; tJtele, many
t)teEeid)t, perhaps
Dter, four; biermal, four times; bicrtel,
a quarter; ber tJtette, the fourth
3SogeI, m., bird
35ol!, n., the people (nation)
tJoU, adj., fuU
boKenben, v. a., to finish
tjolltg, adv., fully
tJon, prep., of, from, by
t)or, prep., before, ago
tjorberetten, v. a., to prepare
tJorlaben (strong), v. a., to summon
ijorlegen, v. a., to submit (placo b^
fore)
— - 133
SJorlefung, £♦, lecture
23orrat^, m., stock
iBorfc^Iag, m», proposition
tooiiici)tig, adj., cautious
ber 35orfiijenbe, chairman
Doriibergel^en (strong), v. n.. to pj
tor^ic^en (strong), v. a., toprefei
t SSad^fant, adj., watchful
tB ft(J^f e u (s trong), v. n., to grow
yL^fBa^m, m., carriage
yL. (fic^) tt)agen, to venture
i-^0:jl, t, election, choice
f tt)al)(en, v. a., to elect, to choose
sj^2Bal}ter, m., voter
^ttja^nen, v. a., to suppose (wrongly)
''Wltljt, adj., true
^iuci^renb, prep., during; conj. while
•/2Bat)rt)ett, f., truth
' SS«4Hpl' 3BaIber), m., forest
/ 2BaE, m. , rampart
XSKanb, f., wall (inside)
t^aimp interrog. adv., when?
ttinrrtty adj., warm
Mrmett^v. a., to warm
>4»arten, v. a., to wait
l ^afUUl/ adv., why
XiM^ pron., what
* % ] iflffc% n., water
* 2Be(i)fet, m. , note (bill of exchange)
S05eg, m. , way, road
/ruegen, prep,, on account of
^ftd) tDCtgern, to refuse (v. n.)
-m€4{r-6o»j . , because
i figeitiy m ^^ine
3Sem§«¥teu, m., vine-yard
meig, «dj., white
ftrrtfc*dj., wise
SB5eigI)eit^.f., wisdom
■ iDCtt, adj., far
n)ctd)er, which, who, that
U3emg, little, few; ttjemger, less (fewer)
Xotv, interr. pron. , who ?
SBetter, n., weather
ttjte, interr. adv., how ? ber toit bielpe,
what day of the month, what (in
order) ?
*tr)iberfal)ren (strong), v. intr., to
befall
*fid^ tDtberfeijen, to resist, to oppose
irieber, adv., again
''D^OCu/t^'^^^^^^W^^ (strong), v. a., to see
again
tniff en, irr. v. a. , to know
tno, where
SKod^e, f. , week
tt)0\)i, adv., well
trol^lfeil, adj., cheap
\voi)ntn, V. n., to dwell, to live,
reside
5So^nung, f., residence
*SSort (pi. either SBorte or SBortcr),
n., word
SBimbarjt, m., surgeon
SSiJtibe, f., wound
jtc^ trunbern, to wonder
2Bunf(^, m., wish, desire
tDunfd^eti, V. a., to wish,^ to desire
SSurm, m. (pi. aBiirmer), worm
8.
3a^t,f., number *^
ja^ten, v. a. & n., to pay y^.
jdl)Ien, V. a. , to number ^
gctc^nen, v. a. & n., to draw (make a yt
draft)
^^3eit^.,time
geituug* f., newspaper
gcrftbren, v. a., to destroy
^m^mtrn., room
3ttnmermann, m., carpenter X #,
30II, m., inch ;k
ber 3oIlbcamtc, the custom-house-
officer*- \
j«, prep., to; adv. too
3urfcr, III. , sugar
jufatlig, adj., accidental
r
134 —
^ttfrkka, adj., contented, satisfied,
T^Siif"'^^/ f., supply, provisions
piOfChm (strong), v. a., to concede
■{^H^'dreiiy V. a., to listen to
' ' gi«nad)en, v. a., to shut
■^urMradv., back
gurMfe^ren, v. n., to return
guriicflaffen (strong), to leave behind
guriicfreifen, v. n., to go (travel),
back
pUxJ^^dmr^. a., to send back
fu]^_4Uru(Jjte^eti (strong), to with-
draw, to retreat
gttfammen, adv., together
guftellen, v. a., to deliver
3uftimmung, f-, approbation, consent
^totd, m.. purpose
^)mu two; ber podtt, the second
gttjetfel^aft, adj., doubtful
gwetfeitt; V. n. , to doubt
gttjetmat; twice
F , 6-
1^%
d
^
c^
— 135 —
READING EXERCISES.
^B®* The words not suggested in the Notes are found in the Vocabulary.
•1. pie ^exie. (The Axes.)
!Dte9l^ti ehte^ armeu ^intmemtannS tnarMtt etnen ©trom^ ge^
fatten^. (Sr flefjte^ htn j^in^ott' an^ fie i^m mieber ^n brmgen«,
©a' fttegs ber ®ott aup unb bra(i)te« eine golbene 2l^t ^erauf^ „^a^
ift bie metmge md)t/' fprai^^^ t)er 3immermann. ®er glu^gott
tau(f)teii in bie Jtiefe^^ unb tam^^ mit ciner fitbernen 2tyt tcieber ^er^
t)or". „2lu(i)i4 biefe ge^ort mir nid)t"/' fagte ber ^xme\ Unb toieber
t)erfan!i6 ber ®ott, nnb bra(f)te eine 3ljt Don ©ifen ntit J^otjernem"
<StieIe''=^ an§ ber 3:iefe. „®a^ ift bie meine/' rief^^ froli^o ber 3^^^==
ntermann an^^^^ „3rf) fe^e, bn bift jmari arm, aber n)a^r^aft22 nnb
e^rlid)23/' Derfefete^^ ber ®ott. ,,9iimm25 alle brei Sleyte gnr^^ Selo^^
nnng2' !" gin nne^rlic^er^s SOienf^, ber tjon biefem aSorfalle^^ ge^ort
l^atte, tt)oUte«o Derfn^en, ob ba^^^ ©tltd i^n ebenfo^^ begiinftigen
tt)erbe«, nnb tie^34 jetne 3lyt borfd^Iirfj^s in ben gln^ fatten, (£r fa^
in ber ki^at^^ bengln^gott anffteigen, na^bem^' er i^n angefle^t ^atte,
i^m bie 21^1 mieber jn bringen, ©er @ott'ijidt^^ eine golbene 2ljt in
ber §anb nnb fragte iftn, ob e^ bie feinige fei. „Qa, ba^ ift bie mei*
nige/' rief ber ©etrliger^^ entjUcft^o an^, feine §anb an^ftredenb^^
„5Ki(^t§tt)itrbiger^M" rief ber ®ott mit jorniger^^ ©timme^^ „®{anbft
hn, bu fonnteft^^ benjenigen tdnfc^en, ber in bein innerfte^''^ ^^^*''
blidt^? ^ux @trafe^» fottft«> bu nun" anc^^^ ba^jenige^^ ^erlieren,
xoa^^ bi^^er^'^ bein Sigentl^nm^^ iDar^^"
^axe. 2river. ^pluperf. of fatten, I, 99, a. <to implore, I, 68. ^river-god. ^to
return, bring back, 'redundant, II, 72. ^imp. of auffleigen, to arise, "l^eraufbringctt,
to bring up I, 99, 4. i^imperf. of f^rcd^en. "to dive, to go down. ^Hhe deep.
i3]^er\3orfommcn, to come up. ^"^an^—nidft, neither, nor. ^^11, 77, 1. '^imperf. of
Uerfinten. ''wooden, i^handle. ^Saugrufcn, to exclaim. 201^ 72, 4 ; II, 68. 2ire-
dundant, if sentences with a6er follow. 22truthful. 23honest. 24to reply, ^^mj^emt.
of nel^men, to take. 26iiistead of ju ber, for a, as a. 27reward. 2?(iislionest. 29iii.
cident. aoj, 53, 3. 3in, 74 § 99. ^^in the same manner, II, 72, 4. ssfuture sub-
junctive (of indirect statement II, 87, 2, note) of begiinftigen, to favor. See II, 39,
note. 34iinperf. of laffen, to let. 3^on purpose, scjntleed. 37after, conjunction.
38imperf. of l^altcn. ssimpostor. ^o^ith dehght, delighted. -^Ho stretch out.
«wretch, miscreant. «angry. 44voice. ^^i^ 49, 62; II, 88,^ note. '*6inmost.
^Hieart. 48to look. 49for your punishment. »oshall. sinow. fi^even. ^^I, 27, Obs.
^''till now, hitherto, ^your own. ^1^ 47. •*
— 136 —
2» §in ixwet ^ancx. (A noble Peasant.)
4Beii einer Ueberfd)tt)emmung2 ber Stfd)^ murbe^ bie SrucEe* t)on
SScrona burd) bie ©emalt ber gluts tjinweggeriffen^. 3lber nod^' ftanbs
ciner^ ber mittterem" Sogen^^ auf bem^^ fid^'^ ein^au^ befanb^^, n)e{*
(^e^ t)on»'» bem ^oKeinne^meri^ jnit feiner gamilie^s betr)of)nt murbe".
i)a^ am^8 ]xfcv'9 berfammette^^ SSoIf fonnte^^ beutlii^sa ba^ §u(fe^
gefdf)rei23 ber imglMUdiem^ gamitie {)oren. ©er ®raf t)on. S^o(t)e:=
rini, ber fi(^ mitten im^^ ©ebrange^e befanb, tierf prates? bemjenigen,
ber bie arnte gamitie mittelft^^ eine^ ^oote^ t)om fidiern^^ Unter-
gange^o erretten" tDUrbe^s, eine S3eIol)nung" t)on 500 j^alern, 3lber
e^*" fanb \xfi) ^Jiemanb^^ ber ^Intf) genug^^ ge^abt l^atte^', fein 8eben
bem tr)iit^enben38 ©trome*^ anjutjertrauen^^ ©a^^ !am^2 ein junger
53auer^3 {jerbei^^ bem bie fritif(f)e'*'» Sage^^ be6 ^ofleinne^mer^ unb
feiner gamilie t)on ben Umfte^enben*^ mitget^eitt trinrbe, D^ne ^tiU
t)ertui>7 fprang^s er in einen ^a^m^, unb mit grower Slnftrcngung ge-
lang e§ i{)m^, ba§ §an^ ju erreitfien. Sr marf" ben Semol^nem^^
ein ®eil53 J^5l^ mittelft beffen^ fie \\d)^^ in ben Sa^n l^erabtie^en^,
§ierauf56 brad)te^'^ er, nai^ einem mut^igen^ ^ampfe^^ mit ben (5te^
menten^o, bie ^amilie unbef^dbigt^i am ba^ fid^ere^^ ^fer. 3lfe nnn^^
ber ®raf i^m bie Setol^nung einf)dnbigen iDoUte^s, bie er fo tDo^I t)er'
bient«6 l^atte, meigerte er fic&, fie anjune^men, unb fagte: rrQd) t)er*
!aufe mein 8eben nii^ts nod^^^ bebarf^^ id^ gure§ ®elbe§, ba meiner
§dnbe 3Irbeit micf) unb bie 9JZeinigen'o ernd^rt, ®ebt 3ltie6 ber ar*
men i^^^inilie, bie ®ott burd^ mid) gerettet i)at, unb bie afler i^rer
§abe^i beraubt ift^^^''
^during, ^inundation, ^^(jige, 4pass. imperf. of l^intoegrei^en, to carry away,
^bridge, ^current, '^still. ^imperf. of ftel^en, to stand {was left), % 48 ; II, 26.
lomiddle. "arch. 121^ 25. '^fic^ Befinben, to be, to stand. >^I, 74; Obs. 3. ^HoU-
gatherer. ^^family. 1 "to inhabit. ^^^I, 93. ^^shore. 2oto gather, (past part.) See
1, 105, Obs. 3. 211, 58, 3. 22distinctly. ssghrieks for help. 24distressed. ssjn the
midst of, among. ^Ccrowd. sTimperf. of toerf^reci^en. 28by means of. 29sure. 30i
struction. 3ito save. ^Sconditional, with the force of a subjunctive of indirect state-
ment. See II, 87 note 4; 11,88 note 6. 33reward. a^redundant, 1, 87, Obs. 1. 351^23.
36enough. ^'IL 89, 6. s^fierce. 39current. -^Oentrust, see II, 60, 2. ^ladverb ot
time, at this moment, II, 72, 2. -^^l^erBeifcmmcn, to come along, ^speasant. '*4cri-
tical. ^ogituation. •♦^bystander, spectator, ''^oss of time, -^simperf. of f^jringeu,
to jump, -^^boat, skiff, ^^imperf. of gelingcn, to succeed in; in German used
•'mpersonally (it succeeded to him), ^limperf. of juttjerfcn, to.throio (something to
jomebody). 52in]iabitant. ^''rope. ^genitive of the relative ber, see II, 16, Rem.
I ; n, 61. ssimperf. of M ^eraBIaffcn, to let one's self down, to descend, see I, 99,
L ^^ then, afterwards, thereupon, ^"imperf. of bringen, to bring, convey, I, 58.
'^vigorous. • s^struggle. ^^baS Clement, the element, ^^unharmed, ^21^ 93^ obs. 1.
— 137 —
2. 4. Secure, ^^redundant. ^^zix(^an\>iQtn tootten, to be about to hand, i. e. to
tender, ^Ho earn. 6?!^ 19^ Obs. 3. ^Snor. 69pres. of tebilrfen (1, 107), to be in
need, construed with the genitive, II, 78, a. 'Omy family, II, 25, 3. '^property,
wpres. pass, of l&crau6en, to deprive. See II, 61, § 75.
3. §xn 6flexxexi!^xf^et ^anet. (An Austrian Peasant.)
3Ife bie granjofen im ^^a^re 1809 auf SBiem t)orru(ftem, mar^
fc^irte^ eine6 abenb^^ ber SSortrab^ einer fraujofifc^en 2:rup:penabt^e{=^
iung^ inxd) ein an ber ^eerftra^e^ belegene^ o[terrei(i)if(i)e^ S)orf. S)er
Sefe^fe^aber«, ber beabft(J)ttgte, tDd^renb ber 5yfact)t einen tniditigem
^lan^o gegen ben geinb au^3ufitf)ren, forberte^^ einen Saner anf", ber
3lbt^ei(nngi=' aU SBegmeifer^^ ^^ btenen"- 2lber ber Saner UljnW
e§i6 ab^^ fid)i7 ^n ehtem fo(^en Slntte" fjerjngebem^ 2lfe ber Dfficier •
feine Slnfforbernng^^ bringenber^ tDieber^otte^ be^arrte^^ ber Saner
entf(^ieben23 anf fetner SBeigernng^^ ®er Offtcter beftiirmte^^ t^n ntit
SSerfprec^nngen nnb bot^e it)m sntefet^^ einen f(^tt)eren Sentel^^ ®oIbe^
ate SeIof)nnng29. Slber 3lHe^ txiar Dergeblicf). -3=njn)if(f)en3o fant bie=^
ienige 2:rn|)penabt]^eilnng an, jn t^etd^er ber 3Sortrab ge^orte, nnb ber
©enerat tnar dn^erft anfgebrarfit^v bag bie SErn:ppen \\^^^ nicf)t fc^om*
lange anf bent 9Jiarfd)e befdnben^^^ Site er erfn^r^^ bag ber ein^ige,
be« 3Bege§ Innbige^^. 3Kann fi(^ ni(^t beiDegen^^ Iaffe% ate ffiegmeifer
in bienen, befaljt er, hen Saner Dorsnfii^ren^s. „gntmeber^/' rief^» er
il^m 3n''o, ^jeigft^^ bn nn^ ben rerf)ten 3Beg, ober id) taffe-^^ i^i^ cx\d)k^
^en«!" — „®e^r tooijtl" ern)ieberte^^ ber Saner, „in biefem galte
toerbe ic^ ate rei^tfctiaffener^s Snrger^^ [terben nnb brandEje ni(f)t 8an==
be^oerrdt^er^' jn iDerben." ©iefe geftigleit^^ erfiillte^^ ben ©eneral
ntit Sen)nnbernng5o. - ®ie §anb be^ aJianne^ ergreifenb^V fpra(^ er:
„®e^e {)eint^^ voadtvtx'^ Waml Qd) tDerbe njo^l^ jnfe^en°« tnitffen,
toie i(^56 o][)jie gitfjrer^^ an§!omnten«8 fann^^."
lYienna. Ho advance, ^to march, "evening, IJ, 79, a. ^advanced guard.
^fbrce. 'an ber ^^eerflrafe betcgen, on the road-side, ^commander, •''important.
^Oplan. "to order, '^(jetachment. i3giiide. ^Ho serve. ^Ho decline, ^^redundant.
^'to lend himself. ^Soffice. i^request. sobvingcnb, urgent, II. 69, Rem. 2. sito repeat.
22to persist, sspositively. 24refusal. 25to overwhelm, sejmperf. of 6icten, to offer. 27at
last. 28purse, soj-eward. 30nieanwhile. siirritated, angry. 32to be. ssredundant.
34imperf. of erfal^ren, to learn, ssfu^i^ig^ y^itji genitive, acquainted with, ^eto induce.
See II, 81 § 103, b. sTgubjunctive of indirect statement. II, 37. ^Ho bring up.
39either. -^oimperf. of rufen (he said to him), "ito show, "^^to have. ^3 to shoot
(n, 81, c). 44to reply, ^honest. "Gcitizen. "Ttraitor. -isfirmness. «to fill. ^Oad-
miration. ^Ho seize, sshome. ^sbrave, excellent. 54i.edundant. °Ho look out.
*®the auxiliary id^ farm is here used redundantly, a construction with the infinitve
being employed in English, s^gui^e. ssto get along, to do.
^9
— 188 —
4. ^cirjog JirBa in flttbofflabt. (Duke Alba in Rudolstadt.)
21(6 ^atfer tarl ber giinfte tm ^'afjrc 154T auf fetnem SDiarfd^
na(^ granfen^ burdft STpringena fam^, ertangte^ bie tDermittmetc^
©rafin Sat^arina t)on ®rf)lt)ar3burg=$Rubo(ftabt t)om ^aifer eincn
©d^u^briefs fitr xi)vt Untert^anem. 31(6 balb^ barauf^ ber faiferitd^e'
Oenerd, ^ei^og^o t)on 2ltba, mtt feinen fijanifdjemi Slruppen \xi) ber
©tabt 9?uboIftabt nd^erte, bat^^ er fi(i)i2 bei^^ ber ©rdfiu auf ein grii^^
ftiid I'* ju ®aft^^ (Sine fo befifieibene^^ Sittei^, an ber ©pi^e^^ etnei
§eere6 get^an^^ fonnte ntdjt tt)oI)t abgefdilagen^ merben. (Sin freunb^
ttc^er^o (gmpfang^i unb eiue gut befe^te^s Za\d^ ermartete^^ beu ^tt
gog auf bent ©c^Ioffe, Saum^^ fjatte man^^ firf) gefe^t, afe ein ©ilbote*
bie ®rdfin au6 bem ©peifefaale^^ rief^^. ©6 toarb^o {f^x gemeftet^i^
ba^ fpanif^e ®oIbaten in einigen ©iirfern ®en)alttptig!eiten32 Der^
itbt33 unb ben ^Bauern^^ ba^ 3Sie^35 i^eggetrieben^e fatten, Sat^arim
auf^ au^erfte" erttritftet^, befal)! i^rer ganjen !iDienerjc^aft»9, fi
fdlleunigf^o unb in^ge^eim^^ ju ben^affnen^^ xinh bie ®d)Io§pforten^3 jj
Derfd)(ie§en» 3ll6 fie na^ bem ©^jeifefaale juriicfgete^rt mar, be
Etagte^^ fie fit^^^ Uber^^ ba^, n^a^^^ ^ gugetragen^^^ unb baritber, bar-
man feine 9tii(ffirf)^9 auf ben faiferUd^en ©d^u^brief genommen^
^be^. 3)er ^erjog ertoieberte^^ lad^enb^^ ba^ bie^ Srieg^gebrau^^j
fei^; unb ba^ bergleidfien^^ f(eine^« Unfdlle^^ auf bem 3)Zarf(f)e uuDer*
meiblid)^'^ u^dren^. „k)a^ gotten tr)ir fe^en/' antiDortete bie ©rdfiri
unb t)ertie^^» ba§ 3^"^^^^'/ ^^^ fi^ i^ menigen Slugenbliden^^ mit ^e*
iDaffneten^o fitllte^i, bie fic^ mit gejogenen^^ ©(^toertern^^ e^rerbietigft*
j^inter^-* ben®tii^(en ber ®dfte aufftellten^^ ©er ^erjog t)erdnberte'
bie garbe^'. Slbgcfcijuitten^s Don ber 2lrmee, bliej^^^ t^j^ j^ic^t^ itbrig^^
aW^ bie beleibigte !i)ame, auf toelcf)e'i Siebingungen e6 ami)'' fei, ju
Derfolinen'^. ^einric^ t)on SraunfditDeig, einer ber Segteiter'^ be3
^erjog^, fagte fid^'^ guerft'^- unb brad^'« in ein" faute^'^ ®etd(f)ter'»
au§'^ Sr ergriffs® ^en t)ernUnftigen»i 2lngtt)egs2^ ben ganjen 25or=
gang83 in^ 8d(i)erli(i)e ju giel^en^^ inbem^^ er ber ®rdfin itber i^n
Sorgfatt^e ^\xx xijxt Untert^anen eine gobrebe I)iett8', 3^^^^^^
Dermo(^te«9 er ben ^erjog, auf ber ©telle^o ben Sefel)!^^ ^u geben, bai
gefto^tene 2Sie^ ben ©igentpmern jurixdjufteQem^. (Sobalb^^ bi(
®rdfin fic^ Uberjeugt^^ ^atte, bap ber ©efeljt au^gefii^rt merbet
iDiirbe, bantte fie i^ren ®dften auf^ t)erbinblidt|fte95, unb bie tefeteren'
t)erabfrf)iebeten9' fid)^' mit grower i)5fli(i)feit»^
'Franconia. ^xhuringia, ^imperf. of !ommen, to come^ to pass. '*to obtain
- 130 —
•widowed. Hetters of protection, "subject (weak decl.). ^later. ^imperial,
wduke. ''Spanish, 'fi^ ju (^aft !6»itteit, to invite one's self, '^at the residence,
"lunch. Immodest, ''request, '"at the head. '^made. '^to refuse, -'^cordial
2»reception. 22fui.nished. actable, ^^to await, zsgcarcely. *<'!, 54, Obs. ^Texpress
messenger, ^s^ining hall. ^gimperf. of rufen, to call. "^I, 77, foot-note, ^'to
report. 32acts of violence. ^Ho commit, ^-ijative after verbs of taking away, IT,
78, b; to be translated as if a genitive dependent on SSiel^. ^ocattle. ^ j^inwegtreiben,
to carry away. 3'extremely. s^provoked. ^o^ody of servants, "^^rapidly. -^ 'in secret,
■^'toarm. -^^gatesof the castle, ^^to complain, ^^of. ''^1,26.27. ''Ho transpire. Supply
the auxiliary l^atte. ^^of the fact that. ^'9tii(ffi(!^t nel^men auf, to pay regard to. ^%ub-
junct. of indirect statement, II, 88, 6, h (foot-note). ^Ho reply. ^Ho laugh, ^^us-
ageofwar. ^^11, £8, 6, a (foot-note), ^''such. ^* petty annoyances, ^'unavoidable.
-58iniperf. of toerlaffen. ^^moments (masc). coarmed men II, 77, § 101, 1. ^'to fiil, I.
83, Obs. I ; II, 81, a. ^"^drawn sw^ords. '^most respectfully. <^ -^behind. <^Ho arrange,
draw up, ^^^change. <^'color. <^^past part, of abfc(>neiben. ^^^^as left. ''^U, 66, 5.
7'whatsoever, II, 67, a.; 89, 7. '-to reconcile, '^companion, "^to compose one's
self, '-'first, 'imperf. of au^bvcc^en, to burst (out), ^'redundant, '^loud. "'laughter.
Resorted to. ^^sensible. ^-expedient. ^^jQcident. ^^to turn into ridicule, ^'par-
ticipial construction in English. ^* solicitude. -' to eulogize, ^^at last, ^"^toermi^gen,
to induce, I, 108; 11, 56. ** ^^on the spot. ^'order. ^^to return, to restore, -^as
soon as, 11, 66, 4. ^j'ij^jgijjeitgen, to convince, to satisfy, ^^in the most obliging
manner, II, 69, c. ^cjatter. ^"to take leave, ^^politeness, courtesy.
5. ^CX §bdUa6c. (The Page.)
Gin (Sbettnabe (latte im aSorjiminev^ griebridj bc§ ©rof^cn bie
9?ad)ttDad)e2. 55er ^ouig, bcr uidjt fc^lafeu fonutc, ffincjeltc^ imb
giug% ba bcr Snabe nidjt erfd}ieii^ fclbft^ in^ SSorjimmcr. Gr faub'
ten 3wng(iiu3« in ticfem @d}lafc» Dor eincm 5:ifd)e fi^enb, auf mU
d)cm cin angefangener Srief lag^^. I)er ^dnig ual)m" ben ®ricf, bcr
a()0'2 (autetc'3: „*^iebe DJZutterl !Dic^ ift mmi^ )d)oiti^ bie britte
)Rad)tf bap id) fur bie aubereu (Sbetfnabcu bie 9iad}tiDadje ti)nc; abcr
id) !aim ha^ ^adjcn^'^ bcina()e'« widjp^ mel)r'« au^l)a(tcu^'. ^ubeffcm^
l)abe id) I)ierburd)i9 fcit brei a55od)eii 3el)u S()a{er Dcrbicnt^^ uie(d)c id)
bir«» jursi grquicfung^i in beiucr traurigen22 gagc^^ [cube — ." 5^icfc
fiublid)e23 giebe^^ gefiel^^ beat ilouig, uub cr ftccf tc^^ bcin^' ^imbcii cine
9iolIe=8 ®oIbftit(Je29 in bie Za\d)c^^ ©icfcr^i crrictl)"^ bei^ fcinem (Sr*
it)ad)en33fogleid), iDo()cr=^* ba^ ®elb gefoinmen fci^^ Gr marp fid) bcm"
tonig, fobatb^s biefcr am udd)ftcn 9)?orgen aufgeftanbcn wav^, jn gni^
Bcn-'o, unb hat^' iDcgcn fciner3Jad)(dffigfeit uin a?er5cil)ung'«i. ®cr £5^
nig abcr pric^'^=* bie finblid)e ?icbe feinc^ Gbclfnabcn, unb bcobad)tcte«
i^n Don t^a aiv^ ndl)cr^^ U)oburd)'^« bie gute 3)icinung'*', bie cr Don il)ni
bcgtc^s, Dot(tommen^»beftdtigt tDurbc. T)icfcr ^nabe rjarb in feincn fpd*
teren 8ebcnej[.i()ren^ burd) ba^ SJcrtrauen^^ fcinc^ SJ^onard)^^ y^i cincr
ber I}i)c^fteu^» uub DcrautiDortUd)ften'* ® tcKungcn im <Staate^ berufen^*^
—140 —
^antichamber. knight- watch, 'to ring the bell. <imperf. of gcl^cn. ^imperf. of
crf(^einen, to appear. ^I. 83, Ob.s. 2. "imperf. of flnbcn. '^lad, youth, ^sleep,
joiraperf. of (icijcr.. '^imperf. of ne^mcn, to take. J-as follows. ^Ho read (v. n.),
J^redundant. '^watching. '^hardly any longer, "'to endure, ''^however, '^by
it (this), II, 72, 2. 2oto earn. "Jfor your relief. 22(jistress. 23fiiial. s^jove, tender*
ness. ^--iniperf. of gcfaHcn. ^'to put. ^Tpossessive dative, 11, 80, b, a, '^roll,
*9goldpieces, 1,33. 3>)pocket. ^ithe latter (this one), II, 77, 1. ^sjniperf, of ct*
rat^'en, to guess, ^il, C2 Rem. 2, 3): wJieufie awoke (at his awakening), ^''whence,
2^11, 87, 2 (foot-note). 3 imp, of toerfen, to throw. 3-possessive dative. ^?is soon
as. 3'?piuperf. of aufftel^en. -^oto be connected with ttjavf fi(^. -"imperf. of bitten; urn
SScrjci^ung bitten, to ask pardon, '^^impej.f. of ^rcifen, to praise, to commend, ''^to
observe. ^ toon ba an, since that time, -^^more closely. "* whereby, ^"opinion.
^%eld, had. •*9fully. "Olife, years of life, ^'confidence, ^^monarch (weak decL, II»
5, § 11, 3). ^I, 22. ^toeranttoortlic^, responsible, ^^state. ^ berufen, to calL
• 6. ^ofTir^ftcif. (Civility.)
3n bcr 9W^c» ciue^ italidni|d}cu= X)ox\^ kbit ein ^mtr, ber eincn
©oI)n, 9Jamene3 ge(i^% I)attc. 5)urd} bie 3lnnutl)^ fcincr (SItern war*
bicfcr finabc gcnotljigt^ fcinea Uittcr()a(t6 bitrd) ®d)iDcinct)Uten' gu
i)crbiencu«. i^tli^ mar immer sudorfommenb^ imb l)ofIid) Qcgen ,3^^^
bermann; bie anberu Suabcu im !Dorfe abcr mareit unficimb Udf iinb
rol)". (Sine^ 2^agc^" fam ciii dJlondj^^ bcr cineu ^egrjciferi^ be*
gc^rte", in^ 5)orf. Sd^renb bie anberu £nabeu beiifclbcui^ uiit
$Rof)l)cit'« be()anbclten, crbot^^ fid) geli^- auf^ freuubUd)fte'8 gum 5K?c(|*
JDcifcr. 2luf bem SScge bcmertte ber iDIoiic^, ha^ 3*c(ij 2^a(ent fjatte,
unb e^ getang'* i()nr''' fpdter, bem H'uabeu ^^Iufnal)mc2» in fcin illofter^
gu ocrfdjaffen-^ §ier ftnbirte gelij auf^ fleifeigftc, nnb, obmol}!-^ cr
balb einer ber ge(el)rteften Don aUen 9)2ond}en luurbe, btieb^^ cr bcn^
nod)" bemut^ig^^ I)of(id) nub guuorfommenb. ©iefe (Sigen)d)aftcn
mad)tcn2' i^n 2lllen, bie i^n fannten-% licb^' nub \y)cvt{,^\ nnb fo ifant
c^, bai3 cr balb ju I}oI)en Stellnngen bcfbrbcrt^» marb. tSr murbc
S3ijd^of»^, Garbinat, nnb, al^ bcr ^ap)>i ftarb^^ marb cr am 24. 9{pril
1585 cinftimmig33 gnm ^apft crmd^Its^ gr rcgiertc nnter bem 9fa^
men Siytu^ ber giinfte, nnb CS ift befannt, ta^ cr ju bea grogteu
aller *ij3dpfte geI)orte.
inear. -Italian, ^^y name, •'poverty, 'imperf. pass, of notl^igen, to compeL
See I, 77, Obs. 2. <^to earn his living, "by tending a herd of swine. 1, 105. ^oblig-
ing, ^impolite. lOrude. "one day, 11, 5, a. i^monk. "guj^^^ >jto ask for.
1 berfetbc has often the force of lie. » rudeness, ''imperf. of crbieten. ' i.i the
gentlest manner. '%e succeeded ia. ^Oadmission. 2iconvent. 22^0 procure, to ob-
tain. 231^ 1C2. 24iiiiperf. of Heilen. "i^ ^02, Obs. 2. 2. humble. sTjieb unb wertf
mat^cn, to endear. *-I, £8, Obs. 2. ^to promote, ^obishop (II, 74, 75, § 90, 3).
'•pope, sejinperj, of ftcrbcn.. saunanimously. 34to elect, to choose, II, 73, h
% 0.
f/4
f^^
AHN'S METHOD
OF LEARNING THE
GERMAN LANGUAGE.
REVISED
GUSTAVUS FISCHER.
SECOND (THEORETICAL) COURSE.
Fourth Edition.
NEW YORK:
E. S t e i g e r.
18t2.
Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1871, by
E. Steiger,
in the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washin£t<»i*
E. Stkiger, New York,
Printer and Electrotyper,
CHAPTER L
PRELIMINARY REMARKS.
§ 1. The German Language is composed of eight parts of
speech. They are: the Article, the Noun or Substantive, the
Adjective, the Pronoun, the Yerb, the Adverb, the Preposi-
tion, and the Conjunction.
§ 2. There are in German two numbers: the Singular and
the Plural; three genders: the Masculine, the Feminine, and
the Neuter; four cases: the Nominative, the Genitive, the
Dative, and the Accusative.*
OF THE ARTICLE.
§ 3. I. Declension of the definite Article,
Singular.
Plural
Masculine.
Feminine.
Neuter,
for all genders.
Nom. ber,
bie,
^a^,
tilt
the
Gen. beg,
ber,
beg,
bcr,
of the
Dat. bem,
ber,
bem,
ben,
to the
Ace. ben,
bic,
bag.
btc,
the.
§ 4. II
. Declension ofth^ indefinite Article,
Nom. ein,
etnc,
ein,
a
Gen. etncg,
eincr,
eineg,
of a
Dat. elnem,
ciner,
einem,
to a
Ace. eineu,
eiue,
ein,
a
* The nominative answers to the English nominative case, the accusa-
tive to the objective case without preposition, and the genitive to the pos-
sessive Ci\se, or to the objective case vfithqf. The dative generaUy answers
to the objective with to.
3
CHAPTER II.
NOUNS (SUBSTANTIVES).
I. GENDER.
§ 5. Nouns denoting persons have a natural gender, and •
are masculine or feminine according to their sex: ber 3)2ann,
the man; bie gi^^ii^ the woman; ber ®(i)neiber, the tailor. There
is no common gender in German.*
Exceptions.— 2)a§ SSeib, the woman (wife); ba§ 9}^dbd}en, the girl; bag
Cfiulein, the young lady, and all other diminutives in d)ert and Icin (as: ha^
55^nlein, the little son); bag ©ema^I, husband or wife; bic ®d)ilbmacf)e,
the sentinel; bie SSaifc, the orphan (both male and female); b e t SP'^m t b gl,
Hhe ward (male and female); ^inb (child) is always neuter.
§ 6. Designations of persons according to their occupa-
tions and other qualities, with but few exceptions, are originally
masculine^ referring to the male sex only. From these nouns
those designating females are derived by attaching to them the
ending in: ®raf (count), ©rdfin (countess); Sonig (king), SoaU
gilt (queen); ®d)neiber (tailor), ®d)neiberiu (dressmaker). The
radical vowel of these derivatives in in is almost always softened.
Remark, — ^This method of derivation applies also to some nouns denoting
brutes: ber SSolf (wolf), bie SSolfin (she-wolf).
§ 1. Nouns denoting things, concrete or abstract, belong
to all three genders: ber i^ki^, the diligence; \)k U[)r, the watch;
ber 3JJnt^, the courage; bie £unft, the art; ba^ SOZccr, the sea.
The gender of these nouns, some derivatives excepted, cannot
be determined by general rules, but must be learned by practice
and the lexicon.
§ 8. Of DERIVATIVE nouus thosc with the endings ei, l^eit,
feit, fdiaft and nng are without exception feminine: \>ic®d}mtid}c^
let (flattery), bie greil)eit (liberty), bie aJldBigfeit (temperance),
bie greunbic^aft (friendship), bie §offnung (hope).
§ 9. The diminutives (with the endings d)en and (ein) are
without exception neuter: ba3 So^ntein or @o{)nd}cn (the little
son); ba^ Sndblein (the little boy). Nouns in t()umare likewise
NEUTER, except ber ^rrt^unt (the mistake); ber ^eid)t(}um
(wealth)..
* The noun ber ^at^e, the god-son; bie ^atl^e, the god-daughter may be
considered as an exception.
II
— 5 —
Remaeks. — 1. Names of countries, cities and villages are NEUTER (a very
few excepted).
2. Compound nouns take the gender of their last component, a few
compounds of the masculine 2JiutI) excepted: bie 5lnnutl), poverty; bic
©I'Ogmut^, generosity; bic ©anftmutl), meekness, and a few others.
3. Some nouns have two genders, but with different meanings:
2)er 53anb, the volume; boS 8anb, the ribbon;
ber dxbe, the heir; ba§ (Srbc, the inheritance;
ber ®d)ilb, the shield; i>a^ @c^itb, the sign (of an inn);
ber X^or, the fool; ba§ 2:()or, the gate;
ber 35erbienft, the earnings; ha^ 3^erbienft, merit;
ber @ec, the lake; tic ®ec, the sea;
ber §eibc, the heathen; tie §eibc, the heath. /^
il. DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
§ 10, There are two declensions, the weak and the strong.
I. WEAK DECLENSION.
§ 11. To the WEAK declension belong: 1. all masculine
nouns ending in e (except ber Safe), as: ber ^mbc (the boy),
ber®el)li(fe (the assistant), ber ^reu|e (the Prussian); 2. several
masculine nouns which have dropped their former ending e;*
3. most appellations of males taken from foreign languages,
provided they have their accent on their ultima, f as: ber
S:t)rann (the tyrant); ber 3:i)eotog (the theologian); ber ^rinj
(the prince); ber Stubent (the student); 4. most feminine
nouns (for exceptions see § 13. Rem. 2), which however are in-
declinable in the singular number: bie grau (the woman); bie
®c^i5nl)eit (the beauty).
§ 12. The weak declension takes in all cases of the sin-
gular (except in the nominative) and of the plural the ending
cn^ and is inflected after the following scheme:
* The most important of these nouns are: §ctb (hero), ©rof (count), Sflrfl
^prince), §irt (herdsman), SWenfc^ (man), ^crr (gentleman), ^^or and Vlaxx
(fool), ^dr (bear), 0(1)8 or Od){e (ox). To these must be added some few
national nouns in r, as Ungar (Hungarian), 33atcr (Bavarian). Many of the
nouns mentioned have retained their ending e in popular dialects and often
in poetry.
t Most of these nouns likewise added formerly the ending t, and some
do still so in poetry and popular dialects, as: ber Xtixannt (in Schiller), ber
X^eologe.
Feminines.
Nom.
S)ie grau, the woman Nom.
Gen.
ber Srau, of the woman (the Gen.
woman's)
Dat.
ber grau, to the woman Dat.
Ace.
bie grau, the woman Ace.
— 6 —
Masculines.
Singular. Plural.
Nom» !Der ilnabC, the boy Nom. bte ^uabcit, the boys
Gen. be^ ^uabcit, of the boy (the Gen. ber ^'uabcil, uf the boys (the
boy's) boys')
Dat. bent ^'nabcti, to the boy Dat. ben ^nabctt, to the boys
Ace. ben ^nabeil, the boy Ace. bie ^nabCtt, the boys.
bie grauett, the women
ber graueil, of the women (the
women's)
ben grauctt, to the women
tilt graucit, the women.
Kem. — 1. The feminine nonns in cr and el add only the endin.::^ tt to the
nominative, as: bie ®d)tt»efter (sister), plur. bie @d)n)eftertt; bie ©abel (fork),
plur. bie ©abettt. §err takes in the singular the ending n, in the plural ctt
(be§ §erril, bie §errcu). Feminines in in double the ji in the plural (bie
^onicjiu, plur. bie ^bniginitcu).
2. The following' masculine nouns in e: griebe (peace), gunfe (spark),
©ebante (thought), ©efalle (favor), ©lanbe (faith), §aufe (heap), 9lame (name),
®ame (seed), @d)abe (damage), SBiHe (will) and the neuter ba6 §erj
(heart), take in the genitive singular cn§ instead of Ctt, but retain in all
other cases the ending en {^tX}^, being a neuter, makes the aceusative like
the nominative). All masculine nouns here mentioned, have in the nom.
sing, a collateral form in en (ber grieben, @e fallen etc.).
II. STRONG DECLENSION.
§ 13. All NEUTER nouns (except ^erj) and those masculines
and feminines not following the weak declension, belong to the
STRONG declension, according to the following
PARADIGM. ;^
Singular, Plural.
Nom. 2)er giW, the fish Nom. bie gifd)C, the fishes
Gen. be§ gifd)C$, of the fish (the fish's) Gen. ber gifd)C, of the fishes
Dat. bent gifc^C (bent gifc^), to the fish Dat. ben gi)d)Ctt, to the fishes
Ace. ben gifc^, the fish Ace. bie gifd)C, the fishes.
^^* Decline thus: ber greunb, the friend; ber §unb, the dog; berSBein,
the wine; ber ^reig, the circle; 't^a^ S^erbienft, the merit; ha^ ^inbernig*, the
obstacle.
* Final j^, when an ending is attached to it, must be changed into ff if
the preceding vowel is short, which is always the case with the vowels e andt.
Rem. — 1. All feminine and most masculine nouns belonging to the
strong declension, that have the radical vowels a, 0, U, au,soften them in the
plural in a, 0, ii, du, as: ber ^a^n, the boat, plur. bie ^d^ne; ber ®o^n, the
son, plur. bie @oI)ue; ber gug, the foot, plur. bie ^ii^t; ber iBaum, the tree,
plur. bie ^dume. The radical vowels in the plural of the weak declension
are never softened.
2. The f jllowing feminine nouns (being indeclinable in the singular)
follow this declension: 1. all ending in iiig (as: bie iBetriibnig, the affliction,
plur. bie iBetriibniffe; bie ^enntnig, the knowleJge, plur. bie ^enntniffe u. j. tt).;
2. about thirty monosyllabics among which are: hit %ict (axe), iBan! (bench),
iBruft (breast), ©ang (goose), §anb (iiand), ^raft (strength), ^unft (art),
Tla&it (power), aJiaug (mouse), 9^ad)t (night), ®tabt (town), SBanb (wall),
and a few compounds.
PAEADIGM.
Singular. Plural.
Nom. 2)te @tabt, the town Nom. bie @tdbtC, the towns
Gen. ber @tabt, of the town Gen. ber (Stdbte, of the towns
Dat. ber @tabt, to the town Dat. ben @tdbtCtt, to the towns
Ace. bie @tabt, the town Ace. bie @tdbte, the towns. c-w
3. The e in the ending e^ of the gen. sing, is often dropped if the word
can be conveniently pronounced without it, especially if the word consists of
more than one syllable, as: 5(ufrul)r (sedition) gen. 5(ufrul)r^ (hardly 5luf»=
rul^reg); SiincjUng (young man) gen. ^iinglingS (not ^iincilinge^) ; but^^obe^
(hardly XoH); gi(cJ[)eg (not gifd)§); ^x^m (not %x^U). The e of the dative
may always be dropped.
4» Nouns ending in et, Cl, Ctt must drop the C of all endings in both
singular and plural.
Singular.
Plural.
Nom.
2)er 5Sciter, the father
Nom.
bie 3>dter, the fathers
Gen.
be« SSatcr^,
Gen.
ber mttx,
Dat.
bem 33ater,
Dat.
ben iBdterit,
Ace.
beu ^ater,
Ace.
bie iBdter.
Here belong the two femine nouns Tluttex, mother (plur. SD^iitter) and
^od)ter, daughter (plur. Xod)ter). Nouns in Ctt do not take another n in ^J
the dative plural, so that their plurals have entirely the appearance of the '-^^
WEAK declension: ber ©arteit (the garden), dat. pi. htn ©drtcn,
*^ § 14. Many monosyllabic neuters, a few masculines, and
all nouns ending in t()um (as: ber 3{cicf)t()um, wealth; bci^3 gurften*
t^um, the principality) form their plural by the ending er, to
8
which they add the ending ti in the dative. They always
soften the radical vowels a, o, u, au.*
Singular.
Nom. 2)a§ %n\i, the oflace
Gen. bc§ %mit^f
Dat. bent ^mtc,
Ace. t>(x§> %mif
Plural.
Nom. bic ^cmtcr, the ofl&ces
Gen. bcr 5(emtct,
Dat. ben ^emtcrii,
Ace. bie SCemtcr.
All monosyllabics following this declension (except some
few not often used) are contained in the following list:
2)er @eift, the mind;
ber @ott, the god;
ber ?eib, the body;
ber Wiaxm, the man;
2)a§ 2(mt, the office;
ba^iBab, the bath;
\iCi^ 33anb, the ribbon;
\>Ci^ 33ilb, the image;
ta^ ^{aii, the leaf;
ba§ 33rett, the board;
^d^ 33ud), the book;
ba§ "^(k^f the roof;
ba§ !5)orf, the village;
bag Si^ the egg\
bag gad), the shelf;
\>Ci^ gag, the cask;
bag gelb, the field;
bag @e(b, the money;
bag ©tag, the glass;
bag ©lieb, the limb;
bag (Srab, the grave;
bag ©rag, the grass;
bag @ut, the good;
bag §aupt, the head;
bag ^aug, the house;
bag §0(5, the wood;
bag §orn, the horn;
ber £)rt, the place;
ber 9ianb, the border;
ber 3Ba(b, the forest;
bcr iSBurm, the worm.
bag ipu^n, the chicken;
bag talb, the calf;
bag tinb, the child;
bag ^leib, the dress;
bag ^OXWf the grain;
bag ^raut, the herb;
bag ?amm, the lamb;
bag ?anb, the country;
bag ?tcl)t, the light;
bag !?ieb, the song;
bag $?od), the hole;
bag D^eft, the nest;
bag 9Jab, the wheel;
bag 9teig, the twig;
bag 9iinb, the cattle;
ba§@d)i(b, the shield;
bag ®d^Io6, the castle;
bag ®djmert, the sword;
bag %\)G\, the valley;
bag %\X&\, the cloth;
bag 33olf, the people;
bag SBctb, the woman;
bag SBortJ, the word.
* Neuter nouns formins: their plurals in e,flo not soften their radical:
bag Satjr (year), bie 3a^re; bag Xt)or (gate), bie Xt)ore etc.
% i)ag SSort forms the phn-iil SSortC, if words in logical connection with
each other are designated; but SBorter, if unconnected words are referred to.
— 9 —
§ 15. The following masculine and neuter nouns decline
STRONG in the singular, and weak in the plural: 1. Two neuters
in e: aiuge, eye; dn'Ot, end; 2. those contained in the following
list:
S)er gorjlt, the forest; bcr @cc, the lake;
ter @au, the district;- ber ®pont (pi. @porcn), the spur;
tcr ©coatter, the godfather; ber ®ta(^c(, the prick;
I
ber Sorbeer, the laurel; ber (Strati, the ray;
bcr iOlaft, the mast; ber Uutcrt^an, the subject (citizen);
ber 9^aci^bar, the neighbor; ber 35ettcr, the cousin;
ber ©Cftmerg, the pain; ber B^txatli, the ornament.
ba« S3ett, the bed; t>a^ ?elb, the sorrow;
bag §emb, the shirt; ha^ £)^r, the ear.
To these must be added several nouns taken from foreign languages, as:
1. Those ending in or, taken from the Latin (^JjJrofeffor, Gen. ^rof effort, plur.
^^JrofcfforCtt, with the accent on the penult). 2. The names of the Roman
offices: ^ribun, (Sonfut, etc. 3. Several nouns that cannot be classified, as:
@taat, state (plur. (gtaateit); 2)iamant (diamond), ^xn^ (interest), infect
(insect), $falm (psalm), and some others,
§ 16. Irregular plurals. 1. Masculine and neuter nouns
borrowed from the French and English languages generally
form their plurals in ^, if their terminations disagree with those
of German words, (bie ©epartement^, btc ®enie^, bie 8orb^, bic
Stuart^, bic (Slub^.*) 2. Words taken from the Latin in um
form their plurals in en: ©tubtum, pi. ©tubicti; (Suangetium;
(gospel), pi. ©Dangclieu; ^n^i^ibuum (individual), pi. 3'nbtt)i='
buctt. 3. The compounds with SJiann generally change this
word in Scute (people) in the plural: ^aufmann (merchant), pi.
Saufleute; ganb^mann (countryman), pi. ganb^fcutc.
III. DECLENSION OF PROPER NOUNS.
§ It. Proper nouns (even the names of females) decline
STRONG, but always drop the e in the ending of the genitive and
dative sing.: Nom. ^arl, Gen. .^art^, Dat. tart; Nom. !iDcutffI)==
* In conversational style this ending 8 is often applie<l even to German
nouns (bie ^crl§, the fellows; bie 3ungen§, the boys).
— 10 —
lanb, Gen. SDeutfdjlanb^ (not S^eutfc^Ianbe^); Dat. ®eutfd)Ianb.
Even female proper names take the ending ^ in the Genitive,
and those in e take en^ (ISTom. 2Ibe(^eib, Gen. 3lbel^eib^; Nom.
maxk, Gen. 3JJarien^*).
Rem. — 1. Some writers use before the ending 9 of proper names an
apostrophe (^art'§).
2. Male or female names are often declined with the article or other
determinative word, and then take no endings at all in the singular: be^
^arl; ber 5Ibell^eib; meiner 5lbelt)eib. The same is frequently observed with
other proper names, and always with those ending in g, r or ^ : ber 3uni, be§
Sunt (or ^uni'g); bte Ufer bc^ SD^ijfifftppi (the banks of the Mississippi). If
proper names are in apposition to their own appellatives, they never take an
ending: ber ®tabt ^Berlin (of the city (of) Berlin); be3 ®taatc8 2)anemarf (of
the state (of) Denmark).
3. The plural of male names declines strong; that of female names
WEAK (bie griebrid)e; bte l^eonorcn ®oetl)e§). To names whose terminations
disagree with those of German words is applied either the endinqr §, or they
receive no ending at all if declined with the article (bie beibeit dicero; bie
9iouffeau'$, $ttt^, bie (Stuart^). This is always the ease with nouns in Q, bie
beiben ^lintu§ (not ^Uniuffe). Some Latin family-names decline weak : bie
©racd^Cn (the Gracchi), bie ddfarCtt (the Caesars).
CHAPTER III.
THE SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS.
I. INTERROGATIVE SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS.
§ 18. They are n)cr (who?), and toa^ (what?), which are
thus declined:
Nom. tvtV, who ? h)a8, what ?
Gen. hjeff cn, whose (of whom) ? ttjeff cn (rare), of what ?
Dat. totnt, to whom?
Ace, iDett, whom ? toaS, what ?
* Some give to female proper names, and even to males, the ending en
in dative and accusative (Dat. @opt)ien, to Sophy; @oetl)en, to Goethe).
Formerly this method of declining wiis the rule, now it is coming out of use.
11
SKeriflba?
SSeriftbieferSRann?
Sffier ift biefe grau?
^effen §aug ift ba§ ?
Bemfrf)reiben @ie?
2Ben fudjen ®ie?
i2Sa§finb mtr?
2Ba§ fagcn <Bu ?
553e[feu ift er fat)ig ?
Who is there ?
Who is this man ?
Who is this woman ?
Whose house is this ?
To whom do you write ?
Whom do you look for ?
What are we ?
What do you say ?
Of what is he capable ?
Rem. — If the interrogative substantive pronoun tva^ is connected with a
preposition, it assumes the adverbial form tl>0, or WOt if the preposition be-
gins with a vowel. These forms are prefixed to the prepositions, as: ttJOtJon, of
(from) what (not t)on \va§>); tt)orin, in what (not in tt)a^); tVO\ilX, for what
(less good fiir \va^).
SSomit bifl bu befd^dftigt ? With what art thou occupied ?
SS^oriit beftel)t e8? In what does it consist?
iBof iir leben Wix ? For what do we live ?
II. PERSONAL SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS.
§ 19, The pronouns denoting the grammatical persons are
thus declined:
SINGULAR,
First persm,.
Second person.
Nom.
id), I;*
,
bu, thou;
Gen.
nteiucr, of me;
beiner, of thee;
Dat.
tnir, to me;
bir, to thee;
Ace.
m\6), me.
PLURAL.
bi^, thee.
Nom.
XOXX, we;
il)r, you;
Gen.
unfer, of us;
tXXtXf of you;
Dat.
un§, to us; ^
eucf), to you;
Aco.
une, us.
Third person,
SINGULAR.
eud^, you.
Masculine.
Feminine.
Neuter.
Nom. cr, he;
fte, she;
C«, it;
Gen
. feiner, of him;
\\)XtX, of her;
feiner, of it;
Dat
. il)m, to him;
t^r, to lier;
il)m, to it;
Ace
. il)n, liim;
fie, her;
eg, it.
*3^d), is also used as a noun of the neuter gender: 'td^ 3c^ (^"r own self),
and has then the declension of nouns, not of pronouns (Gen. be§ 3c!^§; Dat.
bem 3(i)). It is also used without endings: meineS 3ci) etc.
12 —
PLURAL FOR ALL GENDERS.
Nom. jic, they;
Gen. i^rer, of them;
Dat. iljnen, to them;
Ace. fie, them,
§ 20. 1. The pronouns of the first and second persons are
also used as reflexive pronouns (see Part I, p. 52 and 83),
corresponding to the English compounds with self (myself,
thyself, ourselves etc.): 3d) ^^f^J^ftiQe m i rf) , I occupy my^eZ/;
i^r bcf d)dftigt t\x^, you occupy yourselves.
2. The same is the case with the genitive sing, and plur. of
the third person: er ift feincr beipu^t, he is conscious of him'
self; fie ift i ^ r c r nid)t mdd)tig, she has no control of herself
3. But the datives and accusatives of the third person in all
genders and both numbers take the form f i d^ , which corresponds
to the forms (to) himself, (to) herself, (to) itself, (to) them-
selves.
®^ I f.-,f f ; A ^^^'A<f.*-^ir he has killed himself;
fic Ijoben f i dj getobtet, they have killed themselves.
§ 21. The Germans employ the pronouns of the second
person (bit and i()r) only in relations of intimacy, and in ad-
dressing children. In polite conversation persons (in both
numbers) are addressed by the third person plural, which
in this case is written with a capital, the reflexive fid), how-
ever, always keeping its small initial:
SBer jtnb ® i e , who are you f (literally who are they ?)
3c^ Witt e8 3 ]^ n c n gcbcn, I will give it to you (literally io them),
$obett @ i c f ic^ auSgcru^t , have you rested yourself?
III. INDEFINITE SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS.
They refer either to persons or things.
§ 22. To PERSONS refer: 1. man (one); 2. ^cmanb (some-
body, some one, anybody); 9tiemanb (nobody, no one, not any-
body); 4. 3cbermann(everybody, everyone).
Rem.— 1. SJ^an can only be used as subject (in the nominative). If the
English indefinite one is employed in other relations, it is generally rendered
by the adjective Pronoun (Sincr (see Part I, p. 64), and in reflexive relations
— 13 —
by fid) (one's self): man ifl ntd^t immcr mit ftd^ ^ufrtcbcn, one is not always
pleased with one's se.f (himself). Mail tann e« (Sincm ntcf)t immcr red^t
mac^en, one cannot always please everybody (literally: one cannot always make
it rigid to one) .
2. 3ebennamt, 3cmanb and 92iemanb decline strong, taking g (not c^)
in the genitive, but are used without ending both in dative and accusative: 3c*
bermann^ (3emanb§, 9'iicmanb^) 2Bunfd)e, everybody's (somebody's) desires.
Sr Ijat e§ 3ebermann (3emanb, Sf^iemanb) gefagt, he has said it to everybody
(somebody, nobody). Sf^icmaitb and 3cmanb, however, often take the ending
em or ett in the dative, and etl in the accusative. (S^iemaitbcm, 9^iemanben),
3. Instead of ^emaitb the Pronoun tt)cr is sometimes used in Nom.,
Dat., Ace., as: @a!)et i^r tt)en? Did you see any one ? 3ft totx ba gcttJCfcil ?
Has any one been there ?
§ 23. To THINGS refer ettDa^ (something, anything), and
tii^t^ (nothing, not-any thing). They are -used in all cases,
but take no endings. Instead of d\va^ the pronoun ti)a^ is
sometimes used, but is not considered elegant: §at cr cuc^ toa^
gefagt ? Has he told you anything ?
Rem. — 3cmanb, tt)er and ctttJaS, especially if denoting anybody and ant/-
thing, are frequently connected with the adverb irgeitb: §aft bu irgcnb 3enianb
(trgcnb ctmaS) gcfcl)cn, hast thou seen anybody (anything) ? Sciut cr mit
irgcub totm gc}|)roc^cn ^abcn jotttc, if he should have spoken with anyone.
»
CHAPTER lY.
ADJECTIVES.
I. THE DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES IN GENERAL.
§ 24. Adjectives are used without inflectional endings, if
they are used as predicates (predicatively). But if they are
used as attributes (attributively), that is, if they are followed
by their nouns, they must be declined, agreeing with their
nouns in gender, number and case.
3)cr Mann ift g ut (predicate), the man is good.
2)er gute SJ^ann ^attribute), the good man.
Rem, — Adjectives are also considered as attributes, if their nouns are
understood: Qx unterftii^t bic Htmeu (3Kcnfd)en), he assists the poor (men).
S)lefe« 33ud) ift cin gute^ r*- «• ^ud)), this book is a good one.
— 14 —
§ 25, Inflected adjectives belong either to the strong or
the WEAK declension. Most pronominal adjectives follow the
strong declension only, but every ordinary adjective may be
declined according to the method of either declension.
§ 26. The scheme of the strong declension of adjectives,
which is essentially different from that of the nouns, and almost
agrees with the declension of the definite article, is best seen
from the paradigm of biefer, this:
SINGULAR.
MiscuUne,
Feminine.
Neuter,
Nom.
©iefcr (3)lann), this
biefe (grau), this
biejcd* (^Hnb), this
(man);
(woman);
(chUd);
Gen.
btefC^, of this
btefCt
biefc^
Dat.
biefcm, to this
biejcr
biefe itt
Ace.
biefCH; this
biefe
biefe^
PLURAL OF ALL GENDERS.
Nom. biefe, these
Gen. biefer, of these
Dat. biefen, to these
Ace. biefe, these.
^^^ Decline thus: X0t[6)tt (which), gutet (good), oUet (old).
§ 2Y. The WEAK declension is generally used, if an adjec-
tive is preceded and qualified by the definite article, or an
other word taking its place. It has the ending e in the nom.
sing, of all genders, and in the ace. sing, of the feminine and
neuter, taking the ending en in all other cases of both numbers.
Hence its masculine forms are exactly the ffame as those of the
weak declension of the noun. Its scheme is best seen in the
paradigm of the ordinal numeral ber erfte (the first).
SINGULAR.
Masculine.
Feminine.
Neuter,
Nom.
S)er erfte, the first
bte erfte, the first
U% erfte, the first
(man etc.)
(woman etc.)
(thing etc.)
Gen.
begerflen, of the first
ber erften
be« erften
Dat.
bent erften, to the first
ber erften
bem erften
Ace.
ben erften, the first
bie erfte
ba§ erfte
* 2)iefc3 in the nom. and ace. is frequently contracted into bic8; but not
in the genitive.
— 15 —
, PLURAL OF ALL GENDERS.
Nom. S)ie erftetl, the first (men, things etc.)
Gen. htX erftCtl, of the first
Dat. t)en erftcn, to the first
Ace. bte erfteti, the first
^^* Decline thus the adjectives: ber ^ttJeitC, the second; bet gitte, the
good; bcr altC, the old.
II. DECLENSION OF PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.
§ 28. The pronominal adjectives are divided into 1) Inter-
ROGATivEs; 2) Relatives; 3) Demonstratives; 4) Inde-
finites; 5) POSSESSIVES.
1. Interrogative Pronominal Adjectives .
§ 29. They are: tt)c(d}et, whichj what; ftjeld^ ein, tvhat a;
tDa^ fiir, what (what kind of); \va<^ fiir eiit, what a (what kind
of a). SBe(cl)er declines strong (like biefet); toa^ fiir remains
uninflected in all cases; wdd) ein and tt)a^ fitr ein decline the
indefinite article only. (§4.)
SSetc^en §ut ^aben @ie genommen, which hat have you taken ?
2Be(ct)Ct 3iJieiltung fmb @ie, of what opinion are you?
2Be(d)Cm ?aube cjei}i3ren ®ie an, to what country do you belong?
. 3Jiit \vzld)cn (dat. plur.) ^rbeiten befd}dftigen ®ie f\6), with what labors
do you occupy yourself?
SSetd^ eiitcnt Siegimente bift bn jucjet^eitt, to what a regiment art thou
assigned ?
SSa^ fiir gteifd^ l^abett ®te ha (traS l)aben ®tc ba fiir gteifd^), what (kind
of) meat have you there ?
SSa§ fiir ?anb§{eute fmb fie (tt3a« ftub fie fiir ?anb§teute), what countrymen
are they?
2Sa8 fiir einen %v]t l)aben @te, what (a) physician have you (whom have
you for a physician) ?
SSaS fiir eitt SBinterfieib tragen ©ie, what a (style of) winter-dress do you
wear (what do you wear for a winter^dress) ?
2, Relative Pronouns.
§ 30. They are: toeldjtv, ber and \va^. About their English
correspondents see Rem. 1. 2BeIrf)er declines strong, like the
k
SINGULAR.
Masculine.
Feminine.
Muter.
hex, who, which, that
bie
i>a^,
beff Clt, whose, of whom, of which
berctt,
beffcn,
bem, to whom, to which
bcr,
bent,
ben, whom, which
bic,
bas.
— 16 ~
interrogative Wtiijtx. 2Ba§ declines like the interrogative ma^,
and bcr declines like the definite article with this difference
that it adds the weak ending cu to the genitive of all genders
and numbers, and to the dative plural:
ber, bie, ha^ (who, which, that).
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
PLURAL OF ALL GENDERS.
Nom. bie, who, which, that
Gen. berCIt, whose, etc.
Dat. benClt, to whom, etc.
Ace. bie, whom, etc.
Rem. — 1. The German language does not, as the English, employ the
interrogative substantive pronoun tvcx (who) as a relative. But both, the
adjective pronoun tt>et(f)er, and the word ber (properly demonstrative)
correspond to each of the Enp^lish relatives* who, which and thai.
2. The genitive of the pronoun tvcidjtv can generally not be employed
as a relative. Instead of it must be used the genitives of bet (beffen, beretl
in both singular and plural: The hoy whose father you know, bcr ^nabc, b e j f cn
(not iDe!(d)e8) 2>atcr (Sie fenncn. Only if the relative is connected as attribute
with a NOUN, the use of ber is forbidden in all cases, and in this instance Xt)tU
d)e°v n)etd)er must be used in the genitive: iBertin, U) e I d) c (Stabt (8ie fennen
(m e (d) e r ®tabt Gigent^umlid)feiten ®ie fennen), Berlin, which city you know
(the peculiarities of which city you know).
3. The relative n)a§ must be used for the English which or thai if a
relative pronoun is required after indefinite or demonstrative pronouns, used
without nouns in the neuter gender: 5lfle§, UJa^ (ill that), 3>iele§, Wa^ (much
that), ba§ or bagjenige, roaS (that which), not OTcS, ha^ (n)cld)e§), SSieteS, ha^
(tt)e{d)e§) or baS (ba^jenige), t>a^ or n)c(c^e§. But if in tlds instiince the relative
stands in the genitive, befjen (not n>ef|*en) must be used (see the examples).
* There is no difference in the use of n)Cld)er and ber as relatives. 2)cr
is far more used in colloquial language, and is generally preferred in
writing, unless euphonic reasons mike its use inelegant. Nobody would
for instance write: ber, ber ber erfte ift (instead of: ber, m e I d) e r ber erfte ifl
(he who is the first). But it is certainly thus used ii\ sj)eaking, since the
pitch of the three ber's is different. After personal and interrogative pro-
nouns bcr must always be used in place of X\)t\d)CX: I who, id}, ber etc.
i
— IT —
EXAMPLES OF RELATIVES.
Nora. !IDer ^ann, bcrormeld)cr (not mer) bit c« gejogt l^ot, the man who
(that) bus told you (it).
2)ie ^inbcr, b i e or tt) e( d}e mit bir gejpieU ^abcn, the children who
have played with you.
S)ie i8ud)er, b t e or uj e ( d) e bir gel^i3ren, the hooks which (that) helong
to you.
Wc^, \va^ (not baS or ire(d)e§) niir geljort, all that belongs to me.
Gen. S)er 9J?ann, bcff en (not tDcId)e§ or n^effen) §au§ ic^ gefauft l)abc, the
man ivhose house I have boTight,
S)ie ^inbev; b e r e n (not hjeld)er or ujeffcn) Satcr il^r fennt, the children
whose father 3'ou know.
2)a§ §au«, b eff en ©ebrand) ®ie l)aben, the house the use of which
you have.
Wic^, b e f f en (not ujcffen or njeld^es) \i)X befdjulbigt felb, all of which
you are accused.
Dat. 2)er greunb, mit b cm or roctd) em (not mit wtm) x<i) nmge^e, the
friend with whom I associate.
S)a« 2anh, b e m or n? e I d) e m id) angel^bre, the country to which I
belong.
S)ie greunbc, b e n c n or nj e I d) e n il^r trcu fcib, the friends to whom
you are faithful.
OTe«, it? om i t* (not mit n)etd)em) il)r bcfd^ciftigt feib, all (everything)
with which you are occupied.
Ace. Xtx Tlann, benortt>etd)en (not iuen) hn fennft, the man whom you
know.
2)a3 ^ferb, b a S or m e t C^ C 8 bn reiteft, the horse which (that) you ride.
%Uc^, nj a § (not t>a^ or weId)C§) ic^ ge!}ort ^abc, all (that) I have heard.
3. Demonstrative Pronouns,
§ 31. The demonstratives are: L ber, that (plur. those);
2. bicfcr, this (plur. these); 3. jener, that; 4. foldjet, such;
5. berjenige (see § 35.)^ and 6. berfelbe, the same.
§ 32. The pronouns bicfer^ jencr and foldjcr decline strong
throughout (see the paradigm orbiefer, § 26.).
Of fo(d)er exists a collateral form fold) Ctlt, such a, of which only the
indefinite article ein is declined: vgotd) cinem 2Jiauue, to such a man. Such
ah also rendered eiu fold)er, and inflected like ein jeber, § 39.
* The change of tt)a§ into tDO in connection with prepositions takes also
place if \va^ is a relative (§ 18, Hem). Many make U8(; of the combinations
witli \y)o even in the place of the relatives bet or n)etd)Cl*, as: bie J^cbev, lU omit
tc^ fd)reibe, instead of: bie geber, mit b c r or m e I d) e r id) fc^rcibe, the pen
with which I am writing. But others object to the usage.
— 18 —
Examples: — This man, btefCt 3Raun; of that woman, Jcnet 5rau; to this
child, jeucm ^inbe; to those men, icucii 2Jlannern.
§ 33. The demonstrative ber* is declined like the article if
it is followed hj a noun with which it agrees in gender, number,
and case. W\t "i^tw •33ii(J)ern taim id) nidjt^ tl)iin, with those
books I cannot do anything. But if its noun is understood, it
has the same declension as the relative bcr (§ 30). It is thus
frequently used with the force of an emphasized personal pro-
noun of the third person:
3) c n fenne id) nici)t, him I do not know.
2) a§ tami id) iud)t t^mt, that I cannot do.
S) e r en gtbt c§ raenige, of those there are few.
SDlit bene u !ann xi) nic^U tt)un, with thosel cannot do anything*
§ 34. In berjc:iige and berfelbe each of the two components
bcr and jcutQe (fe(te) is inflected: bcr, entirely like the article,
and ieitlije (fctbe) after the weak form (§ 27.):
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
Masculine,
Feminine.
Neuter.
All Genders.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
bcrjenige
iJCiSjeiugctt
bcmjeuigctt
i>Cttiemgeu
^iejentgc
bcrjenigcit '
l^crienigcn
feicienige
fea^jenige
^ci^ienigcit
fccmjenigett
ba^jemge
^icjenigctt
^crjentgen
^ctlientgctt
Hcjenigett
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
l)crfetbc feicfelbc
fcC^Sjelbcn (2:en-
erally beffelben) bcrfetbcit
bemfelbcu ^crieIbcu
t>enfelbctt t)icfetbc
^a^feIbe (generally
written baffetbe)
beffelben (beffelben)
&cmfetbctt
&a^felbc
Mcfelben
berfetbett
bcnfelbcn
Hcfelbeit.
§ 35. ©crjenige is used only in a correlative connection.
It corresponds: 1) to the English he or its equivalent the one
(pi. those^ the ones), if these words are determined and com-
pleted by a relative clause; 2) to the English tJiat (the one,
pi. those, the ones), if these words take the place of a noun
previously mentioned, provided that a relative clause or a de-
pendent phrase is attached to the demonstrative.
* The vowel c in the demonstrative ber is more strongly emphasized
than either in the article or in the relative ber. If the word is connected, as
demonstrative, with a noun, it is always spaced in print, to distinguish it
from the article.
— 19 —
SDerjemge, bcr feme greunbe ^at, ifl gu betlagen, he (the one) who has no
friends is to be pitied.
S)ieientgen, tie nic^t benlen, tebeit ntd)t, those (the ones) who do not think,
do not live.
SSldw $au§ ift fi^oner, al8 ba^ieuige bctneS iBruberg, my house is more
beautiful than that (the one) of thy brother.
2)iefe^ ^ferb ift groger at§ ba§jentge, 'tid^ bu gefauft l^afl, this horse is
larger than the one (that) which you have bought.
Rem. — 1. The masculine sing, berjetttge, ber if both words are in the
nominative, may be replaced by the interrogative tD er, and the plural bie*-
jentgen, bie may be replaced by b i e alone. 2S e r tetiie greunbe l)at, tfl gu be*
flagen, who has no friends etc. ; 2)ie ni(f|t benten, leben nic^t, those who do
not think etc.
2. The neuter ba^jenige, if used absolutely, and not referring to a par-
ticular noun, must be followed by the relative ID a 3 (see § 30. Rem. 3). In
this instance ba^jeiuge may be dropped,
2)a§ienige, lu a§ (not "t^a^ or luelcfje^), bu fagfl ift njaljr, or: ilSa§ bu fagfl,
ift Xoa\)Xf what (that which) you say is true.
But if the demonstrative is in the genitive or dative, it cannot be
dropped: 2)ie 2Ba{)rl}eit be^ienigen, uja§ ®ie niir gefagt i^aben (not bie SBal^r*
l^eit iDeffeu), the truth of what you have told me.
§ 36. The demonstrative bet (§ 33.) is frequently used
with the force of berjenigc; but in this instance it takes the form
fceret, instead of bercn, in the genitive plural. The demon-
strative jener is generally not employed in this connection.
^ er, tDelc^er (or berjeuige, ber; or n)er; not ber, tt)er) fdet, n)irb eruteu,
who (he who) sows will reap.
©e^t nur um mit bcneti, bie (benjenigeu, bie; beneu, h)etci)e) euern
(§eift bifben, associate with those only that benefit your mind,
golgt nic^t bem ^ai\)t ber er (beriemgen, but not bereu*), bie eud^ benei-
ben, do not follow the advice of those that envy you.
2)a8 $?eibeu b c r SintDoljuer (or berjemgen, but not berer or bercn), bie
burd} ben ^rieg tjerarmt traren, the suffering of those inhabitants who
were impoverished by the war.
Unfere Jiteratur ift grog, aber bie ber !J)eutfd)eu (or biejenige bcr 2)eut-
fd^en) ift grower, our literature is great, but that of the Germans is
gi eater.
* There are passages enough, in which we find b er eu in this connec-
tion. But it is considered as- faulty.
— 20 —
4. Indefinite Pronominal Adjectives,'^
§ 3*1. Sing, eiu, eine, ein (the indefinite article), a, some,
any (sing.), one.
einigcr, e, c^ (strong),
ctlDa^ (indeclinable), \ some, any, a little.
xot{6)tt, e, e^ (STRONG),
Plur. einiQC (strong), ) ^ ^^^^
iDeWjC (STRONG), ) > ^?
1. Gin refers to individual nouns (such as friend^ horscj fidd, etc.) in the
singular. Referring to nouns previously mentioned, or used with the force
of 3cmanb or man (see the note), it declines strong through(>ut (einct, cinC,
cinCd or eind). Its force is often increased by the adverb irgenb placed be-
fore it. For its declension as indefinite article see § 4.
§aben (Sic cincn §ammer? §ier ifl ciner. Have you any hammer ?
Here is one, 3ft nid)t (E i n C r an bev X^iir ? Is not some one at the door ? §afl
bn c i n 3)leffcr ? 3a, id^ l)abe e i n § (einc«). Have you a knife ? Yes, I have
one. §aft bu einc gcber bei ber §anb? Have you some (a) pen at hand?
^onnen (Bie nid)t t r (^ c n b c i n SBertjcug finben ? Can you not find some tool ?
SBenn ^it irgenb eincn 2Sunf(^ ^aben, bringen (Sic i^n bor! If you have
any desire, state it.
^^* In this connection the English one or any cannot be rendered by
Cttt)a8 or cintgcr. For the form b C r cinc see § 46.
2. S t n? a § and the singular of c i n i g c r and tt)tld)tv refer exclusively
to nouns denoting a quantity (such as water, grain, gold), and to abstracts
(as diligence, courage etc.). SSctc^er in this connection cannot be joined
to nouns, but may be used in reference to nouns mentioned before. These
words may also be preceded by irgenb, in which case tDCld^cr may be joined to
nouns.
SScnn @ic nnr c i n t g c n gfeig anmenbcn n?oUtcn, if you would but apply
9ome diligence. §abcn 2>it e t tu a 8 @elb bei ftd) ? 3a, id) l^abe n? c I c^ e «.
Have you ang (some, a little) money with you ? Yes, I have some, SScnn tX
irgenb cinigcS {ttxoa^, njctdjeS) ©ctbflticrtraucn Ijatttf if he had any self-
reliance (at all).
^^ The English some and ang employed in a merely partitivef sense
are not expressed in German, except if referring to a noun previously men-
* All these pronominal adjectives may, like all other adjectives, be em-
ployed 'substantively', repiacinj^ the substantive indefinite pronouns, men-
tioned § 22. They are then written with a capital. Thus feincr stands for
3cmanb or man; Reiner with the force of ^^iiemanb; 3eber for 3ebcmiann;
(SinigeS for (StroaS. But this does not make these words ' substantive pro-
nouns', as they always keep their adjective inflection.
f That the Enp:lish some or any are employed in a partitive sense will be
generally evident, if we may not replace these words by a Utile or a few.
— 21 -
tioned: S^rtnfctt ®ic Setn (not citttgcn or cttuaS SSetn), do you drink any
wine ? ^ertaufen 8ie 3iiffc5^ ("^^^ einigen or ettt)a§ 3"^cr), do you sell any
sugar ? 3a, ic^ oeilaufe w e ( d) c n , yes, I sell sorm.
3. ©inigc and tueld^e in the PLURAL answer to the English some or any, if
they are used in tlie sense of ' a few' before plural nouns. SBctd)C refers to
plural nouns which are mentioned before. If irgenb is used I efore plural
*nouns, tDClc^C generally takes the place of einigc. If some and any cannot be
replaced by *a f<iv)\ before plural nouns, they are not expressed in Ger-
man, except when they are used with emphasis.
Sd) gtug mit c i ni g en greunt>en fpa;;icren, I took a walk with some (a
few) friends. SBcnit bieje SSdnbc e t n i g e ^i^^^t^^n batten, ttJiirben fie beffcr
au^fc^en, if these walls had some (a few) ornaments, they would look better.
Senn crirgcnb xot\6)t ©c^ttjteric^teiten erl^eben foHte, if he should raise any
difficulties (whatever). SKa« fud)ft bu ? 3d) fud)c ^fJciget. §aft bu tt) c I d) e
gefunben ? What are you looking for ? I am looking for (some) nails. Have
you found some (any) ?
4. Instead of einigct in all its forms the indefinite pronoun ctUd)Ct
(strong) may be used. But it cannot be connected with irgenb, nor can it be
used with abstracts.
§ 38. ^ein, fcine, fein, no, not — any; plur. feine (strong), no.
^ein before nouns is declined like the indefinite article. But if it refers to
nouns mentioned before, or if it is used substsmtively, it declines strong
throughout (teinCt, feine, feincd or fetnd), and is translated none or no one
(nobody).
3d) ^abc feine 9^ad)rid)t crl^attcn, I have not received any news. (5r ^at
feine greunbe, he has no friends. (Sr l^at etnigc 3(nf^riid)c, ober bn Ijaft
feine, he has some claims, but thou hast none. 3ft (Sinei* l)ier gettjefen ?
SUtxw, Reiner ift ^ier gcttJcfen, Has any one been here ? No, no one has
been here.
§ 39. 3ebet, c, e§ (strong)^ each, every (without plural).
It may also, without changing its meaning, be preceded by the indefinite
article, and declines then weak, except in those forms in which the indefinite
article takes no ending: Norn. einjebCt; Gen. eineg jebCtt; Dat. cinem {ebClt;
Neuter : ein jebc^. In both forms it may be used substantively with the
force of 3ebermann.
^rgab jcbcm (cinem jeben) ^nabcn eincn 5;^aler, he gave to each
boy a dollar. 3cbcr (ein 3cber), ber nid)t fiir mid) ift, ift mtber mid),
every one that is not for me, is against me, @ib 3cbcm(eincm 3cbcn)
bad ®eine, give every one his own.
§ 40. SlHer, oMe, allc^ (strong), all; plur. at(c, all.
The neuter singular fitted, used substantively, is rendered by everything ^
and is also used in speaking of persons (all, every one, all the people).
— 22 —
21 tt c r Xabd !rdn!t, all censure hurts. 9[)^tt a U e r ^ufmerffamfett, with
all attention; mtt alien feincn grcmtben, with all his friends. 2111 eS ift
JJCrloren, all (everything) is lost. 21 U e g freut fid), all rejoice.
^^^ If jZZ with the article before singular nouns is equivalent to * the
whole', it is not gendered by atter, but by the adjective gang: all the city,
tie ganje (Stabt
§ 41. 23iel, much; plur. many.
If t)tel is not preceded by the article or another qualifying word, it is
either not inflected at all, or it declines strong. In nom. and ace. sing the
uninflected forms are far more usual; in the other cases the inflected forms
prevail. (Nom. t)ie( iffiein; Gen. t)ieleg Scin§; Dat. t)telem SBein; Ace. tjtel
SBein). In the plural, the nom. and ace. are about as often inflected as not
(tjiel or DielC Solbaten, many soldiers). In the other cases of tlie plural the
inflected forms prevail. If it stands without noun, the singular much answers
to the neuter 25ietoril5ielC^, the genitive and dative being almost always
inflected. The plural ' many\ used substantively, is always rendered by the
inflected form ^ielc. (Sr tueig iBiel or 23ielc^*, he knows much (many things).
2)ie§ ift tie 2JJeinung S3telcr, this is the opinion of many.
^ie( may be preceded and qualified by the definite article, by demonstra-
tives or possessives, and inflects then WEAKf, being translated by 'great
amount or quantity of\ bet t>ielc 9iegen, the great amount of rain. 2Bag ttJillft
bn mtt biefem Dielcit ©olbe anfangen? What will you do with this great
amount of gold ? 2)^it feinem tiielcit (Selbe, with his great amount of money*
§ 42. aSenig, little; plur. few.
If little is opposed to great, it is translated by Ilein; if opposed to much, by
hJentg. SSenig, in respect to its inflection is almost entirely treated like tJtel:
Nom. menig @elb, little money; Gen. tuenige^ (en)t @etbe^; Dat. tncntgem
©elbe; Ace. tuenig ®e!b. After prepositions the uninflected forms decidedly
prevail (mtt Juenig @elb). In the plural the inflected forms are required in
the genitive, and more frequent in the dative; but in nom. and ace. the
uninflected forms rather prevail: Sr !^at n)entg grennbe, he has few friends;
but roenigCt J^^^eunbe, of few friends. If used substantively in the plural,
n)enig is inflected in all cases: iBenigC (not njenig) begmeifetn t^, few doubt it.
LittUf used absolutely in the singular is generally rendered by the uninflected
tDenig, rarely by tDenigeS. 2Senig in the singular, like little, may be preceded
by the indefinite article: ein roenig, a little, which is almost equivalent to
etn)a§. It remains in all cases uninflected (mtt ein menig %\t\^, with a little
diligence). The plural a few is translated by einige or ti\\6)t, not by ein
irenig. Not a few is rendered by nid)t tDenige or by mancl)e; and not a little by
nic^t menig.
* Some make a difl'erence between ^iel and SSieleS, which is not war-
ranted by the usage of the best writers.
t With possessives it must inflect strong if the possessive takes no
ending. See § 55. Rem. 1.
X See § 55. Rem. 2.
23
¥
§ 43. WanijCT, c, t^; plur. manege (strong),* many a,
not a few.
2)Zancf)er both in the singular and plural corresponds to manr/ a or not a
few: (Sr ^attemit manc^cm §inberniffe (or manc^en §inberntffen) p fdmpfen,
he had to struggle with many an obstacle (not a few obstacles).
§ 44. SSKe^r, more.
It is indeclinable in all cases: mit me^r ®eib, with more money; me^r
greimbe, more friends.
SBeniger, less, is treated in the same way, but is sometimes, though
rarely, found with (strong) inflection.
§ 45. 3)Jet)rcre (strong), several.
It is used only in the plural: CEr ntac^tc mtljXCtt (SitlltJCnbuttgctt, he
made several objections, 'ifladj me^retCIt ^erfud)en, after several attempts.
§ 46. S)cr (bte,ba§) eiiie, the one; ber (bie, ba^) anbere, the
other (both weak).
Both form plurals (bic eitten, hit anberen; the ones, the others). 5lnbcr
takes also the indefinite article before it and is then declined like eilt jeber,
(etu anberct, C, C§, another). Without an article it is declined strong
throughout: 3Son anbcrcitt (^toffe, of other material; bie ©ttten anberct
3e'lten, the manners of other times.
5. Possessive Pronouns^
§ 41. The simple possessives are:
Masculine, Feminine,
1. Singular Person.
2.
masc, Pers,
3. -( ,, fem.
neuter
( ,, masc, Pers, (
.} ,, fem. ,, }
I ,, neuter ,, (
1. Plural Person.
2.
betn,
fein,
it)i\
fein,
unfer,
euer,
nietne,
beine,
jeine,
i^re,
feiue,
unferc,
euere,
i^re,
Neuter,
mein,
bein,
fein,
fein,
unfer,
euer,
t^r,
my;
thy;
his;
her;
its;
your;
their.
Rem. — The second singular and plural persons (bein, eucr) are confined
to relations of intimacy, like the corresponding substantive personal pro-
nouns. Among persons less intimately connected the third person plural
3^r (their) is used in addressing either one or more persons. 3()r is then
written with a capital. Your brother, 3l)r ^ruber; your sister, 3l^re @(^tt)C*
fter. 3d) baue auf 35re Sf^ad^fid^t, meinc §crren, I rely on your indulgence,
gentlemen.
* 9)^Qnd)cr in connection with an adjech've or the indefinite article may
be used without any inflection: 9Jiand) tin .tunftter, many an artist; mand)
.Qvoger aJlann.
— 24
§ 48. The simple possessives inliect strong in the plural,
and in the singular like the indefinite article: .
SINGULAR.
Masculine. Feminine.
Neuter.
Nom.
mein iBrubcr, meiuc ®d)n)cfler,
ntcin ^ud),
Gen.
meinc^ iBruberS, nieiuct (Scl)mefter,
tueiucd ^11 dj?,
Dat.
meincm iBruber, meincr (Sd)wefter,
meincm iBud)e,
Ace.
meincu 33ruber, nieine ^rf)n)efter,
PLURAL FOR ALL GENDERS,
Nom. tneine iBriiber,
Gen. meincr ^riiber,
Dat. meinctt iBriibern,
Ace. meinc ^riiber.
mein ^ud).
Thus
are declined:
fctn 1
his
cr erne
3 il)rc
bis
X\)X 1
her or their
her or the>r
uufer [■53ruber, our
■ ^ imfere \ (Sd)tt)cfter,
our
cuer
3l)r J
-your
^ ■ eure*
3t)re .
-your
1^^ In nnfer and euer the final letters are not inflectional endings, hut
radical, and cannot he dropped in declining them, as it is the case in btcfct
^-en. biefc^, Unfer and cuer form Gen. nnferc^ (or unfer^), enrc^ (not un]e0<
§ 49. The possessive pronouns, like ordinary adjectives,
may be used predicatively, answering to the English possessive
cases mine, tJiine, Ms, hers, its, etc. They are then not
inflected, the same as other predicative adjectives.
S)ie(e8 ^ud) ift me in, tbis h( ok is mine; biefe iBiid^er fmb bein (fein^
nnfcr, CUerf); these hooks are thine (his, ours, yours).
§ 50. Aside from this case, the English possessive forms
mine, thine, etc. are rendered by any of the following three
forms of the German possessives:
1 ) By the ordinary possessives with strong inflection even
in the nominative:
3ci^ l)abe meine $f(id)t gett)an, tl^nt tf)r c n r e , I have done my duty, do
ye yours. — S)a§ ift ntd)t bein ^ortt)eU, ober e§ ift m e i n e r , that is not thy
advantage, hut it is mine. — (Suer $?oog ift leic^t, ober u n f e r e S ift traurig,
your lot is easy, hut ours is sad.
* Instead of euerc the form cure is preferred.
t With the third person plural this form is not used.
2) By placing the definite article before the possessive,
which has then weak inflection throughout (ber, bic, ba^ mciiie,
Gen. be§ metnctt, etc. ; ber, bie, ha^ unfcre, Gen. bc^ m\cxc% etc.).
Unfer §aii6 ift alt, ba§ cure ift neu, our house is old, yours is new. (5r be*
btcnt fid) metiier ^intmcr I}ier, unb id) bebicne mid)'ber fcincn bort; he makes
use of my rooms here, and I make use of his there.
3) By attaching the termination ige to the possessives, and
placing the definite article before them. These forms, like-
wise, decline weak (bcr, bie, ba^ metnige, Gen. be^^bermeiitigeti;
bav bie, ba^ feinige; Gen. bc^ feinigeti; Plur. bic feinigen; ber,
bie, \)a^ unfrige*, eurige, il)r[ge, etc. ).
SSdl)reub i^r eure 9Jlitburger tjerfotgtet, befd)ul?ten mx bie unfrigcit, while
you persecuted your countrymen, we protected ours. 2)ic§ ift meiu @d)i(ffa(,
IDaS UJirb aber DaS beinigc feiu? this is my fate, but what will be thine ?
^^^ The two forms with the definite article have often conventional
significations. 3) a § ilReintcie, ©eintgc, etc. (substantively) means my, his,
etc. property; bte 9}ieinigcn, S)eintgcn, etc. denote persons who are in some
particular connection with the person designated by the pronoun, as his
family, his friends, adherents, etc.
III. NUMERAL ADJECTIVES.
§ 51. The cardinal numerals
are:
1 ein^,
19 ttcun^jel^n,
2 mh
20 gtDanjtg,
3 bret,
21 einimbj^iDangig,
4 Dter,
22 gmeiuiib;;man;;tg,
6 fiinf,
23 bretunb;^n)an;;ig,
6 fed)§,
24 Dierunbjmanjig,
7 fieben,
25 fiinfimbjwanjig,
8 ad)t,
30 bretgig,
9 neitn,
40 bierjig,
10 scl)n,
60 funf^ig,
11 elf,
60 fedijtg
12 ^Woll
70 fieb^tg (riebcnstg)
13 brei;iel)n,
80 ad)t3ig,
14 Dierje^n,
90 neimjig,
15 fuufse^n,
100 l)unbertt,
16 fed)5et)n,
101 l^unbert unb cxn9,
17 rieb;iet)u (ficbenje^n),
102 ^imbert unb jttjei,
18 ad)t3c^n,
103 l)unbert unb brei,
* In bcr unfvicje, bcr curigc the c of the possessive stem is dropped,
t The English a hundred and a thousand are expressed without article in
German; but one hundred, one thousand take the f')i m @ i n^unbcvt, Q. X Utaufcnb.
— 26 —
200 3UKi I)inibert, 1,000 gtDci taufeub,
1,000 taiifeub, 10,000 gel)n taufenb,
1871 taufenb aS)! l)uubcrt ein itnb fiebgicj, or a^tjeljn Ijunbert ein unb fiebjig;
a million, eiiie iDlillion.
Rem. — 1. The form (Sin^ is used only in counting, or as a neuter when
it inflects strong. Else the numeral one is expressed by the indefinite article
which has then the emphasis, and is spiced in print, or written with a
capital; ei n er 5rau, to one woman. If the noun is understood, it has the
STRONG inflection throughout. SSie t»tel ^naben maren bort ? 9^ur e i n e r ;
how many boys were there ? Only one. (2r I)atte uid)t me^r i8ud)er q(^ eill^
(einC^), he had no more books than one,
2. Both is expressed by beibe. If employed with the definite article,
which always precedes, it answers the English the two, and declines weak;
else strong: 2)te Siidier bcibcr iBriibcr, the books of both brothers; bie ^Biic^er
b e r beibCU 33ruber, the books of the two brothers. iBeibe forms a neuter
singular iBetbC^, corresponding to the English both, referring to things in
general: iQ e i bc$ ift vid)tig, both is correct.
3. ^Xon and brei, if not preceded by the article or an adjective pro-
noun, take in the genitive the strong termination er, for instance: 2)ie2luS*
{age glueier ^i^^O^^^r ^^^^ deposition of two witnesses. The other cardinal
numbers remain unaltered, except that in the dative they sometimes take
the termination en, if not followed by nouns. §unbert and taufenb, if their
nouns are understood, decline strong, if referring to an indefinite number of
hundred or thousand, corresponding to the English hundreds, thousands, Sr
\)(\i oft in e i n e m %(x%t Saujenbe tjerloren, he has often lost thousands in
one day.
§ 52. The ordinal numerals are adjectives, and are de-
rived from the cardinal numerals by the addition of the syllable
te or fte. From two to nineteen is added tc, the rest take ftf .
2)er erfte, the first; ber gman^igftc, the twentieth;
ber gtDeite, the second; ber ein unb jn^an^igfte, the twenty-
ber brittc, the third; first;
ber ijierte, the fourth; ber bretgtgfte, the thirtieth;
ber fiinfte, the fifth; ber fiinfgigfte, the fiftieth;
ber ad)te, the eight; ber i)nnbertfte, the hundredth;
ber jtDotfte, the twelfth; ber taujenbfte, the thousandth.
Rem — 1. The ordinals generally decline weak. But they decline strong,
if neither the definite article nor an inflected pronominal adjective stand be-
fore them: (SrftCt 35anb, volume first; fein briltCt @0^n, his third son.
2. To the class of the ordinals belongs the interrogative numeral bcr
iniet>tetfle ? (with weak inflection), corresponding to which (in order)? if an
ordinal numeral is expected as answer. It must be generally expressed in
English by circumlocution: !5)er hJteOietfle iBanb ift bie« ? What is the number
— .2t —
of this volume ? It is used substantively to ask for the date: S)cr tlJietjletflC
tft Ijeute V What day of the month is to-day ?
3. From the ordinals are formed 1) the ordinal adverbs by the ending
Ctt^ : erftcn^, firstly, in the first place; jtDeitett^, in the second place,
secondly; brittCtt^, in the tMrd place, etc. 2) the fractions by the
ending d, being of neuter gender if used substantively : eiu 2)l'tttcl, one
third; tin 3>iertcX, one fourth; etn 3^^n3igftcl, one twentieth. The numeral
giueite does not form a fraction; instead of it the word I)alb is used. If l)atb is
preceded by the indefinite article*, it is declined like etu jeber, but preceded
by the definite article it declines weak (etn I)atbC^ $funb, half a pound; tin
^albCt gu6, half a foot; bag \)alht S^egiment, half the regiment). If used as
an abstract fraction it is not declined (^jwaujig uub eiu l)aib, twenty and one
half). Instead of eill itnb ein l)a(b the expression anbertl]a(b is often used.
Thus britte^alb, two and a half; Diertel)alb, three and a half, etc.
§ 53. The other numerals are:
1. Multiplicative Numerals.
(Stufac^, single; gel)nfadb tenfold;
boppelt or gtt)eifad), double; l^UItbertf ad), a hundredfold;
breifad), treble; taufenbfac^, a thousandfold.
They are ordinary adjectives, and decline like these.
2. Cardinal Adverbs.
(Sinmat, once; biermat, four times;
gtuelmat, twice; l^unbertmal, a hundred times;
breimat, thrice; tauteubmal, a thousand times.
3. The Indeclinable Numerals in \tX*
(Stnertei, of one kind; lTtancf)ertet, of several kinds;
gltJeierlei, of two kinds; Dieledei, of many kinds;
breierfet, of three kinds; allertet, of all kinds.
They are formed by adding eriel to the cardinals and indefinite pro-
nouns, expressing quantity.
IV. ORDINARY ADJECTIVES.
§ 54. Ordinary Adjectives. decline weak if they are pre-
ceded and qualified by the definite article, or any adjective
pronoun or numeral that has an inflectional ending:
SI NGUL AR .
3Iasculine.
Nom. ber gutC SSlann, the good man;
Gen. \it^ flutcn 9D?anne«, of the good man;
Dat. bem cjutCtt SJJanne, to the good man;
Ace. ben gutCtt SSlann, the good man.
* §alb never takes its articles or determinative words after it.
— 28- —
Feminine.
Nom. hit gutC grau, the good woman;
• ' Gen. ber gutCll grau, of the gooJ woman;
Dat. ber C^Utcn grau, to the good woman;
Ace, bie gute %va\l, the good woman.
Neuter,
Nom. ba§ gutC ^inb, the good child;
• Gen. be§ gutcn ^inbeg, of the good child;
Dat. bent gut en ^inbe, to the good child;
Ace. ba§ gutC ^inb, the good child.
PLURAL FOR ALL GENDERS.
Nom. bie gittCtt Wdnntv, grauen, ^inber;
Gen. ber gutCtt 9)2dnnciv grauen, ^inber;
Dat. ben gate It 2J^dnuern, grauen, ^inbern;
Ace. bie gut en 2)Iduner, grauen, ^inber.
Thns are declined adjectives preceded by the interrogative WddjCX, by the
demonstratives biefer, jeuer, fotd)er, berfelbe, berjenige; by the indefinites jeber,
alter, eiuiger, etlid)er, mand)er, uieler, by the ordinals (ber erfte etc.), the nu-
meral beibe and by those cases of etn, fein and the possessives that have
inflectional endings, as: meinem gutcn greunbe; unfere guten 9^ad)barn;
!einet guten SJlduner, etc.
PtEM.— After the plurals of the indefinite t)iele, atte, mel)rere, cinige, etlid^e,
manege, anbere the following adjective generally declines strong, although
these indefinites are themselves inflected by strong endings: 5Itle gute ^dU'
ner (Gen. aller guter 2T2dnner); me^rere groge ^iinftter; t»te{e beru^mte gelb^
l)erren, etc. Sometimes, however, this rule is not observed, and the adjectives
are found with weak inflection after these words.
§ 55. Adjectives not qualified by the definite article or an
adjective pronoun or numeral with strong endings, decline
strong:
SINGULAR.
Masculine.
Nom. guter SSein, good wine;
Gen. gute§ SS^eiue^, of good wine;
Dat. gutem SSeiue, to good wine;
Ace. guten SBein, good wine.
Feminine.
Nom. frifd^e Wild), fresh milk;
Gen. f r if d) er aJiild), of fresh milk;
Dat. frifd)et Wild), to fresh milk; -
Ace. frifc^e TIM), fresh milk.
— 29 —
Neuter.
Nom. Jd^traqC^ %\\^, black cloth;
Gen. jdiioarjc^ !£ucl)eg, of black cloth;
Dat. fc^ioaqcm %\\&)t, to black cloth;
Ace. fcl)tt)ar3C!S %yx^), black cloth.
PLURAL FOR ALL GENDERS.
Nom» fd}One iBlumeu, fine flowers;
Gen. fd)onci: ^(umen, of fine flowers;
Dat. fd)oncit S3lumen, to fine floweis;
Ace. fd)onC iBlumeii, fine flowers.
Eem. — 1. Hence adjectives inflect strong, 1) if they are immediately
preceded by prepositions: 2J2it grogcitt gtei^e, with great diligence; 2) if
they are preceded by those forms of the indefinite article or of the possessives
that have no endings: eiu grojjCt SiJiann, a great man; nieiit lieber ^ruber,
my dear brother; unfer gutC^ ^inb, our good child; 3) if they are preceded
by any pronominal adjective or numeral without inflectional endings: ittel^r
gutc ^ud)cr, more good books; t)iel gutCt SBein, much good wine; tnand)
jungC^ ^iub, many a young child; i\oz\ fc^onC ^J3ferbe, two fine horses; 4) if
the pronominal adjectives which precede them are not in the same case with
them: beffCtt grower 3rrtl)Um, whose great error.
2. It is now customary to give to the genitive singular of the mas-
culine and neuter of adjectives the weak ending eit, even if the adjective
should decline strong according to the general rules: (Sine 2)^eucje gutett
SSeinS (instead of: guteg SSeitlS), a quantity of good wine; gutCtt 50iut^§, of
good cheer (instead of: gute^ SJ^Ut^^). But some authors reject this rule, and
genitives with the strong ending e^ can not be considered as faulty.
3. Those pronominal adjectives that may or may not be inflected, require
the strong inflection of the following adjective, if they take no inflection;
but if they are themselves inflected; the following adjective declines weak:
SSiel gutcr 3Bein, or uteler gutc Sein; Dieted @ute, or biet @utc^ (much
good); manc^ inngc^ ^inb, or ntand^c^ junge ^inb (many a young child).
4» Since the indefinite article, the possessives, and the indefinite tein
take no endings in the nom. sing, of the masculine and neuter,and the accu-
pative singular of the neuter, but decline their other cases strong, the follow-
ing adjective must always decline strong in the nom. sing, masc, and nom.
and accus. singular neuter, but weak in all other cases. Some have called
this the "mixed declension" with the following scheme:
SINGULAR.
Masculine,
Nom. cm (tfinS^t Xag, a whole day;
Gen. cinc^ gftn^CIt Xagc^, of a whole day;
Dat. cincm gaujcit ^age, to a whole day;
Ace. eincn gan.^cn %(\o^, a whole day.
— 30 —
Feminine,
Nom. einC gangc ^^Jac^t, a whole night;
Gen. eiucr Qangcn ^lcL6)if of a whole night;
Dat. ciiict gan^ett 9^ad)t, to a whole night;
Ace. eiiiC gaujc 9tad)t, a whole night.
Neuter.
Nom. ein gongC^ 3a]^r, a whole year;
Gen. einc^ Qcmjcii 3a^re^, of a whole year;
Dat. eincm gangcn 3al)re, to a whole year;
Ace. ein ganjc^ 3al)r, a whole year.
riuraL
Nom. meiuc (jutcn J^reiinbe, my good friends;
Gen. tneincr gittctl greitnbe, of my good friends;
Dat. meincil gutcit greiniben, to my good friends;
Ace. meinc gutcn greimbe, my good friends.
y. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
§ 56. The comparative of an adjective is formed bj adding
the termination er, and the superlative by adding the ter-
mination fte, as:
9?ei(^, rich; retii)er, richer; bet reic^fte, the richest;
\6)txv, fine; fd)oner, finer; berfd)Onfte, the finest;
milb; mild; milber, milder; . ber milbefte*, the mildest.
The radical vowel of the positive is softened in the com-
parative and superlative: a changes into d, o into o, it into ii, as:
TO, old; otter, older; ber attcfle, the oldest;
grog, great; gro^ei*, greater; ber grogte, the greatest;
jung, young; juiiger, younger; ber jiingfte, the youngest
The following Adjectives are exceptions :
5Ba^r, true; fad)t, soft, slow;
fd)tauf, slender; farg, stingy;
fd)taff, lax; runb, round;
fanft, soft; bunt, motley;
matt, faint; ftumpf, hlunt;
florf), flat; fro^ Joyful;
fatfd), false; l^olb, gracious;
blag, pale; rof),raw;
gtatt, slippery; toU, mad;
ger abe, straight; Doll, full,
* Instead of jle, we add ef^e, when euphony demands it.
— 31 —
and the Adjectives ending in bar, t)aft, and [am, as: banlbar,
grateful; banfbarer, more grateful; bo^^aft, malicious; ho^^
I)aftcr, more malicious; fparfam, economical; [par[amer, more
economical.
§ 57* The following Adjectives are irregular:
@iit, good; beffer, better; ber bcftc, the best;
xmi), near; lial)er, nearer; ber ncidjfte, the next;
l^oc^, high; l)ol)er, higher; ber ^od)fte, the highest;
Uiel, much; mel)r, more; ber meifte, or me^rfte, the most.
§ 58. Comparatives and superlatives are declined accord-
ing to the same rules as the adjectives in the positive, as: ber
fleine Xi\d), the small table; ber Iteinere Zi]d), the smaller table;
ber Heinfte S^ijcf), the smallest table; ein flciner Slifd), a little
table; eiu tteinerer S^ifd), a smaller table; ein fdjone^ Suc^, a
beautiful book; eiii jdjouere^ Slid), a more beautiful book.
§ 59. Superlatives can generally not be used predicatively
without the definite article. In order to render the English
predicative superlative without an article, a peculiar adverbial
form is used in German, consisting of the preposition an, con-
tracted with the dative neuter of the definite article (am inst.
of an bem) and the weak form of the superlative: fd)on, beau-
tiful, superl. am fdjonften, most beautiful; cold, fait, superl. am
fa{te[tcn, coldest.
SBeld^e^ Xijin ift bem 9Jlenfd)eu am treufteu? What beast is most
faithful to man ?
SSanu finb bie 3)Zenfdicn a tit gtiicfltd^flen? When are men happiest ?
SD'lein greunb ift am g u f r i e b e n ft c u , n^ettit er atteitt ift, my friend is
most pleased when he is alone.
Bem. — If a predicative superlative is connected with the article, it agrees
in gender^ number, and case with the subject. But if the superlative is
qualified by a partitive noun which is logically the predicate, it agrees only
in case and number with the subject, but in gender with the partitive noun:
2)ie(e (Stunbe ttjar bie f d) o tt fte meineS lOebeng, this hour was the most
beautiful of my life.
%{tt ©otbateii ftnb ttid)t immer bie t a ^ f c r ft e tt , old soldiers are not
always the bravest.
2)er 9)lorb ift b a 6 fl r o 6 1 c aller 5Berbred)ett, murder is the greatest of
all crimes.
— - 32
CHAPTER Y.
THE VERB.
I. PRELIMIXARY REMARKS.
§ 60. German verbs have four moods: the Indicative, the
Bubjunctive, the Conditional, and the Imperative.
The indicative mood has two simple tenses, as:
Present Tense: id) (obe, 1 praise;
Imperfect Tense: id) (obte> I praised.
All other tenses are formed by means of the auxiliary verbs.
Perfect Tense: id) l)abe getobt, I have praised;
Pluperfect Tense: id) l)atte (jclobt, I had praised;
First Future Tense: id) Werbe lobeu, I shaU praise;
Second Future Tense: id) mcrbe gelobt l)aben, I shall have praised.
The subjunctive mood has the same tenses as the Indic-
ative. The conditional mood has two tenses, the Present or
the First Conditional, and the Past cr Second Conditional.
§ 61. The infinitive of all German verbs terminates in en
or n*. By taking off this termination we find the stem of the
verb, as: fd)reib is the stem of the verb fd)reiben, to write;
fag, the stem of the verb fciQCtt, to say; dnbcr is the stem of the
verb aubcrtt, to change.
§ 62. The German verbs are divided into weak and
STRONG verbs. Weak rerbs are those the imperfect of which
is formed by the ending te, without affecting the stem, as:
loben, imperf. id) lobte; facjen, imperf. fagte. Strong verbs are
those which form their imperfect without ending by a change of
the radical vowel, as: gebcn, to give; imperf. id) (\ah; fterben, to
die; imperf. id) ftarb; [d)(aQen, to strike; imperf. id) fd)(ug.
II. CONJUGATION OF WEAK VERBS.
§ 63. The present tense of weak verbs is formed by the
following termination, which are attached to the stem:
Indicative. Sing. 1, — e, Subjunctive. Sing. 1. — c,
2. —eft, 2. —eft,
X — ct, 3. — e,
* (^etn (to be), t^ltn (to do), and verb^:^vith stems in cr and el take only
n as ending, as bcttelu, to beg; DetmtnDcrn, to diminish.
— 33 —
Plur» 1. —en, Plur. 1. —en,
2. — et, * 2. — et,
3. —en, 3. —en.
The imperfect has the same endings in both indicative and
subjunctive:
Sing. 1. — ete, Plur. 1. — eten,
2. — eteft, 2. — etet,
3. —ete, 3. —eten.
The imperative and the two participles are formed by the
following endings:
Imperative. Sing. — e,
Plur. — et.
Present Participle. — enb,
Past Participle. — et, (in connection with the prefix ge).
Rem. — 1. In the present indicative, imperative and past participle
the vowel c of the ending, when followed by ft or t, is generally dropped,
except in those verbs that cannot be conveniently pronounced without
it. These are the verbs with stems ending in b, t, (t^), gn and d^n,
as: rebctt (rebeft, rebct); antwortcn (antnjovteft, antroortet); begegncit
(begegneft, begegnct); red)ncn (red)ncft, red)nct); but lobcit, lobft, (obt;
fagctt, fagft, fagt; lerncn, lernft, lernt. Verbs ending in a sibilant (\, f^,
\^, J) retain e before ft only: reifcii, rcifcft, reift; mifd)Cn, mifd)Cft, mifc^t;
Uerte^eit, t)erl'et3Cft, berle^^t. The dropping of the e does not apply to the
subjunctive present: (obcu, lobcft, lobct; fageit, fagcft, fagct, except in
verbs ending in cm and etn, which drop the e of the ending in all forms, un-
less it be final : id) dnbere, bn dnberft, er dnbert, njir anberit (both for indica-
tive and subjunctive).
2. In the imperfect the c, preceding the final consonants is always kept,
but initial t of the ending is dropped in all persons, except in verbs with stems
in b, t, gn and d)n (id) lobtc; but '\6) rebetc).
3. The prefix ge of the past participle (gclobt) is generally called the
augment. It is used in all verbs, except those that are not accented on the
first syllable. The verbs which do not take such an accent, and hence drop
the augment, are these: 1) Verbs with the foreign ending iren or ieren, as:
rcgieren (part, regiert, not {^crcgtert); mavfd)iren (marfd)trt); 2) verbs with
the prefixes be, ge, ent, emp, er, tier, "^tx (see § 82), as: befnd)en, part. befud)t;
gc'^'oren, part. get)i)vt; gevftbren, part. ;^evftort; 3) most compounds with the
prepositions bnrd), nnter, iiber, um, l)intcv, nnber, and the adverb tjoll (see
§ 82), as: nntcrrid)ten, part. untcrrid)tet; umringen, part, nmvtugt; nnbedegen,
part, njibertegt; DoUenben, part. UoUenbet. Verbs compounded with other pre-
positions or adverbs take their augment between the preposition and the
simple verb: anflagen, part, angetlagt; auSreid^en, part, an^gcretd^t. (See § 83).
— 34 —
MODEL OF CONJUGATION OF WEAK VERBS.
a) dropping the c.
Infinitive: lobctl, to praise.
Indicative Mood. Subjunctive Mood.
PRESENT TENSE.
Sing. 1. id) lobe, I praise, I do praise, Id) tobC, I praise*
I am praising
2. bu (obft, thou praisest, dost bu lobcft,
praise, etc,
3. er (obt, he praises, does er lobC,
praise, etc.
Plur, 1. n)ir lobCtt, we praise, etc. tt)ir lobCtt,
2. i^^r lobt, you praise, etc. i^r lobct,
3. fte lobcn, they praise, etc. fie lobCtt.
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Indicative and Subjunctive.
Sing. 1. \6) lobtC, I praised, I did praise, I was praising,
2. bu lob t eft, thou praisedst, thou didst praise, etc,
3. er lobte, he praised, etc.
Plur, 1. h)ir lobten, we praised, etc.
2. \\)X lobtct, you praised, etc.
3. fie lobten, they praised, etc.
Imperative, Sing. lobe, praise (thou), Pres, Participle, Tobeitb, praising,
Plur. lobtf/ praise (you). Past Participle, gelobt, praised.
h) retaining the e.
Infinitive: rebeit, to speak.
Indicative,
PRESENT TENSE,
Sing. 1. \6) rebe, I speak, I do speak,
I am speaking,
2. 'aw reb eft, thou speakest, etc.
3. er rebet, he speaks, etc,
Plur. 1. \mx reb en, we speak, etc.
2. i^r rebet, you speak, etc.
3. fie reb en, they speak, etc.
Subjunctive.
\(i) rebe,
bu rebeft,
er rcbe,
mir rebett,
if)r rebet,
fie reb en.
* The translation of the subjunctive mood is generally not different
from the indicative, although it must often be rendered by one of the forms
of the potential. See the syntax §105. In our paradigms the subjunctive is
given without translation.
t If the third person is used for address, the present subjunctive is used
with the personal pronoun after the verb: ?oben ^xz, praiM (you).
— 35 —
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Indicative and Subjunctive.
Sing. !♦ ic^ rebctc/l spoke, did speak, was speaking
2. bu rebCtcft, thou spokest, etc.
3. er rebctC, lie spoke, etc.
riur. 1. mx rebetcn, we spoke, etc.
2. i^r vebCtct, you spoke, etc.
3. fie rebCtCtt, they spoke, etc.
Imperative. Sing. rebC, speak (thou) Pres. Participle, rebcil^, speaking
Phir. rebct, speak (you) Past Participle, gcrebct, spoken.
^^ Verbs, to be conjugated for practice: fagen, to say; gtaubett, to be-
lieve; tuunfd)eu, to wish; fct)eqen, tojest; ft^aben, to hurt; dnbern, to change;
uevciteln, to frustrate, ntarjd)ireu, to march; uiiterncl)ten, to instruct.
§ 64. Irregular weak verbs. The following weak verbs
deviate more or less from the above scheme:
1. The auxiliary l)aben in many of its forms drops the consonant b, or
changes it into i, and softens the radical vowel in the imperfect subjunctive.
See the paradigm page 41.
2. The potential verbs tDotteit, foHen, foniteu, inogen, miiffen, biirfen,
toiffen are conjugated by a peculiar intermixture of strong and weak forms.
(See the paradigms page 55.)
3. The verbs brennen (to burn), fentten (to know), tiennetl (to name),
rennen (to run), fenben (to send), tpenben (to turn), change their radical
vowel c into a in the Imperfect indicative and past participle (brflnntC,
fanntc, nanntc, etc., gebrannt, (jetauut, etc.). ^Senbcn and tnenben drop,
moreover, the e of the imperfect indicative and past participle (against § 63.
Rem. 1): fanbtC, ttJatlbtC; gefanbt, gemanbt.* AH these verbs restore the
original vowel e in the imperfect subjunctive (brCltUtC, fCUtttC, etc., jcnbctc,
trenbetc).
4. iBringen (to bring) and bcnfen (to think) make the imperfects
bracbte, ha^^it, Imperf. subj. hxa^tt, bacfttc; Past. part. gebra<^t,
gebadjt.
III. CONJUGATION OF STRONG VERBS.
§ 65. There are about a hundred and seventy-five strong
verbs in modern Germanf , some of which, however, admit of
* (Senbcn and tt)enbeu sometimes form their imperfects or past participles
regularly (feiibete, gejeubet).
t A list of all strong verbs is contained in the Appendix. Verbs not
occurring iri that list are weak. The present language does not form any
more strong verbs; but all verbs newly introduced in the language are weak
verbs by necessity.
fe
— 36 —
both the STRONG and the weak conjugation, as for instance
rafcn, imperfect rufte or rtcf. Their conjugation varies from
that of the weak verbs iu the foll6wing particulars:
^ 1. Their iinperfect indicative in the iirst pers. sins:, takes no ending, and
always changes tlie radical vowel of the infinitive (fommCll, imperf. id) tftm).
2. Tliiiir past participle takes the ending eu and a radical vowel differing
either from the infinitive, or from the imperfect, or from both (see the formulas
in the remark).
3. The imperfect indicative has the following scheme of personal
endings:
Sing. 1. — Pliir. 1. cil
2, ft (eft) 2. t (et)
3. — 3. en.
4. The imperfect subjunctive adds the endings of the present subjunc-
tive of weak verbs, and soRens the radicals a, 0, U into a, 5, ii (indie, ic^
tarn; subj. id) !&mc, bu tdmcft, etc.).
5. The second and tliird pers. sing, of the present indicative soften the
radical a into d, and sometimes o into i) (fd)tagen, fd)Idgft, fc^ldgt), and
mostly change the radical e into i (ie) Jcl)eu, jic^ft, fici)t. -
6. The singular of the imperative imdergoes the same change of c into i,
but not the softening of the radical vowel, which never takes place in the
imperative. It drops the ending c whenever it- changes its vowel (fel^en,
imper. fie^; fterben, imper. ftirb).
7. The remainder of the present indicative, the whole present subjunc-
tive and the present participle are always formed as in the weak verbs.
Rem. — The vowel-changes of the imperfect and participle cannot be
reduced to a rule, but must be learned by the appended list of strong verbs.
Vhe formulas of the vowel-changfs are these:
Present ( fnfin. ) . Imperfect. Participle.
(fd^tafen, fd)Iief, gefci)tafen,)
(tragen, tvug, getragen,)
(fe()en, fal), gefetjen,)
(fterbeu, ftarb, geftorben,)
(fed)ten, fod)t, gefod)ten,)
(fingen, fang, gefungen,)
(fliegen, flog, gcflogen,)
([d)etnen, fd)ien, gefd^ienen.)
§ 66. Irregular Yerbs of the Strong Form.
These are:
1. j c t n and tt) e r b c n , the former of which makes its tenses from
several different roots, while the latter has two different forms for the imper-
fect ind. sing., (itjnrbc and tnarb). See the paradigms page 43, 44, 45, 46.
a
t(ie)
a
a
u
a
e
a
c
e
a.
c
i
a
u
Ic
et
i(te)
t(ie)
Some few
verbs
(as tommen, bi
formulas.
2. 1 1) U It, to do, repeats the initial consonant as final letter of the im-
perfect (t^at), a relic of former reduplication. Moreover, it drops the c in the
endings of the present indicative in all persons but the first singular (t^UC,
i\)\\\t, tl)iit, Vcjxm, t()ut, tl)un).
3. ft e I) e n and (^ c I) e ll form their imperfects and participles from other
roots (iniperf. ftaub [ftuub], (]iug; part, geftanben, gcgangen). They do not
chan<::e their radical e in the present. @tel)en generally makes ftiiube in
imperf. subj.
4. Many verbs belonging to the formula c, a, take in the imperf.
subj. the softened vowels 5 or ii, instead of a (befel}fen, befal)!, subj. liefi>l)Ie;
fterben, ftarb, subj. ftiirbe).
Minor irregularities are stated in the list.
MODEL OF CONJUGATION OF STRONG VERBS.
a) Formula a, U, a with softening of the radical.
Infinitive: fci)Iagett, to strike.
Indicative,
PRESENT.
Sir>g. 1. id) fd)(agC, I strike, do strike, 1 am striking
2. bit fci)tdgft, thou strikest, etc.
3. er fi^lat^t, he strikes, etc.
riur» 1. njir jd)lat3Ctt, we strike, etc.
2. il)r fd)(at3t, you strike, etc.
3. fie fc^lagCtt, they strike, etc.
IMPERFECT.
Sing. 1. id) fd)hlf;, I struck, did strike, was striking
2. bu fd)Iligft, thou struckst, etc.
3. cr fd)(lli}, he struck, etc.
Plur. 1. tt)ir fif)lugCtt, we struck, etc.
2, il)r fd)luc^t, you struck, etc.
3, fie ft^lugCtt, they struck, etc.
Imperative. Sing. jd)IagC, strike (thou)
Plur. fd)tagt, strike (you)
Subjunctive,
td^fd)Iacje
t>\x fd)(a9cft
cr fd)Ia(ic
n?ir fd)(ac|cn
tl)r fd)taijct
fic fd)(a9cn.
\6) fd^tiige
bu fd)liigefl
er fd)Higc
tt)ir fcI)Higcit
il)r fd)lugct
fie fd)lugctt.
Pres. Participle. fd)(agCttb, striking
Past Participle. 9Cfd)IagCtt, struck.
h) Formula c, a, 0, with change of the vowel in the pres. ind.
Infinitive Present: fterbCtt, to die. "
Indicative, Subjunctive,
PRESENT.
Sing. 1. id) flerbe, I die id) ftcrbe
2. bu ftirbft, thou diest h)X ftevbcft
3. er ftirbt, he dies er fterbc
Plur. 1. njir fterbcit, we die Xoxx fterbcit
2. i^rftcrbt, you die i^r fterbct
3. ftc fterbcn, they die fte fterbeit.
— 38 -^
Indicative, Subjunctive.
IMPERFECT.
Sing. 1. \di \taxh, I died id) ftiirbc
2. bu ftarbft, thou diedst bu ftiirbcft
3. er ftarb, lie died er ftiirbe
Piur. 1. wiic ftarbcn, we died mx ftiirben
2. i()r ftarbt, you died tl)r ftiirbct
3. fie ftarbcit, they died fte ftiirbctt.
Imperative. Sing, ftirb, die (thou) Pres. Participle. fterbCtt^, dying
fterbt, die (you) Past Participle. gcftOVbCtt, died,
lY. FORMATION OF THE COMPOUND TENSES.
§ 6Y. Compound tenses are those which are formed by
means of an auxiliary as Unite (conjugated) verb, and with tho
past participle or the infinitive of the verb proper. There are
the following compound tenses in German: 1) perfect; 2) pluper-
fect; 3) first future; 4) second future, all of which have an in-
dicative and subjunctive mood; 5) and 6) the first and second
tenses of the conditional mood. Besides these, there is a per-
fect infinitive.
§ 68. As auxiliaries of the active voice are used the
present and imperfect tenses of the verbs l)aben, to have, fetn, to
be, and merben, which as an ordinary verb means to become,
but as an auxiliary has difierent meanings.
PiEM. — The present and imperfect tenses of the auxiliaries Ijabetl, feinand
iDerben are these:
Present Indicative. Present Subjunctive.
x6) Ijabe, I have id) I)abe, I have
ic^ bin, I am id) \t\, I be
id) \t)erbe, I shall (will) ic^ ruerbc, I ^hall
Imperfect Indicative. Imperfect Subjunctive.
\6) ^atte, I had id) ^dtte, I had
tc^ war, I was id) mdre, I were
id) tDurbe, * • id) itJiirbe, I should or would.
§ 69. The auxiliaries I)abeu or jein are used for the forma-
tion of the perfect and pluperfect tenses. The perfect is com-
bined of the PRESENT tense of ()abcn or fciu, and the past .participle
of the verb ])roper; the pluperfect is composed of the imper-
fect of ()abcu or fein, and the past participle of the verb proper.
* The indicative imperfect ic^ tDUrbc does not occur as auxiliary of the
active voice; but it occurs as auxiliary of the passive (see below).
— 39 —
Bem. The regular auxiliary is l()aben, which is used to form the perfect and
pluperfect tenses active of all transitive, almost all intransitive, all reflexive
and many neuter verbs. But with the auxiliary fein are formed all neuter
verbs that denote a passing either from one place or from one state to another,
as fommcn, to come; gcl)en, to go; fallen, to fall; ftcrben, to die; ertraufen,
to fall sick; berfteit, to burst. Besides these the verbs b lei b e it, to remain,
j e i tt , to he (see the paradigms), and the intransitives f o I g e n, to follow, and
b e g e g n e n, to meet, are conjugated with fein.
SYNOPSIS OF THE PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT TENSES.
a) With the auxiliary ^aben.
Perfect Infinitive, gelobt (;^u) l)aben, (to) have praised.
Indicative. Subjunctive.
PERFECT.
i(!) ^abc gelobt, I have praised id) ^aBc gelobt, I have praised.
PLUPERFECT.
xdj f)aiiC gelobt, I had praised idj ^'dttc gelobt, I had praised.
b) With the auxiliary fein.
Perfect Infinitive, gefommen (gu) fein, (to) have come.
Indicative. Subjunctive^
PERFECT.
i(^ Mn getommen, I have como id) fci gefommen, I have come.
PLUPERFECT.
id^ Wat gefommen, I had come id) toare gefommen, I had come.
§ 70. The auxiliary tDcrben occurs as auxiliary of the two
futures, and the two tenses of the conditional mood. The first
ifuture is formed by the present tense of t^crbeu and the present
infinitive of the verb proper; the second future by the present
of iDcrben, and the perfect infinitive of the verb proper.
The first conditional is formed by the imperfect subjunctive
of tDerben and the present infinitive of the verb proper; the
second conditional is formed by the imperfect subjunctive of
Herbert and the perfect infinitive of the verb proper.
SYNOPSIS OF the TWO FUTURES AND CONDmONALS.
Indicative. Subjunctive*.
FIRST FUTURE.
tc^ it)CtbC loben, I shall praise id) tuctbc loben, (that) I should praise
* The conjugation of the future indicative in some of its persons is tlie
same as that of the subjunctive; in other persons it is different from that of
the subjunctive (see the Paradigms). The subjunctive of these tenses is only
used in dependent clauses, especially such as are introduced by bag^thit).
It is always translate'd by the English potential. The conditional which is
likewise rendered by the English potential may be often substituted for it.
(See the syntax.)
40
SECOND FUTURE.
Indk'iUve, id) tDCtbC getobt ^aben, I shall have praised.
^Subjunctive, id) H>crt)C tjelobt l)abeu, (tlmt) I should have praised.
Hrat CondUionaL id) tDUrt>C fobeu, I should (would) praise.
Second Conditional. id) iDUtbC gelobt l)aben, I should (would) have praised.
Rem. — If the verb is conjugated with fein, the second future and second
conditional, of course, take perfect infinitives f.)rmed with jcttt: Second .
TURE. id) Uierbe gefonimen fein, I shall have come. Second Conditional.
\6) tDiirbc (^efommen f e i ii , I should (would) have come.
PARADIGMS.
1) ]^ abcu, to have.
Present Infinitive.
(p) ^aben,
to have.
Perfect Infinitive.
get)abt (511) ^aben, to have had.
Present Participle.
I)abciib, having.
Past Participle.
ge{)abt, hac
L
Indicative.
present.
Subjunctive,
Sinp:.
1.
id) l)abC, I have
ic^ \)<\\yt, I have (may have), etc.
2.
bu ^aft, thou hast
bu l)abcft
3.
er ^(xt, he has
er t)abe
Plur.
1.
tDir l)abctt, we have
tDir \\cihtn
2.
it)r l)abt, you have
\\)x t)abct
3.
fie l)abCll, they have
IMPERFECT.
fie t)abcu.
Sing.
1.
id) '^attC, I had
id) ^dttC, I had (would have), etc
2.
bu l)attcft, thou hadst
bu t)dttcft
3.
er l)attC, he had
er l)dttc
Plur.
1.
mir I)attcn, we had
iDir l)attc«
2.
i^r ^attct, you had
il)r {)dttct
3.
fie fatten, they had
PERFECT.
fie l^dttcit.
Sing.
1.
\&\ ^bC nP^)'i^t, I have had
id) t)abc ge^abt, I have had, etc
2.
bu ^aft gcl)abt, thou hast had
bu ^abcft gel)abt
3.
er I)at get)abt, he has ]
lad
er t)abc gebabt
Plur.
1.
tDtrl)abcn flet)abt, we
have had
iDir t)abctt ge^abt •
2.
il)r ^abt gel)abt, you have had
iftr f)abct gcl)abt
3.
fie l)abcn ge^abt, they
have had
fie t)abcu gel)abt.
PLUPERFECT.
Sing. 1. \6) l)attC gel)abt, I had had
2. "bn l)attcft gel)abt, thou hadst had
3. er t)attc gel)abt, he had had
Plur. 1. rair fatten get)abt, we had had
3. \\)X f)atttt get)abt, you had had
2. fie l)attcu gef)abt, they had had
id) l)dttC gc^abt, I had had, etc.
bu l)dttcftgel)abt
er l)dttc get)Qbt
tuir l)dtteii ge^abt
i^r f)dttct get)abt
fie fatten ge^abt
— 41 —
!
Indicative. Subjunctive.
FIRST FUTURE.
Sing, 1. \6) titcrbc* l)nben, I shall have id) njcrbc t)aben,T should
2. bu tvirft l}abeu, thon wjlt have bu tncrb c ft l)aben [have
3. er U)irb l}abcn, he will have • er tvcrbc l)aben
rinr. 1. inir mevbcii t)aben, we t^hall have mtrtnerbcn l)aben
2. it)r Uierbct ()aben, you will have ibr tverbct t)aben
3. fie raerbcit t)aben, they will have • fie tijevbcn l)aben.
SECOND FUTURE.
Sing. 1. id) irerbc c^e^abt l^abcn, I shall have had id) tnevbc (^el)abt l)aben
2. bu rairft gcl)abt l)aben, thou wilt have had bu tDcrbcft ge^abt I)aben
3. cr wirb cjebabt l)abeu, he will have had er mevbc qel)abt l)abeu
P!ur. 1. tDir merbcn gebabt l)abeu, we shall have had ton iverbctt gebabt t)aben
2. \{)x werDct gebabt t)abeu, you will have had ibr tucrbct get)abt \)(ihm
3. fie merbctt gel)abt babcu, they will have had fie iuerbcit ge{)abt ^aben.
FIRST CONDITIONAL.
Sing. 1. \6) niiirbe baben, I should have
2. 't>\x tniu'bcft brtben, thou wouldst have
3. er iDlirbC \\ixhtix, he would have
Plur. 1. \mx iDiirbclt l)abcu, we should have
2. ibr miivbct l)aben, you would have
3. fie miirbcit b^^beu, they would have.
SECOND CONDITIONAL.
Sing. 1. id) miirbc ge()abt Ijabeu, I should have had
2. bu U)urbcft gel)abt bcibeu, thou wouldst have had
3. er tDurbC gcl)abt I)aben, he would have had
Plur. 1. U)ir n?urbcn gct)nbt l)abeu, we should have had
2. il)r tpiirbct ge()abt \](x\itx{, you would have had
3. fie n)urbcii get)abt babeu, they would have had.
IMPERA.TIVE.
Sing. '\)a\)t (bu), have (thou)t
Plur. !)abt (ibr), have (you)
[l)abeu ®ie, have (you)].
2) \t\\\f to be.
Present Infinitive, (^u) feiu, to he.
Perfect Infinitive, gemefeu (ju) fcitt, to have heen.
Present Participle, feicilb (very rare), being.
Past Participle, gctuefeu, been.
* See the paradigm of iuerbeu.
t If a command is issued to a third person, the German generally uses
the subjunctive: babe er, may he have, let him have. Thus in the first
person plural: l^abeu wir, let us have.
42 —
Indicative.
Subjunctive,
Sin<?. 1. t(f) bin, I am
2. bll bift, thou art
3. cr ift, he is
Plur. 1. Wiv ftnb, we are
2. tf)r fetb, you are
3. fie finb, they are
\d} fei, I (may) be
bu jcicft
er fei
mx jeien
il)r feiet
fte feicn.
IMPERFECT.
Sing. 1. id) triar, I was
2. bu U)arft, thou wast
3. er tnar, he was
Plur. 1. n)tr trarCtt, we were
2. i{)i* tuarct (raart), you were
3, fte rtJarClt, they were
id) WixvC, I were
bu tDdrcft
cr ID arc
mx tDcirctt
i^r tvdrct
fte iDdrctt,
Sing, 1. idf) bin Qemefen, I have been
2. bubift gemejeu, thou hast been
3. er ift geujefeu, he has been
Plur. 1. unr fiub getnefen, we have been
2. il}rfeib c^eraeftu, you have been
3. fie flub gewefeu, they have been
id) fei geirefen
\>n feicft gemefeu
er fei gcivefeu
mx feicn getvefen
il)r fcict geroefeu
fie feicn geix)efen.
PLUPERFECT.
Sing. 1. id} wax getrefen, I had been \di Wdxt getnefeu
2. bu U)arft geircfen, thou hadst been bu tvdrcft gemefeu
3. er Wax gemefcu, he had been er tudrc getDefen
Plur. L Unr tuarcn gett»efen, we had been it>ir tudrcn getDefen
2. il)r Uiarct(n)art) gett)efeu, you had it)r tudrct geraefeu
been
3. fie it»arcn geuiefeu they had been fie w'dxcu geirefeu.
FIRST FUTURE.
Sing. 1. id) n^erbc fein, I shall be
2. bu iuirft feiu, thou wilt be
3. er luirb feiu, he will be
Plur. 1. trir tr>erbcn feiu, we shall be
2. i^r iuerbct feiu, you will be
3. fie UJerbCtt feiu, they will be
xdj U)erbc fein, I should be
bu merbcft fein
er iDerbc feiu
ujir merbcn fein
il)r Ujcrbct fein
fie iDerbCtt feim
— 43 —
Indicative. Subjunctive.
SECOND FUTURE.
fc;ing, 1. ic^ merbc gemefen fein, I shall id) iDerbe getuefen fein, I should have
have been been
2. bu tuirft gemefen fein, thou bu trevbcft getrefeii fcin
wilt have been
3. er h)irb getrefen fein, he will cr tr>erbc getrefcn feiu
have been
Plur. 1. njir tDcrbCtt gemefen fein, we xovc inerbcn getrefen fein
shall have been
2. il)r ttierbct getDcfen fein, you i^r txjerbct geroefen feiu
will have been
3. fie ttjerben gemefen fein, they fie n)erbett getuefen fein»
will have been
FIRST CONDITIONAL.
Sing. 1. id) njiirbc fein, I should be
2. bu tuiirbcft fein, thou wouldst be
3. er tt)iirbc fein, he would be
Plur. 1. roir tr)iirbcn fetn, we should be
2. \\)X wiirbct fein, you would be
3. fie miirbCtt fein, they would be.
SECOND CONDITIONAL.
Sing. 1. id) tt)iirbe gemefen fein, I should have been
2» bn tuUrbcft geiuefen fein, thou wouldst have been
3, er iDiirbe gemefen fein, he would have been
Plur. 1. totr miirbcn gemefen fein, we should have been
2» il)r iDiirbct geraefen fein, you would have been
3. fie iDiirbcn getnefen fein, they would have been.
IMPERATIVE.
Sing, fei (bu), be (thou)
Plur. feib (il)r), be (you)
[fein (Sic, be (you)].
3. tDcrbeti, to become.
Present Infinitive, (gn) ttJCrben, to become.
Perfect Infinitive, gettjorben (jn) fein, to have become.
Present Participle. Werbenb, becoming.
Past Participle. gen)orben, become, having become.
44
Indicative,
Subjunctive.
Sing. 1. id) iljerbC, I become
2. bll voir ft, thou becomes t
3. er luirb, he becomes
Plur. 1. mv tuerbctt, we become
2. il)r merbct, you become
3. fie IDi'l'bCn, they become
i(f) roerbC, I become
(may become)
bu mcrbcft
cr merbe
ton ttjerbcit
i^r merbct
fie inerbctt.
IMPERFECT.
Sing. 1. [^ murbc (id) tuarb), I became id) triirbe
2. bu tDUVbcft (Dii luarbft), thou becamest bu luiirbcft
3. eu raurbc {U waxh), he became cr Uiiiibe
Plur. 1. mil* ttJurbcn, we became toil' miirbcit
2. il)r ivurbct, you became il)r iviirbct
3. fie lUlirbCll, they became fie tDiirben.
Sing. 1. tc^ bin geiDOrben, I have become
2. bu bift geiDOrbeu, thou hast become
3. er ift geworbeu, lie has become
Plur. 1. mir finb gcroorbeu, we have become
2. il)r feib gen)orbeu, you have become
3. fie finb geraorbeu, they have become
xdj fei getrorben
bu feicft geui 01 ben
er fei geiuorbeu
njir feictt gemorben
il)r feiet gemorbeu
fie feicn gemorben.
PLUPERFECT.
Sing. 1. id) wax gemorben, I had become
2. bu tvarft getDorbeu, thou hadst become
3. er wav geiuorben, ho had become
Plur. 1. mx marcn geirorbeu, we had become
2. it)r marct geiDorben, you had become
3. fie marClt gemorben, they had become
id) trare gemorben
bu tDcireft gemorbeu
er marc geioorbeu
ujir tncirctt getuorbcn
il)r irdrct gemorbeu
fie iDdrCtt gemorben ♦
FIRST FUTURE.
Sing. 1. x^ iwerbc merben, I shall become
2. bu wlvU itJerben, thou wilt become
3. er inirb roerben, he will become
Plur. 1. tuir ujerbcn toerben, we shall become
2 i()r merbct raerben, you will become
3. fie Werbeil tt)erben, they will become
i^i) mcrbc merben
bu merbcft roerbeu
er werbc toerbeu
mv merbctt merben
t^r raerbet merbeu
fte roerbctt ttjerbeu.
45 —
Indicative.
SECOND FUTURE,
Sing. 1. id) njerbc gctrorben jein, I
shall have become
2. buix)irftGett)orbeniein;thou
wilt have become
3. er iDirb gemorben fein, he
will have become
Fmr. 1. mv merbCtt gcti:)orben feiu,
we shall have become
2. t^r merbct geirorben fein,
you will have become
3. fie merben genjorbeu fern,
they will have become
Subjunctive,
id) njerbc getuorben fein
bu n?erbcft gemorben fein
cr itierbc gett)orbeu fein
Move njerbeu gen)orben fein
i^r roerbct geworbcn fein
fie ttjerbeit gemorben fein.
FIRST CONDITIONAL,
Sing. 1. td^ UiiirbC UJerben, I should become
2. bu tDiirbcft irerben, thou wouldst become
3. er tuiirbc lucrben, he would become
Plur» 1. mir miirbCtt luerbcn, we should become
2. \\)X WiirbCt merben, you would become
3. fie tDiirbeit Itjerbeu, they would become.
SECOND CONDITIONAL.
Sing. 1. id) lt)iirbc gett)Ovben fein, I should have become
2. bu tDiirbcft geiuorben fein, thou wouldst have become
3. er nnirbc geraorben fein, he would have become
Plur. 1. iDir miirbCtt gemorben fein, w^e should have become
2. it)r miirbct gemorben fein, you wouhihave become
3. fie tDiirbCtt geiDorben fein, they would have become.
IMPERATIVE.
Sing, tuerbe (bu), become (thou)
Plur. n^erbet (il)r), become (you)
[tt)erben ®ie, become (you)].
4) Active Voice of the Weak Yerb.
Present Infinitive.
Perfect Infinitive.
Present Participle.
Past Participle.
(ju) loben, to praise.
C|C(obt (gu) l)aben, to have praised.
IobCtt^, praising.
gClobt, praised, having been praised.
— 46
Indicative.
Sing. 1. t(^ lobe, I praise
2. bll lobft, thou praisest
3. er lobt, he praises
riur. 1. voir tobcn, we praise
2. i!}r (obt, you praise
3 fie lobcn, they praise
Subjunctive^
tcf) lobe
bll lobeft
cr lobe
uiir loben
ibr lobet
fte lob en.
IMPERFECT.
Sing. 1. t(f| tobte, I praised tcf) lobte
2. bu lob t eft, thou praisedst bu lobtcft
3. er lobte, he praised er lobte
Plur. 1. mir lobtett, we praised n)tr (obtCtt
2. i^r lobtet, you praised t^r lobtet
3. fie lobten, they praised fie lobtett.
'tt.^
Sing. 1. t.i^ ^abe getobt, I have praised
2. bu 6aft (^etobt
3. er ^at gelobt
Phir. 1. n)ir I)abett getobt
2. it)r bcibt gelobt
3. fie ^abctt getobt
PLUPERFECT.
Sing. 1. iJ) batte gelobt*, I had praised
2. bu batteft gelobt
3. er I)atte gelobt
Plur. 1. n^ir l)atten gelobt
2. i^r l^attet gelobt
3. fie ^attett gelobt
FIRST FUTURE.
Sing. 1. id^ irerbe lobeu, I shall or will praise
2. bu trirft loben
3. er iDirb loben
Plur. 1. xo'vc n)erbett loben
2. \\)x ttjerbet loben
3. fie trerbett loben
id) l^abe gelobt
bu ^abeft gelobt
er ^abe gelobt
iDtr l^abctt gelobt
i^r ^abet gelobt
fie Ijaben gelobt.
id) ptte getobt
bu biitteft gelobt
er ^dtte gelobt
trir batten gelobt
i^r ^cittet gelobt
fie fatten gelobt.
\6) merbe loben
bu iDerbeft loben
er ttjerbe loben
irir trerbett loben
\\)x tDerbet loben
fie trerbett loben.
* Not unfrequently a pluperfect id) ^attC gelobt ge^abt is met with, td
indicate a time happening before an action, expressed by an ordinary plul
perfect.
^ 47 —
Indicative. Subjunctive.
SECOND FUTURE.
Sing. 1, id) tDcrbe gctobt l)abcn, I i(^ ttjcrbe Qctobt Ijabctt
shall or will have praised
2. bii mirft gelobt l)aben bu irerbeft (^elobt l^aben
3. er tt)trb gelobt Ijaben er raerbe gclobt \)Cihtxi
Plur. 1. it)tr iDerbett fldobt ijaben \mx racrbett gelobt baben
2. i^r merbct gelobt Ijabcn i^r merbet gelobt l^aben
3. fte merben gelobt ^abert fie njerben gelobt l^aben.
FIRST CONDITIONAL.
Sing, 1. ic^ njiirbC loben, I should or would praise, etc.
2. bii tDurbcft lobeti
3. er miirbc loben
Plur. 1. mir tDiirbeit loben
2. i^r tBurbct (oben
3. fte wurbcu loben.
SECOND CONDITIONAL.
Sing. 1. ic^ tDurbc gelobt ^aben, I should or would have praised, etc.
2. hvi miirbcft gelobt ^abcn
3. er n)urbc gelobt ^aben
Plur. 1. n^tr tt)urbctt gelobt l)aben
2. i^r tDiirbct gelobt Ijaben
3. fie tDiirbCtt gelobt ^aben.
IMPERATIVE. ;
Sing, lobe i^Vi)i praise (thou)
Plur. lobt (il)r), praise (you)
[loben @ie, praise (you)].
REMARKS ON THE CONJUGATION OF THE VERB.
§ 71. The present (sometimes also the perfect) infinitive
of all verbs may be used with the force of a noun, denoting the
action, expressed by the verb, as an abstract. Such infinitives
are of neuter gender, and are declined (in the singular only)
like nouns ending in cu (§13. Rem. 4). They must be pre-
ceded by a neuter article or pronominal adjective in the
neuter gender and correspond to the English participial
noun in ing: ba^ ?efen (Gen. be§ 8efen^), the reading; mein
^anbelit (Gen. meine^ §anbeln^), my acting; nad) meinem ^(x\vix^
l^alten, according to my opinion (supposing). Many of these
— 48 —
infinitives have assumed the meaning of common nouns: ha^
@d)reiben, the writing (a letter); ha^^ S)afein, the existence; ba^
geben, life, etc.
§ 12. Both participles are frequently used with the force
of attributive adjectives, and are then declined and generally
may be compared like ordinary adjectives with weak or strong
inflection: ber b(ii()enbe Saum, the blooming tree; eiu angie^enbe^
^uc^, an attracting book; t)orbereitenbe ®(f)rttte, preparatory
(preparing) steps; ein auffattenbere^ greignife^ a more striking
event. Past participles of transitive verbs have always passive
signification, if used attributively; they are thus more freely
used than the English past participles : nac^ get()aner 3lrbeit^
literally: after done labor (after the labor was done). But
the past participles of many verbs, conjugated with fein, may
be used attributively in an active sense: ber getpefene ^rofeffor
(literally: the been Professor), the ex-pro.fessor; ineiu t)er[tor^
bener 4Bruber, my ^died' brother (my late brother).
§ 13. The conjugation of the strong verb differs only in
the simple tenses. In all compound tenses the conjugations of
weak and strong verbs are entirely the same, aside from the
deviating form of the past participle.
V. THE PASSIVE VOICE,
§ 14. The conjugation of the passive voice consists in the
different forms of the auxiliary merben (page 45) in combina-
tion with the past participle of the verb. The verb iDerben
corresponds, in the passive voice, entirely to the Enghsh passive
auxiliary ^ to be, '
Rem. — 1. The order in which the auxiliary and the verb are placed in
the passive voice is the same in English and in German, except that in those
tenses which are formed from the compound tenses of the auxiliary (perfect, k
pluperfect, future, etc.) the past participle of the verb proper must always j
precede both the participle and the infinitive of the auxiliary. Thus in \
the German perfect passive the arrangement is '/ have praised been/ id) bin
gclobt tDorben.
2. Since tDerbcit in its compound tenses takes feilt as an auxiliary, it
follows that the verb 'have,' wherever it occurs in the English passive,must
be expressed by the German „fcin".
— 49 —
The augment of the past participle of ttJerbeit ((^CitJOrbeit) is always
iropped if iDerbeu is used as auxiliary of the passive, (id) bin getobt Iforbcn,
not: i(^ bin gelobt cjetDorben).
PARADIGM OF THE PASSIVE VOICE.
Present Infinitive, getobt (ju) ttJerbcn, to be praised.
Perfect Infinitive. ge(obt ttJorbeu (gu) jein, to have been praised.
Present Participle, getobt ttjerbenb (extremely rare), being praised.
Past Participle. getobt, praised.
Indicative.
Sing. 1. xdj trerbe getobt, I am praised
2. bu tt)irft getobt
3. er ttjirb getobt
Plur. 1. tDtr tverben getobt
2. i^r werbet getobt
3. fie iDerben gelobt
IMPERFECT.
Sing. 1. td^ njurbe getobt, I was x(i) toiirbc getobt
praised
2. bu ttjurbeft getobt
3. cr rourbe getobt
Plur. 1» mx tuurben getobt
2. itjr ttjurbet getobt
3. fie Jtiurben getobt
PERFECT. -
Sing. 1. td^ bin getobt iDorben, I have
been praised
2. bu bift getobt morben
3. er tft getobt n)orben
Plur. 1. ttiir ftub getobt ttjorben
2. i^r feib getobt morben
3. fie fmb getobt trorben
Subjunctive,
id) njerbe getobt
bu merbeft getobt
er n)erbe getobt
mx tDerben getobt
xljx njerbet getobt
fit tDerben getobt.
bu miirbeft getobt
er miirbe getobt
tt)ir toiirben getobt
il)r luiirbet getobt
fie iDiirbcn getobt.
i(^ iei getobt ttjorben
bu feift getobt ttjorben
er fel getobt tt)orben
ttjir feten getobt morben
i^r feiet gelobt morben
fie feien getobt njorben.
PLUPERFECT.
Sing. 1. i(^ njar getobt morben, I had
been praised
2. hn njarft getobt n)orben
3. er ujar get0bt njorben
Plur. 1. mir waren getobt morben
2. i^r ujaret getobt tuorben
3, fic tuaren getobt rt)orben
xdj hjdrc getobt njorbcn
hn iDdrefl getobt njorben
er ware getobt. niorben
njir miiren getobt njorben
t^r ttJiiret getobt morben
fic njcircn getobt morbcn.
— 50 —
FIRST FUTURE.
Indicative, Subjunctive.
Sing. 1. id) merbe gelobt merben, I ic^ trcrbe t3clobt njerben
shall or will be praised
2. bu roivft gefobt lucrben bu tt)crbeft ^etobt merben
3. er iuirb gelobt tuerben er merbe gelobt mcrben
Plur. 1. mv irerben gelobt luerben wiv merbcn gelobt tnerben
2, it)r tperbet gelobt ttjerben il)r tDcrbet gefobt merbeii
3. fie merben gelobt ttjerben fie merben ge(obt merben.
SECOND FUTURE.
Sing, 1. x6) h)crbc gelobt luorben fein, id) ttjerbc gctobt tt)orben fcin
I shall or will have been
praised
2. bu tDirft getobt tDorbcn fein bu tDcrbcfl gelobt morben fcln
3. er rutrb getobt tDorbeu feiu er tt)erbe getobt tnorbeu feiu
Plur. 1. tuir tuerbeu getobt iuorben feiu luir merbeu getobt luorbeu jeiu
2. ibr tt»erbet getobt ujorbcu feiu il)r tverbet getobt ujorbeu feiu
3. fie tDerben getobt tuorbeu feiu fie roerben gelobt ujorben fein.
FIRST CONDITIONAL.
Sing. 1. ic^ tviirbc getobt tuerbeu, I should or would be praised
2. bu miirbcft getobt merbeu
3. er miirbe getobt ttjerbeu
Pltir. 1. mx roiirbeu getobt ujerbeu
2. il)r UJiirbet getobt uierbeu
3. fie luiirbcu gctobt tuerbeu.
SECOND CONDITIONAL.
Sing. 1. i^ triirbe getobt Ujorbeu feiu, I should or would have been
praised
2, bu U3iirbeft getobt roorbeu fein
3, er UJiirbc gelobt u^orbeu feiu
Plur. 1. mir uiiirbeu getobt tuorbeu feiu
2. il^r uiiirbet getobt u^orbeu feiu
3. fie tuiirbeu getobt ujorbeu feiu.
IMPERATIVE,
Sing. ttJerbc (fei*) getobt, be (thou) praised
Plur. trcrbet (feib) getobt, be (yon) praised
[feiu <Bit getobt, be (you) praised.]
* The form of the imperative with fein is more frequent than that with
h)crbcn.
i
— 51 —
§ 15. The German verbs form also a passive voice by-
means of the auxiliary fein, instead of merbeu. This is the case
if the action expressed by the verb, is conceived as accom-
plished or as a state. The meaning of the English passive is
ambiguous, and it can only be decided by its connection with
the rest of the sentence whether the action at the specified time
is considered as going on or as accomplished. The present
passive in ' the house is sold' generally means that the sale has
been accomplished, w^hile the sentence ^ the neivs is believed
to be true\ means that the belief is going on. The German
passive is free from this ambiguity, since the passive with tner^
ben always means the going on of the action at the time spoken
of, while the passive with fciu represents the action as accom-
plished. Thus the present tense in „ha'^ $au^ t ft t)er!auft'^ means
that the house is sold in consequence of a former sale, while
,M^ §ciu^3 iDirb Devfauff' denotes that the house ^ is being sold'
at present.
VI. REFLEXIVE VERBS.
§ t6. Yerbs which are conjugated with reflexive pronouns
as objects (§ 20) are called reflexive verbs. Their number
is considerably larger than in English, and the German reflexive
verb must often be translated by an English neuter or passive
verb, or by means of a phrase: fic^ freucn, to rejoice; fic^
frf)dmen, to be ashamed; fid) crfcilten^ to take cold.
Rem. — Ordinary transitive verbs may in both languages become re-
flexive, if the object of the verb denotes the subject itself, as: fiiij tbbtctl, to
kiU one's self; id) tobtc mid), I kill myself; bu tobteft bid^, thou killest thy-
self; er tbbtet fid), he kills himself; unr tbbten un^, we kill ourselves; il^r
tbbtet eud), you kill yourselves (®ic tbbten fid), you kill yourself); fic tbbteit
fid), they kill themselves. But even in common transitive verbs the reflexive
pronoun is often understood in English, and the verb assumes then both a
transitive and neuter force. Such English neuter verbs must be generally
rendered by German reflexives, as: to dress (one's self), \id) auftciben, to move
(ones self), fid^ bcit)cgen.
§ 11, Many German verbs occur as reflexives only (proper
reflexives). In these the reflexive pronoun is almost always
in the accusative case (sec the Paradigm). In verbs that
may also be used with non-reflexive objects, the case of the
52
reflexive pronoun may be the dative, if the verb as such takes
its object in that case: ic^ fc^meidile ittir, I flatter myself
(|djnietd)elu being construed with the dative); bu gibft 'biv
9Jfii()e, thou takest pains (givest trouble to thyself).
^^* For reciprocal verbs see Practical Part p. 83, Obs. 4. For impersonal
reflexives see § 79, Rem. 3. For the translation of the forms with self by felbft,
see P. P. p. 83, Obs. 2.
PAEADIGM OF A PROPER REFLEXIVE VERB.
Present Infinitive, fid^ freuen, to rejoice.
Perfect Infinitive.
Present Participle.
Past Participle.
fii^ gefreut (ju) l^aben, to have rejoiced,
fid) freuenb, rejoicing.
wanting,*
Indicative. Subjunctive.
Sing. 1. iij frciie mic^, I rejoice ic^ freue mic^
2. bu freuft bid), thou rejoicest bu freueft bid)
3. er freut fid), he rejoices er freue fid^
Plur. 1. tt)ir freueu uu§, we rejoice mx frcueu uu^
2. it)r freut eud), you rejoice i^r freuet eud^
3. fie freueu fid), they rejoice fie frcueu fic^.
IMPERFECT.
Sing. 1. id) freutc mid), I rejoiced id) freute midj
2. bu freuteft bic^, thourejoicedst bu freuteft bic^
3. er freute fid), he rejoiced er freute fid)
Plur. 1. mx frcuteu uu§, we rejoiced Wix freuteu un8
2. \\)X freutet eud), you rejoiced i^r freutet eud)
3. fie freuteu fid), they rejoiced fie freuteu fid^.
Sing. 1. id^ l)abt mid) gefreut, I have
rejoiced
2. bu t)aft bid) gefreut
3. er Ijai fid) gefreut
Plur. 1. wix ^abeu \im gefreut
2. il)r ^abt cwi^ gefreut
3. fie ^abeu fid) gefreut
id) Ijobt mid) gefreut
bu l)abeft bid) gefreut
er Ijaht ftd^ gefreut
tvxx \)ahen uu^ gefreut
il)r l)abct eud) gefreut
fie ^abeu fid) gefreut.
* Reflexives cannot form passives, and since the past participle has al-
ways passive signification (unless the verb be conjugated with feiu), a past
participle of retlexive verbs cannot exist. In the past participle which is
used for forming the compound tenses the reflexive pronoun grammatically
belongs to the auxiliary, not to the participle.
— 53 —
PLUPERFECT.
Indicative, Subjunctive.
Ring. 1. id) ^atte mid) gefrcut, I had id) ^attc mid) gcfreut
rejoiced
2. bu ^attcft bid) gefreut bu ptteft bid^ gefreut
3. er l)atte fid) gefreut er t)dttc fid) gefreut
Pliir. 1. mir t)atteu uu^ gefreut mir l)dtteu uu§ gefreut
2. il)r l)attct eud) gefreut t^r ^dttet eud) gefreut
3. fte l)atten fid) gefreut fie l)dtteu fidj gefreut.
FIRST FUTURE.
Sing. 1. id^ itjcrbc mid^ frcucu, I shall id) ujcrbe mid^ frcuen
or will rejoice
2. bu trirft bid) freuen bu merbeft bid) frcuen
3. er iDirb fic^ freueu er ttjerbc fid^ freuen
Plur. 1. mir merbeu uu« freuen mir merben un§ frcuen
2. il)r merbet cud) freuen i^r merbet euc^ freuen
3. fie iperben fid) freuen fie ttjcrbcu fid) freuen.
SECOND FUTURE.
Sing. 1. id) mcrbc mic^ gefreut l^aben, id) mcrbc mid^ gefreut l^abcn
I shall or will have rejoiced
2. bu mirft bid^ gefreut l)aben hn njcrbcft bid^ gefreut baben
3. er wirb fid) gefreut t)aben er mcrbe fic^ gefreut ^aben
Plur. 1. miritjerbeu un^ gefreut l)aben xvxx merbeu uug gefreut ^abcn
2. i^r merbet eud^ gefreut l)aben il^r merbet end) gefreut l)aben
3. fie mcrbcn ftd^ gefreut l^aben fte merbcn fid) gefreut ^abcn.
First Conditional.
Sing. 1. tc^ miirbc mid^ freuen, I should or would rejoice
2. bu miirbeft bid) freuen
3. er miirbc ftd) freuen
Plur. 1. mir miirben uu^ freuen
2. i^r miirbet end) freuen
3. fie miirben fid) freuen.
Second Conditional.
Smg. 1. id^ miirbe mid^ gefreut ^abcn, I should or would have rejoiced
2. bu miirbeft bid^ gefreut l)abcn
3. er miirbe fic^ gefreut ^aben
Plur. 1. mir miirben un8 gefreut l^abcn
2. i^r miirbet end) gefreut l)aben
3. fie miirben fid) gefreut ^aben.
Imperative.
Sing, frcuc bid^, rejoice (thou)
Plur. freuet cudt), rejoice (you)
[frcuen 'Bit jid^, rejoice (you).]
— 54 -
YII. IMPERSONAL VERBS.
v^ 18. The impersonal relation of verbs is expressed both
in German and in English by the neuter singular of the personal
substantive pronoun of the third person (c^, it). But many
impersonal expressions are peculiar to the German language,
and must be rendered by personal forms in English (see
Practical Course, pp. 86, SI).
§ 19. The German impersonal passive is a general imper-
sonal form, applying to all neuter and intransitive verbs if the
agency of the action is assigned to persons* in general, without
any statement of their names or qualities, as: S^ unrb gctan^t
(literally: ^it is danced'), meaning ^people dance,' ^ there is
dancing'; e^5 toivb ty'xd gebaut (literally: ^ it is much built')^
meaning ^x>eople are building muchj' ' there is much building,'
Rem. — 1. The English equivalents that are applied to rendering this
peculiar German form are various, and depend on the idea conveyetl by the
impersonal expression. In general an active expression with some im-
personal or uncertain subject may be employed (there is, people, one, they)^
Often a phrase may be substituted with a transitive object, in which case the
passive form may be kept: (g^ Xowxht f^dt gu ^JJad)t gejpeift, a late supper was
taken. (S^ iDUrbe ftavf geinettet, bets were made freely.
2. The impersonal passive form is the only passive form of which neuter
verbs are capable, and the only one that can be applied to those active verbs
which in German require their object to be in the dative or genitive. The
English language, connecting all active verbs with the objective case, may
always use such verbs in a personal passive form, which must be rendered
by an impersonal passive, if the German verb requires any other case of the
object but the accusative: / am believed, eS ir>irb tnir gecjtaubt (not id) tuerbe
geglaubt, the verb gtauben requiring the dative); 1 am commanded, ed ttJirb mir
befo{)leu (literally: it is commanded to me); I am obeyed, e^ tDirb mir gef)or^t.
The impersonal e^ in such transitive verbs is frequently dropped, and the
dative opens the phrase: SOZir twirb gegtaiibt, mir mirb befo^tcn, mir it)irb ge^
]^orcf)t. Thus with the genitive: g§ tuirb meiner gcbad)t (meiner mirb gebad)t),
I am remembered (gebenfeu governing the genitive).
3. If a neuter verb is qualified by an adverb or a clause, a reflexive
IMPERSONAL may often be used instead of an impersonal passive to express facts
always happening under the circumstances, as: S'^ tanjifld^ l)ier gut (literally:
it dances itself well here), one dances well here, here is good dancing. ©^ ftirbt ,
fic^ Ieid)t, i»enn man ein gute-3 ©eiciffeu l^at, one dies easily if he has a good
conscience.
* It cannot be applied to those neuter or intransitive verbs the idea of
which apply to things only. Thus we cannot say: e^ mirb gebliil)t; C§ tuirb j
gc{d)ienen (of stars for instance); c^ mirb miggliicft, etc.
- 55 --
VIII. THE POTENTIAL VERBS.
§ 80. There are seven potential verbs: fonnen, mogen,
iDoKeu, follen, mitffen, burfeu and luiffen*, the conjugation of which
is irregular. (See Practical Course pp. 108. 109.)
Rem. — The potential verbs or modal auxiliaries are in several respects
treated alike:
1. They reject the ending c in the first pers. sing, ind» present.
2. The third pers. sing. ind. present is lilie the first.
3. The radical vowel of the singular ind. pres. is different from that of
the infinitive, except in jotten.
4. The radical vowel of the plural ind. present and of the whole sub-
junctive present is the same as that of the infinitive,
5. The radical vowel of the imperfect indicative is different from that of
the infinitive, except in troUen and jottcn, and also different from that of the
present, except in miiffen and follen.
6. The imperfect subjunctive has the same radical vowel as the infin-
itive, except in tviffett.
7. The imperfect conjugates weak.
8. The past participle has the weak form, taking the radical vowel of
the imperfect. But it has the strong form without augment (which gives it
the appearance of. the infinitivef ), whenever another infinitive is dependent
on it: 3d) l^abc nic^t fommen tonnen (instead of id} ^abe ntd)t fommen gc*
!onnt), / have not been able to come. Only it) iff en forms always the participle
getDugt.
9. The present and imperfect tenses of all potential verbs may be rendered
by one of the English auxiliaries of the potential mood or future tense.
But the infinitive, the participles and the compound tenses must be rendered
by English verbs different from the auxiliaries of the potential and future.
PARADIGMS.
1) tonnen, mbgcn, njollen.
Present Infinitive.
fonnen, to be able mbgen, to like tt)oUen, to intend, to be
willing
Perfect Infinitive,
gefonnt (ju) ^abcn, to gemod^t (ju) ^aben, to getuottt (;^u) ^aben, to have
have been able have liked intended, to have been
willing
* The verb iniffen belongs here in regard to its conjugation. In its
UK-aning, too, it often answers to the English potential : ©r TOugte C^ nid)t
anbev§ ^u mad)en, he could not do otherwise.
f The history of the language distinctly shows that these forms are no
infinitives, but strong forms of the participles without augment. See Grimm's
German Grammar P. IV p. 168 foil.
56
fonuenb, being able
gcfonnt (fonncn)
id) !ann, I can
bii !annft
cr fann
tt)ir fonncu
i^r !omit
lie fonnen
id) !i)nnc
ic^ tonntc, I could
id^ fonntc
Present Participle (rare),
mogeub, liking hjottenb, intending.
Past Participle*
gemod)t (mogen) getuottt (tDotten).
Present Indicative.
id) mag, I may id) triti, I will, I intend
bu magft bu miUft, thou intendest, etc.
er mag er mU, he intends, etc.
mx mogen lt)ir motleii, we will, we intend, etc.
il)r mbgt i^r mollt, you intend, etc.
fte mogeit fie iroUeii, they intend, etc.
Present Subjunctive,
id^ mogc id) tuolle.
(is conjugated regularly).
Imperfect Indicative, f
id) mod)te, I might
id) trotttc, I intended, etc,
i^ tDoUte.
Imperfect Subjunctive.
xij mod^tc
Perfect.
id) t)abc gcfonnt (tomtcn), id) ^abcgemod)t (mogen), id) \)abt gettjollt (moHcn),
I have been able
I have liked
I have intended, etc.
Pluperfect
x6) ^ttc gcfonnt (fon- id^ l)attc gemoi^t(mogen), id^ ^attc gcmoitt (moKcn),
ncn), I had been able I had liked I had intended, etc.
First Future.
x6) n)crbc fonnen, I shall id^ merbe mogen, I shall id^ merbe iDoIIen, I shall
be able like ' intend, etc.
Second Future.
id) n^erbc gcfonnt l^abcn, id^ ttjerbe gemod)t^aben, id^ lucrbc gcttjottt ^ben, I
I shall have been able I shall have liked shall have intended,
etc.
* The past participle of the potential verbs is only used to form the
compound tenses.
t The conjugation of all tenses through the different persons is regular,
except that of the present indicative.
— 5Y —
First Conditional.
id) ttJiirbe fonncn, I id) iDiirbc mogen, I id^ tonxht njottcn, I should
should be able should like intend, etc.
Second Conditional,
id) hjiirbe gefonnt ^aben, id) miirbe gemod^t l^aben, id) tuiirbe getuoltt liaben, I
1 should have been 1 should have liked should have intended.^
able etc.
Imperative,
■ ' ttjottc, (used redundantly).
2) miiffcn, biirfcn, tDtffcn.
Present Infinitive.
ntiiffeit, to be obliged biirfen, to be at liberty hjiffcn, to know, to be able.
Perfect Infinitive.
gemugt l)aben, to have geburft I)abcn, to have gettjugt l^abctt, to have
been obliged been at liberty known.
Present Participle.
iniiffenb (rare), being biirfenb ("rare j, being at UJiffcnb, knowing,
obliged liberty
Pa^t Participle,
gcmugt (miiffen) geburft (biirfen) gcttjugt.
Present Indicative,
id) mvi% I must id) barf, I may (am at id) njeig, I know
liberty)
bu mu6t bu barffl bu ujeigt
er mug er barf er tueig
unr miiffen xo\x burfcn h)tr UJtffcn
i^r miigt i^r biirft t^r hjigt
fie muffen ftc biiufen fic miffcn.
Present Subjunctive,
id) miiffc id) biirfc id) njtffc.
Imperfect Indicative,
id) mngtc, I must (was id) burf te, I was at liberty id) tDUgtc, I knew,
obliged)
Imperfect Subjunctive,
id) miigtc id) biirftc id) h)ii6te.
Perfect.
id) l^abe gemugt (miiffen), id) l^abe geburft (biirfen), id) \)(xht gcwugt, I have
I have been obliged I have been at liberty known.
68
Pluperfect
id^ ^atte gemu§t ^muffen), i^ t)atte geburft (biirfen),
I had been obliged
\6) tperbc miiffen, I shall
be obliged
id) luerbe gemu6t I)aben,
I shall have been ob-
liged
\6) UJiirbe miiffen, I
should be obliged
\6) iDiirbe gemugt l^abcn,
I should have been
obliged
I had been at liberty
First Future,
\6) ttjcrbe biirfen, I shall
be at liberty
Second t\dure,
\6) njerbe gebnrft I)aben,
I shall have been at
liberty
First Conditional.
x6) miirbe biirfen, I
should be at liberty
Second Conditional,
\6) ttJiirbe gebnrft Ijaben,
I should have been at
liberty
Imperative^
\^ l)attc gcnjngt, I had
known.
\6) hjcrbe iDiffen, I shall
know.
id^ tt>erbc Gemugt ^aben,
I shall have known.
id^ miirbc tt)iffen, I should
know.
id^ njiirbe genmgt ^aben, I
should have known*
njiffc, know.
,^** The verb follen in the present indicative singular is thus conju-
gated id) foil, bn foUft, er foH. In all other forms it is regular. It is trans-
lated by I am to, and sometimes by I shall; also by it is said that, as: er foil an»
get ommen fein, it is said that he has arrived, he is said to have arnved.
Rem, Tlie Pluperfect of the English potential mood with could have, might
have And should have is generally rendered by t)dtte fonnen, l)dtte fotlen; as:
he could (might) have praised, er ^dtte toben fonnen (notmogen); he should have
praised, er '^dtte loben foUen. But 'should have in the first person generally cor-
responds to the German conditional: / should have praised, if etc., id) tpiirbc
gelobt l^abcn, U)enn etc.
IX. COMPOUND Verbs.
§ 81. Compound verbs are either separable or insepar-
able, according as their prefixes or words which enter in com-
position with them, may or may not be separated in some of
their forms.
§ 82. Inseparable compound verbs are conjugated like
ordinary verbs, except that they refuse the augment of the past
participle. See§ 63, Rem. 3. They are compounded l)with one
of the prefixes ge, be, ent, cr, t)er, ger and miB; 2) with one of
the prepositions ^tnter iDiber, biirdf), iiber, um, unter and the ad-
— 59 —
verbs t)oIt and tDieber. But verbs compounded with burrf)^
iiber, xtui, untcr, DoK and iDteber are sometimes separable*.
§ 83. Separable compound verbs are those which are
compounded with prepositions or adverbs other than those
mentioned § 82t. These are the prepositions ab, an, auf, qu^,
bci, in (with accus., always taking the form ein), mit, nad), Dor,
ob, 511, and the adverbs 'Oa (generally taking the form bar),
fort, nieber, tr>cg, juritcf, gufammen, f)er, \}in with the compounds
of the last two (I)crab, l]eran,-I)erauf, I)irtab, ^inaiif, einl)cr, um()er,
um^in), and many other adverbs and adjectives as fern, fret,
lieb, to^, etc.
§ 84. Those words which form separable compounds with
simple verbs, are detached from their verbs in the present
and imperfect tenses and the imperative mood, and are placed
after them (generally at the end of the sentence), as anfangen:
pres. id) fange an; imperf. id) fing an; imper. fange an. The sign
^n of the infinitive is placed between the prefix and the simple
verb: anjnfamjen. The augment of the past participle is like-
wise inserted between the prefix and the verb: angefangen.
PARADIGM.
Pres. Infinitive, anfangcn (an,^iifaiigen), to begin.
Perf. Infinitive, augefaugen (;ju) ^aben, to have begun*
Pres, Participle, aufanc^cnb, beginning.
Past Participle, augefangen, begun.
Pres. Indicative, id) faili^C an, I begin
bu fcingft an, thou beginnest
er fangt an, he begins
ttitr faugen an, we begin
t^r fan(^t an, you begin
fie fangen an, they begin.
Pres. Suhj. id) fange an, bn fangeft an, etc.
Imperf, Ind. \^ fing an, bn fingft an, etc.
Imperf. Suhj. id) finge an, bn fingeft an, etc.
Perfect id) i)abe angcfangen, bn I)aft angefangen, etc.
Pluperfect. id) ^atte angcfangen, bu l)atteft angefangen, etc.
Rrst Future. id) n^erbe anfangen, bn wtrft anfangen, etc.
Second Future, \6) it)erbe angefangen ^aben, bu mirft angefangen l^aben, etc.
* Whether a compound. verb is separable or not, may always be seeu
from the lexicons.
t There are some verbs, having the appearance of compound verbs,
which seem to contradict this rule, as: (icbfofeu, luftmanbeln, offenbaren. Ihe
treatment of these few exceptional verbs must be learned from the lexicons.
— 60 —
First Conditional, \6) hjiirbc anfangen^ bu triirbcfl aitfangcn, etc.
Second Conditional, id) wiirbc aiicjefangen l^aben, bu njiirbeft angcfangcn
l)aben, etc.
Imperative. fange Oil, begin (thou); faitget an, begin (you).
Rem. — 1. If a separable compound is in a clause, requiring the transpo-
sition of the finite verb to the end of the clause (see § 106,7.10), no separation
of the prefix takes place, and the separable compound is treated like an inse-
parable compound verb, retaining however the augment, and gu as sign of the
infinitive between the prefix and the verb: ttJeitll {ha^) cr ailfangt, if (that)
he begins; tvtidjt Xvix onfangeu, which we begin.
2. Many of the particles entering into composition with verbs, are
themselves compound. If they are both separable compounds, both are se-
parated from the verb: borange^en, to precede; Pres. id) gcl^e ttoran. If the
former of the two is inseparable, the 1 itter being separable, the whole verb
is INSEPARABLE if the compouud prefix cannot be used as a word by itself:
tjerabforgen, to hand over; Pres, id) Derabfotge (since a word uerab does not
exist). But bet)orft€^en, to impend; Pres. \6) ftel)C bet) or, I impend (the word
bet)or occurring separately as an adverb). — If the former of the two prefixes
is separable, and the latter inseparable, the verb is separable, and only the
first prefix is separated: borentt)aIten, to keep away; Pres. \6) cntl)a(te t)or, I
keep away*. This last class of verbs does not admit of an augment in the
participle: id) l^abc Dorent^atten, I have kept away
3. Some verbs have the appearance of separable compounds, but are
derived from compound nouns, as frii^ftiicfeil, to breakfast (from grii^ftiicf);
lurgroeilen, to cause pastime (from ^urjlDetl); ratl)fd)tagen, to deliberate (from
9latt)fcl)tag), and many others. Such verbs can never be separated (ic^ frii^*
ftiicte, etc.).
4. Separable compounds and those verbs derived from compound nouns
(Rem. 3.) have their principal accent on the prefix (an'fangeu; bet>or'ftel)en;
rat^'fc^tageil). Inseparable compounds have their main accent on the radical
syllable of the verb: entttJei'c^en, toottbrtn'gen. Those prefixes which may
belong to an inseparable or to a separable verb (§ 82.) have the main accent
if the verb is separable, but the accent is on the radical syllable of the verb
if the latter is inseparable (iibertoin'bcu, to defeat; but ii'bergel)en, to go over).
Those exceptional inseparables which are mentioned page 59t have partly their
accent on the prefixes, partly on the verbs. Thus liebtofen and luftluanbeln
are accented on the prefix; the verb fro^todfen, to exult, is by some accented
on fro!^, by some on lo(f ; the compounds with ntig are generally, but not
always accented on the prefix (miB'braud)en, but also migbrau'd^en). This
* There are some verbs, especially those beginning with aufer and aViUx,
which never occur in those forms, which would require a separation of the
particle. Thus we may say: a\% cr auferftanb (when he arose) or tt)eld)e er
aibSerfal), (which he selected), if the clause requires a transposition of the verb,
in which no separation of the prefix takes place. But if the clause does not
admit of transposition, such verbs cannot be employed at all {not: (Si* crftanb
Quf; id) crfa^ au8; nor can we say: ^6) auferftanb, etc.).
— 61 —
class of compounds takes the augment gc in the participle if the accent is on
the prefix; if the accent is on the verb, the aupfment is dropped ((]eUeb'!oft,
geluft'tt)anbelt; ne^ol)1ocft or frol)locft'; gemtg braud)t or migbraud)!'). The
verb offeilbaren, although it has its accent always on the syllable ha, is used
both with or without the augment (offenbQrf or geoffenbart').
CHAPTER YL
PREPOSITIONS.
§ 85, Prepositions govern either the genitive, or the da-
tive, or the accusative, or both the dative or accusative.
jl: § 86. 1. The prepositions governing the genitive are:
l^alber (l)alben), for the sake of; jcnfeit, bej^ond;
ouJ3er{)a(b, outside of; ftatt (anftatt), instead of;
xnnerl)Qlb, within; ungead)tet, notwithstanding;
oberljalb, above; unireit (unfcrn), not far from;
unter^alb^ below; Dermoge, by means of;
!raft, in virtue of; tDcitjreub, during;
IdngS (entloug), along; tDcgen, on account of;
taut, according to; um— miEen, for the sake of;
niittetft (liermttte(ft), by means of; trot3, in spite of;
bieSfeit, this side of; S^^f'^^Q^f ^^ consequence of.
^^^ The prepositions ldng§ (enttattg), tro^, Sufolge are also connected
with the dative. §a(ber, jufolge (generally) and sometimes ungead)tet are
placed after their governing nouns. SBegeu mosty follows its noun.
2. With the dative are construed:
au§, out of; nad), after;
ouger, outside, except; ndd)ft (j^UUad^P), next to;
bei — (see Rem. 2) ; nebft, ) . ,, ...
binnen; within; \ammt, \ *^^''^'' '"'^'
cntgegen, against; feit, since;
gegeniiber, opposite; . toon, from, of;
gemag, in accordance with ; S^' ^^'
mit, with; JUltoiber, contrary to.
entgegcn, gegeniiber, gemdg are generally placed after their nouns.
The preposition ob, over, on account of, is now obsolete, except in poetry.
3. The prepositions requiring the accusative are:
burd), through, by; ol)ne, without;
fur, for; urn, about, around;
gcgen, iigainst; ttoiber, against.
J^^ The preposition Joilbcr, without, is now obsolete, except in some
phrases and in poetry.
4. The prepositions requiring either the dative or the accu
sative are:
an, at; ubtv, over, above;
auf, on, upon; Itntcr, under, beneath, among;
Ijintcr, behind; t)or, before;
in, in, into; gn)il(f)en, between*.
neben, beside;
Rem. — 1. The adverb bi§ is frequently connected with, and placed bo
fore prepositions expressing motion in space, or progress in time in order tc
denote the limit up to which a motion takes place, or to limit the extent o
time. Such combinations are bt^ xiad), bi6 ju, bi§ an, bi§ auf, btS in, bi§ Dor,
They are generally rendered as/ar as, till, up to or to : 33id nad) iSevtin, as fal
as Berlin; bi§ an ben gUig, up to the river; bi§ gu Sci^naditcn, (up) t<
Christmas. Before proper names of places, and in some other phrases th(
preposition connected with bi^ is often omitted: ^i^ Berlin, as far as Berlin
big l)entc, till to-day.
2. There is no general equivalent for the preposition bei in English
1) In local connections bei means 'near by' : (Sin 2)orf bet S3erlin, a village
near Berlin; bte ®rf)(acl)t bei @abott)a, the battle of (at) Sadowa. 2) Befon
names of persons bei denotes the place where these persons are or live: 5d
tvax b e i mcinem iBrnber, I was with (at the house of) my brother; t^ bleib
bei 3l)nen, I remain with you; bieS Wav @itte bei ben @ried)en, this was th(
custom among the Greeks (in their country). 3) Before nouns expressing
EVENTS it denotes their coincidence with the action, (bei fcincr 5Intnnft, <
his arrival; bet jener @e(ecjenl)eit, at that occasion), or a relation of cause
being generally rcn lered by a participial clause: 33ci bent i]Utcn (5rfotf|C bie
fer 9Dhaa§re(^e( trng ev !ein ^ebenfen, nod) tt)eiter gu gcl)cn, this me isure hein^
successful (considering the success of this measure), he did not hesitate to gQ
still farther.
3. The preposition feit denotes not only a time-point, represented as th
beginning of actions, but also a period of time not completed. In the forme
signification it corresponds to since or ever since, in the latter to for: 3d) bil
l^ier feit bent erften biefe§ 9)lonat§, I have been here since (ever since) the firs
of this month. 3c^ bin (jd)on) jcit brei 3}ionaten tjier, I have been here/a
three months.
* The meanings which are here assigned to the different preposition
are those by which they are generally translated. But often German pre
positions must be rendered by English prepositions different from those whicl
we have assigned to them in the above lists. Such idiomatic difference
must be learned by practice and the lexicons, as for instance: U n t C r 3c
manbe§ ^luc^cn fein, to be before ones eyes; an 3emanben ben!en, to think o>
somebody;* ftd) n m etma^ brel)Cn, to turn on sc^mething; t> n etiua^ abt)fln
C^cn, to depend on somethins:. ^nrd)t t) r 3emanbem, fear (/somebody; mi
Semanbem or an 3cmanben t)erf)eirat^et fein, to be married to somebody; rci(
on 2RctaUcn, rich in metals, etc., etc.
— 63 —
4. Those prepositions that i^overn two cases (No. 4) require the accu-
sative: 1) if they imply a motion towards their object; 2) if they denote the
placing of something upon an object, or the application of something to a
thing; 3) if they indicate a direction or tendency of the mind towards
something.
Examples: To No» 1 : 3d) Cje^iC in ben ©artcit, I go into (to) the garden.
3d) Wide i^ii in bic ®tabt, I send him into (to) the city, (Sv fteigt anf
b a 6 '^adj, he ascends the roof {literally: mounts upon the roof) . (Sin 5lngriff
anf ben Jyetnb, an attack upon the enemy . @ie fd)icf en ©efanbtc a n b c n
^onig, they send en voj-s to the king. @tc T^uhm ftd) 'Winter tl)re ^er^
fd)an;;unfjen jnriic!, they withdraw behind their intrenchments. — To No. 2:
3d) ftecfe ©elb i n b t e Xa^djc, I put money into my pocket, 3d) lege ha^
S8nd) anf ben Xi^d), I place the book on the table. 3d) flopfe an bie
%\)nrf I knock at the door (apply a knock to it). 3d) bane ein §au§ anf ben
$(a^, I build a house on the ground (the house being placed there), (Sr ftii^t
fid) anf mid), he leans on me (implying the placing of the body). (Sin
@d)lai3 ing ©efid)t, anf bic @d)nlter, a blow in the face, a tap on the
shoulder (applied to the face, etc.). 3d) fe^^te mid) neb en il)n, I seated
myself beside him. (Sr fe^t fid) nnter ben 53anm, he takes a seat beneath
the tree.— To No. 3: (Sv ben!t an mid), he thinks of me. ®ie fdjauten anf
b t C @tabt, they looked on the town. %n 3emanben fd^veiben, to write
to somebody, U b e r cine (^ad)t jprec^en, to speak of something,
5. if these prepositions are used in other relations, they require the
DATIVE. Thus the dative is required if the governing verb denotes rest or
being: (Sr Jt)oI)nt in ber @tabt, he lives in the city, (Sr ftel)t ^ inter
b c m §au(c, he stands behind the house. (Sr fi^t nnter b e m 53anme, he
is sitting beneath the tree. (Sr ift in g r jj c r S5crlegcnl)eit, he is in a great
embarassment. 2)er Unterfd)ieb jroijd)en biefer nnb j e n e r (Bad}t ifl
nid)t gro6, the difference (being) between this and that thing is not great.
When the governing verb expresses motiox, but the preposition does not
denote the aim of the motion, the dative, not the accusative, must be used:
(Sr ging an b e m SSatbe borbci, he passed by the wood (literally: went past
at the wood). (Sr !am nnter ber (Srbe ^ert)or, he came from below the
ground,
6. If these prepositions are used in relations of time, they require the
DATIVE in answer to the question when, but the accusative in answer to the
question how long: 35or ctntgcn ^ag en, several days ago, am {an bcm)
gmeiten 2Rai, on the second of May. But: Gr bcfud)te mid^ anf c in i g e Xage,
he visited me for several days. After bi§ they always require the accusative:
bi3 anf biefen !^ag, up to this day. Uebcr, in relations of time, requires
the accusative: Ueber Dicrge^n S^age, in a fortnight.
7. It is often difficult to determine the correct case to be employed
after these prepositions when internal relations are spoken of. All depends
here on the manner in which such relations are conceived in the German
language. This cannot be fully understood unless the different meanings of
— 64 —
the governing verbs have been made entirely clear. In such instances the
use of the correct case must be learned by practice or the lexicons.
§ 87. Prepositions can generally not be used before the in
terrogative pronoun voa^i and the neuter e5 of the personal pro-
noun of the third person. Instead of such combinations the
German language generally employs adverbs compounded with
n)0 (or iDor), for tt)a^3; and adverbs compounded with ba (or
bar), instead of e^3: SSomtt (not mit \m^*) befcf)dfti(jt i^r tni}^
with what do you occupy yourselves? — Q6) ^abe mid) b arttt
(not in c§) geirrt, I was mistaken in it.
Rem. — 1. These combinations with tt)0 and ba are used only with the
following prepositions: mtt, nebft, bet, Don, nac^, au§, ^u, burd), fiir, um,
gegen, ttJiber and all prepositions governing both the accu^tive and dative.
Instead of trecjcit with e§, we say be§rt)egen (on account of it), and instead of
iDecjen with \va^: rtte^mcgenf (for what reason) ?
2. The same adverbial combination with tro and the prepositions men-
tioned above is frequently used instead of prepositions with relative pro-
nouns, as U) r i n , instead of in meld)em, in which; tnoran, instead of an
iDeld)em, at which; n)obur(^ instead of burd) n)ctd)en (melc^e, h)eld)eg), etc.
But these combinations are inadmissible if the relative pronoun has a persoh
as antecedent.
§ 88. The dative and neuter accusative of the definite ar-
ticle is frequently contracted with some prepositions into one
word, taking the form of the letter m for the dative, and ^ for
the neuter accusative.
Thus are especially used :
am instead of an bent Dom instead of t)on bent
an§ ,, an ba^ gnm „ gu bem
tm ,, in bem bnrd)« ,, bnrd) ha^
tn« „ in t>a^ fiir§ ,, fiir ba3
auf^ ,, auf ba^ iibcrm ,, iiber bem
■ betm ,, bet bem libera ,, iiber ba§.
The dative feminine of the article is thus contracted with the prepos-
ition ju only (gnr instead of gn ber).
* Occasionally we meet with the expressions auf n)a§, bon itJaS, mit
h)a§, burc^ ma^. But these combinations are considered as faulty if the pre-
position governs the dative, and as inelegant if the preposition is connected
with the accusative.
t The spellino: be^ttjegen and ttjcgtuegen is very frequently met with; but
be^njegen and iDeSmegen are more correct.
65
CHAPTER YII.
CONJUNCTIONS.
§ 89. Conjunctions are divided into coordinating and sub-
ordinating conjunctions. Tlic coordinating conjunctions are:
unb, and beiin, for
aha, ] entircbcr ober, either or
attetn, V but iDeber nod), neither nor
fonbevn, ) ntd^t uur (blojs) foubern aud), not
bod), yet, still, but only but also.
ober, or
Rem» ©onbcrn is only used after sentences or phrases containing a ne-
gative: S^t fottt nid)t fpieten, foubern lernen, you must not play but
study. See P. C. page 72. The conjunction but, if it does not correct a
previous clause, but merely restricts it, is rendered by abet, not by fonbem:
3d) fann bir md)t I)elfen; aber mein iBruber mU e§ tl)mt/I cannot help you,
but my brother will [do it]. 5Ittetn and abev are used almost synonymously,
but aUein imparts a stronger emphasis to the sentence than abev: 2)U ntac^jl
bte§ tt)un, a n ei n erinnere bic^ beine§ 2l5crfpred)en§, you may do this, but re-
member your promise.
§ 90. The subordinating conjunctions are:
hai, that nad)bem, after
bam it, in order that nial)renb, ]
a\^, when, than, as inbem, [■ while
\o at^*, as as inbeffen, )
ha, since, as iDte, as; bi3,till
tr»et(, because jeitbem, feit, since (ever since)
ttjcnn, if, when obgteid),
^ (See P. qgp. 102).
njcnn, if, when obgteid), )
Ob, whether (if) obfd)on, \ (gee P Ql^ I
a(8 ob (mie njenn), as if obmobL etc. ) * ^^
aU ob (mie njenn), as if obmo^l, etc.
^^^' i before ^ ie....befto, the.... the
beoor, j ungeac^tet, although
Hem. — 1. Clauses introduced by subordinating conjunctions (or by rela-
tive adjectives and adverbs) are called dependent sentences or clauses. They
require the finite verb to be at the end of the clause: Sr ift gtiicflid), tt» e i t
Cr Jjufviebcn ift, he is happy, because he is contented. The sentence to which
the dependent clause is appended, is called the principal sentence.
* Here belongs the combination foit>ol)I oi^ (and^), as well. . . .as,
both. . . .and, which is mostly used to connect single words or phrasfs with
the force of coordinating conjunctions: ®ott)o^l beine, al^ and) nicine greunbe,
both your and my friends. @ott)0^l SBergangene^ a(« ^i^^i^if^ifl^^/ *^^ P^^ *s
well as the future.
— 6Q —
t. For the relation of the words roetin, Wann, al€, when, if, see Practi<
Course p. 74. For nad^bem and el}e sec P. C. p. 81. For obglei^, objd)on and th
other equivalents of although and even if, see P. C. p. 102. For the ellipsis
itJenn and ob see P. C. p. 102, Rem. 3. The conjunction ob is sometime
omitted in the combination a(§ ob, as if. In this case the verb must be in
mediately phxced after al^i (S*r fprad), aU ob er unfd)u(big tvdre, or a I
tt) arc er unfd)Ulbtg, he spoke as if he were innocent.
3. In comparative clauses as is rendered either by al^ or by U)te, th
former referring to degree and intensity, and the latter to manner: 3Bir fin
fo reid^ a ( 6 i^r, we are as rich as you. 2Bir benten \V i e il)r, we are thinkin
as you do (in the same manner as).
4. 2(I§ (not tvit) is also used after the combinations of fo with adverbs
TIME (fobalb aU, as soon as; fo oft at§, as often as; fo lange aU, as long as
In these combinations aU is frequently omitted, and fo with the adverb (
time is used with the force of a subordinating conjunction: @obaIb er nad) bi
©tabt ^uruct!c()rte, as soon as he returned to the city. ®o oft id) biti^ anfe^i
as often as I look at you.
5. The comparative conjunction al3 corresponds also to the English tha,
after comparatives (P. C, p. 12), and to the conjunction but after the negj
tive pronouns: g^temanb a t § id), nobody but I. 9fiid)t§ al§ bieg tDtrb mi
geniigeu, nothing but this will satisfy me.
6. The conjunction bag is frequently connected with certain preposition
(ftatt, auger, ol)ne) or prepositional adverbs (baburd^, bafiir, barin, baran, etc.]
bein.s: generally rendered by an English preposition followed by a participia
clause: ® t a tt b a (3 er feinen ^luftrag auSfii^rte, instead of performing hi
charge. D I) n e ha^ er e^ 311 merfeu fd)ten, without seeming to notice it
51 u fj e r b a f3 er feine ©efunb^eit Derlor, except that he lost his health (or hesidi
losing his health). 2) a b u r d^ b a fj er ftet§ feine iBcrfpred)nnnen I)ielt, b
always keeping his promises. 2)aran bafjer ^ter ift, l^abc id) nid^t gebad^i
of his being here I did not think.
7. 211^ ^g with the subjunctive imperfect or pluperfect (mostly of
modal auxiliary) is used idiomatically after adjectives or adverbs precede
by ju (too), corresponding to a mere English infinitive: 3d) Uicig bte^ 3
getDtfi^atSbagic^ ntid) irren !i)nnte, I know this too certainly to be mistaken
^r ii^ar ^jn l)artnadtlg, aU bafjer feinen $(an aufgegeben I)atte, he wa
t(^o obstinate to give up his plan. If the subjects in both clauses are different
the English sentence must be recast: 2)ie geftung tx^urbe gu l^artnddfi
t»ertf)eibigt, at § bag mv fie Ijdtten ne!)men fonnen, the fortress was to
bravely defended to be taken by us. d^ ift gU f^dt, a U b a g er nod^ bmmi
fijnnte, it is too late /or hirn to come (literally: than tluit he should come).
8. The adverbs fatt^ (in the case that), and UJOfem (provided that) a
frequently used with the force of the conjunction n)enn (if): gatt^ e§ morgi
regnen fottte, if it should rain to-morrow. Sofern er fein iBerfprcd^en Ijdlt,
(provided that) he keeps his promise.
— 6Y —
9» The English conjunction unless (except if) is either translated by rDentl
ntd)t, rtjofern nidit, auger menu, or by the circumlocution c6 [ei benn bag, or
by the subjunctive of the verb placed at the beginning of the clause, and
followed by bcttnt I shall depart to-morrow unless he should order (it) otherwise^
id) tDerbe morgeu abreifen, n? e n n er e§ nid)t anber§ bcftimmt; or c § f e i
benn, bagereS anber^ beftimmt; or c r b e ftt m in e e § benn anbev«.
10. The adverb and) in connection with preceding relative adjectives or
adverbs (ttjo, tDte, luann) or with the adverbs fo fe'^r or with fo and an adjec-
tive, is used with the force of a concessive conjunction, similar to the conjunctions
obtt)ol)l, ob{d}On, etc. (although). These combinations are rendered in different
ways:
a) %\x6) after relatives corresponds to the English combinations with
ever, soever: 2B e r e8 and) fet, whoever he (it) may be. 23 cr fid^
and) befinbe, whereever he may stay. iBa^ and) (|efd)et)en macj,
er njtrb fein SSort ^alten, whatsoever may happen, he will keep his
word.
h) %\x6) after fo fet)r (tt)ie \t\\X) corresponds to the adverb however, however
much : Sir tonnen e§ nic^t tl)un, f o (n)ie) f e I) r mir e§ a u d^ njiinjc^en,
we cannot do it however much we may desire it.
c) %Vi^ after jo with an adjective or adverb is rendered by however or
by as: @ o e I) r t i d) feine ©eftnnnngen and) fein moc^ten, man traute
i^m bennod) ntd)t, however honest might have been his sentiments, he
was nevertheless not trusted, (go grog anc!^ fein ©influg toax, er
lonnte fctne 2Sunfd)e nid)t bnrdjfeljen, great as was his influence, he
could not carry out his desires.
§ 91. If a clause introduced by a subordinating conjunc-
tion is placed before the principal sentence, the clause is
called PROTASIS (33orberfa^), and the principal sentence,
APODOSis (9^a(I}fa^). The apodosis generally has the inverted
ORDER of arrangement, in which the finite verb has the first
place before the subject of the sentence. If the protavSis be
introduced by one of the conjunctions inemi, a(^, ha, todU lt)ie,
obg(eid) (and its synonyms) and the combinations with [o
(Rem. 10), the apodosis is frequently introduced by th^ adverb
fo, which in this connection is not translated in English:
Examples: — 3)ag fid) bie§ ereignen n)iirbe, ^atte x6) Icintjft tjermntl^et,
that this would happen I had supposed long ago. SBci^renb id) anf bem !?anbe
n)ar, brannte me in §an§ in ber @tabt ab, while I was in the country,
my house in the city burned down. Senn i()r rnl)i(^ 3Ul)oren trollt, (f o)
tT) er be id) end) bie ©riinbe an^einanberfefeen, if you will listen quietly I shall
explain to you the reasons. Obn^ot)! bu 9led)t l}a% (fo) miirbcfl bn bod^
n)0^( t^un, bic^ JU magigen, although you are right, you would nevertheless
— 68 —
do well to restrain yourself. ®o fel^r bii auc^ eUen magfl, (fo) ttjcrbe i
bod) fruiter bort jein, al^ bU, however much you may hasten, I shall yet b
sooner there than you.
Rem. In periods with the combination jc .... beflo (the the), thi
clause introduced by je is the dependent clause (protasis), and that with beft
theprmcipal sentence (apodosis). Hence the former has the order of de
pendent clauses (§ 90, Rem. 1), while the latter has the inverted order : 3
raenigev i^r barttber fpre(f}t, befto beffer n? i r b e 8 fiir eud) fein, the less yoi
speak about it, the better will it be for you.
CHAPTER VIII.
ADVERBS.
§ 92. All adverbs are derived words, being forme(
from any of the other parts of speech. The most import
ant class of the adverbs is that which is derived fron
ADJECTIVES.
Rem. Adverbs are condensations of speech, representing either prepos
itional phrases, containing one of the ideas of space, time, manner, intensity
CAUSE, or whole clauses. Thus the adverb l^ier (here) denotes at this place: th<
adverb VDanil (when), at what time; tPie (how), in what manner ;\t\6)i (easily), m
an easy manner; \t\)X (very, very much), in a high degree; tuarum (why), /or wha
cause. Other adverbs denote whole clauses, as: 3^^^/ ^^ ^* ^^^^ ^^^^> befaitnt
lid), as you (v^e) knoic; l^offeitttid), it may be hoped that; iDQ^rfdjeintid) (probably)
it is probable that; fonft (else), if this is not the case, then .... Thus the adverbi
[a (yes) and netU (no) denote the affirmation or denial of the whole preceding
interrogative sentence.
*
§ 93. Adverbs derived from adjectives imply 1) the idea
of a preposition;* 2) the idea of the adjective from which thej
are derived; 3) one of the ideas of space, time, manner, in
tensity or cause. The adjectives from which adverbs are de-
rived are either ordinary or pronominal adjectives. Ordinarj
adjectives are used as adverbs in their own crude forms with
* Thus the adverbs of manner imply the preposition in (fd^bn, in
beautiful manner); adverbs of time imply the preposition at or on (^eiltc, <
this day).
— 69 —
out receiving any ending*: gr \px\(i)t pt, he speaks loell. (gte
^anbeln weife, they act ivisely. ® iefe ©d)raierig!eit ift I e i c^ t er*
U'dxtf this difficulty is easily explained.
Rem. — 1, Some adverbs add the ending U(^ (English hj) to the adjec-
tive: fd)tt)erUc^, hardly; n)al)rUcl), verily; IcDiglid), only, and several others.
Other adverbs add the word iDeifc (like the English wise in otherwrn) to the
gen. fern, of the adjective, this word being originally the fern, noun ^eijc
(manner), as: gtiicflid^emeifc, fortunately; tttcrfti)iirbtcjcrtt)etfe, peculiarly;
irtugertoeife (or HiigUc!^) prudently. A few adjectives add the ending t, as:
langC, long, a long time; fernC or ferit, far. The adjective gut forms two ad-
verbs it)ot)( and gut, both corresponding to the English well,
2. The COMPARATIVES of adjectives are used as adverbs without any
further ending, in the same manner as the positives: er lief f d) U e 11 er , he
ran more quickly, ^r tDUgte ba^ b e f j e r , he knew that better,
3. The adverbs of superlatives are differently formed for absolute super-
latives (denoting a very high degree), and relative superlatives (denoting the
highest degree among compared qualities).
The adverbs of absolute superlatives are formed:
a) Without any ending in the manner of positives. Only a few adverbial
superlatives, thus formed, are in common usage, as: freunbUd)ft,
most amicably; ^er^lid)ft, most cordially; iuuigft, most tenderly; el)r*
erbietigft, most humbly; ergebcuft, (most) respectfully; geljorjamft,
(most) obediently. Several adverbs thus formed cannot be trans-
lated literally, as: gefcilligft or giitigft,if you please; mi3gtid)ftasmuch
as possible; b eftini3g(id}ft, as well as possible; ba(bmi3giici)ft, as soon
as possible; tdugft, long ago; dufierft (l}0d}ft), exceedingly.
h) A few superlative adverbs add the ending eu^ to the superlative of
the adjective, as: befteu^ (in the best manner), fd)oufteu3 (in the
handsomest manner), fiul)eften0 (at the earliest), f^jcitfteu^ (at the
latest), tt)enigfteu§ (at least).
c) Generally the absolute superlative of adverbs is formed by the pre-
position auf with the accus. neuter of the adjective superlative: auf^
forgfdlttgfte, in the most accurate manner; auf^ foftbarfte, most ex-
pensively. Sr unterfagte bie§ aufS ftrengfte, 'he forbade this in the
most positive manner'. Very frequently the absolute superlative
adverbs are expressed by circumlocution with superlatives of degree,
and the positives of the adverbs: d U J3 e r ft ^cftig, most (extremely)
violently, ^r UJarb \)o6)\i milbc beftraft, he was punished most
leniently.
* Hence it is impossible to distinguish formally a predicative adjective
from an adverb in German, The connection alone must show whether a
word must be parsed as a predicative adjective or as an adverb. Compare:
Die3 ift I e t c^ t (this is easy), and bic« ift t C i d) t get^an (this is easily done),
©r ift iJorftd[)tig, he is. cautious, and cr ^anbelt CorflC^tig, he acts caw^iow^.
— 70 —
Adverbs of relcative superlatives are formed by am with the dative of the
adjective-superlative, the same as predicative superlatives (§ 59): (Sr Ijat
btefen ^untt am forijfdltigften bel)anbe(t, he has treated this subject mort
accurately (that is: more accurately than the other objects, or: than other persons ) .
S)ie§ 9^ec|tment \)(ii bem geinbe am Idngften tuiberftanben, this regiment ha
withstood the enemy longest (that is: longer than any other regiment). Rarely
the preposition gu is used instead of an: gum minbeftcn, at least.
§ 94. To the pronominal adjectives correspond pronom*
INAL adverbs which, accordingly, are called interrogative,
RELATIVE, DEMONSTRATIVE, INDEFINITE and NUMERAL ADVERBS.
From possessive pronouns no adverbs are formed.
To the interrogatives (mer, UJa^, tDclc^er) correspond the
following adverbs: 1) of place: n)0, where; tDol^in, whither
n)oI)er, whence; 2) of time: mann, when; 3) of manner anc
intensity: Xqk, how (in what manner or degree); 4) of cause
jparum, ipe^I)atb, tDe^megcn, why.
Rem. — 1. The adverb ttjtc is used in connection with other adverbs U
form adverbial expressions of TIME, quantity, degree and manner: Xo'xt of^
how often; ttJie fe^r, how much; Xo'xt hoWi, how soon. SStC is also used, lik<
the English how before adjectives as an adverb of intensity (it)ie (^rog, tt)i
gut, etc.). Such combinations must often be recast in English: Sin tt)i
t^eure^ $ferb ^aben @ie, how dear is the horse you have ? (literally : A hai
dear horse have you ?)
2. The adverb lr>0 forms compounds with most prepositions, having th<
force of the corresponding English preposition with the interrogative pro
noun what (tt)a«), as momtt, mobiivc^, monac^ (with what, by what, afte
what). With prepositions beginning with a vowel, tt)0 takes its old an(
original form Vrov (UJOtauf, itJOran, tt)Onu). See § 87.
§ 95. The demonstrative adverbs are mostly formed fron
the demonstrative root ha (corresponding to the demonstrative
adjective ber), and the ancient demonstrative root hi (corres
ponding to the adjective biefer). They are: 1) adverbs
place: t}icr, here (at this place); ba (bort), there (at tha
place); l)er (toward the place of the speaker); I)in (away fron
the place of the speaker), and the coml3inations ba^er or hoxtljC
(thence, from there), bal^in or bort^iit (thither), I)ierl)er an^
]^ierl)iu (hither); 2) adverbs of time: bann, then, and the com
pound bama(^, at that time; jel^t, now, at this time; 3) of manne]
and intensity: fo, so, thus; 4) of cause: barum, be^^atb, bti
WtQtWf therefore, for that reason.
— 11 —
Rem. — 1. The adverbs \)tx and ^in belong to the most frequent words
of the German language, without having any precise English equivalents.
They are used either in composition or in close connection with other words.
See "p. C. p. 99, Obs. 4:
a) In composition with adverbs they take the last place, Ijxn denoting a
direction away from the place of the speaker to or towards a place,
and ^ec a direction from another place toward that of the speaker.
Thus are used h)0^in( whither), ba^in or bort^tu (thither), fernl^in
to [into] a distance; tt3oI}er (whence), ba^er or bort^er (thence),
fertlljer (from afar). In composition with Ij'itic, however, both !^itt
and l)er denote direction toward the speaker, ^ter^er denoting hither
(not hence*), and Ijiev^in hither or thither, referring to a place near
the speaker. @r fommt b r t l)er or b a Ijer, he comes thence (from
there); er gel)t b o r t ^in or b al)in, he goes thither. But: bringc bie§
1^ i e r ^ C r , bring this hither (to me); lege baS ^ud) l^ierl)in, place the
book here (at a spot near the speaker), ^ierl^in is often used in
opposition to bort()in, the same as biefer in opposition to jener.
b) In com[)Osition with verbs l^er has generally the meaning of l^ier^er
(hither), and \)m the meaning of bortl^ill (thither), dv eilte ^er,
he hastened hither; er elite I) in, he hastened thither.
c) In composition with prepositions l)er and j^in generally take the first
place, the accent being on the preposition (l^erau, l^iuauf, fteretn,t
]^inab4 etc). In these compounds, which are generally again com-
posed with verbs, the words l)n and l^in are not distinguished in the
English translation (see the examples in P. C. p. 100), and merely
refer to the place of the speaker, or to that place to which the
speaker imagines himself transferred in his narrative. ' lie stepped
into the carriage may be rendered; er ftteg in ben SBagcn Ijerein or
l^inein. The f<3rmer translation indicates that the speaker is in the
carriage or dwells there with his mind; the latter translation in-
dicates that the speaker is, or imagines himself to be, outside of the
carriage.
If the words '^er and l^in follow the preposition with which they
are compounded, they have mostly conventional meanings. The
word ^er in this combination frequently denotes the absence of
precise direction: Qx fd)ritt e i n ^ e r , he walked along; er ging U ttt *
f) er , he walked about. The metaphorical meanings of the different
compositions of ^er and Ij'm are very different, and must be learned
from the lexicon.
* The English hence is rendered by t)on ^ter, not by I)ierl)er.
f The preposition in with the accusative takes in all compositions the
form ein. The preposition in with the dative takes the form innc, which in
the verb i^tn)ot)nen is changed into in, but in the noun (Sinnjo^ner into cin.
Both forms are inorganic.
X %b in compositions corresponds to the English ojf and often to the pre-
position oon.
2. 2)a and l^ier (like n)o) form compounds with most prepositions (see
§ 87), corresponding to an English prepu^ition with the pronoun it or the
demonstratives this and that, 2)a (before vowels bar) implies the pronoun it
or the demonstrative that; \)\tx implies the demonstrative this: 2)abur(^, hy\
that, hy it, therel/y; {)icrblird), hy this; barttt, in that, in it, therein; pterin, in this.
Both ba and i)uv, but especially the former, are frequently used as adverbs of
TIME, with the meaning then, and often serve as loose connectives to denote
the progress of the narrative: S)a fam t^m feitt iBruber entgegen, then his
brother met him.
3. To the adverbs formed from the demonstrative root hi belong the
words l^cute (old German hiutu, contracted from hiutagu, at this day), to-day;
and l^euer (old German hiuru, contracted from hiujaru, in this year), thisyear^
Here belongs also the word ^eint or Ijint, to-night (old German hinaht), which
occurs only in some local dialects. '
4. To the demonstrative berfctbe corresponds the adverb eben in its
different compositions: cbenfo, in the same manner; cbetlba (ebenbaje(bft), at
the same place; ebenbal)in, to the same place; ebenbat)cr, from the same
place; ebenfallS, likewise, ^ben is also connected with berjelbe and the other
demonstrative adjectives, making them more emphatic: eben bevfetbe, eben
biefer, eben jener, thm ber (that very man, etc.). The various idiomatic
significations of eben must be learned from the lexicon.
§ 96 » The indefinite adverbs are of very various formation,
being either ancient words, or compounds of modern origin.
They are best classified according to their connection with the
indefinite adjectives (p. 20, 21, 22).
a) To the indefinites etntger, ttielc^er and ctnjaS (§ 37.), or to the idea
represented by some and any belong the adverbs jc (jemalS), tver^
the compounds of the adverbs \vo, iDannand mc with irgenb, irgenb*
lUO*, somewhere, anywhere; irgenb JDann, at some time; irgenbunc,
in some manner, somehow, anyhow), and the adverb ttwa (or etWanJ
instead of etlDann), denoting indefiniteness in general, and corres-J
ponding to about, perhaps, 'say: (gr ift e t tt) a ad)t 3al)ve a(t, he isS
about eight years old. §abt i^r e t Ui a gcfd)fafen? did you sleep
perhaps ? 9^e()men ^\t einigc $[ unb , e t m a brei ober tjicr, takej
some pounds of. . . ., say three or four.
b) To the indefinite tein belong the negative adverbs nie, ttieutal^J
nimmer (opposed to \t), never; nirgenb; nowhere; nic^t, not; neinJ
no; !etne§roecj§, by no means; teinenfattS; in no case.
c) To jeber and aHer belong the adverbs iiberatl (aUentl)aiben), ever}!]
where; immer (aUejeit, jcbeqeit, ftet§),always, ever; jcbenfall^, at any
rate; jebe^mof; attemal, every time.
* Even the simple adverb tro is sometimes used as an indefinite adverb,!
with the meaning somewJiere.
— 73 —
d) To toiel belong the adverbs oft, often; puftg, frequently; t)iCi[maI§.
many times; fe^r/very, very much, much; ^Vi, too; 311 je^r, too much.
e) To Uienicj belong jeltett, seldom, rarely, and to mand)er the adverbs
manc^mal, bl^njeilen, jutveikn, sometimes.
PtFM. — 1. The root of the adverb jc (old German io) is found in several
indefinite adjectives and adverbs, as jeber, uie, tmmer (instead of iemer), ^t
is used especially in interrogative and conditional sentences: (gcib il)r je
bovt (tctuefen ? were you ever there ? 2Benn er J e iuieberfomtnen foEte, if he
should ever return. S5on Je or tjott je^cr denotes 'from times imrnemoriaV . 3c
has also a distributive meaning: (gr gab il)nen je t)ier 2^^ater, he gave four
dollars to each. 3e liac^bem means according as; je nac^, according to, 3e is
also used as a conjunction. See § 90.
2. The indefinite adjectives Diet, tueitt^, tnel)r are also used as adverbs*
The English adverb much (very much) is generally translated by fe^r: (Sr be*
triibt fid) f e!)r (not Uiet), he is much afflicted. S>tel is used as adverb only if
it does not refer to intensity: er gel)t t)tel fpa^terett, he walks much. The
adverb me^t with a negative often corresponds to the English longer: ^r tfl
n t d) t me ^ r @oIbat, he is no longer a soldier, ©r ^at t e i u e greunbe ni e I) r,
he has 7io longer any friends (no friends left). The adverbs gar and red)t have
a meaning sfmilar to fe^r, as: Sr tft ein gar red)tlid)er 9Jiann, he is a very
honest man; er ift red)tgefrf)eibt, he is very clever. @ar nid)t mcd^ns not at
all. The peculiar idiomatic meanings of gar must be learned from the
lexicon.
§ 9Y. The relative adverbs have no peculiar formation of
their own. The German language borrows either the interro-
gative or the demonstrative adverbs (with ba) for the purpose
of relative clauses.
Rem.— 1. As relatives of place serve the adverbs UJO, tDot)in, 'mo\)tt,
and the compounds of tt)0 with prepositions (§ 94, Rem. 2.): ber Ort*, tvo
x6) il)n fa^, the place where (at which) I saw him. S)te ®tabt, tl) l)er er
!am, the city from which (whence) he came. ©el)e, ttJO^in bu njitlft, go
where (whither) you like. 2)a« §au«, to rtl^ er ttJol)nt, the house in which
ho lives. The use of demonstrative adverbs as relatives of place is only
poetical : ber 8erg, ba^er (instead of U30l)er) er !am, the mountain from which
he came.
2. As relatives of time the German language borrows either the inter-
rogative or demonstrative adverbs of place, as: baS 3a^r, VO (or b o) bieS
gefc^al), the year in which this happened. The relative adverbs of manner
are borrowed from the interrogatives (tDie): bie W, Wie bteS gcfd)a^, ihe
manner in which this was done.
* Relative clauses, and clauses introduced by conjunctions are in
German always separated by commas.
— 74 —
3. Relative adverbs are also used in correlation to demonstratives: 3(
ftanb ha , tt) o er mic^ ermartete, I stood there where he expected me. ^d) Ijaw
kite f 0, U)ie er e^ befdjlofien l}atte, I acted so as he had determined it. I:
such connections the demonstratives are frequently omitted, and the rclativ
adverbs pass over into conjunctions: 3d) ftanb, \vo er mi(^ ermartete; ic^ l}a;
belte, tt) i e er e§ befd)Ioffen l)atte.
§ 98. Many adverbs that formerly were adjectives, ar(
now used only as adverbs, as bafb, soon, gern, ivillingly. Othe
adverbs are formed in various ways from nouns, verbs ant
prepositions. See the lexicons.
Rem. Adverbs not derived from adjectives are generally not susceptibl
of comparison. But of some adverbs that formerly were used as adjectivi
an irregular comparison has boen preserved. 33alb (soon) forms the com
paratives e'^er or frii^er (sooner) and the superlatives am efjeften, am frii^efte;
(soonest). @ern (willingly) forms the comparative tieber (more willingly
rather) and the superlative am tiebften (most willingly): 3ci} t^ue e§ gem
I do it willingly (I like to do it); id) tl)lie e§ H e b e r , 1 rather do it; id) tl)U
eS om H e b ft e n , I like most to do it. Dft (often) forms the comparativi
i)fter, ofterer (oftener) or ofter§ (with the force of a positive — rather cften)
The superlative is rare: om {hVim) ofteften, ofteften, ofterften (dftenest). In
stead of it am l)aufigftcn is generally used. It is peculiar that the compara
tives ()fter and ijfterer, and (very rarely) the superlative are also used a
adjectives.
CHAPTER IX.
THE MOST IMPORTANT SYNTACTICAL RULES*.
§ 99. The DEFINITE ARTICLE is often used in German when th
English language either uses no article at all, or an indefinite article. Thi
is especially the case 1) before abstract nouns, especially if the case couli
not be recognized without an article: 2)ie iBorfc^riften b e r 3fieIi(]ion, th
commands of religion; bie Uebet b e§ ^rieg«, the evils of war; 2) if concret
nouns are used to represent a whole genus or species, as: 2) er SD^enjd) ben!t,
@0tt letltt, man proposes and God disposes. 2)ie %\)mt fmb fterblid^, beasts
are mortal; 3) if an indefinite noun is followed by an attributive genitive
with the indefinite article: 2)er ©efanbte etne« aii^martigen §ofe§ fam einjl
in eine fleine beutfd)e ®tabt, an embassador of some foreign court came once
to a small German city.
The article is frequently not used in German, when the English languai
makes use of either the definite or indefinite article: 1) often with nou:
* Only those syntactical rules are given here, which for the beginner an
most necessary to know in order to introduce him in the reading of German
text.
— 15 —
connected by unb or obcr: (5r bcrfauftc §au8 unb ©artcti, he sold the house
and the garden; 2) often before adjectives after prepositions: (Sr auttDortetC
tnit gri3f3ter ^Vi\)tf he answered with the greatest calmness; 3) often before
predicative nouns: (Sr ift 53urcjer ber S^ereinigten etaaten, he is a citizen of
the United States.
§ 100. AGREEMENT.
1. All adjective pronouns, adjectives and participles used adjectively
must agree with their governing nouns in number, gender, and case: (Sin gc*
rdumigc§ §au§, a spacious house. 3}lit grower 5lufmer!fam!eit, with great
attention. ^otd)Ctt 9)ldnncrtt, to such men. 2)ie vgorgen ttebenbet ©(tern,
the cares of loving parents.
2. If adjectives, without a repetition of the article, are placed after their
governing nouns*, they are generally left without inflectional endings: 3)ic
iBciume, griin unb frifd), the trees, green and fresh ; but bie ^inber, b i e un*
fd^utbigClt, the children, the innocent ones.
3. Some adjectives are either altogether indeclinable, or drop occasion-
ally, or in some of their forms the inflectional endings. Altogether inde-
clinable are a) adjectives in er, formed from the names of cities, as: bcr ^|>a*
rijcr griebe, the Parisian peace, Gen. be^ ^arijCt grieben^, etc. h) S)ie ad-
jectives tauter and citet, if used in the signification mere, nothing but: CEr fprid)t
in tauter 9ldtl)fe{n, he speaks in mere riddles. 3u eitet I?uft unb ^43rad)t, in mere
gaiety and splendor, c) Numeral adjectives ending in ertei are indeclinable:
2J2it ntant^erlci iBemertungen, with several remarks. d) Adjectives
often drop their strong ending e§ in the nom. or ace. singular of the neuter
gender: (Sin neu (instead of neuc§) (3t\ti^, a new law. e) The adjectives ganj
and Ijatb, if used without an article, are used without inflectional endings
before names of countries and towns: @ot(^en (Stauben ^abe id) in gau^
3frciet ntd)t gefunben, such a faith I did not find in all Israel. §atb !^onbon
ttjiirbc ruiuirt merben, cne half of London would be ruined, f) For niebr,
biet, ftienig, see § 41, 42, 44. ff) The pronominal adjectives mand)er, tDctd)cr,
fotd}er, frequently drop their inflectionrd endings, and always before the inde-
finite article: ntan^ ein (many a), tvcidj eiu (what a), fold) ein (such a).
4. Predicative adjectives are not inflected, except if used with an article
(see p. 32.). Predicative nouns, and nouns in apposition always agree with
their subjects or governing nouns in case, and generally in numbei also,
dx tvav t)crtt)anbt mit 2Bill)eIm, bent ^rin;^en Don Oranien, he was related to
William, the prince of Orange. If the predicative noun (or the noun in ap-
position) denote a person (§ 6 ), it must take the feminine gender in agree-
ment with a feminine subject, provided the noun be capable of taking that
ending, ©ic ®efd)id)te ift bie 9iid)tcritt ber ^onige, history is the judge of
kings.
* The placing of adjectives after their governing nouns is mostly con-
fined to poetry or higher style.
— t6 —
6. If two or more subjects are connected by imb, the verb is generall|
in tbe phiral; but if all the subjects are in the singular, the verb is sometime^
found in the singuhir number, ^avi uub ^^riebrid) f i It b augefoinilien, Charlei
and Frederick have arrived. 3n feiuer ©eiPUlt \V a X 2:ob unb l^ebeu, in his
power were life and death.
6. By two or more attributive adjectives the number of their governing
noun is not affected: 2)ie beutfd)e unb fraugofifdje <Bpxad}t (not ©pradjeii), the
German and French languages.
7. If a personal or demonstrative pronoun, used substantively, is the
subject of a sentence with the verb fetlt and a noun as predicate, the pronoun
is frequently placed in the neuter singular, even if it refers to persons, or to
things of different gender and number. The verb fein agrees in this instance
in number with the predicative noun: d^ Wavtn iinfere greunbe, bie i^r
fal)et, it was our friends whom you saw. 2) a § {hlt^, bieje^) ( i n b meillC
^riiber, ihe^e are my brothers. 2) a § iDar feilte Dlcbe, that was his language,
8. Relative pronouns, and personal pronouns of the third person agree
■with their antecedents in gender and number, but not in case: 2)te ®tabt, ill
b c r roir ti?ol)iien, the city in which we live. 3)te ^ejc^k, b e n e n nnr gcl}ord)eii
muHteu, the orders which we had to obey. S)ie offentUd)C 9}?einiini] radjt ftd^
ail '^Uen, bie f i e Oerac^ten, public opinion takes revenge on all that despise it.
9. If the subject of a clause is a relative pronoun, having a personal
pronoun of the tirst or second person as antecedent, the verb of the clause
is either placed in the third person, or in the person of the pronoun. But in
the latter case the personal pronoun must be repeated after the relative: 2Ba8
fann xdj tl)un, b e r felber l)uIfto§ t ft (or b e r id) jelber l)\xi\lo^ b i ti), what can
I do who am helpless myself?
10. Possessive pronouns of the third person have a double agreement.
They agree as to the gender and number pertaining to their roots, with their
antecedents; but in respect to their endings they agree in case, gender and
number with their governing nouns. 2) t e 9JJutter fcgnet i^rcit 'B offn,
the mother blesses her son. 2) e r )Sfloi\h erl)dlt f e i u ?id)t tJOtt ber eonne, the
moon receives her light from the sun. S)ie (Bbt)ne (Ebiiarb^ tDurben Don
t!)rcm Ol)etm 9lid)arb ermovbet, the sons of Edward were murdered by
their uncle Richard.
11. English nouns preceded by the preposition of are frequently rendered
by German appositional nouns without inflectional endings. Here belong
a) names of countries and places: S)a§ ^oitigreic^ <Spanien, the kingdom of
Spain, Gen. beg ^oniQreid)§ ©panien (not^gpanien^). 2)ie <Stabt S3er(in, th
city o/ Berlin, Gen. ber Btabt Berlin, b) Names of months: 3)er SD^OUat
3uni, the month of June, Gen. beg 9Jionat§ 3uni. c) Names of families: 2)Q^
§au§ §oI)en^oIlcrn, the house of HohenzoUern, Gen. be§ §aiifeg §ol)ensolIern.
d) Expressions denoting measured, weighed and computed substances. If
these are in appo.sition to nouns expressing the units of measures and weights
or to nouns expressing quantity, they do not generally assume case-endings,
but take the sign of the plural when they do this in English: ^el)U ^tten
— n —
? C t nm a n b , ten yards of linen; fiinf 2)ut^enb 9^ (i g C I , five dozen of nails;
etlie SJienge ©otbateu, a multitude o/" soldiers. The nouns denoting the units
of measure and weight, if they are masculine and neuter, take neither case-
endings nor the sign of the plural: 3)2tt brel ^ f uub 53lei, with three ^wmfe
\ of lead, gin ^e^it g u g langeS S3rett, a board iQwfeet long.
, § 101. ABSOLUTE ADJECTIVES.
1. Adjectives used with the force of substantives are of masculine
gender if they denote persons in general; but if they refere to women they
are feminine. They are used both in the singular and plural, and may refer
to individuals or to whole classes of persons. In the singular they must be
connected with the definite or indefinite article, but may be used without
article in the plural: ©in ^rmer, a poor man. 2)ie ^ranfe, the sic-k woman.
2)ie 9^eid)en, the rich (persons). 2) e m ®d) roadmen ift feiii Bia^d aud^
(^egeben, a sting is given even to the weak. i8 e f i e g t e n foil man eine golbnc
^riid'e bauen, for the vanquished a golden bridge should be built. Of the
pronominal adjectives the demonstratives and mandjer may be used absolutely
in both numbers, in reference to persons: (Sinige, 33iete and SSenige are thus
used in the plural only; (giner, 3"ber and ^einei* only in the singular.
2 The absolute singular neuters 5(tle^ and SSa§ (instead of OTeS tt)a6,
5lllc bie) are often used idiomatically in a plural sense, referring to persons:
MeS freut fid), all rejoice. 33 a ^ t)on ben (Sintuol^nern bent ©emetjel cntgan*
gen tt> a r , tu nr b e in bte ®ctat)ercl Derfauft, all of the inhabitants that had
escaped the slaughter were sold into slavery. Often absolute adjectives in
the neuter singular refer to persons in order to indicate that either of the two
sexes is meant. §at nic!^t ein 3 e b e § t»on-euc^ (men and women) fc^on %d)Xl*
\\6)Z% erfa^ren ? Has not every one of you already experienced similar
things ?
3. Absolute adjectives are placed in the neuter singular to denote things
or QUALITIES, both in an abstract and concrete sense: 2)a§ ©r^abcnc unb 'td^
@d)one, the sublime and the beautiful. S)a§ ©roge unb Unertuartetc bc3
©C^aufptel^, the greatness of the spectacle and the fact that it was imexpected
(literally: the great and unexpected of the spectacle). SBenn tt>ir ^(eincS
mit ©rogem Uergleid}en, if we compare small with great things. 2)ie§ (bie*
je^) nimmt mid) Sunber, this takes me by surprise.
4. All absolute adjectives are inflected either strong or weak, according
to the general rules, as if nouns of respectively masculine, feminine or neuter
gender were added.
§ 102. THE THEORY OF THE CASES.*
1. The NOMINATIVE is a) the case of the subject, and of all words that
must agree with the subject; b) the case of the predicate-noun. A predicate-
* The general English equivalents of the German cases (p. 6) denote
the original ideas connected with them. They are only applied when the
relations in which the nouns stand to other parts of the sentence are con-
ceived in the same way by both languages. Wherever this conception
differs, the German cases must be expressed by other equivalents. We give
in § 102. the leading differences in the conceptions of both languages.
— 78 —
nominative is required a. by the verbs fetn, to be; ttJerben, to become; bteibeit,
to remain; fd)einen, to seem; l^eigcn, to be called, b. By the passive of those
verbs that denote the application of a name to some one (nenuen, to call,
fc^elten or fdjtm^fen, to call abusively; taufen, to give a name by baptism, to
christen). The English predicate-nominatives after the passives of other
verbs (as: to consider, elect, etc.) must, with the corresponding German verbs^be
expressed by the preposition gu or fiir: (Sr iDiirbe gum ^rdfibeuteil ern^d^It,
he was elected President, ©r tDirb f ii r e t it en @elel)rten ge^atteu, he is con-
sidered a scholar, c. The nominative is iised, as in English, with the force
of a vocative with or without the interjection o (Oh).
2. The German verbs, except those classes mentioned No. 1, are con-
strued either with cases other than the nominative, or with nouns in connection
with prepositions. The cases (without prepositions) required by verbs are the
GENITIVE, DATIVE and ACCUSATIVE, cach of which may correspond to a mere
objective in English or to a prepositional construction. It is presumed tJuit a
verb requiring the mere objective in the English language corresponds to a German verb
construed with the accusative: ^i) lobe ben (Sv"t)iiler, T praise the scholar; er
tobtet f e t n c n ^etub, he kills his enemy. The following rules are mostly
exceptions to this principle.
a) The genitive is required 1) by many reflexives, as: fid) cinCt @a(^e
ontnagcn, to usurp a thing; fid) eincr @ai^e bcbieneit, to make use
of a thing; fic^ etncr ^a^t erinnern, to remember a thing; ftd) 3c*
TnanbCt§ erbarmen, to take pity on somebody. 2) By many verbs wliich
besides an accusative of the direct object require a genitive of the
indirect object, as: 3emanbCtt eiticr ^Ci6)t be(d)ulbl(^en, to accuse
somebody of a thing; Semanbctl eitic^ S)ieufte8 enttaffen, to remove
somebody from an office. 3) The other verbs requiring a genitive are
mostly construed also with the accusative: ciltCt (eine) ©ac^e be=»
biirfen, to need a thing; einet (etnc) ^a6)Z entbe^ren, to lack a thing;
eincr (eine) ^ad^t ermdlinen, to mention a thing.
b) The verbs requiring a simple object in the dative mostly con-espond
to English verbs requiring the mere objective: 3enianbcm banfen,
to thank somebody; 3cmanbcm broken, to threaten somebody; 3e*
ntanbcm entf(iel)en, to escape somebody. Thus are construed folcjen,
to follow; ge^ord)en, to obey; l^elfen, to help; nii^en, to benefit; ent*
fagen, to renounce; lDiberftel)en, to resist; fd^meid^ctn, to flatter, and
many others. — Verbs that require two objects generally have one
object (the direct) in the accusative, and the other (the indirect)
in the dative, as: (gincm etma^ geben, to give (to) somebody
something: ©in Cm etn)a§ ertanben, to permit somebody some-
thing. This construction comprises verbs denoting the taking away
of something from somebody. After such verbs the person from whom
something is taken, is almost always placed in the dative, as:
©incm etmaS nel^men, to take something from somebody; (SinCitt
ttroa^ ftel)ten or rauben, to steal or rob something from somebody;
— 79 —
^incm etroa^ tni^klftn, to withdraw something from somebody.
Thus are construed eiltraenben, to purloin; cntrei^en, to snatch away;
ob|)fdnben, to distrain; obnotljigen, to force away, and many other
verbs exprt-ssing similar ideas.
c) The following verbs, taking two objects, require, both of them, to
be in the accusative: 1) frageit, to ask, and le^ren, to teach;*
2) those verbs which, in the passive, require a predicate-nominative
(No. 1, b, 6); ®ic namttcn il)n hen (§ro6en, they called him the
Great. Verbs of considering, selecting, etc., require the prepositions
gu or fur.
3. German Adjectives govern either the genitive (as: fd^ig, capable;
jc^utbig, guilty; t)erbdd)tig, suspected; U)iil'btg, worthy), or the dative (as:
dljItUd), similar; g(eid), equal; na^C, near; nii^(id), useful; gefd^rlid), dan-
gerous), or they are construed with prepositions (as: giitig gegen, kind to;
rcic^ an, rich in; ftotj auf, proud of; gornig iiber, angry at, etc.). Those that
j^overn the genitive mostly correspond to English adjectives construed with
of; those that govern the dative mostly answer to English adjectives con-
strued with to or for. The accusative after adjectives is used only after a few
adjectives in place of the usual genitive, as: 3d) bin il)n (feiner) Io3, I am rid
of him. 3d) bin e$ miibe, I am tired of it.
4. A NOUN, dependent on another noun, is placed either in the genitive
or connected by a preposition. f The English possessive case dependent on
nouns, is either rendered by a German genitive (which may be placed before
its noun — the latter losing its article, as in English), or by a compound noun:
Jfy brother's children, uteine^ 33ruber§ ^inbet (meine S3ruberfinber) ; my sister's
house, meiner ec^raeftei* §aug; a stone's throw, cin @teinrauvf; my night's rest,
meine 9'?ad)trul)e.
5. If the different cases neither complete the idea of a noun, nor that
of a verb or adjective, they are called adverbial cases.
a. The adverbial genitive is of very frequent occurrence, but generally
idiomatically confined to certain phrases, as: ^cd)tCt §anb, to the
right; meinC^ ^xadjtcn^f according to my opinion; ei* Wax j einC^
* gragen, however, is generally construed with an accusative of the
person and a prepositional object (iiber, nad), tDegen). ?el)ren is generally
construed with two accusatives, but the object denoting the person who is
taught, is not unfrequantly found in the dative (Lessing, Gutzkow, Immer-
mann). Tliis is always the case in the passive construction: 2Ji i V (not niirf))
mirb etmag gelcbrt, I am taught something (not id) tt>erbe etiva^ gekt)rt). In
poetry, however the accusative is sometimes found in connection with the
passive of tefjrcn, ns: 2)a8 fd)Itmmfte, njaS nn« tt)iberfdt)rt, \>a^ tvcvben wit
t»om ^ag gc(et)rt (@ott)e). Some grammarians consider tlie dative after teljren
to be faulty both in the active and in the passive.
f No noim governs a mere dative or accusative. Such constructions as
mtr ju ? i e b e (for the love of me) are elliptical, and the dative in these
is an adverbial case (see No. 5, b).
— 80 —
3 e i ct) e n $ ein ®d)mieb, he was a smith hy trade: gcl)e b c i n C 1
^ e g e , go away (literally: walk of thy ways) ; um)evnct)tetcr 2)inge,
without accomplishing anything (literally: of unperformed things )\
leic^ter 2Jcu^C, without trouble; be^ 2^ag$, by day; be$ D^ad)t$,* by
night.
b. The ADVERBIAL DATIVE occurs in two relations, 1) as possessive
dative; 2) as dative of the interested person.
a) The possessive dative takes the place of a possessive adjective or
of the genitive (possessive case) of a noun or pronoun. It is used
either in place of a possessive, or (rarely) along with it: 9)lit
ftarbeu pod tapfere ®bt)ne, two brave f-ons of mine died, ^lyrtt fanf
ha^ ^tx^, his heart failed. Sr, fecitt fctli ©liicf ;ierftort trar, he
whose happiness was destroyed. 2)er @d)lag eiitftellte &citt ^nabeii
ba§ ©efic^t, the blow disfigured the hoy's face.
h) The dative of the interested person (mostly a personal pronoun ),.
is generally redundant in English, and is used to show that the action
has an interest of some kind for the mentioned person (in the
dative): 3cf) im^m mtr eiii§ ber ©djluerter, I took out (for myself)
one of the swords. (Sr erluavb ftd) l)o{)eu ^ut)m, he acquired (for
himself) great glory. 3cl) lobe mittnein eigen §au^, I prefer my
own house (literally: I praise to myself). 3)eu!e ^Xt, U)a§ er gefac^t
^at, imagine (for yourself) what he has said. Here belong these
constructions: (S§ fd)eint itiir, it seems to me. 2)ie§ ift niit gu
grog, this is too large for me. (S§ ift Mitt, al3 ob, I feel as if
(see P. C. p 86). The dative mir (sometimes bir) is frequently used
(redundantly) to express a general interest of the speaker in another
person's act which is either commanded, advised or wished by him:
®e^e intt md)t gU tuett, do not go too far; the ntir implying that it
would be unpleasant for the speaker if the r.ddressed person should
go too far. 2)u mugt mir fobatb nic^t tt)ieberfommen, you must not
come again very soon. This dative is called the ' ethical dative'.
c. The ADVERBIAL ACCUSATIVE cxprcsscs a) the idea of space in con-
nection with adverbs of space (especially the compounds with l^in
and l)er with the prepositions auf, (xh, an, burd), iiber, untcr, see § 95),
as: l)inauf or ^erauf, up; ^inab or ^erab, down; auf unb ah, up and
down, to and fro. These adverbs are often connected with the verb,
and the accusatiye of space is made dependent on the compound
verb: (Urging ben53erg l)inauf, he went up the mountain. (Sr
ritt bie®traJ3eii l)inburd), he rode through the streets (literally:
he rode the streets through). 2Bir ful)ren b i e iS V ii cf e !)inuber, we drove
* A very peculiar expression, 92ac^t being a feminine. Probably „be3
XagS" produced this inorganic form»
— 81 —
over the bridge*. — h. The accusative of time answers to the question
^how long?\ and stands either alone, or in connection with adverbs
of time (lang, l)inburrf), uber): (S§ baucrte ^totx ajJinutcn (or
gtuei SJiiuutcu tang), it lasted two minutes, ©r t)ieU ftc^ l)ier 3tt)et
2B d) e n iibcr auf, he staid here for two weeks. ^6) arbeitete c i n e ii
2R u a t l)inburd) an bem SSerfe, I was busy with this work during
a moiithf . c. The accusative of measure, weight and value,
completes these ideas by a noun expressing the units of measure,
etc. with numerals, in answer to the questions: 'how heavy, how long,
how much': (g§ trog ctitcit (^CTiiixct (c8 tvax cinctt ©cntnet
]d)tOtx), it weighed a hundred pounds. S)er SSeg tft l)ict SJlctlCtt
iang, the road is four miles long. 2)a§ ^n6) foftet cittett ^X^aXct,
the book costs a dollar.
§ 103. THE VOICES OF THE VERB.
1. ^Equivalents of the Passive:
a) Reflexive verbs, many of which must be translated "by English
passives: S)a6 Icritt ftift Ieid)t, that is easily learned. @r ivtt fld>,
he is mistaken. §at fl^ betn §ut gefunben^has your hat been found ?
b) Any reflexive verb in connection with laffen takes a passive mean-
ing: 3)a^3 Id^t ficft tl)nn, that may be done. 2)cr geinb l^at ftcft
fc^lagCtt laffcn, the enemy has been beaten, ^r ^t fid} in ber
®tabt fel^Ctt laffcit, he has been seen in the city. These passive-"
reflexives are construed with the preposition t>Otl»like ordinary pass-
ives (No. 2.): Sr l)at ft<^ t)on feinem greunbc iiberreben
laffCtt, he has been persuaded by his friend.
c) The active infinitive, (of transitive verbs) connected with laffen, in
the meaning to cause something to he done has a passive force, and is
likewise construed with t)On or bnrc^, like ordinary passives: (5r
I'd^t etne iBriicfe Ibaucn, he causes a bridge to he huilt. dv licf^ btc
§inberniffe burd^ bie ©olbaten (t)on ben ©olbaten) ^intvt^s
rdumctt, he caused the obstacles to he removed by the soldiers.
d) The active infinitive with gn after the verb fein has a passive mean-
ing: 2)ie8 tft nid^t JJU gtaubCtt, that is not to he helieved (cannot be
belie ved)» 2)aran tft nid)t JU ^eitf en, that cannot he thought of.
* Instead of the accusative of space, the dative with the preposition gu
is often used: dx ging g n m iB e r g e l)inanf ; mx fntjren g n r S3 r ii cf c ^tn=
iibev. The accusative may also be replaced by the preposition contained in
the adverb, placed before the noun in the proper case: Urging auf ben53erg;
ritt burd) bie ©trapen; Wix fubren iiber bie ^riicfe. These 'difterent methods
produce a slight ditference in the sense which generally cannot be expressed
in English.
t The accusative of time is also used in answer to the question * when ?'
But this a'^cusative is found only in a few phrases, and instead of it the re-
gidar form with prepositions (an or in) is mostly used. * When did he arrive ?'
^ m bvitten ^dxx (or b e n bvitten ^axp, (on) the third of March. 3d) fa^
x\}n ben nad^ften (more usually am nad)ften) 2^ag, I saw him next day.
— 82 —
e) The indefinite substantive pronoun man (§ 22.) is very frequently
an equivalent of the passive voice, if the doers of the action
are indefinite persons, or if it is not convenient to mention them :
^lan badjtc baran, bicje 2JJa§rcgeIn an^uue^men, it was considered to
adopt these measures. Wtan mugte ben ^(an aufgeben, the plan
had to be given up. Wtaii iiber^dufte it)n niit ^oramrfen, he was
overwhelmed with reproaches.
For the double form of the passive with jein and tnerben see P. C. 74:. TY.
2. Personal and Impersonal Passives:
a) Only verbs governing an accusative as direct object form a complete
passive voice, by changing the accusative into the nominative as
passive subject. The active subject in the passive construction is
introduced by the preposition Don (by), sometimes by burd) (b) ) : 2)er
I^el^rer lobt ben ®d)uler, the teacher praises the pupil. Passive ; 2)er
©djiiler Wivb u o n bent l^e^rer getobt, the pupil is praised by the
teacher. Verbs, governing the accusative as diitct object are called
TRANSITIVE, and the passive voice formed from these is called the
PERSONAL PASSIVE (having the transitive accusative as a subject).
The existence of a personal passive is a certain evidence of the
active verb being transitive, and of its governing the accusative.
b) Verbs not transitive form an impersonal passive, if their idea ad-
mits of a person as subject. The impersonal passive exicts only in
the infinitive (the governing verb taking the impersonal form), and
in the third person singular of all tenses. In its complete form it
is introduced by e§ (it), which is left out if it does not begin the
sentence. It is translated in various ways: Q^ tOUt^C iiber biefc
Semevhmg gcladjt (or: iiber biefe S3emcrfung iDurbe getad)t), this
remark was laughed at. §tcr barf ntd)t g c r a n d) t in e r b e n ,
smoking is not allowed here. ^^ mxb lun ^ntmort (^Cbctcit (or:
Um 5lntn3ort n^irb gebeten), an answer is requested. 6§ ift btg gum
^benb gcf dmipft tt>orl>C1t, the battle lasted till evening. (S. § 79.)
c) Verbs governing the genitive or dative form an impersonal passive
only, in w hich the genitive or dative object remains unchanged,
and generally is placed at the beginning of the passive phrase
(without e§). Such impersonals may generally be translated by
English ordinary passives: gS tvarb meiner Itic^t rael)r bcbutft
(or meiner Waxh nid)t melir beburft), I was no longer needed. @§
tDurbe t^m nid)t geglaubt (i^m n)urbenid)t geglanbt), he was not
believed. S)cm gerbl)errn tt)Ur&C gcfd)meid)e(t, the general was
flattered, ^eittcitt greunbc tann nid)t ^e^olfen wcx^cn, your
friend can not be helped.
d) Neuter and intransitive verbs often take a reflexive form with the
force of an impersonal passive (with or without laff en see No. 1):
(5§ ftirbt (14) \djXr)tX mit bofem C^ettJtffen, people die hard with a
bad conscience. g§ qcl)i fi^ f)ier gut, here is good walking. §ter
— 83 -
lagt fi^ nur mit 2)^ut)e fprcd^cn, it is difficult to speak here (one
can speak here only with trouble).
§ 104. TENSES, INFINITIVES, PARTICIPLES.
1. The PRESENT tense has sometimes the force of a future, of a command
or of the English present perfect: iBann fommft bit 5Urucf, when are you
going to return ? '^\t @d)tt)ebeu riicfen moreen in bie geftuug, the Swedes will
enter tlie fortress to-morrow. 3l)V fctltueigt, bi^ man eil(^ ft:acjt, he silent till
you are asked. 2)u bleibft I)ier, you miost remain. 3d) uiarte fd^ou lange Ijier,
I have waited here for a long time.
2. In lively narration the present is often used with the force of an
imperfect, and the perfect with the force of a pluperfect. 51I§ bie§ gejc^a^,
ftiirjt er au^ feinem iBerftecf \)tx\)ox, unb I) at feiuen ©egner balb iiber =
iudltig t, when this happened, he rushed from his lurking place, and had
soon overpowered his antagonist.
3. The IMPERFECT is, like the English past, the proper tense of the
narrative. But in stating detached facts belonging to the past, the perfect
is oftcner used than the imperfect: 3lm Dergangenen greitag ^ at ber ©enat
bie ^crat^imgen iiber "ta^ giuau^geje^ beenbigt (or bcenbigte ber @enat), last
Friday the Somite finished the deliberations on the finance-law. ,
4. The PERFECT, aside from having the force of the English past tense
is employed, like the English present perfect, to indicate past events the
results or effects of which exist at the time of the speaker: ^avl 9iitter I) at
burd) jeiue @eograpl)ic t?ou %\kn bie 3Bif}enfd)aft ber (Erbfuube gaii^lid^ iim>
geftaltet, tJharles Ritter,by his Geography of Asia, has entirely revolutionized
geographical science. 2)er 2)cgen I) a t htn ^aifer arm g e m a d) t , the
sword has impoverished the emperor.
5. The FUTURE (first and second) is often used of probable events, re-
ferring to the present or past time: ^r tt)tr b knten, ha^ bu md)t I)aff !om*
men tDOden, he probably thinks that you did not wish to come. S)em ^ater
tuirb (fd)on) bafiir gejorgt l)aben, your father has probably taken care for that.
6. The INFINITIVE of any verb, in connection with the neuter article, is
used with the force of a noun, corresponding to English substantives or
participials in ing: S)a^ @d)reten linb Xoben ber 9)?enge, the shouts (shouting)
and raging(s) of the multitude. Such infinitives have no plurals, but are de-
clined '(strong) in all cases of the singular.
7. The SUBJECT-INFINITIVE is used either with or without the preposi-
tion jii: (Seine 9?eigungen beficgen ift fd^mer (or feine 9leigungen ;ju bcficgen ijl
fd)n)er, or e§ ift fd)mer feinc DfJeigungen gn beftegen), it is difficult to conquer
one's inclinations.
8. The OBJECT-INFINITIVE^ IS generally preceded by the preposition ^w,
and is used after verbs, adjectives or nouns, frequently with the force of the
English participial in ing with or without prepositions, and of other forms of
expression: 3Sir fangen an, ben ^^(a^ ^ n r d n m e n , we commence to evacu-
ate the place. 3Bir f ntjren fort j u j )) i e I e n , we continued playing. (5r luar
unfdt)ig gu Jpredjen, he was unable to speak. 2)ie ®emoI)nl)eit gufammen
— 84 —
3 u f c t n , the habit of being together. 2)cr getnb Der^lnbcrtc un§, xotxitt
t) r ,^ It r il cf e U , the enemy prevented us from advancing any farther. ^6)
glaubte, i(}n ^u toerftet)en, I believed I understood him. Sr tDiijjte fid)
au§ ber iBerlegenl)eit g u g i e 1} e n, he knew how to extricate himself from the
dilemma.
9. Pf-esent infinitives of the active voice with gu, in connection with
the verb fein, have a passive meaning, generally with the idea of possibility:
S)ic}e SKeinung i ft !aum gu t)ertl)etbiflen, this opinion can hardly he
defended (is hardly defensible). 2)aran it) a V md)t gU bcitfeu, this was
not to he thought of.
10. Infinitives with gu after the preposition um denote purpose, being
rendered in order to: (5r ih,at bte^, 11 tU m tr gU fd^aben, he did this in order to
hurt me.
11. The OBJECT-INFINITIVE IS uscd without gu a) after the modal auxil-
iaries including laffeu: (Sr barf nid)t in bie ®tabt ! o m m e n , he is not
allowed to come to the city: 3t)v itjerbet euren ^or(a^ nid)t burd)fiil}ren
fonnen, you will not be able to carry out your purpose. (S§ maq f ein, tVXt
iljX jagt, it may he as you say; b) after the verbs ^oren, fe^eu, f listen, fiuben,
lerneiT, lel)rcu, l)eif3eib gel}en, fa^ren, Meiben, l)aben, ^elfcn, mad)en: 3c^ Ijbrc
il)n ! m m e n , I hear him come, 3Sir fa^en bcii Xxupp f i d) langfam
n d ^ e rn , we saw the troop slowly approaching. 5)ie 9^ot^ le^rtc i^n a r b e t*
ten, necessity taught him to i^^orZ:. @et)t fd^tafeu! Go to bed (literally:
to sleep. See P. C. p. 91.). c) The participle in the compound tenses of the
modal auxiliaries and of the verbs laffeii, Ijetgen, mad)en, fe^en> l)elfen,
prcn takes in these constructions the form of the present infinitive: ©r l)at
nid)t totnmcu tv o U c u (instead of geiX)oIIt),he has not wished (did not wish)
to come. 3l)r t)dttct frai)er auf^oren f o H e n (instead of gefoEt), you ought to
have stopped sooner. 3c^ I)C4be \\)\\ fpre(^en p r e n (instead of ge^ort), I have
heard him talk. See § 80, 9.
12. Those English verbs which require a substantive object along with
an infinitive, generally admit a similar construction in German, as: ©r befall
nttr gu fommen, he ordered me to come. (gr gtnangben geinb, bic
SBaffeu gu ft V ed en , he compelled the enemy to lay down their arms. 2Bir
Ijorten 3 e m a n b ( )) r e d) e n , we heard somebody talk. — But the verbs of
WISHING, EXPECTING, BELIEVING, DECLARING, CONSIDERING do not admit this
construction in German, generally requiring a clause with bag: (El* tDiinfd)tC,
\ia% xoxx in ber ®tabt bleiben mbd)ten (not: er n)unfd)te un« in ber @tabt
gn bleiben), he wished us to stay in the city. 3Bir glaubtcn, b a 6 crunfercr
2)^einnng f e t , we believed him to be of our opinion.
13. Instead of construing the passives of these verbs (of wishing, etc.)
with infinitives, the German language generally employs an impersonal con-
struction followed by bag: He ivas believed to be in danger, c § njurbe gegtaubt
(man glanbte), bag cr in @efal)r f ei.
14. The English infinitives employed in indirect statements after in-
terrogative adverbs or. pronouns, .and after so as, must be rendered by com-
— 85 —
plete sentences, so as, being translated by fo ha^: I was doubtful what to do,
3d) tuar in ^mijel, m a § gu tt)un f e i. — We were so near the battery as to be
exposed to the guns, tt)tr waxcn bcr ^atterie f o no^e, t>a^ wiv ben ^anoneu
au^g e| et^t iraren.
15. German participles are used in the following instances:
a) With the force of adjectives, as: 3lnjiel)enbe Srjal^Iunc^cn,
interesting tales, ^lad^ UoHbrad)ter Arbeit, after the labor had been
accomplished (literally: after the accomplished labor). Here belongs the
present participle preceded by gu, which is often called the future participle
OF THE PASSIVE, and is rendered either by a passive infinitive, or by a relative
clause with a passive verb: (Sine fpciter ^n beantujortcnbe gracje, a
question to be answered at a later time. 2)ie(e ni^t JU nberfef)enbe il^aU
\(XdjC, this fact which ought not to be overlooked. All these participles must be
inflected like attributive adjectives,
b) Participles are used (without inflection) if an action is represented
as ACCOMPANYING the action expressed by the main verb, or as being closely
connected with it, as: (gr ging fort, bie SBorte beS ilJJanneg iibcrbenlenb,
he went away reflecting on the words of the man. But it is inadmissible thus
to employ the participles of any auxiliary (modal or other). English parti-
cipial constructions of this kind are generally changed into complete sen-
tences: Having spoken thus he went away, nad)benierfogef!|)ro(^cn l^atte,
ging er l)inmeg (not; jo gefprod)en it)abenb). English expressions with the
auxiliary participle '^ew^', and many of those with 'having' that correspond to
German verbs conjugated with fein (§ 69), may be generally rendered by the
past participle of the main verb, as: 5Bon biefem 35ort)aben nnterric^tct,
riiftete evfid) anf ben ^ampb ^^^^^ informed of this design, he prepared for the
conflict. — 3n ber (£tabt angefommen, ertunbigte id^ mid) jogleid^ nad)
t!^m, having arrived at the city, I immediately inquired for him.
c) Past participles are used to complete the verb fommcn with the
force of English present participles, and verbs of receiving with the force of
a noun in apposition: ^r !am g el a n f e n (geritten, etc.), he came running
(riding, etc.). 3ci) l)abe cS gefd)en!t betommen (er^arten), I received it
as apresent. Sometimes past participles (even in connection with reflexive
pronouns) are used with the force of imperatives: 3(ufgcpaJ3t ! pay attention !
')Sl\XX \ i d) brat) g e it) e ^ r t , only defend yourselves bravely !
16. Aside from these instances, English participial constructions can
generally not be expressed by means of German participles. The most usual
German equivalents of English participial expressions are: a) infinitives,
either in the form of substantives (No. 6), or preceded by gu; b) complete
CLAUSES introduced by bag, inben!,ba, nad)bem; c) finite verbs connected
with the preceding sentence by means of the conjunction unb.
Clauses with bag, and infinitives with gu are mostly used to render those
participial constructions in which a participle in ing is preceded by a prepos-
ition. In these constructions the English preposition is regularly expressed
by a prepositional adverb compounded with ba (§ 95, 2): By giving this advice.
b ab ur d^ , b cr g cr (man, xd^, etc.) btefen fftatlf gab (gtebt, etc.) [literally: 5y
this that he gave]. Be insisted vpon seeing him, er beftanb barauf i^n gll
fe^en (literally: wjoon ^Ais to see him).
Examples: By ieacldng others^ we instruct ourselves, burci) hd^ ?ei}ren
5(nbrer untcrridjten wir m\^ felbft (or b a b u r d) , b a \\ tuir 5lubere Iet)i-en, or
illbem tDir "^nbere Iet)ren). — 1 exjjoctcd no reward /or c?e//i'm;?^ iiim from
this condition, id) cnuartcte leinen Jo^n b a f ii r , \io.^ id) i()u au§ biefer ?age
rettete (or gerettct ^attc, or rctten tuiirbe, according to the connection) — I oc-
cupied myself ?r?<A reflecting on the inconstancy of fortune, id) bcjd^dftigte r[\\6)
b a m i t , iiber bie Uubcftdubigfeit be§ ©liid^ nad)3uben!en (or m i t
yiad)bcu!en iibcr etc.). — • I did not think of his being ahsent, id) ha6){t
iud)t b a r a n , b a 6 er abmcfcnb f e t. — After delivering my message, I returned,
tiad^bem id) meinc ^otfd)aft abgcftattet I)atte, te^rtc id) juriicf. —
Their conversation turning up(m my favorite theme, I soon pirtook in the
debates, ti a tt)rc Unteu!)attiing mein lHebIing§tt)ema betraf, nal)m id) batb
%\)t\\ an ben 5>erl)anbhntgen. — I could not lend him those books, needing
them for my own use, id) fonnte it)m biefe iBiid^er nid)t leil)en, "ba ( i nb em )
id) tl)rer gnm eigenen @ebraud)e bebnrfte. — Knowing that I would have
your assistance, I engnged in the work, \i a id) muOte,* 'bCi^ id) 3l)ven
S3eiftanb l)aben triirbe, ubernat)m id) bie 2(rbeit. — I told him all this, adding
that he w<is expected by you, \6) fagte i^m ba§ 2lUe§, n n b f ii g t e ^ i n 3 n ,
\ia^ cr Don bit crmartet n^erbe.
§ 105. THE SUBJUNCTIVE AND CONDITIONAL.
The German subjunctive corresponds either to the English indicative,
potential or imperative; rarely to the English subjunctive.
1» The srBJUNCTiVE of the present is used in independent sentences
conveying commands or requests: 2)er iJ3ote trcte ein ! letthQ messenger
enter. iS§ (ebe ber ^bnig, (long) live the king ! ^^ e V t r a n e n luir, raaS \mx
bieje 9^ad)t gefel)en, bem jungen §am(et, let us impart what we have seen to-
night unto young Hamlet. This form is always used with the force of an
imperative if the third person is used for direct addiess: ©ein^Sie Uor|'id)tig,
be cautious, ^ei (Sr !ein ^^or, be no fool. Instead of this subjunctive, cir-
cumlocutions with the imperative lagt, (plnr. la^t, iaffen ^ie), or with the
present indicative of mogen or irotlen are often employed: 2)loge er unfer gc*
benfcn, may he remember us ! (Sr mag cintreten, let him enter. 2a^t un§ fo*
* It would be grammatically correct to render this sentence and the
next by literally employing German participles of the present: ,,2Biffenb, bajj
id) etc.", and ^^ingufiigeub ha^ er etc.". But in clauses denoting cause, and
if the English participle h:;s the force of a mere coordination, the German
language generally prefers complete sentences introduced by conjunctions.
This is esp'jcidiy the case when the English participle is connected with
complicite<i ndjimcts. Piirticipial constructions are inadmissilile in German,
when the English participle has a subject different from that of the principal
sentence, or when it is introduced by a preposition. See the examples.
t The use of la^ or lagt is only admissible in direct address.
I
— 8Y —
gtetd) anfangcit, let us begin directly. SBix rt)ot(cn unS entfcrnen, let us
withdraw.
2. The subjunctive imperfect or pluperfect is used in exclamatory sen-
tences expressing a wish of the speaker, not corresponding to reality. Such
sentences have the inverted order (see § 106, 9.), and maybe introduced by
the interjection O ! The verb is frequently followed by the particle bod).
Such sentences are also introduced by the conjunction bafi^or £) ha^, in which
case the verb stands at the end: (O) 3Sdre bod) beiit ^rubcr !^ier, would that
your brother were here ! O baJ3 id) t^n uie gefe^en ptte, would that I had
never seen him !
3. The subjunctive of all tenses is employed in indirect statements to
represent an action as conceived, asserted, asked, commanded or wished, by
a person introduced in the text by the author (or speaker). The author may
thus introduce himself (id)) or a person addressed (S)U, @ie)*: (Sr gtaubtc,
* The subjunctive of indirect statement is regularly used when *he verb
of the principal sentence is in the imperfect or pluperfect. If in this
instance the verb of the stated clause is in the future, the indicative can
never be used. If the principal verb is in the present or future, the sub-
junctive must likewise be used if the statement is against reality or doubt-
ful: Sr tDdl)nt, bajj id) 511 §au|e f e t, lie falsely supposes, thjit lam at home.
(Sr bel)auptet, ha^ feiu ^ruber mid) ntd)t leune, he maintains, that his
brother does not know me (if he really knows the speaker). Else, in indirect
statements dependent on verbs in the present or future, the in licative is
generally prefen-ed to the subjunctive. In regard to the use of the sub-
junctive of indirect statement the following specialities should be noticed:
1. The most usual words which may govern a clause of indirect state-
ment are these: a) Verbs of conceiving: beufeii, glauben, iud^nen, t)ermut^en,
;^tt)eifetn, I)offen, ertvarten, fiird)ten, e^ fd)eint mir, fommt mic tjor, and the
nouns ©ebaufc, 3Bal)U, ©laube, 5lbrid)t, etc. b) Verbs of saying and asserting:
fagen, bemcrfeu, bel)aui)tcn, ertldren, t)erfirf)crn, antmorten, fd)rciben, benac^nd)=
tigeu, and the corresponding nouns 53emev!ling, (Srfldrimg, etc. c) Verbs ex-
pressing or implying a question: frageu, fid) ei'tuubigen, nac^forfd)en, gmeifetn,
nid)t ruiffen (with ob), and the nouns J^rage, 3meifel, etc. d) Verbs of
commanding: tjevlaugeiT, fovberu, befet)Ien, Uerovbnen, and the nouns ^cfet)(,
Sluftrag, e*-,c. e) Verbs of wishing: XQXi\\\6)t\\, bitten, trollcn, with the nouns
Sunfc^, iBittc, etc.
2. If the indirect statement is conceived as a question, it is introduced
by ob (whether) or by interrogative pronouns and adverbs. Other indirect
statements are introduced by bag*
3. Sentences dependent on the clause introduced by bag, ob or inter-
rogative adjectives or adverbs, have their verbs in the Fui)junctive, unless
they represent the author's own conceptions: Sr fagte, bag ei* nic^t gcfont^
men fei, xozxi @efd)dfte i^n t)erl)inbert I) d t te n , he said that he had not come
because engagements had prevented him. But: (Sr fagte, hCL^ bte \X\)X, bie tt
i^ a 1 1 e , it)m nid)t gel)ore, he said that the watch which he had, did not
belong to him.
4. Dependent clauses may be indirectly stated by menns of the sub-
junctive, even if there is no principal sentence introduced by bag: 3t)r mun)d)t
cu(^ einen tugenb^aften @ol)n, ber eure« §aupte§ grei(e ?o(f en e I) v e , you wish
— 88 —
ba§ fern Srubcr frait! fct (hJarc), he believed that his brother was sick.
3d) autmortete, ha^ id) fetnen 3Sorjd)Iag a n u a I) m e (annel^mc), I answered
that I accepted his proposition, ^kn fagt, ha^ ber ^rieg aucgcbrod)en f e t, it
16 SLiid that war has broken out. 3d) fragte il)n, ob er mic^ ueri'taiibeu l)abe,
I asked him, whether he had understood me. (gg tuiirbe allcjenieiu Derlaiigt,
ba% ber @enera( angreifen foUe, it was universaiiy demanded that the
jreneral should make the attack. @ie iDiinfd)ten, bag uiifere 2lbreije oufi3cfd)obeu
tuerben nt b C^ t e , they wished that our departure miffhi be postponed. 2)?an er=
luartete, bag ber ^rdfibcut t>a^ @e|"e^ nid)t beftdttgen ti) e r b e, it was expected
that the President would not confirm the hiw. 2)ie iBenievtmig, baJ3 ev betl
Srief nie gefe()eu ^ b e , tuai* untt)al)r, the remark that he had never seen the
letter was untrue.
4. The subjunctive is used, in clauses introduced by ha^, if the action
is represented as necessary, expedient or desirable: d^ tft erforbcrltd), ba^
bie^ g e f d) e I) c , it is necessary that this should he done, d^ ift unfer Sntereffe,
hai bte^ @efe^ gednbcrt m C r b e , it is our interest that this law should be
changed. If such and similar sentences contain a fact that has actually
happened, the indicative must be used even if in English the potential should
for a virtuous son, to honor the grey hair of your head. 2)iefer iBor*
fd)lag njurbe uermorfen, ha er mit bem 3$ort^eiIe ber ©tabt iinDereinbar f ei,
this proposition was rejected since it vms held that it was incompatible with the
interest of the city.
5. The conjunction bag mny be omitted, which is almost alwa)^s the
case in long quotations. Sentences in which the conjunction ha^ is thus
understood are arranijed in the common order (§ 106. 5. 8 ). Gr bef)ailp*
tcte, ber S3rief f e i i I) m nie eingc^diibigt trorbeu, he asserted (that) the
letter had never been handed to him.
6. As to the TENSES of the subjunctive, a distinction must be made
■whether the principal verb is in a past tense or not. If the principal verb is
in a past tense, three ca.ses must be distinguished: a J if the stated action has
happened at the time of the statement, the present or imperfect is used. 'J'he
imperfect is always used if in the plur.\l of tlie present the subjunctive
could not be distinguished from the indicative. (Sv fagte, ha^ feine (^o^nc
nod) in ^Berlin feien (or mdren), but: er fagte, ba^ feine @ol)ne fid) in ^erftn be*
fdnben (not bcfinbeil), he said that his sons ivere in Berlin. b) If the stated
action has happened before the statement, the perfect or pluperfect of the
subjunctive is used: (gr fagte, b'ag er bein 53nd) bor gmet Sal)ren »erIoren
1^ a b e or 1^ d 1 1 e , he said tUat he had lost your book two years ago. c) If
the stated action had not yet happened at the, time of the statement, either
the future subjunctive or the conditional is used in the clause; dx l)Offte, ha^
bn feinem Sunjc^e geniigcn n? e r b e ft or tt) ii v b e ft , he hoped that you
would aatisfy his wish. See Pr. C. p. 65.
If the principal verb is in a present tense, the subjunctive of the clause
is m the present if the stated action is coincident with the time of the prin-
cipal verb: (Sr njdl)Ut, bag bu abiuefenb jeieft, he supposes that you are
absent. If the stated action has happened before the time of the principal
verb, the subjunctive is in the perfect: (2r be^an)3tet, ba^ bn ben 53rief er*
1^ a (t en I) a be ft , he asserts that you received the letter. If the stated fiction
lies in the future, the subjunctive is generally not used. After verbs of wish-
ing the subjunctive present of mbgen (Utoge) is employed.
— 89 —
be emplo3^ed: I regret that this should have happened, xdj hehaVLVt, ba^ fl6) bte§
ereigiiet t)at (not ^abe or ^aben foUte). The tense of this subjunctive generally
agrees with the tense of the principal verb.
5. The subjunctive is required after the conjunctions bamit (or ba§ if it
has the meaning 'm order that ), (x\^ ob (as if), al^ \ia^, if preceded by adjec-
tives with ^\i (too). See §90, 7. 2r elite nad) bem "^iai^t, bamit i^m DfJiemanb i u=
u r ! m m e (or gutjorfdme, or jnuorfommen !oune), he hastened to the place
in ordiT that nobody might anticipate him. ©r iDar git eifrig, a l§ hd,^ er bie
Uiiterbrec^un'g bemerft I) d 1 1 e (or l)dtte bemerteu foflen), he was too zealous to
notice the interruption (literally: than that he should have noticed the interruption).
2)amtt has its subjunctive in the present or imperfect; the subjunctive after
al^ ob is treated according to the rules of the indirect subjunctive (No. 3),
and aU ta^ generally requires the imperfect if the principal verb is a present,
and the pluperfect if it is a past.
6. The subjunctive (imperfect or pluperfect) is used (optionally with
the indicative) in relative clauses if the principal sentence contains a nega-
tion which is restricted by the relative clause: 3d) !enne 9^iiemanben, ber bie§
D e V f U d) t I) d tt e (or l)at), I do not know anybody that tri£d this. (Sr t)at
9^id)t^ ermittein tonnen, wa^ beineu 5(nfpriid)en e ii t g e g e u ft dn b e (or eut=
gec|euftet)t), he could not ascertain anything contrary to thy claims (that
might be opposed to thy claims).
7. The subjunctive (optionally with the indicative) is used after
general concessive clauses, introduced by ttjag aud), iuer and), tDO aud), etc.
(See § 90, 10).
8. The subjunctive (in the same tenses as required by the indirecc
subjunctive No. 3) is used in connection with benu in the meaning unless.
(See § 90, 9).
9. Conditional sentences corresponding to reality require the indicative:
If this BE so, menn bie^ fo ift (not fei)» But hypothetical sentences (that is
those which do not correspond to reality) require the following construction:
a) The conditional clause (introduced by n^enu, i/J has its verb in the
subjunctive imperfect or pluperfect.*
b) The principal sentence has its verb either in the conditional (which
is more usual), or in the imperfect or pluperfect of the main verb or
of a modal auxiliary (foniien, biivfen, miiffeit, etc.). See Pr. C. p. 65.
2Beun ev fo I) a u b e 1 1 e (or ^aubeln woUtt), m ii r b e er angefe^euer fein
(or iDdre er angefe()cuer), if he would act thus, he should be more respected.
2)ie^ b ii r f t e (miirbe) fid) md)t ereignet ^aben, it)cmt bu ^ier gemefen
it) d r e ft , this would not have happened if you had been here.
For the omission of tt)cnn see l\ C. p. 102.
10. The conditional clause is frequently replaced by single words (fonjl,
haib, beinal)e, etc.), by phrases or infinitives, and sometimes entirely under-
* Some writers use here often the conditional. But it is conbidered
faulty.
— 90 —
stood: 2)icfc ^reifc tv'dxm fonft fiir iDoWett gcljalten tDorbcn, these prices
would have h^i^.n formerly considered cheap (i. e, if we lived in former times).
3d) tuare b e i n a I) e gefaUen, 1 7iearhj. had fa len (L e] if I had not been f ivored
by fortune or accident). Ueber ben ^oqug eiiie^ biefer SDHimer g u ft r e i t c n,
It) are imangemeffen, to dispute on the preference of either of these men
u'Ofdd be inexpedient (^i. e. if we would dispute). ®ute ©eifter tDlirbe id)
Ueben, ffood i^hosts I would love (i, e. the ghosts if they were good).
S)U f U t e ft 3ioimermanu it)erben, you should turn a carpenter (L e, if you
were wise).
§ 106. ORDER OF WORDS.
1. Order of Attributes. Adjectives are generally placed before their
nouns, even if they are accompanied by adjuncts: (Sin mit grower 2}^ut)e er-
rungener 'Sieg, a viotory obtained with great difficulty.
Genitives are placed either before or after their nouns; in the former
instance the governing noun drops its article: Tleim^ i8ruber§ ^inb, or ba^
^inb meine^ ^rubers.
2. Adje(^tives have their adjuncts generally before them: 2)er 3Jlann ift
be§ §affc§ Uiiirbtg, the man is worthy of hatred.
3. Among the adjuncts of verbs the personal pronouns stand first,
then follow the case-objects, and last the adverbial adjuncts.
4. The verb is placed differently according to the three orders of ar-
rangement: a) common order; b) inverted order; c) dependent order.
5. The common order takes place if the sentence is not introduced by
a subordinating conjunction (§ 90.) or a relative, and begins with the sub-
ject or its attributes.
6. The inverted order takes place if the verb or one of its adjuncts
opens the sentence, which is the case in direct questions and for the sake
of emphasis.
7. The dependent order takes place in sentences introduced by rela-
tive adjectives or adverbs, by subordinating conjunctions, and in indirect
questions. Seethe foot-note (No. 2.) on pige 87.
8. In the common order the finite verb (auxiliary, or simple tense of the
verb) stands immediately after the subject and its adjuncts, and the infini-
tives and participles occupy the last place, so that all adjuncts of the verb
stand between the finite verb and the infinitive or participle. If the finite
verb is a separable compound the prefix stands at the end of the sentence.
But infinitives with ^nmay follow the prefix of the finite verb:
©rojse iBegeben^eiten ereignen fid) oft unerwartet.
S)er iBerbred)er ift au^ bem ©efdngnig entjprnngen.
S)ie ®onne gcl)t urn fec^^ lU)r anf.
S)ie '^onne ift nm ad)t U^v untergegangen.
Sr fdngt on fid) ju fiii'd)ten, or: ei* fdngt fid) gn fiirc^ten an.
9. In the inverted order tlie finite verb is placed before the subject and
its adjuncts, the arrangement being in all other respects the same as in the
common order.
— 91 —
Oft ereignen pft) grogc 58egcbenl)etten uncrmartct.
^^ i ft e i u 35 e r b r e d) e u au^ bem (^^efangntg eutfprungen.
Uiii fed)« Ul)r g e I) t b i e @ o ii n e auf .
Urn ad) t Ut)r tft hie (Sonne nntergcgangcn.
g a n g t e r an fid) gu f urd)ten ?
10. In the dependent order the finite verb is placed after all other
■words of the sentence.
SS c i ( groye ^cgeben^eiten fid^ oft nnermartet ereignen.
2)er ^evbred)er, b c r au^3 bem (^efdngniffe entjprungen t ft.
©^ ift grut)(ing ober §erbft, \v e n n bie ®onne um jed)§ Ut)r a n f g el^ t.
(Sr ^at mid) gefragt, tu a nn bu gnrii(ftel)ren nj i r ft?
Exceptions:
a) The auxiliary in the dependent order is frequently omitted :
9^ad)bem er bic§ met)rfad) njieber^ott (tiattt), nat)m er 5(bfd)ieb.
b) Those verbs whose participles take the form of an infinitive, have
their auxiliaries before the object-infinitive (without gn):
2)a er unfern 3?orfd)(ag nid^t I) a t anne^men tooUtn, fmb voxx nn*
oerric^tetei* ©ac^e fortgegangen.
92 —
List of Strong Yerbs.
REMARKS.
1. Forms in ordinary type are those alone in nse.
2. Forms in full faced type indicate that weak forms are also found, but
that the strong form is preferable.
3. Forms in parenthesis are less usual than the weak or the regular
strong forms.
4. Forms in Roman characters are only poetical.
5. No compounds are given. Verbs foimd in composition only, are
given under the first letter of the root, with a hyphen prefixed to it.
7^" The irregular weak verbs are appended in a separate list.
Infinitive. Present Indie- Imper- Imperfeet
ative Sing. alive. Indicative.
badfen, bake bcicfft, bcicft buf
»bd'ren (^bierft, =biert) -bar
Only gebdren, bear (bring forth).
beifeen, bite bi§
bergen, hide birgft, birgt birg barg
berften, burst
(birfleft,birft) (birft)
bavfl
(borft)
beugst,beugt bog
beutst, beut beut hot
banb
bat
blafeft, btafet blieg
Mieb
bli«
As transitive only of weak conjugation.
braten, roast bratft, Wdi (bvtct)
bred)cn, break bvi(^ft, brid}t bric^ brad)
'bei^en -Me^
Only gcbetl)en, thrive,
^berben =btrbft,-birbt -birb ^barb
Only Uerberben, perish, spoil.
As transitive (spoil, destroy), weak
biegen, bend
bieten, offer
binben, bind
bitten, beg
blafen, blow
bleiben, sttiy
bleid)en, bleach
Imperfect
Past
Sahjumtive
. ParticipU,
Bute
gebacfcn
-bore
*boren
biffe
gebiffcn
bdrge
geborgeu
(biirge)
(bdrfte)
geborflen
borfte
bbgc
gebogeu.
bi3te
geboten
bdnbe
gebunben
bate
gebeteu
bdefe
geblafeu
blicbe
geblicbeu
m^t
geblid)en
(briete)
gebraten
brdd)e
gebrod)en
-bie^e
>bte^en
(::bdrbe)
^borben
=burbe
or STRONG,
93
Infinitive,
bingen, engage
brefc^en, thrash brifcl)jt,
bri)(t)t
^v^^briegen -dreussest
-dreusst
Only tjcrbriegen, vex.
bringen, urge
"-effcn, eat iffeft, i§t
fal)ren, drive
fallen, fall
fatten, fold
Present Indie- Imper- Imperfed Imperfect Past
alive Sing, ative. Indicative. Subjunctive. Participle.
bang (biinge) gebungen
(bung)
brifd^ brafc^ brd|cf)e gebrojc^en
(brofcf)) brojct)e
^brog ^broffe ^broffeti
fat)rft, fci^rt fut)r
fdlift, fdUt fie(
WEAK
brang brange gebntngen
ig q6 age gegeffen
fnl)rc gefal}ren
fiek gefallen
WEAK Jjcfttltcn (in-
transitive)
"^fangen, catch fdngft, fdngt fing (ficng) finge gefangen
Thus anfangen, l)egin; empfangen, receive and other compounds.
fed)ten, fight (fiditeft), ft^t ft(ftt fod|t forf)te gefodjten
.fcl)(cu 4ief)Ift,=ne^lt 4^^ -fa^t (=fdt)k) .fo^)fen
Thus befel)Ien, command; empfet)ten, recommend, and several further
compounds of these, ge^len, fail, is weak.
"^--pnben, find fanb fdnbe gefunben
fterf)ten, hraid flitfetjt, flirit flit^t ftod}t ftod)te fieflori)ten
-fleigen .,•••• =ftt5 =Me ^fliffen
Only befteigen, take pain?,
flicgen, fly fleugst,fleugt fleug flog ffbgc gcftogen
fiiet)en, flee fleuchst, flench ftol) flii^e geflot)en
flench t
fliegen, flow fleussest, fleuss ffog floffe geftoffen
fleusst
fragcn,:)sk (frdgft, friigt) (frug) (fruge)
(f^tagen is better conjugated weak throughout.)
freffcn, eat (of friffeft, frigt frig frog frdgc
beasts)
frteren, freeze
gd^ren, ferment
or gdren
gcben, give
f ror f rorc
..... 9oit(0or) 0bjrc
(gore)
giebft (gibft) gieb(gib) gob gdbe
giebt (gibt)
ge()en, go ...... ging ginge
(gieng) (gienge)
gotten, be valued gittft, gilt gilt golt golte
(gd(tc)
gcfreffen
gefroren
gcgoftrcn (ge*
goren)
gegeben
gegongen
gegoUcn
— 94 --
Infinitive.
Present Indie
-Imper-
Imperfect
Imperfect
Past
alive Sing.
ative.
Indicative.
Subjunctivt
. Participle-
-geffen
-giffeft, =giet
-gi6
.ga6
.gd6e
'Qeffeu
Only uergcffen, forget.
giegen, pour
geussest,
geusst
geuss
gog
9offc
gegoffen
»ginnen
*gann
*gannc
»gbnne
-gonnen
Only begtnnen, begin.
gleic^en, resemble
0lid|
Bli*c
Bcgliftcit
gleiten, glide
%m
glitte
Bcglitten
glimmen, gleam
glomm
glbmmc
gcglommen
graben, dig
grdbft, grabt
grub
grube
gegraben
greifen, seize
griff
Sriffe
gegriffen
l^alten, hold
I)dttft, l)dtt
!)ielt
^telte
gebolten
t)angen, pngen,
IjQugft, l^dngl
^ing
I)inge
ge^angcn
hang (in trans.)
(^ieng)
(l)ienge)
The transitive pngen, hang, generally conjugates weak.
l^aucn, beat
$tc6
l^tcbe
gel}aueit
I}eben, raise
l)ob (^ub)
l^obe (^iibe) geljoben
l)ciJ3en, call, be
^ieg
ftteBe
geljeigen
called
I)etfen, help
m\^r mt
^iif
^atf
]^mfe(plfe) qeljolfen
feifen, chide
(«ff)
(!tffc)
(getiffen)
:=tiejen or 4iiren
»for
.fore
=!oren
Only erfieje
n or crfiircn, single out.
Ilimmen, climb
flomm
flbmrne
geflommen
Ilingeu, sound
!fang
fldnge
gethingen
fneifen, tnetpcn,
Imff,fm^p fniffe,
gcfniffen, ge=
pinch
fnippe
tntppen
tommeit, come
(!ommfl,
fommt)
fam
!dme
gefommen
tried)en, creep
kreuchst,
kreucht
kreuch
lxo6)
h:ocf)c
gcfro(i)cn
laben, load
Itttjft, Ittbt
Ittb
liitie
gelaben
laffen, let
Idffeft, tdgt
lieg
liefec
gelaffen
laufeu, run
Idufft, Iduft
lief
Uefc
gelaiifen
leiben, suffer
Utt
litte
gelitten
Ieit)en, lend
lie^
Iiel)c
gdtel}en
lefen, read
Uefeft, Ueft
ae«
laS
Idfe
gctefen
liegcn, lie (down)
lag
Idgc
gelegen
4ieren
^lor
-lore
4oren
Only tjerlieren, lose.
4ingen
4ang
*tdnge
•lungcn
Only gctingcn, succeed, and tntgUngen, fail.
— 95 —
Tnfinitivt. Present Tndic- Imper- Imperfect Imperfect Past
ative Sing, ative. Inclicative. Subjunctive. Participle,
Iofdf)cn, extinguish lift^efl, lifi^t lifdj lofi^ Ibf^c ^clofc^en
In transitive meanings always weak; in intransitive nearly always strong.
(ugett, lie (tell a
lie)
mal)len, grind
nieiben, shun
melteu, milk
nteffen, measure
nc{)men, take
leugst, leugt leug (og
logc
gelogen
WEAK
mteb
(milffl, tnitft) (mot!)
miffeft, rnigt mig mag
ntmmft, nimm nal)m
nimmt
-na8
Only gcncfcn, recover one's health.
-nicgcn -neusscst, -neuss :=no§
-neusst
Only genie J3en, eat, enjoy.
WEAK
gemal)len
nttebe
gemieben
(motfe)
Oemolfen
ntagc
gemeffen
nal)mc
genommen
=neen
*noffc
^nefen
«=noffen
pfeifen, whistle
PPff
^ftffe
gepfiffen
pflegen, cherish
(Pftog)
(pfloge)
(gepflogen)
In some
phrases the strong forms are more
i usual than the weak one
pftegen, be wont,
conjugates weak only.
preifen, praise
pries
priefe
gepriefen
qnetten, gush
quittft, quint
• quill
quott
quottc
gequottcn,
forth
(swollen)
quetten,
make swell, conjugates
WEAK.
rad^cn, revenge
roch
rcjche
fiCtO^Ctt •
V^rat^cn, advise
^reiben, rub
tatlfl, tdt^
xm
rict^e
gerat^en
rieb
riebe
gerieben
reifeen, tear
n6
riffe
geriffen
reiten, ride
ritt
ritte
gerittcn
riec^en, smell
reuchst,
reucht
reuch
xo^
rod)c
geroc^cn
ringen, wrestle
rang
range
(riinge)
gerungen
rinnen, run (flow)
rann
ronne
geronnen
(rdnne)
rnfen, call
tief
tiefe
gerufen
jdjen, salt
WEAK
WEAK
pcfalgctt
janfen, drink
fauf^fduft
toff
\m
gefoffeu
(of beastsand
drunkards)
laugen, suck
fog
fbge
gcfogen
ifhriffen, create
fcl)uf
fdliife
gejdiaffen
1 l^affen in t)crfcf)affcn, procure, and in the
meaninK 'work' is wbak.
I' fd Icn, isound
f4oa
fdlbEe
gcfi^oflett
— 96 —
Infinitive. Present Indie- Imper- Imperfect Imperfect Past
alive Sing, ' aiive. Indicative. Subjunctive. Participle.
=fd)ief)t
Only gcfdje^en, happen.
fd^ciben, part, sever fd^ieb fci)iebc gcfd)tebcn
fcl)einen, seem fd)ien jd^ienc gefc^ienen
fd)elten, scold fdjiltft, fc^itt fijilt \6)oXt fd)b(te gefdioltcn
(fd)oIt) (fd)a(te)
fci)eren, shear (f(i)ierfl, (fti)ici*) fi^or Miirc gef^otctt
jc^iert)
fcf)ipben, shove fd^ob fcI)obe gcfd^oben
fdiiegyx, shoot fci^og fc^offc gc]'d)offen
fd)inbcn, flay fd)anb jd)unbe gejd}unben
(fd)unb) (fd)anbe)
fd)rQfeu, sleep Wlaffl, fd^taft jc^Iief fd}(iefe gefd)tafcu
fd)lagen, strike jd)fdgft,fd)ldgt id)tug fc^liige gefc^lagcn
ratf)fc^lagctt, deliberate, conjugates weak.
fd)Ieid)en, slink fd^tid) S&i{\&\t gefd)tid^en
[d)teifen, whet jd^liff jdiUffe gef^Uffen
In some senses it conjugates weak.
fd)Iei§en, slit ft^Hft fi^liffc geWiffen
fd)tie6en, shut schleussest, schleuss jd^Iog jd^Ioffc gcfd)(offen
schleusst
fd)Ungen, sling fd&lang fd)tange gefd)lungen
(fd)lunge)
fdimeigcn, throw fdimig fd)mif|e gcfd)miffeu
i^meljen, melt frj^miljcfl, fr^miJj itftmoli jr^miiljc gefr^moljcn
Usually WEAK in transitive meaning.
fd)nauben, pant fcftnoB fi^itoBc gefil^noBcn
fd)neiben, cut fd)nitt jc^iutte gejd)iutten
id)rauben, screw fd^rob f(^ri)bc gcfd)tobcn
4d)rcc!en, be -|d)ridfl, ^jd)vide =fd)raf -^d)rd!e ^id)rocfeii
terrified ^fc^ridt (^d)rarf) (-jdjrarfc)
Only in compounds (crfd^rcdfcn, au jfc^rcden, etc.). In transitive
meaning weak.
fd)rciben, write fd^rieb fd)nebe gcfd)rieben
jd)reien, cry jd^ric \6)x\tt gcjd)viecn
jd^retten, stride jdjrttt fdjrtttc gefd)ntten
fc^roten, prind schriet geff^rotett
id)iDdrcn, ulcerate (fd)tt)ierfl, |d)tt)or fd)morc gefcftrooreu
(d)n)iert) (fdjmur) (|d)H)iii*e)
fc^ttjcigcn, be silent |d)Wteg jc^iuicgc gcfd^luicgcu
91
Infinitwt. Present Indie- Imper- Iviperfed Imperfect Past
ative Sing, alive. Indicative, Subjunctive, Participle,
fditDcHcn, swell fdimiUft, fd^mill fd^hjott jdjtDoUc gefc^wollen
In transitive meanings weak.
fd)ii>immen, swim fdittjanim
()d)roomm)
fd)tDtnben, vanish jd)lt)anb
fd^mingcn, swing fd^mang
fd)tt)oren, swear : fd)tt)or or
fd)it>ur
fel)en, see f\c\)% fie^t fie^ fa^
jein, be bin, bift, ifl jet tt)ax
fieben, boil fott
fmgen, sing fang
(sung)
ftnfcn, sink fanf(sunk) ^
fmnen, meditate fonn
fi^en, sit fa6
jpalten, split weak
i^eien, spit • fjiic
jpinnen, spin jpamt
fpleigen, slit f|jli§
fpred)en, speak fprid^ft,f^nd)t fprid^ fprad^
f^riejjen, sprout spreussest, spreuss jprog
spreusst
fpringen, spring fprang
fted)en, prick ftid)ftjtid)t ftid) ftad)
ftecfen, stick (fticfft, ftidt) (fticf) ftaf (ftacf)
flet)en, stand ftaub
(ftunb)
ftc^Ien, steal pie^ift, ftie^U ftie^t ftal)t
(fteftle)
fteigen, step up fticg
ftevbcn, die ftirbft, ftirbt ftiib ftavb
ftieben, disperse * Ilob
ftinfen, stink ftanf
ftogen, thrust ftofeefl, ftbfet ftieg
n-.;4,*„^ stroke fivid^
fd^ttjommc
geid)n)ommen
(jd)mdmme)
fdjWiinbe
gejd)n3unbcn
(fcftmcinbe)
fd)tt)unge
gefditrnngcn
(id)n)dnge)
jc^morc 01
gefd^worcn
fdiroiirc
fal)e
gefeljen
tv'dxt
gcnjcfen
mtc
gefotten
fangc
gefungen
(sunge)
fantc(fun!c)gefunfcn
fonne
gefonncn
O'dnne)
fafie
gefcffen
WEAK
gcflioUeii
fliicc
geftiieen
fponne
gefponncn
(fpdnnc)
\mt
fiefjiliffctt
fprdd)e
gefprod)cn
fproffc
gefproffen
fprdngc
gefprungen
ftdd)e
geftod^en
fIttfcCftddtc;
ftiinbc or
gcftanbcn
ftdnbe
ftot)Ie
gefloI)lcn
mm
fticgc
gcfiiegcn
ftiirbc
gcftoibcn
(ftdrbc)
ftobc
gcflobcn
fldnfc
geflunfen
(ftiinfc)
ftiegc
gcftofeen
flridjc
gcflridjen
— 98 —
Infinitive.
flrciten, struggle
t^un, do
tragen, carry
treffen, hit
treiben, drive
treten, step
triefen.- drip
trinfen, drink
trugen, deceive
Present Indie- Imper- Imperfect Imperfect Past
aiive Sing, ative. Indicative, Subjunctive. Participle,
ftritt ftrittc geftrittcn
tragft, trdgt trug
triffft, trifft triff trof
trieb
trittft, tritt tritt trat
treufst, treuft treuf iroff
trant
treug trog
treugst,
treiigt
I, toac^ft n)U(f)3
tpog
tl)dte
get^an
triige
getragen
trdfc
getroffcn
triebe
getviebcn
trdte
getretcn
trbffc
(getroffcn)
trdufe
getruntcn
(truntc)
troge
getrogen
n)U(^fe
gen)ad)fcn
mbgc
geiuogen
n)ad)fen, grow
iDdgen, tt>iegen,
weigh
iDdgen has transitive meaning and is conjugated either strong or weak.
wafdjen, wash tt)dfd)cfl, toufd^ tt)ufd)e gcmajt^en
todfc^t
njeben, weave toob toobe gelooben
*tt>egen ^rtjog *tt)oge ^mogen
Only betDcgen, move, which in some senses is conjugated strong, in
others weak.
tt>ei(^en, yield
hjid)
tt)td)c
gett)td)cn
tt)cifen, show
njte§
njiejc
gemiejen
ipcrben, woo
tt)trbfl, tt)irbt n)irb
njarb
rourbc
gettjorben
( tt)d vbc)
tt)erben, become
koirfl, to'nb
marb or
njurbe
njiivbc
getDorbcn
roerfeu, throw
h)irffi, n)irft
iuirf
h)arf
njiirfc
(njdrfe)
geiDorfen
iDtnben, wind
hjanb
h)dnbc
gettjunbcn
^njiunen
*tt)ann
-mdnnc
>tt)oitnen
Only geminncn, win.
gcil^cn, accuse
Sie^
gie^c
gqtc^cn
gie^cn, draw
zeuchst,
zeucht
zeuch
gog
hm
gejogen
smingcn, force
gmang
smdngc
gcjmungcn
i
— 99 —
Irregular Weak Verbs.
Infinitive. Pres, Ind. Sing.
Imperf.
Imperf.
Past Participle.
Indicative .
Subjunctive
brcrtnen, bum reg.
brannte
bvenntc
gebrannt
brm(ieil, bring reg.
brad)tc
brad)te
gebrad^t
bau(i)ten (impers.) e8 'i>m^i
e« bdud^tc
eg bdurf)te
gebdud)t
think
benten, think reg.
bac^tc
badjtc
gebad^t
biirfen, be allowed barf, barfft, barf
burftc
burftc
geburft (biirfen)
^abcn, have ^aft, ^at
^attc
^dttc
gel)abt
tcnnen, know reg.
lanntc
!enntc
(fdnnte)
getannt
fonnen, be able !ann, lannft, !ann fonntc
fijnnte
gcfonnt (fonncn)
moqen, like mag, magft, mag
mod)tc
modjtt
gemoc^t (mogcn)
miiffen, be obliged mug, mugt, mug
mu6te
miigte
gemngt (miifjen)
neunen, call reg.
nanntc
nenntc
(ndnnte)
genannt
jcnben, send reg.
fanbtc
(fenbete)
fenbete
gefanbt or gefenbet
foUeit, be obliged foU, follf!, foU
reg.
reg.
gefottt (jotten)
ttjenbcn, turn reg.
hjanbtc
tuenbetc
genjanbt or gctDen-
(menbetc)
bet
njtffcn, know hjcig, tuctgt^njcig umfetc
njiietc
gettjugt (tt)tffen)
iPoUcn, be willing tt)iU, tuiUft, toitt
tuoUtc
woUtc
gewoUt (tt)oUen)
— 100
INDEX.
4^- The Roman figures refer io the Courses, I, denoting the Practical, II,
the Theoretical Course. The English figures refer to the pages.
21, pronunciation I, 2; a changed in-
to a in strong verbs I, 90. See
vowels.
a h , prepos., used only in compounds
II, 71.
abcr, place of I, 97; coord, con-
junction II, 65; difference from
jonbern I, 72; II, 65; difference
from allein II, 65.
accentuation I, 7; on which
syllable the accent is placed I, 7;
in compound words, ib,; in com-
pound verbs II, 60.
accusative, answers to the objec-
tive case without preposition II, 3;
case of the direct object I, 15; II,
78; when it has the same form as
the nominative I, 15; ace. singular
of adjective pronouns formed bv the
ending en I. 15; dropping ot the c
in the ending I, 15; ace. of per-
sonal pronouns precedes the dative
I, 54; verbs with two accusatives
II, 79; no noun governs an accus-
ative II, 79; accusative of space II,
80; ace. of time, measure, weight,
and value II, 81; verbs that govern
the objective in English may gen-
erally be rendered by verbs govern-
ing the accusative II, 78.
a6)t X g c , a week I, 60.
adjectives II, 13; adjectives and
adj. pronouns agree in gender with
thi ir nouns I, 13; II, 13. 75; pre-
dicative adj. not declined I, 39; II,
13; weak declension of adj. I, 39;
II, 14; II, 27. 28; weak and strong
declension of adj. I, 40; II, 14;
strong declension of adj. 1,41; II,
14. 28 29; adj. used as adverbs I,
72; II, 68. 69; adj. generally pre-
ceded by their adjuncts I, 53;
placed before their governing nouns
together with their adjuncts I, 105;
when their nouns are understood
II, 13; placed after their nouns,
they do not agree with them II, 75;
indeclinable adj. II, 75; absolute
adi. denoting persons are placed
in the masculine gender, denot-
ing things in the neuter gender
II, 77; what pronominal adjec-
tives may be used absolutely II,
77; inflection of absolute adjec-
tives II, 77; adj. governing the
genitive II, 79; adj. governing tlie
dative mostly correspond trt English
adj. with to or for II, 79; adj.
generally not construed with the
accusative II, 79.
— 101
adverbs, how formed I, 72; II,
68. 69; their force and function in
the sentence II, 68; derived from
adjectives II, 68; comparison of
adv. II, 69. 74; pronominal adv.
II, 70 foil.
after, conjunction, translated by
nac^bem I, 81.
agreement, II, 75 foil.
all, when translated by gan^ II, 22.
a n e l It , coordinating conjunction II,
65; difiference from abcr II, 65.
all cr, declined I, 32; II, 21; alleS,
used of persons II, 21. 77.
aWt^t it, indefinite adverb, II, 72.
al^, when, I, 47; I, 74; subordinat-
ing conjunction II , 65 ; al§, as II,
66; ol§, than II, 66; it requires the
verb to be at the end I, 76; aU ob
II, 65; stands with the subjunctive
II, 89; ob omitted in aU ob II, 66;
al^ omitted II, 66; aU, distin-
guished from njte II, 66; al^ hci%
idiomatically used after jit II, 66;
requires the subjunctive in this
connection II, 89.
although, how translated I, 102.
a n , preposition, when it governs the
accusative, and when the dative I,
93; II, 62.
a n b e r , declines strong or weak I,
48; II, 23.
a n ft a 1 1 , preposition with gen. II. 61.
any, when not translated II, 20.
apod OS is and protasis, I, 59;
IL 67.
J apposition, nouns in app., how
|: they agree II, 75.
P b a t b , adverb, compared II, 74.
S3ar, declined II, 5.
S3 C b i C n t e , difference from 2)tcncr
and ^nec^t I, 76.
before, conjunction, translated by
c^c or betjor I, 81.
a r g C r tl , personal and impersonal
use of the verb I, 87.
arrangement of sentences, op-
en ed by objects, adverbs or preposi-
tions I, 72; arr. of clauses in which
the participles of modal auxiliaries
have the form of infinitives 1, 108;
arr. of sentences which have com-
pound verbs as predicates II, 60.
See order of words.
article, repetition of I, 9, 15; de-
finite art. I, 9. 14. 19; 11, 3; inde-
finite art. I, 10. 15. 18. 20; II, 3;
different usage of articles in German
and English II, 74. 75.
as, how translated I, 13; II, 66.
at before nouns of places, how
rendered I, 29.
aud) in connection with interrog-
atives idiomatically used in a con-
cessive sense II, 67; subjunctive in
such clauses II, 89.
augment, when used in the past
participle I, 71; II, 53; augment
of compound verbs II, 60.
a U 8 , preposition governing the da-
tive II, 61.
aVL^tX, preposition with the dative
II, 61; augerroenn, used as conjunc-
tion, except if, unless II, 67.
au§crl)alb, preposition with the
genitive II, 61
auxiliaries of the compound
tenses I, 99; II, 38; verbs with
the auxiliary Jetn II, 39; njcrben as
aux.II, 39; 1,74. 77. 80.
B.
bci, preposition with dative I, 24;
II, 61. 62.
b e t b e d and b e i b e distinguished
II, 26.
bctrubcn, fid), used personally,
and impersonally I, 87.
102 —
b C t) r , subordinating conjunction
II. 65.
b in n c n , preposition with dative
II, 61.
bis, till, prepositional adverb I, 60;
in connection with prepositions, II,
62; how translated and construed
I, 94; II, 62; subordinating con-
junction II, 65.
btSttJCilcn, sometimes, indefinite ad-
verb II, 73.
b I e i b e n, construed with a predicate-
nominative II, 78; conjugated with|
fein I, 99.
e« bU^t, I, 86.
both, liow rendered II, 26
b r e n n c n , imperfect of I, 58; II, 35; j
subjunctive imperfect I, 62; II, 35.
b r i n 9 e n, imperfect of I, 58; II, 35; I
subjunctive imperfect I, 62; II, 35,]
but, when translated by fonbern I
I, 72.
by, preposition, bow translated I, j
21. 74. 94.
d, consonant, used only in foreign
words I, 4.
cases, theory of II, 77 foil; when
the general equivalents of cases
can not be employed II, 77, note;
what is meant by adverbial cases
II, 79.
(J ^ , pronunciation I, 4.
cities, gender of 1, 29.
clock, rendering of the phrases
with, 1,95. 96.
comparatives, formed I, 32; II,
30; change their radical vowels I,
32; II, 30; comparative of adverbs
II, 69. 74.
comparison of adjectives 11,30;
irregular comp. II, 31; of adverbs
II, 74.
compound verbs, see verbs; comp,
nouns, see nouns,
conditional mood, conjuga-
tion of I, 64; formation 2, 39; cond.
mood in hypothetical clauses I, 65;
II, 89.
conditional sentences, gen-
erally require the indicative II,
89; when they must have the verb]
in the subjunctive or conditional,]
see hypothdical clauses; cond. clauses ]
understood I, 65; II, 89. 90.
conjugation, strong and weak, |
preface V, note; model of conjuga-
tion of weak verbs II, 34; of strong!
verbs II, 37. 38; irregular conj. of I
weak verbs I, 58; II, 35; of strong
verbs II, 35 foil.
c o nj u n c t i o n 8, II, 65 foil.; clauses |
introduced by subordinate conjunc-
tions require the verb to be at the|
end II, 65.
consonants pronounced I, 4 foil. I
to continue, when translated by j
fovtje^en, and when by fortfaljrcnj
I, 110.
correlative adjectives I, 26; cor-j
rel. adverbs II, 74.
could, translated by fonntc I, 65;l
in clauses introduced by that I, 65;1
English potential pluperfect with
covM, how translated I, 108.
countries, gender of I, 29.
b a , adverb I, 23; adverb of time and
loose connective II, 72; relative ad-
verb II, 73; demonstrative adverb
II, 74; combined with prepositions
I, 98; II, 64. 72; when these combin-j
ations must be used I, 99; ba, con|
junction (since) II, 65; td, since, re
quires the verb to be at the end, 1, 5^ J
103 —
b a m a 1 6 , adverb of time, II, 70.
b a m i t , in order that, subordinating
conjunction II, 65; subjunctive after
bamit II, 89.
b a a f en , with dative II, 78.
b a n n , adverb of time, II, 70,
b a r U m , adverb of cause II, 70.
t)a^ ift, that is I, 39; baS finb,
thei/ are I, 40.
\>a^, WaQ I, 26; II, 19.
ha^, subordinating conjunction II,
65; clauses introduced by ha^ re-
quire the verb at the end I, 54;
with subjunctive I, 62; II, 88. 89;
ba6 omitted I, 63; II, 88; in con-
nection with prepositions (ftatt, aiu
%tV, o{)ne) and prepositional ad-
verbs (baburd), etc.) II, 66. Clauses
with ha^ preceded by a preposi-
tional adverb, compounded with hd,
are equivalents to English partici-
pial constructions II, 86.
dative, how rendered II, 3; for-
mation I, 19; when the dative
drops the ending e II, 7; generally
precedes the accusative I, 19; dat.
of per.sonal pronouns generally fol-
lows the accusative I, 64; verbs
governing the dative II, 78; verbs
requiring two ol jects generally
have the direct object in the accu-
sative, and the indirect in the da-
tive II, 78; no noun governs a da-
tive II, 79; adjectives with dative
II, 79; dative after prepositions II,
61. 62; adverbial dative is either
possessive or the dative of the in-
terested person II, 80; ethical da-
tive II, 80.
declension, strong and weak,
pref ice V, note; decl. of nouns I,
14. 17. 19. 30. 71; II, 5; of nouns
in er, e(, en I, 19. 33; II, 7; of
nouns in c I, 34; II, 6; weak de-
clension of nouns II, 5; scheme of
weak declension II, 6; of nouns in
e with genitives in cn8 II, 6; scheme
of strong declension II, 6; nouns
that soften the radical vowel in de-
clension II, 7. 8; feminine nouns
of the strong declension II, 7; nouns
strong in the singular, and weak
in the plural II, 9; declension of
proper names I, 28; II, 9 foil.; de-
clension of the definite article, I,
19; II, 3; of the indefinite article
I, 20; II, 3; of possessives I, 20;
II, 24; of pronominal adjectives
I, 14. 17. 18. 19. 31; II, 15 fjll.; of
ordinary adjectives I, 39. 40. 44;
II, 27 foil.; mixed declension II,
29; declension cf comparatives and
superlatives II, 31; of adjectives
whose nouns are imderstood I, 40;
of cardinal and ordinal numerals
I, 42; II, 26.
b C i n , possessive adjective II, 23.
b C i n c r , genitive of bu II, 23.
demonstratives I, 9. 12. 18.31;
II, 17; they agree with their nouns
I, 13; djmonstrative adverbs II,
70; their roots /a and ha II, 70.
b C n t C n , formation of imperfect I,
58; II, 35; subjunctive imperfect I,
62; II, 35.
b C n n , for, coordinating conjunction
II, 65; idiomatically used with a
subjunctive (e8 |ei benn) in the
meaning unless, II, 67. 89.
b e r , hit, ha^, article I, 9. 14. 19; II,
3; relative pronoun" II, 15. 16; its
difference from tvcldjCX II, 16, notej
ber as demonstrative II, 17. 18; in
the plural used instead of biejent*
gen, bic II, 19; ber instead of bcr-
jeniflc II, 19.
beret, genitive ])lural of the demon-
strative ber, used instead of beren
II, 19.
berienigc, ber (n)et(f)er); ber, njet*
d)er I, 26. 27; II, 17. 18.
— 104
b C r f C I b e , demonstrative pronoun
11, 17. 18.
b c ^t) a I b, b e 8 m e g e u, demonstrat-
ive adverbs of cause II, 70; whether
to spell befe or bc^ II, 64.
be ft in connection with je II, 65.
t>idi, accusative of bu II, 11; used
as reflexive II, 12.
bt C f C r , demonstrative adjective, de-
clined I, 14. 17. 19; II, 14. 17; bic=
|e3 contracted into bte§ II, 14.
b i e § f e i t , preposition with geni-
tive II, 61.
diminutives, how formed I, 102.
diphthongs, pronunciation of
1,3.
bir, dative of bu II, 11; used re-
flexively II, 12.
b d^ , coordinating conjunction II, i
65; bod), bennoc^, adverbs, not I
translated in the apodosis after the ]
equivalents of aUhaiigh I, 102.
e§ bo inter t I, 86.
b r e i , cardinal numeral, when in- j
fleeted II, 26.
broken, with dative II, 78.
b U , pers. pronoun, declined II, 11.
b U r d) , preposition with accusative \
II, 61; exponent of the passive
agent I, 74; in compound verbs,
II, 58.
biirfcn, modal auxiliary, con-
jugated I, 107; II, 57; peculiari-
ties of biirfen II, 55.
b ii r ft C U , used personally and im-
personally I, 87.
S, vowel, pronunciation I, 2; when
dropped in the declension of nouns
II, 7; when dropped or retained in
the conjugation of verbs I, 50. 90.
91; not dropped in the subjunctive
I, 62; when dropped intheim{>erat-
ive of strong verbs I, 90; II, 36;
changed into i in the present and
imperative of strong verbs I, 90.
each other, how translated I, 83.
cben, adverb, corresponding to the
adjective bevfelbe It, 72; used in
connection with pronouns II, 72.
Cl)e, before, subordinating conjunc-
tion II, 65; requires the verb to be
at the end I, 81.
cin, indefinite article II, 3; declines
strong or weak I, 48; II, 20. 23. 26.
cin, indefinite pronominal adjec-
tive (some, any), II, 20; used sub-
stantively II, 20; instead of the
obliqu3 cases of man II, 12. 13; eiii,
numer il II, 25; when the form eiit^
must be used II, 26.
c i n a n b e r , each other, I, 83.
c i n b i t b e n , fid), has the reflexive
pronoun in the dative I, 83.
e i U i g e r , indefinite adjective II, 20;
translated by same or any II, 21-
e i t e i , meaning nothing but is inde-
clinable II. 75.
C t e 1 11 , fic^, personally and imper-
smaliy used I, 87.
emphatic f o r m of the English
verb, how expressed I, 19.
e n t g c g e It , preposition with dative
II, 61.
e 11 1 i a 11 g , preposition with dative
II, 61.
e It t f a g e u , governs dative II, 78.
entmeber — obcr, coordinating
conjunction II, 65.
c r , 1 i e , e § , personal pronoun I, 45;
declined II, 11.
erft, not till I, 94.
e ^ , impers' ►nal pronoun, omitted I,
34. 87; II, 54.
e 1 1 i c^ e r , instead of eiiiiger II, 21.
e 1 10 a , indefinite adverb, meaning
of II, 72.
105
cttuaS, substantive pronoun I, 23;
II, 13; used adjectively II, 20.
cud), dative and accusative plural of
bu II, 11; used reflexively II, 12.
cuer, genitive plural of bull. 11;
possessive adjective II, 23.
everything, rendered by OTeS
II, 21.
f a 1 1 §, used as conjunction instead of
iuenu, if (in the case that) II, 66.
feminine nouns, indeclinable in
the singular I, 17; feminine per-
sonal nouns in in I, 102; II, 4; they
double the n in the plural II, 6;
feminine gender of derivatives II, 4.
a f e w , translated by einigc or etlid^c
II, 22; not a few translated by nid)t
njenigc or mand)e II, 22.
f 1 g e n , conjugated with fein I, 99;
governs the dative II, 78.
fractions I, 46; II, 27; mixed
fractions, how translated I, 56.
f I* a g e n , construction wiih double
accusative II, 79.
grau, graulcin,as titles, trans-
lated I, 46.
f r e U C n , fld^, personal and imper-
sonal use of I, 87.
frier en, differently translated I,
86; personally, and impersonally
used I, 86.
fiir, preposition with accusative I,
15; II, 61.
fiird^ten, to he afraid, when used
with a reflexive pronoun, and when
without I, 89.
g ii r ft , declension of II, 5.
future tense, how formed I, 60;
subjunctive of the future I, 64;
both futures used of probable pre-
sent or past events II, 83.
®, letter, different pronunciation of
I, 5.
g a n ;; , when not declined II, 75.
gar, adverb of intensity, its mean-
ing II, 73.
g c , see augment.
g e g e n , preposition with the accusa-
tive II, 61.
gcgeuiiber, preposition with the
dative II, 61.
g C !^ e n , irregularly conjugated I, 91;
II, 37.
get)or(^en, governs the dative
II, 78.
g e It n g c n , conjugated with fein
I, 99.
g e m d 6 , preposition with the dative
II, 61.
gender of nouns in general II, 4;
of persons and things I, 9; II, 4;
of countries and cities I, 29; II, 5;
gender denoted by the ending in
several derivatives I, 102; II, 4;
natural gender of nouns II, 4; no
common gender in German II, 4;
gender of diminutives II, 4; gender
of compound nouns II, 5; nouns
with two genders II, 5; pronomi-
nal subjects followed by a predicate
noun, generally placed in the neuter
gender II, 76; the neuters WXt^
and tt»a§ used of persons II, 77;
neuter gender applied to indicate
persons of either sex II, 77.
genitive, how formed I, 17; how
translated II, 3; genitive of nouns
I, 71; when the vowel c in the
ending c^ is dropped II, 7; genitive
jn cn3 of nouns II, 6; genitive pre-
ceding its governing noun cor-
responds to the English possessive
case I, 73; genitive singular of
106 ~
adjectives generally assumes the
weak inflection II, 29; genitive
governed by prepositions II, 61;
genitive after verbs II, 78; after ad-
jectives II, 79; most of the simple
verbs governing a genitive, also
construed with an accusative II,
78; genitive after nouns II, 79; ad
verbial genitive II, 79.
gcrn, adverb, how compared II, 74.
@ r a f , declension of II, 5.
H.
Ijabcn, io have, the present conju-
gated I, 13; imperfect I, 48; is an
irregular verb II, 35; paradigm of
n, 40; what verbs require ^aben as
an auxiliary I, 99; II, 38.39. 89;
2ufl l)aben I, 49.
^alb, numeral II, 27; when not
declined II, 75.
5 a I b e r, preposition with the geni-
tive II, 61.
^ e i n t, to-night, used in local dialects
II, 72.
§ e i 6 e^n, to be called I, 28; construed
with a predicate-nominative II, 78.
§et b, declined II, 5.
]^ e I f e n , governs the dative II, 78.
^cr, particle II, 71; combined with
prepositions I, 98; with adverbs II,
70; meaning of l^er in these con-
nections I, 99; diflerence from l^in
I, 99; II, 70.
§crr, declined II, 5; §err, grau,
graulcin as titles I, 46.
I) e U e r , adverb of time, in this yeaVy
II, 72.
I) e U t C , adverb of time, io-day, II, 72.
h i , demonstrative root II, 70. 72.
!^ i e r , demonstrative adverb of placa
II, 70; in composition with prepo-
sitions II, 72.
^ in , particle II, 71; combined with
prepositions and adverbs I, 98; II,
70; difference from l)erl, 99; II, 70.
\\XiitX , preposition with dative and
accusative II, 61.
§ir t, declined II, 6.
however (much), tuenn oud) nod^
fo I, 103.
]^ U n g C r n , used personally and im-
personally I, 86.
hypothetical clauses require
the finite verb to be in the sub-
junctive I, 64. 65; the verb in the
principal sentence of such clauses
is in the conditional or the sub-
junctive imperfect or pluperfect I,
65; II, 89.
3, vowel, pronunciation I, 2.
ic!^, pers. pronoun, declined II, 11;
used as noun II, 11.
if, translated by luetttt or ob I, 74;
e ven if, how translated I, 102.
il^m, dative singular of cril, 11.
i ]^ n , accusative singular of er II, 11.
il) n en , dative plural of er II, 12.
i^r, how translated I, 10; dative
fem. sing, of er (fie, e§) II, 11; poss-
essive adjective CAer, ihtir) II, 23.
i :^ r e r , genitive plural of er (fic, c8)
II, 11. 12.
t m nt C r , indefinite adverb II, 72.
imperative drops the ending e in
certain strong verbs I, 90; II, 36;
imper. passive formed with the
auxiliary fcin II, 50.
imperfect of fcin I, 47; cf Ijabcn
I, 48; of weak verbs I, 58; II, 33;
when the e in the ending etc is
dropped or retained I, 58; II, 33;
— lOY
irregular imperfect of bringen, ben-
fen, nennen, jenben, etc., of tDoUen,
fonn^n, miiffen I, 58; II, 35; im-
perfect passive I, 77; the imperfect
is the tense of the narrative II, 83.
impersonal expressions, more
numerous in German than in Eng-
lish I, 87; impersonal fonn may be
given to almost all sentences I, 87;
when preferred to the personal
form I, 87; impersonal verbs I, 86;
II, 54 foil ; impersonal passive II,
64, 82; reflexive impersonals II,
54. 55; impersonal passives of verbs
of believing, saying, etc., followed
by bag, correspond to English per-
sonal constructions II, 84.
in, preposition with dative or ac-
cusative I, 24. 93; IF, 62; in com-
position takes the form ein, *if gov-
erning the accusative II, 71.
indefinite pronouns II, 12. 20;
indefinite adverbs II, 70. 72.
inbcm, inbcHctt subordinating
conjunctions II, 65.
infinitive, termination of I, 50;
II, 32; with gn I, 50; place of the
inf. in the sentence I, 50; inf. with
gu in compound verbs I, 72; inf.
without gu idiomatically rendered
I, 91; used as a neuter noun I,
105; II, 47. 83; inf. after ol)nc I,
109 after nm I, 72; inf. of transitive
verbs after tafjen has a passive mean-
ing II, 81; active inf. with gu after
fein has a passive meaning II, 81. 82.
83; subject-infinitive is used with or
without gu II, 83; object-infinitive is
generally preceded by the preposi-
tion gull, 83. 84; verbs requiring the
object-infinitive without gu II, 84;
the English construction of the ob-
ject-infinitive in connection with a
substantive object after verbs cf
wishing,expecting,believing,declar-
ing, considering is not used in Ger-
man II, 84; the English infinitive
after so as must be rendered by
finite verbs after fo bag II, 85.
t n n e V I) a I b , preposition with gen-
itive II, 61.
inseparable compound verbs, see
verbs.
interrogative adjectives de-
clined I, 24. 31; interr. substantive
pronouns declined I, 23; II, 10
foil.; interrogative adverbs II, 70.
inversion of the apodosis I,
58.
i r (^ e n b in combination with in-
definite pronouns II, 13. 20. 21;
in combination with relative ad-
verbs II, 72.
i t , how rendered I, 23,
J, (Consonant.)
J a f affirmative particle I, 45.
Je, jcntalS, indefinite adverbs of
time II, 72; indefinite adjectives
and a<l verbs derived from the root
ie II, 73.
i C — b e ft , subordinating conjunc-
tions II, 65.
J C b C n f a 1 1 §, indefinite adverb II, 72.
Jebcr, indefinite adjective I, 39;
used substantively II, 20.
Jeberinann, indefinite substantive
pronoun II, 12; declined II, 13.
jebergett, indefinite adverb of
time, synonym of imm^r II, 72.
j e b e § nt a 1 , indefinite adverb of
time II, 72.
j e m a n b , indefinite substantive pro-
noun I, 23; II, 12; declined II, 13.
j e n C r, demonstrative adjective, de-
clined 1, 18; II, 17. 21.
jenfcit, preposition with genitive
II, 61.
\ti^t , demonstrative adverb of time
II, 70.
108 —
\a\t, c^ijl (mir)I, 86.
!ein, indefinite adjective, declined
I, 40; II, 21; used substantively
' II, 20.
!einen falls, indefinite adverb
II, 72.
fcine6tt)Cg8, indefinite adverb
II, 72.
! e n n C n , formation of imperfect I,
58; II, 35; distinguished from
hJtffcn I, 58; subjunctive imperfect
I, 62; II, 35.
(gg flop ft I, 86.
1 m m c n , e« tommt mir toor, alg
ob 1, 86.
1 n n C n , modal auxiliary, con-
jugated I, 49; II, 55; imperfect I, 58;
peculiarities of conjugation II, 55.
f r a f t , preposition governing the
genitive II, 61.
L.
I d n g § , preposition with genitive or
dative II, 61.
I a I j e n , when the active infinitive
depending on it has a passive mean-
ing II, 81.
I a U t , preposition with genitive II,
61.
I a U t e r , meaning nothing hut is inde-
clinable II, 75.
CS lautet I, 86.
\t\)XtX\.f construction of II, 79.
1 e i b 1 1) U n , impersonally used I, 87.
I e f e n , lo read, how distinguished
from tjorlefen, ablefen I, 84.
letters, use of capitals in German
I, 9.
? c u t c , plural of 2Jiann I, 105.
little, translated I, 37; II, 22; not
a liule, nidji tnenig II, 22.
M.
mad) en, how distinguished from
tl)un I, 49.
ntal, numerals with mal I, 46; II,
26. 73.
m n , indefinite substantive pro-
noun, how to translate I, 54; II,
12; man, one, they 1, 35; man as
equivalent of the passive voice
II, 82.
manc^cr, manc^ ein, declined II,
23; mand)mal, indefinite adverb
II, 73.
2JJ a n n , different from SO^enfd) I, 37.
m a y , when to be translated by biir*
fen I, 108.
mel)r, indeclinable I, 37; II, 23;
different from mel)rerc II, 23; used
as adverb II, 73; corresponding to
longer II, 73.
mcin, possessive adj., see j>ossessives;
used predicatively II, 24.
mcincr, bcr meinigc, possessive
adj., substantively used I, 43. 44;
II, 24; ta^ SD^einigc, !^cini9e, etc.,
my, they, etc. property II, 25; bic
2)Ieinigcn, 2)einigen, etc. my, thy,
etc. friends II, 25.
meincr, genitive of id) II, 11.
2Jienfd), declined II, 5; distin-
guished from Tlann I, 37.
mid), accusative singular of td^ II,
11; reflexively used II, 12.
might, translated by fonntc I, 65;
by moc^tc I, 65.
mine, how to translate I, 43; II,
24 foil.
mir, dative singular of ic^ II, 11; as
a reflexive II, 12.
m i 6 1 i n g e n , conjugated with fcin
I, 99.
m i t , preposition governing the dat-
ive I, 24; II, 61.
— 109 —
m i 1 1 C t (l , preposition governing the
genitive II, 61.
m d) t C , how translated I, 65.
modal auxiliaries II, 54; their
participles take the forms of infini-
tives I, 108; II, 35; their peculiar-
ities in conjugation II, 55.
m g e n , conjugated I, 107; II, 55
f'jlL; meaning of I, 108; peculiar-
ities of conjugation II, 55.
moods of the verb II, 32.
Mr., Miss, Mrs., how translated
I, 46.
much, many, II, 22; the adverb
much generally translated by \t])\
II, 73.
must with negatives translated by
biirfen I, 108.
tniiffen, conjugated I, 54; II, 57;
imperfect, how formed and rendered
I, 58; peculiarities in conjugation
11,55; miiStc, how rendered I, 65.
N.
nQ.6) f preposition with the dative II,
61; before names of plares I, 29.
n a (^ b C m , after, subordinating con-
junction II, 65; requires the verb to
be at the end I, 81.
11 d d^ ft , preposition with dative II,
61.
9Z a r r , how to decline II, 5.
n e b e n , preposition with dative or
accusative I, 93; il, 62.
n e b ft , preposition with dative II, 61.
n C I) ni C n , to take, governs the dative
of the person from whom something
is taken II, 78.
n e i n , adverb I, 45; nature of II, 72.
II e It n C n , formation of the imper-
fect I, 58; II, 35; subjunctive im-
perfect I, 62; II, 35; in the active
construed with two accusatives II,
79; in the passive requires a predi
cate-nominative II, 78.
II I d)t , indefinite adverb II, 72; 11 id) t
itur — fonbcrn auc^, used as
coordinating conjunctions II, 65.
II i d) t 8 , indefinite substantive pro-
noun I, 23; II, 13.
11 ie, nicmoU, indefinite adverbs
II, 72.
5'^ i C m a n b , indefinite substantive
pronoun I, 23; II, 12; declined
II, 13.
11 i r (J C It b , indefinite adverb of place
II, 72.
It d^ \i\6) i , not ydl, \i:\ Txo 6) t'xxi*
mat, once more I, 60.
nomin ati ve II, 3; case of the
subject and predicate II, 77; when
a predicate-nominative is required
II, 78; English predicate-nominat-
ives after verbs of considering,
electing, etc., generally rendered
by the preposition ju or fiir II, 78;
nominative with the force of a
vocative II, 78.
n o u n s II, 4 foil. ; declined I, 14.
17. 19. 30; plurals of nouns formed
by the ending cr I, 32; by the end-
ing eit I, 34; when nouns denoting
measurement or weight are not in-
flected I, 38; II, 76; how predicate-
nouns, and nouns in apposition
agree with their governing words
II, 75.
numerals 1,34; cardinals 11, 25;
when they are inflected II, 26; or-
dinals I, 42; II, 26; numeral ad-
verbs II, 26; II, 70.
It ii ^ e It , governs a dative II, 78.
oB, whether, if, subordinating con-
junction II, 65; with subjunctive
I, 63; II, 88; translated by i/I, 74;
separated or dropped in the com-
— no —
pound conjunctions obglcid^, ob*
fdjou, obtt30l)l I, 102.
b C r I) a I b , preposition with the
genitive II, 61.
b g ( e i d), O b f d) O n, and the subor-
dinating conjunctions synonymous
to it I, 102; II, 65; they require
the verb to be at the end I, 102.
objective c.ise, German equiv-
tilent of II, 3; English verbs gov-
erning the objective case generally
rendered by German verbs with
the accusative II, 78; when ren-
dered by the dative I, 50; II, 78.
p c c u p y , to, how translated I,
76.
£) C^ § , inflection of II, 5.
obcr, coordinating conjunction II,
65.
of, English preposition, translated
by the genitive II, 3; when trans-
lated by the preposition toon, and
when by the genitive I, 21. 28; not
translated after nouns of measure-
ment and weight I, 38; not trans-
lated after fractions I, 46; in what
other instances it is not translated,
I, 42; II, 78.
officer, how to translate I, 86.
oft, indefinite adverb of time II, 73;
comparison of II, 74.
I) U e , preposition with the accusa-
tive II, 61; followed by an infini-
tive I, 109.
one another, how translated I,
83.
order of words II, 90.91. See
Arrangement.
participle, present, how formed
I, 105; past participle, how formed
I, 70. 71; without augment in in-
separable compounds, and in verbs
with the ending iveu I, 71; II, 33;
past participles of strong verbs have
the ending en I, 71; past participles
of the modal auxiliaries and some
other verbs ((affen, I)oren, fcl)en, IjtU
feu, l^ei{3en) often take the form of
infinitives I, 108; II, 65; future par-
ticiple of the passive with ;;ii, used
attributively II, 85; participles de-
clined and compared I, 105; II, 48.
85; place of the past participle I,
14; II, 90; participles and their
adjuncts placed before their gov-
erning nouns I, 105; II, 90; past
participles after bmmcu with the
force of a present participle II, 85;
past participles with the force of an
imperative II, 85 ; participles with
the force of adjectives II, 85; in-
stances in which the German lan-
guage admits of participial con-
structions II, 85. 86; participial
constructions cannot be formed by
means of auxiliaries II. 85; parti-
cipial constructions generally used
to express an accompanying action
II, 85; German equivalents for
English participial constructions
II, 85. 86; past participles after
verbs of receiving II, 85.
parts o f s p e e c h II, 3.
passive v o i c e II, 48. 81; present
indicative of the passive conjugated
I, 74; imperfect indicative and sub-
junctive I, 77; perfect and pluper-
fect indicative and subjunctive I,
80; complete paradigm of the pas-
sive II, 49 foil. The passive voice
formed by the auxiliary njcvbeu or
fciitl, 74.' 77; II, 48; place of the
participle of the auxiliary in the
passive tenses II, 48; tiie passive
agent (with by) expressed by toon
or burc^ I; 74; II, 82; impersonal
— Ill
passive II, 54. 82; German equiv-
alents of the passive voice II, 81;
what verbs admit of a complete
passive voice II, 82.
people, how translated I, 86-
perfect indicative and subjunctive,
how formed I, 62; II, 38; of the
passive I, 80; German perfect tense
usoi with the force of the English
past tense I, 81; especially in de-
tached statements II, 83; has the
force of the English present-per-
fect II, 83.
)) f I C 9 e n with the infinitive, how
translated I, 109.
pluperfect indicative and sub-
junctivc conjugated I, 62; of the
passive I, 80; the exceptional plu-
perfect „ic^ ^attc gelobt ge^abt" II,
46.
plural of nouns I, 30. 32. 34; of
feminine nouns I, 59; plurals in cr
I, 32; II, 7. 8; irrej?ular plurals II,
9; plurals in g II, 9; plurals of
proper names II, 10; plural of the
finite verb, when the subject con-
sists of two nouns connected by
unb II, 75.
possessive case, English, how
translated into German I, 73; II, 3;
the English possessive case rendered
either by a genitive or by a com-
pound noun II, 79.
possessive pronominal adjectives
I, 20. 11. 16; II, 23. 24. 43; de-
clined like the indefinite article I,
18.20; plural of I, 31; possessives
of the third person used for address
II, 23; possessives used predicat-
ively II, 24; substantively I, 43;
.II, 24. 25; ber meine, bcr mcinigc,
meincr II, 25; possessive pronouns
have a double agreement II, 76.
potential mood, English, with
could or might how translated I, 65;
II, 58; potential with should ot would
after the conjunction fhat^ how
translated I, 65; the English poten-
tial pluperfect with should (ought
to), could and would, how translated
I, 80. 108; II, 58.
potential verbs II, 35. 55.
prefixes of separable compound
verbs placed at the end I, 68; II,
59; they are often placed before the
infinitive with gu I, 69; when they
are not separated from the verb I,
69; II, 60; prefixes partly separable,
partly inseparable I, 69; II, 59;
compound prefixes II, 60.
prepositions II, 61; with genit-
ive, dative, and accusative I, 93;
II, 61 ; requiring the dative or ac-
cusative II, 62; I, 93; II, 63; con-
tracted with the article I, 93. 100;
II, 64; often translated by preposi-
tions differing fiom their original
meanings I, 93. 94; II, 62; prepo-
sitions in connection with the ad-
verbs ttJo, ba, I)cr, Ijin, ^ier I, 98. 99;
II, 64. 71. 72.
present indicative of the regular
verb in the active voice I, 56;
present subjunctive I, 62; present
indie, of the passive I, 74; present
subjunctive of the passive I, 77;
present tense with the force of the
English perfect I, 54; with the
force of an English past tense II,
83; with the force of a future II,
83; with the force of an imperative
II, 83.
pronouns, personal I, 45. 49. 51;
II, 10 foil.; place of I, 50; pronouns
of the second person used only in
relations of intimacy II, 12; pro-
nouns of the third person in polite
conversation used instead of the
pronouns of the second person I,
11; II, 12; indefinite substantive
pronouns II, 12; indefinite prono-
minal adjectives II, 20; used sub-
— 112 —
stantively II, 20; adjective pro- pron unci at ion I, 2 foil,
nouns agree with their governing proper names, declension of I,
words II, 75. See relatives^ demon- 28; II, 9 foil.
stratives, possessives, reflexives^ interro- protasis and apodosis I, 59; II,
gcUives 67.
r e d^ t , adverb of intensity, how to
translate it II, 73.
91 e d) t ^ a b e n, to be right I, 13.
reciprocal pronouns, rendered
by reflexives I, 83.
reflexive pronouns, their form
and use I, 52; II, 12.
reflexive verbs, definition of
II, 51; paradigms of I, 83; II, 52;
how translated into English I, 83;
English neuter verbs that have
also an active meaning, generally
rendered by German reflexives II,
61; reflexive verbs have generally
the reflexive pronoun in the accus-
ative I, 83; II, 52; ordinary transit-
ive verbs may become reflexive II,
51; proper reflexives If, 51 foil.;
they have no piist pnticiples II,
52; refloxive impersonals II, 54.
55. 82; reflexive verbs in connect-
ion with laffcu have a passive mean-
ing II, 81; reflexive verbs with or
without laffen have often a passive
meaning II, 81; reflexive verbs
governing the genitive II, 78.
eg regnet, I, 86.
relative pronouns, declined '
I, 25. 31; agreement with their
antecedents I, 25. 31; 11,76; ex-
amples of relative ccmstructions II,
17; clauses introduced by relatives
have the finite verb at the end I, 25;
II, 65; if the antecedent of a relative
is a p'jrsonal pronoun of the first or
second person, either the finite verb
is placed in the third person, or the
antecedent must be repeated II, 76;
relative adverbs II, 70- 73; in cor-
relation to demonstratives II, 74;
subjunctive in relative clauses II,
89; clauses introduced by relatives
must be separated by commas II, 73.
r e n tt e n , imperfect indicative, how
formed I, 58; II, 35; imperfect sub-
junctive I, 62; II, 35.
to rise, translated by aufflel^CIt or
aufge^en I, 68.
@, f, 8, when these characters for the
German sound of s are used I. 6.
§ {az) final, changed into ff after a
short vowel when an ending is
added to the word I, 32 (foot-
note); II, 6.
f a in m t , preposition with the dative
II, 61.
f c^ e i n e n , connected with a predi-
cate-nominative II. 78.
f d) c U e n , j d) t m p f c ii in the pass-
ive, construed with a predicate-
nominative II, 78; in the active
they require two accusatives II,
79.
\d)mt\^t\Xi f governs the dative
II, 78; has the reflexive pronoun
in the dative I, 83.
f c^ m e r 3 e n , impersonally used
I, 87.
eg fennel t, I, 86.
f C ^ r , the adverb of tjtet II, 73.
fein, irregular verb II, 36; para-
digm of II, 41 foil.; present indi-
cative conjugated I, 8; imperfect I,
47; perfect I, 46; pluperfect I, 62;
113
subjunctive of present and imper-
fect I, 62; of perfect and pluperfect
1, 62; used impersonally (e§ ift mir)
I, 86; used as auxiliary of the ac-
tive voice instead of l^aben I, 99; II,
39; used as auxiliary of the passive
instead of tuerben I, 74. 77; II, 48;
takes feiu as an auxiliary in the
perfect II, 39.
j C i tt , possessive adjective of the
third person, see possessive pronomi-
nal adjectives.
J e i n c r, genitive of cr II, 11 ; genitive
and dative feminine of fcilt 1, 18. 20.
feit, since, preposition with the dat-
ive I, 34; II, 61; use of feit II, 62;
subordinating conjunction II, 65.
f C i t b e m subordinating conjunction,
synonym of Jcit II, 65.
self, compounds with self correspond
either to felbft, or to German re-
flexives I, 83.
f C 1 1 e n , indefinite adverb of time
II, 73.
f C n b C n , imperfect indicative I, 58;
11, 35; imperfect subjunctive I, 62;
11,35
sentences, dependent, require the
finite verb to be at the end II, 65.
separable compound verbs, see
verbs.
shall, corresponds to the auxiliary
ruerbcn II, 39; when it must be
translated by joHeu I, 60.
}id), dative and accusative singular
and plural of the reflexive pronoun
of the third person I. 52; II, 12.
fie, personal pronoun of the third
person, either nominative or ac-
cusative singular feminine, or nom-
inative or accusative of the plural
of all genders I, 45; II, 11. 12; if
spelled with a capital, it has the
meaning of a pronoun of the second
person, in singular or plural I, II.
jo (so, thus), adverb of manner and
intensity II, 70; fo in the apodosis
not translated I, 59; II, 67; I, 102;
fo, translated by as in the first part
of a comparison I, 13; fo followed
by andjf idiomatically used in a
concessive sense II, 67.
f — a I § {as — as), subordinating con-
junctions II, 65; the fo often com-
bined with adverbs of time (fobatb,
fo oft etc.), in which case the fol-
lowing alS may be omitted II, 66.
fold)er, fotc^ ein, demonstrative
adjective II, 17.
f n e n , translated by shall I, 60;
peculiarities of conjugation II, 55.
58.
some, when not translated II, 20
foil.
f n b e r , obsolete preposition with
accusative II, 61.
f n b e r n , coordinating conjunction
II, 65; when 6m< must be translated
by it I, 72; II, 65; nid)t nur — foit*
bern aitrf) II, 65.
fomol)! — atS aud), have the force
of coordinating conjunctions II, 65.
P a 1 1 , instead, preposition with gen-
itive II, 61.
ft e I) e n , to stand, irregular strong verb
I, 91; II, 37.
ft c t § , indefinite adverb of time,
synonym to immer II, 72.
subj cot, placed in the nominative
II, 77; when placed after the verb
I, 72; II, 90; for subject-infinitive
see infinitive.
subj uncti ve formation of I, 62;
of the passive I, 77; of the future I,
64; of fonnen, tniiffen, l^aben, feiit I,
62; subjunctive of indirect state-
ment II, 87. 88; after tiCk^ and bamit
I, 62; 11,87,88; in relative clauses
II, 89; in general concessive clauses
II, 89; tenses of the subjunctive I,
63, 80; II, 88; subjunctive after
verbs of asking and doubting fol-
114 —
lowed by ob I, 63. 64. 65; II, 88;
subjunctive imperfect or pluperfect
in hypothetical clauses I, 65; 11,
89; present subjunctive in impera-
tive sentences II, 87; subjunctive
imperfect or pluperfect in exclama-
tory sentences II, 87.
substantives, German, written
with capital initials I, 9.
superlative, how formed I, 22;
II, 30; irregular II, 31; predicative
superlative with am II, 30; agree-
ment of the predicative superlative
in connection with the article 11,30;
absolute and relative superlatives
II, 69; adverbial superlative II, 69.
syllabication I, 7.
C« tagt I, 86.
t a U f C n , construed with a double
accusative II, 79; in the passive
with a predicate-nominative II, 78.
t e n s e s of the verb, simple and com-
pound II, 32; formation of com-
pound tenses II, 38; use of the
tenses of the subjunctive II, 88 foil.
than, how translated II, 66.
that, rendered by i>a^ or bieS I, 56;
by jener 1, 12; by berjenigel, 26. 27;
by ha^ I, 54; II, 65; by ber, bic,
baS II, 16; that which, how
translated I, 94.
there is. e^ ift; there are, e5
fmb I, S4; e« gibt I, 36.
XljOX f declension of II, 5.
t ^ u n , irregular strong verb I, 91;
II, 57; how distinguished from
ntac^en I, 49.
till, translated I, 60. 94; not till,
crft I, 94.
time of the day I, 95. 96.
t i 1 1 e s I, 46.
to and for before names of places
rendered by nad^ I, 29; to, how
translated I, 94.
transitiveverbs are those which
govern the accusative as direct ob-
ject II, 82.
t r ^ , preposition with the genitive
II, 61.
U.
fiber, preposition with the accusat-
ive or dative I, 93; II, 62.
ii b e r a 1 1 , indefinite adverb of place
II, 72.
U m , preposition with the accusative
II, 61; with the infinitive and ju,
translated in order that I, 72; um —
tritlen, compound preposition with
the genitive II, 61.
Utlb, and, coordinating conjunction
II, 65.
un g e a d^ t e t , in spite of, preposition
with genitive II, 61; ungead)tct, al-
though, subordinating conjunction
II, 65.
unless, translated by ttJOf cnt nid^t,
auger njenn, trenn nic^t, e« fei benn
bag II, 67.
Unrcdjtl^aben, to be wrong I,
13.
nn^, U8, dative and accusative plural
of id^; used reflexively II,. 12.
unfer, possessive adjective I, 11;
II, 23; genitive plural of td^ II, 11.
U It t e r , preposition with dative or
accusative I, 93; II, 62.
untcr^alb, preposition with gen-
itive II, 61.
u n m e 1 1 , preposition with dative
II, 61.
RETURN TO the circulation desk of any
University of California Library
or to the
NORTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY
BIdg. 400, Richmond Field Station
University of California
Richmond, CA 94804-4698
ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS
• 2-month loans may be renewed by calling
(510)642-6753
• 1-year loans may be recharged by bringing
books to NRLF
• Renewals and recharges may be made 4
days prior to due date.
DUE AS STAMPED BELOW
^fP 7 2001
12,000(11/95)